PROJECT MANUAL for The

Issued For Bids October 9, 2015 Volume 2 of 2 Divisions 07 through 33 PROJECT MANUAL for the

Addition and Alterations to the Gladwyne Free Library

Contract Number 4083-15-23

Prepared for the

Department of Finance Township of Lower Merion 75 East Lancaster Avenue Ardmore, Pennsylvania 19010-2376

Prepared by

VITETTA Stantec Consulting Services Inc. Architecture*Engineering*Planning* Civil Engineer Historic Preservation 1060 Andrew Drive Suite 140 Baldwin Tower, 1510 Chester Pike, Suite 104 West Chester, Pennsylvania 19380 Eddystone, Pennsylvania 19022

Albert M. Comly, Jr., AIA (EX 7114) Charles J. Olivo, PE (26200E)

MacIntosh Engineering DEDC Structural Engineer Mechanical & Electrical Engineer 300 Delaware Ave, Suite 820 315 S. Chapel St. Wilmington, Delaware 19801 Newark, Delaware 19711

Robert T. MacIntosh, PE (PE-033845-E) Paul Gerard, PE (PE-049907-E)

Ernie B. McNeely Eric Traub Township Manager Chief Financial Officer

VITETTA Project No. 8318.02

8318.02 | 10-8-2015 Gladwyne Library

DOCUMENT 00 0110

TABLE OF CONTENTS

VOLUME 1 OF 2

Division 00 – Procurement and Contracting Requirements

Document Title Pages Introductory Information 00 0110 Table of Contents………………………………………………………...5 00 0115 List of Drawing Sheets………………………………………………….. 2 Procurement Requirements 00 1113 Advertisement for Bids…………………………………………………..2 00 2113 Instructions to Bidders (LMT Exhibit ‘C’)…………………………. 1 + 6 00 2213 Supplementary Instructions to Bidders…………………………………. 2 00 3132 Geotechnical Data………………………………………………. .... 1 + 28 00 4116 Bid Form – Stipulated Sum (Multiple-Prime Contract) (LMT Exhibit ‘A’) ………………………………………………...... 1 + 16 00 4200 Lower Merion Township Checklist………………………………… 1 + 1 00 4313 Bid Security…………………………………………………………. 1 + 4 00 4513 Bidder’s Qualifications……………………………………………… 1 + 4 Contracting Requirements 00 5200 Agreement Form…………………………………………………….. 1 + 4 00 6113.13 Performance Bond…………………………………………………... 1 + 2 00 6113.16 Labor and Materials Payment Bond………………………………… 1 + 2 00 6119 Maintenance Bond…………………………………………………... 1 + 2 00 6216 Certificate of Insurance……………………………………………… 1 + 1 00 6519.16 Release of Liens……………………………………………………... 1 + 2 00 6519.19 Consent of Surety to Final Payment Form…………………………... 1 + 1 00 7000 General Conditions (LMT Exhibit ‘B’)…………………………… 1 + 35 00 7300 Supplementary Conditions (LMT Exhibit ‘E’)……………………… 1 + 2 00 7346 Wage Rate Determination Schedule……………………………… 2 + 15 00 7373 Statutory Requirements (Pennsylvania)………………………………… 3

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0110 - 1 8318.02 | 10-8-2015 Gladwyne Library

Division 01 – General Requirements Section Title Pages 01 1000 Summary…………………………………………………………………4 01 1200 Multiple Contract Summary…………………………………………….. 9 01 2100 Allowances……………………………………………………………... 3 01 2200 Unit Prices……………………………………………………………... 2 01 2300 Alternates………………………………………………………………... 2 01 2600 Contract Modification Procedures……………………………………… 3 01 2900 Payment Procedures…………………………………………………….. 5 01 3100 Project Management and Coordination…………………………………. 8 01 3200 Construction Progress Documentation…………………………………. 5 01 3233 Photographic Documentation…………………………………………… 3 01 3300 Submittal Procedures……………………………………………………16 01 4000 Quality Requirements…………………………………………………… 7 01 4100 Regulatory Requirements (Pennsylvania)………………………………. 5 01 4200 References……………………………………………………………… 18 01 4533 Code-Required Special Inspections and Procedures……………………. 8 01 5000 Temporary Facilities and Controls……………………………………… 8 01 6000 Product Requirements………………………………………………. 8 + 2 01 7000 Alterations Project Procedures…………………………………………...4 01 7300 Execution………………………………………………………………..11 01 7700 Closeout Procedures…………………………………………………….. 5 01 7823 Operation and Maintenance Data……………………………………….. 6 01 7839 Project Record Documents……………………………………………… 3 01 7900 Demonstration and Training……………………………………………. 4 Division 02 – Existing Conditions 02 4113 Selective Site Demolition ...... 4 02 4119 Selective Structure Demolition………………………………………… .. 6 Division 03 – Concrete 03 3000 Cast-In-Place Concrete………………………………………………… 26 Division 04 – Masonry 04 2000 Unit Masonry………………………………………………… ...... 17 04 4300 Stone Masonry………………………………………………… ...... 14 Division 05 – Metals 05 0500 Post-Installed Anchorage……………………………………………… ... 4

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0110 - 2 8318.02 | 10-8-2015 Gladwyne Library

05 1200 Structural Steel Framing………………………………………………. . 10 05 3100 Steel Decking………………………………………………………….. ... 5 05 5000 Metal Fabrications ...... 6 Division 06 – Wood, Plastics and Composites 06 1053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry………………………………………… 6 06 1600 Sheathing………………………………………………………………... 4 06 2013 Exterior Finish Carpentry……………………………………………... 6 06 4023 Interior Architectural Woodwork……………………………………….. 9

VOLUME 2 OF 2

Division 07 – Thermal and Moisture Protection 07 1326 Self-Adhering Sheet Waterproofing ...... 6 07 1700 Bentonite Waterproofing ...... 4 07 2100 Thermal Insulation ...... 2 07 2726 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barriers ...... 6 07 3113 Asphalt Shingles ...... 9 07 6200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim………………………………………… . 8 07 8123 Intumescent Mastic Fireproofing……………………………………… ... 6 07 8413 Penetration Firestopping………………………………………………… 7 07 8446 Fire-Resistive Joint Systems…………………………………………….. 5 07 9200 Joint Sealants……………………………………………………………11 Division 08 – Openings 08 0001 Door and Frame Schedule………………………………………… 1 + 1 08 1113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames………………………………………... 9 08 1416 Flush Wood Doors……………………………………………………… 4 08 3113 Access Doors and Frames………………………………………………. 4 08 4410 Fire-Rated Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls…………………………… 7 08 7110 Door Hardware………………………………………………………… 18 08 8000 Glazing………………………………………………………………….11 Division 09 – Finishes 09 2116 Gypsum Board Shaft Wall Assemblies………………………………... 6 09 2216 Non-Structural Metal Framing…………………………………………...5 09 2900 Gypsum Board…………………………………………………………... 7 09 3000 Tiling……………………………………………………………………. 8 09 5113 Acoustical Panel Ceilings……………………………………………….. 6 09 6229 Cork Flooring…………………………………………………………… 5

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0110 - 3 8318.02 | 10-8-2015 Gladwyne Library

09 6513 Resilient Base and Accessories…………………………………………. 4 09 6813 Tile Carpeting…………………………………………………………… 6 09 9100 Painting………………………………………………………………….. 7 09 9300 Staining and Transparent Finishing……………………………………... 4 Division 10 – Specialties 10 1100 Visual Display Surfaces………………………………………………… 6 10 1400 Signage………………………………………………………………...... 5 10 2800 Toilet, Bath and Laundry Accessories…………………………………... 5 Division 11 – Not Used Division 12 – Not Used Division 13 – Not Used Division 14 – Conveying Equipment 14 2400 Hydraulic Elevators (Base Bid)…………………………………………13 14 2401 Hydraulic Elevators (Alternate Bid) ……………………………………13 Division 20 – Not Used Division 21 – Not Used Division 22 – Plumbing 22 0719 Plumbing Piping Insulation ...... 3 22 1005 Plumbing Piping ...... 8 22 1006 Plumbing Piping Specialties ...... 2 Division 23 – Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning (HVAC) 23 0000 General Requirements Mechanical and Electrical ...... 29 23 0553 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment ...... 2 23 0593 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC ...... 9 23 0719 HVAC Piping Insulation ...... 2 23 2300 Refrigerant Piping………………………………………………………. 9 23 3100 HVAC Ducts and Casings ...... 5 23 3300 Air Duct Accessories ...... 4 23 3700 Air Outlets and Inlets ...... 2 23 8127 Single Zone Heat Pump Systems ...... 7 Division 24 and 25 – Not Used Division 26 – Electrical 26 0501 Minor Electrical Demolition ...... 2 26 0519 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables ...... 9 26 0526 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems ...... 6

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0110 - 4 8318.02 | 10-8-2015 Gladwyne Library

26 0529 Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems ...... 5 26 0534 Conduit ...... 11 26 0537 Boxes ...... 7 26 0553 Identification for Electrical Systems ...... 7 26 2100 Low-Voltage Electrical Service Entrance ...... 4 26 2416 Panelboards ...... 6 26 2717 Equipment Wiring ...... 2 26 2726 Wiring Devices ...... 6 26 2813 Fuses ...... 3 26 2818 Enclosed Switches ...... 5 Division 27 – Communications 27 1100 Communications Equipment Room Fittings ...... 7 27 1300 Communications Backbone Cabling ...... 12 27 1500 Communications Horizontal Cabling ...... 16 Division 28 – Electronic Safety and Security 28 2300 Video Surveillance…………………………………………………...... 33 28 3111 Extend Existing Fire Alarm System…………………………………...... 8 Division 29 – Not Used Division 31 – Earthwork 31 1000 Site Clearing ...... 2 31 2001 Earthmoving-Building Pad ...... 9 31 2319 Dewatering ...... 2 31 2500 Temporary Soil Erosion and Water Pollution Control…………………..1 Division 32 – Exterior Improvements 32 1216 Asphalt Paving ...... 6 32 1313 Exposed Aggregate Concrete Paving ...... 4 32 1413 Unit Paving ...... 5 Division 33 – Utilities 33 4000 Storm Drainage Utilities ...... 4 Division 34 to 39 – Not Used

END OF DOCUMENT

TABLE OF CONTENTS 00 0110 - 5

8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 07 1326

SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Modified bituminous sheet waterproofing.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for joint-sealant materials and installation.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate, technical data, and tested physical and performance properties of waterproofing.

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of waterproofing. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, sheet flashings, penetrations, inside and outside corners, tie-ins with adjoining waterproofing, and other termination conditions.

C. Samples: For the following products:

1. 12-by-12-inch (300-by-300-mm) square of waterproofing and flashing sheet.

D. Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with requirements.

E. Qualification Data: For Installer.

F. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for waterproofing.

G. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 1326 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that is approved or licensed by waterproofing manufacturer for installation of waterproofing required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain waterproofing materials, protection course, through one source from a single manufacturer.

C. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review waterproofing requirements including surface preparation, substrate condition and pretreatment, minimum curing period, forecasted weather conditions, special details and sheet flashings, installation procedures, testing and inspection procedures, and protection and repairs.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver liquid materials to Project site in original packages with seals unbroken, labeled with manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.

B. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by waterproofing manufacturer.

C. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.

D. Store rolls according to manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Apply waterproofing within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by waterproofing manufacturer. Do not apply waterproofing to a damp or wet substrate.

1. Do not apply waterproofing in snow, rain, fog, or mist.

B. Maintain adequate ventilation during preparation and application of waterproofing materials.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace waterproofing material that does not comply with requirements or that fails to remain watertight within specified warranty period.

SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 1326 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1. Failure includes, but is not limited to, failure of waterproofing due to failure of substrate prepared and treated according to requirements or formation of new joints and cracks in substrate exceeding 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) in width. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING

A. Modified Bituminous Sheet: 60-mil- (1.5-mm-) thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of 56 mils (1.4 mm) of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil- (0.10-mm-) thick, polyethylene film with release liner on adhesive side.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. American Hydrotech, Inc.; VM 75. b. American Permaquik Inc.; PQ 7100. c. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW MiraDRI 860/861. d. CETCO Building Materials Group; Envirosheet. e. Grace, W. R. & Co.; Bituthene 3000. f. Henry Company; Blueskin WP 200. g. Meadows, W. R., Inc.; SealTight Mel-Rol. h. Nervastral, Inc.; BITU-MEM. i. Pecora Corporation; Duramem 700-SM. j. Polyguard Products; Polyguard 650. k. Progress Unlimited, Inc.; Plastiwrap 60. l. Tamko Roofing Products, Inc.; TW-60.

2. Physical Properties:

a. Tensile Strength: 250 psi (1.7 MPa) minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified. b. Ultimate Elongation: 300 percent minimum; ASTM D 412, Die C, modified. c. Low-Temperature Flexibility: Pass at minus 20 deg F (minus 29 deg C); ASTM D 1970. d. Crack Cycling: Unaffected after 100 cycles of 1/8-inch (3-mm) movement; ASTM C 836. e. Puncture Resistance: 40 lbf (180 N) minimum; ASTM E 154. f. Hydrostatic-Head Resistance: 150 feet (45 m) minimum; ASTM D 5385. g. Water Absorption: 0.15 percent weight-gain maximum after 48-hour immersion at 70 deg F (21 deg C); ASTM D 570. h. Vapor Permeance: 0.05 perms (2.9 ng/Pa x s x sq. m); ASTM E 96, Water Method.

2.2 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Furnish auxiliary materials recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for intended use and compatible with sheet waterproofing.

SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 1326 - 3 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1. Furnish liquid-type auxiliary materials that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.

C. Surface Conditioner: Liquid, waterborne surface conditioner recommended for substrate by manufacturer of sheet waterproofing material.

D. Liquid Membrane: Elastomeric, two-component liquid, cold fluid applied, trowel grade or low viscosity.

E. Substrate Patching Membrane: Low-viscosity, two-component, asphalt-modified coating.

F. Sheet Strips: Self-adhering, rubberized-asphalt sheet strips of same material and thickness as sheet waterproofing.

G. Mastic, Adhesives, and Tape: Liquid mastic and adhesives, and adhesive tapes recommended by waterproofing manufacturer.

H. Protection Course: ASTM D 6506, semirigid sheets of fiberglass or mineral-reinforced- asphaltic core, pressure laminated between two asphalt-saturated fibrous liners and as follows:

1. Thickness: 1/8 inch (3 mm), nominal. 2. Adhesive: Rubber-based solvent type recommended by waterproofing manufacturer for type of protection course.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, and treat substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrates for waterproofing application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not receiving waterproofing to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C. Remove fins, ridges, mortar, and other projections and fill honeycomb, aggregate pockets, holes, and other voids.

D. Prepare, fill, prime, and treat joints and cracks in substrates. Remove dust and dirt from joints and cracks according to ASTM D 4258.

SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 1326 - 4 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1. Install sheet strips and center over treated construction and contraction joints and cracks exceeding a width of 1/16 inch (1.6 mm).

E. Bridge and cover isolation joints with overlapping sheet strips.

1. Invert and loosely lay first sheet strip over center of joint. Firmly adhere second sheet strip to first and overlap to substrate.

F. Corners: Prepare, prime, and treat inside and outside corners according to ASTM D 6135.

1. Install membrane strips centered over vertical inside corners. Install 3/4-inch (19-mm) fillets of liquid membrane on horizontal inside corners and as follows:

a. At footing-to-wall intersections, extend liquid membrane each direction from corner or install membrane strip centered over corner.

G. Prepare, treat, and seal vertical and horizontal surfaces at terminations and penetrations through waterproofing and at drains and protrusions according to ASTM D 6135.

3.3 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS SHEET WATERPROOFING APPLICATION

A. Install modified bituminous sheets according to waterproofing manufacturer's written instructions and according to recommendations in ASTM D 6135.

B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by sheet waterproofing in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

C. Apply and firmly adhere sheets over area to receive waterproofing. Accurately align sheets and maintain uniform 2-1/2-inch- (64-mm-) minimum lap widths and end laps. Overlap and seal seams and stagger end laps to ensure watertight installation.

1. When ambient and substrate temperatures range between 25 and 40 deg F (minus 4 and plus 5 deg C), install self-adhering, modified bituminous sheets produced for low- temperature application. Do not use low-temperature sheets if ambient or substrate temperature is higher than 60 deg F (16 deg C).

D. Apply continuous sheets over sheet strips bridging substrate cracks, construction, and contraction joints.

E. Seal exposed edges of sheets at terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with mastic.

F. Install sheet waterproofing and auxiliary materials to tie into adjacent waterproofing.

G. Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in waterproofing not complying with requirements. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with sheet waterproofing extending 6 inches (150 mm) beyond repaired areas in all directions.

H. Install protection course with butted joints over waterproofing membrane immediately.

SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 1326 - 5 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

I. Correct deficiencies in or remove sheet waterproofing that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates, reapply waterproofing, and repair sheet flashings.

3.4 PROTECTION AND CLEANING

A. Protect waterproofing from damage and wear during remainder of construction period.

B. Clean spillage and soiling from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

END OF SECTION

SELF-ADHERING SHEET WATERPROOFING 07 1326 - 6 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 07 1700

BENTONITE WATERPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY A. Section Includes: 1. Bentonite waterproofing. B. Related Requirements: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 2. Section 31 0000 – Earthwork: Excavating and backfilling.

1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include product specifications and manufacturer's written installation instructions. B. Shop Drawings: Show installation details for interface with other work. C. Samples: For waterproofing: 6 inches square.

1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Material Certificates: For bentonite waterproofing, from manufacturer. B. Field quality-control reports. C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain bentonite waterproofing system from single source from single manufacturer. Obtain accessory products used with bentonite waterproofing from sources acceptable to bentonite waterproofing manufacturer. B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to Project site in manufacturer's original unopened and undamaged containers. B. Store materials in a dry, well-ventilated space. C. Remove and replace bentonite materials that have been prematurely exposed to moisture.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permit bentonite waterproofing to be installed according to manufacturers' written instructions and warranty requirements. 1. Do not apply waterproofing materials to surfaces where ice or frost is visible. Do not apply bentonite waterproofing materials in areas with standing water. 2. Placing bentonite clay products in panel or composite form on damp surfaces is allowed if approved in writing by manufacturer.

BENTONITE WATERPROOFING 07 1700 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.07 WARRANTY A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace components of bentonite waterproofing system that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 COMPOSITE HDPE/BENTONITE MEMBRANE A. Composite HDPE/Bentonite-Polymer Membrane: Minimum 200-mil- (5-mm-) thick membrane consisting of HDPE geomembrane liner bonded to a layer of bentonite-polymer clay granules. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. CETCO; Volclay Ultraseal SP. 2. Puncture Resistance: 75 lbf (334 N) according to ASTM D 4833. 3. Vapor Permeance: 0.005 perms according to ASTM E 96.

2.02 COMPOSITE GEOTEXTILE-HDPE/BENTONITE MEMBRANE A. Geotextile/Bentonite-Polymer Waterproofing: Minimum 250-mil- (6.4-mm-) thick membrane of bentonite-polymer clay granules between two layers of geotextile polypropylene fabric, one woven and one nonwoven, needle punched and heat fused together. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. CETCO; Volclay Ultraseal BT. 2. Puncture Resistance: 75 lbf (334 N) according to ASTM D 4833. 3. Vapor Permeance: 0.005 perms according to ASTM E 96.

2.03 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Granular Bentonite: Sodium bentonite clay containing a minimum of 90 percent montmorillonite (hydrated aluminum silicate), with a minimum of 90 percent passing a No. 20 sieve. B. Bentonite Mastic: Trowelable consistency, bentonite compound, specifically formulated for application at joints and penetrations. C. Granular Bentonite Tubes: Manufacturer's standard 2-inch- diameter, water-soluble tube containing approximately 1.5 lb/ft. of bentonite; hermetically sealed; designed specifically for placing on wall footings at line of joint with exterior base of wall. D. Termination Bar: Extruded-aluminum or formed-stainless-steel bars with upper flange to receive sealant. E. Cement Grout Patching Material: Manufacturer's recommended grout mix compatible with substrate being patched. F. Concrete and Masonry Fasteners: Case-hardened nails or hardened-steel, powder-actuated fasteners. Depending on manufacturer's written requirements, provide 1/2- or 1-inch- diameter washers under fastener heads. G. Sealants: As recommended in writing by waterproofing manufacturer. Comply with requirements specified in Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants.

BENTONITE WATERPROOFING 07 1700 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

H. Tapes: Waterproofing manufacturer's recommended tape for joints between sheets, membranes, or panels. I. Adhesive: Water-based adhesive used to secure waterproofing to both vertical and horizontal surfaces.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrate preparations affecting performance of bentonite waterproofing. B. Verify that substrate is complete and that work that will penetrate waterproofing is complete and rigidly installed. C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Coordinate work in the vicinity of waterproofing to ensure proper conditions for installing the waterproofing system and to prevent damage to waterproofing after installation. B. Formed Concrete Surfaces: Remove fins and projections. Fill voids, rock pockets, form-tie holes, and other defects with bentonite mastic or cement grout patching material according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Horizontal Concrete Surfaces: Remove debris, standing water, oily substances, mud, and similar substances that could impair the bonding ability of concrete or the effectiveness of waterproofing. Fill voids, cracks greater than 1/8 inch (3 mm), honeycomb areas, and other defects with bentonite mastic or cement grout patching material according to manufacturer's written instructions. D. Excavation Support and Protection System: If water is seeping, use plastic protection sheets or other suitable means to prevent wetting the bentonite waterproofing. Fill minor gaps and spaces 1/8 inch (3 mm) wide or wider with wood, metal, concrete, or other appropriate filling material. Cover or fill large voids and crevices with cement mortar according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL A. Install waterproofing and accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Apply granular bentonite around penetrations in horizontal surfaces and changes in plane according to manufacturer's details in preparation for granular bentonite tubes and mastic. 2. Apply granular bentonite tubes, bentonite mastic, or both at changes of plane, construction joints in substrate, projections, and penetrations. B. Apply granular bentonite tubes continuously on footing against base of wall to be waterproofed according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Protect waterproofing from damage and wetting before and during subsequent construction operations. Repair punctures, tears, and cuts according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Backfill after inspection by manufacturer’s representatives indicates waterproofing complies with specified requirements. 2. Backfill to 3 feet above top of footing if sequencing of subsequent construction operations require that waterproofing remain exposed to weather.

BENTONITE WATERPROOFING 07 1700 - 3 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

3.04 COMPOSITE HDPE/BENTONITE MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. General: Install a continuous layer of waterproofing membrane with ends and edges lapped a minimum of 3 inches. Stagger end joints between membranes. Seal joints with permanent seam tape. B. Below Structural Slabs-on-Grade: Apply waterproofing membrane with HDPE side down and staple ends and edges. 1. Install under footings, grade beams, and pile caps; or continue waterproofing through key joints between footings and foundation walls, and extend a minimum of 8 inches (200 mm) up or beyond perimeter slab forms. 2. Protect waterproofing from damage caused by reinforcing bar supports with sharp edges. C. Slabs: Starting at lowest point, install a continuous layer of waterproofing membrane, with ends and edges lapped a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm).

3.05 COMPOSITE GEOTEXTILE-HDPE/BENTONITE MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install a continuous layer of waterproofing membrane with ends and edges lapped a minimum of 3 inches (75 mm). Stagger end joints between membranes. Seal joints with permanent seam tape.

B. Concrete Walls: Starting at bottom of wall, apply waterproofing membrane with HDPE side facing Installer; overlap sheets 3 inches (75 mm). Secure with powder-actuated fasteners or case-hardened nails. Extend to bottom of footing, grade beam, or wall, and secure. 1. Termination at Grade: Extend waterproofing membrane to within 2 inches (50 mm) of finish grade unless otherwise indicated. Secure top edge with termination bar. Apply sealant to top edge of termination bar.

3.06 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspection: Arrange for manufacturer's representative to inspect completed waterproofing installation before covering with other construction and provide written report that installation complies with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Remove and replace applications of bentonite waterproofing where inspection indicates that it does not comply with specified requirements. B. Perform additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

END OF SECTION

BENTONITE WATERPROOFING 07 1700 - 4 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 07 2100

THERMAL INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Foam-plastic board insulation.

1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, and other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.

B. Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows: 1. Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment. 2. Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site before installation time. 3. Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of construction.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FOAM-PLASTIC BOARD INSULATION

A. Extruded-Polystyrene Board Insulation: ASTM C 578, of type and minimum compressive strength indicated below, with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 75 and 450, respectively, per ASTM E 84.

THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. DiversiFoam Products. b. The Dow Chemical Company. c. Owens Corning. d. Pactiv Building Products. 2. Thermal Resistance: R-value of 5.0 ft2 x h x degree F/Btu per inch of thickness at 75 degrees F mean temperature in accordance with ASTM C 518. 3. Type VI, 40 psi for under slab & foundation wall insulation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or that interfere with insulation attachment.

3.02 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applications indicated.

B. Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, or snow at any time.

C. Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.

D. Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths, and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers are otherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF BELOW-GRADE INSULATION

A. On vertical footing and foundation wall surfaces, set insulation units using manufacturer's recommended adhesive according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. If not otherwise indicated, extend insulation a minimum of 24 inches (610 mm) below exterior grade line.

3.04 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

END OF SECTION

THERMAL INSULATION 07 2100 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 07 2726

FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Fluid-applied membrane air barrier, vapor retarding.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 2. Section 07 6200 - Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Sheet metal flashings. 3. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Joint-sealant materials and installation.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Air Barrier Assembly: The collection of air barrier materials and auxiliary materials applied to an opaque wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movement through the wall.

1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor-retarding air barrier and as a liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or water penetration. Air barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and of sealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakage exceeding specified limits.

1.04 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate; technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of air barrier.

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations and extent of air barrier. Include details for substrate joints and cracks, counterflashing strip, penetrations, inside and outside corners, terminations, and tie- ins with adjoining construction. 1. Include details of interfaces with other materials that form part of air barrier. 2. Include details of mockups.

C. Product Certificates: For air barriers, certifying compatibility of air barrier and accessory materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with the barrier; signed by product manufacturer.

D. Qualification Data: For applicator.

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for air barriers.

FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 2726 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Applicator Qualifications: A firm experienced in applying air barrier materials similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in applications with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Mockups: Before beginning installation of air barrier, build mockups of exterior wall assembly coordinated with other mock-up requirements, incorporating backup wall construction, external cladding, and other specified components, to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment, and sealing of gaps, terminations, and penetrations of air barrier membrane. 1. Coordinate construction of mockup to permit inspection of air barrier before external insulation and cladding is installed. 2. Include junction with roofing membrane, building corner condition, and foundation wall intersection. 3. If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reconstruct mockups and apply air barrier until mockups are approved.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store liquid materials in their original undamaged packages in a clean, dry, protected location and within temperature range required by air barrier manufacturer.

B. Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.

C. Store rolls according to manufacturer's written instructions.

D. Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by air barrier manufacturer. Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect performance of air barrier. Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIER

A. Fluid-Applied, Vapor-Retarding Membrane Air Barrier: Elastomeric, modified bituminous or synthetic polymer membrane. 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Elastomeric Modified Bituminous Membrane: 1) Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; Barriseal. 2) Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Air-Shield LM. 3) Tremco Incorporated; ExoAir. b. Synthetic Polymer Membrane: 1) Grace, W. R. & Co.; Perm-A-Barrier Liquid. 2) Henry Company; Air-Bloc 32. 3) Rubber Polymer Corporation; Rub-R-Wall Airtight.

FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 2726 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

2. Physical and Performance Properties: a. Membrane Air Permeance: Not to exceed 0.004 cfm x sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft. pressure difference; ASTM E 2178. b. Membrane Vapor Permeance: Not to exceed 0.1 perm; ASTM E 96.

2.02 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Auxiliary materials recommended by air barrier manufacturer for intended use and compatible with air barrier membrane. Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Primer: Liquid waterborne primer recommended for substrate by manufacturer of air barrier material.

C. Counterflashing Strip: Modified bituminous, 40-mil- thick, self-adhering sheet consisting of 32 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to an 8-mil- thick, crosslaminated polyethylene film with release liner backing.

D. Butyl Strip: Vapor-retarding, 30- to 40-mil- thick, self-adhering; polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to layer of butyl adhesive with release liner backing.

E. Modified Bituminous Strip: Vapor-retarding, 40-mil- thick, smooth-surfaced, self-adhering; consisting of 36 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil- thick polyethylene film with release liner backing.

F. Joint Reinforcing Strip: Air barrier manufacturer's glass-fiber-mesh tape.

G. Substrate Patching Membrane: Manufacturer's standard trowel-grade substrate filler.

H. Adhesive and Tape: Air barrier manufacturer's standard adhesive and pressure-sensitive adhesive tape.

I. Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: 1- or 2-component, foamed-in-place, polyurethane foam sealant, 1.5 to 2.0 lb/cu. ft density; flame spread index of 25 or less according to ASTM E 162; with primer and noncorrosive substrate cleaner recommended by foam sealant manufacturer.

J. Modified Bituminous Transition Strip: Vapor-retarding, 40-mil- thick, smooth-surfaced, self- adhering; consisting of 36 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil- thick polyethylene film with release liner backing.

K. Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: ASTM D 2000, 2BC415 to 3BC620, minimum 50- to 65-mil- thick, cured sheet neoprene with manufacturer's recommended contact adhesives and lap sealant with stainless-steel termination bars and fasteners.

L. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, single-component, neutral-curing silicone; Class 100/50 (low- modulus), Grade NS, Use NT related to exposure, and, as applicable to joint substrates indicated, Use O. Comply with Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 2726 - 3 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance. 1. Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other contaminants. 2. Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by air barrier manufacturer. 3. Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263. 4. Verify that masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Clean, prepare, treat, and seal substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean, dust-free, and dry substrate for air barrier application.

B. Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting other construction.

C. At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and edges to form a smooth transition from one plane to another.

D. Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another with stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for air barrier.

3.03 TRANSITION STRIP INSTALLATION

A. Install strips, transition strips, and auxiliary materials according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a continuous air barrier. 1. Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base flashing to ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane. 2. Install butyl or modified bituminous strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over both substrates.

B. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air barrier sheet in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours. 1. Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to achieve required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.

C. Connect and seal exterior wall air barrier membrane continuously to roof insulation, concrete below-grade structures, floor-to floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazed curtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other construction used in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials as recommended by manufacturer.

D. At end of each working day, seal top edge of strips and transition strips to substrate with termination mastic.

FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 2726 - 4 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

E. Apply joint sealants forming part of air barrier assembly within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges. Consult manufacturer when sealant cannot be applied within these temperature ranges.

F. Wall Openings: Prime concealed perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors. Apply modified bituminous transition strip or elastomeric flashing sheet so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage is achieved over both substrates. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearing to perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch of full contact. 1. Modified Bituminous Transition Strip: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion. 2. Elastomeric Flashing Sheet: Apply adhesive to wall, frame, and flashing sheet. Install flashing sheet and termination bars, fastened at 6 inches o.c. Apply lap sealant over exposed edges and on cavity side of flashing sheet.

G. Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and miscellaneous penetrations of air barrier membrane with foam sealant.

H. Seal strips and transition strips around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations with termination mastic.

I. Seal top of through-wall flashings to air barrier with an additional 6-inch- wide, modified bituminous or counterflashing strip.

J. Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by metal counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.

K. Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and flatten fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in strip direction.

3.04 AIR BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Apply air barrier membrane to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to achieve a continuous air barrier according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Apply air barrier membrane within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges.

C. Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be covered by air barrier sheet in same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

D. Apply a continuous unbroken air barrier to substrates according to the following minimum thickness. Apply membrane in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties. 1. Vapor-Retarding Membrane Air Barrier: 60-mil dry film thickness or as recommended by manufacturer.

E. Apply strip and transition strip over cured air membrane overlapping 3 inches onto each surface according to air barrier manufacturer's written instructions.

F. Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates and reapply air barrier components.

3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 2726 - 5 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

A. Protect air barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required by manufacturer. Remove and replace air barrier exposed for more than 30 days. 2. Protect air barrier from contact with creosote, uncured coal-tar products, TPO, EPDM, flexible PVC membranes, and sealants not approved by air barrier manufacturer.

B. Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work using cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.

C. Remove masking materials after installation.

END OF SECTION

FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 07 2726 - 6 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 07 3113

ASPHALT SHINGLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Asphalt shingles. 2. Underlayment. 3. Sheet metal flashings.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 06 Section "Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry" for wood framing. 2. Division 06 Section "Sheathing" for roof sheathing.

1.3 DEFINITION

A. Roofing Terminology: See ASTM D 1079 and glossary of NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual" for definitions of terms related to roofing work in this Section.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of asphalt shingle, ridge cap shingles and exposed valley lining indicated.

1. Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.

C. Samples for Verification: For the following products, of sizes indicated, to verify color selected:

1. Asphalt Shingle: Full size. 2. Ridge and Hip Cap Shingles: Full size. 3. Exposed Valley Lining: 12 inches (300 mm) square. 4. Self-Adhering Underlayment: 12 inches (300 mm) square.

ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 3113 - 1 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

B. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, for asphalt shingles.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of asphalt shingle required, from the ICC.

D. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For each type of asphalt shingle to include in maintenance manuals.

1.7 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Asphalt Shingles: 100 sq. ft (9.3 sq. m) of each type, in unbroken bundles.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of units required for this Project.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain ridge and hip cap shingles from single source from single manufacturer.

C. Fire-Resistance Characteristics: Where indicated, provide asphalt shingles and related roofing materials identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per test method below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: Class A; ASTM E 108 or UL 790, for application and roof slopes indicated.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.9 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store roofing materials in a dry, well-ventilated, weathertight location according to asphalt shingle manufacturer's written instructions. Store underlayment rolls on end on pallets or other raised surfaces. Do not double stack rolls.

1. Handle, store, and place roofing materials in a manner to avoid significant or permanent damage to roof deck or structural supporting members.

ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 3113 - 2 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Protect unused underlayment from weather, sunlight, and moisture when left overnight or when roofing work is not in progress.

1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install asphalt shingles until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1. Install self-adhering sheet underlayment within the range of ambient and substrate temperatures recommended by manufacturer.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard or customized form, without monetary limitation, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace asphalt shingles that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 50 years from date of Substantial Completion.

B. Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section, signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including all components of roofing system such as shingles, base flashing, insulation, fasteners, for the following warranty period:

1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS-FIBER-REINFORCED ASPHALT SHINGLES

A. Laminated-Strip Asphalt Shingles: ASTM D 3462, laminated, multi-ply overlay construction, glass-fiber reinforced, mineral-granule surfaced, and self-sealing. Shingles shall match existing shingles in size, shape, color and texture. 1. Acceptable manufacturers include but are not limited to: a. GAF b. Tamko c. Owens Corning 2. Algae Resistance: Granules treated to resist algae discoloration. 3. Color and Blends: To match existing

2.2 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Felt: ASTM D 226 or ASTM D 4869, Type I or Type II, asphalt-saturated organic felts, nonperforated, as recommended by shingle manufacturer.

ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 3113 - 3 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment, Polyethylene Faced: ASTM D 1970, minimum of 40-mil- (1.0-mm-) thick, slip-resisting, polyethylene-film-reinforced top surface laminated to SBS- modified asphalt adhesive, with release paper backing; cold applied; as recommended by shingle manufacturer. Provide primer for adjoining concrete or masonry surfaces to receive underlayment.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing, Inc. b. CertainTeed Corporation c. Grace, W. R. & Co. - Conn. d. Henry Company. e. Johns Manville. f. Owens Corning. g. Polyguard Products, Inc.

2.3 ACCESSORIES

A. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, Type II, asbestos free.

A. Standard round wire, zinc-coated steel or aluminum; 10 to 12 gauge, smooth, barbed or deformed shank, with heads 3/8 inch (9mm) to 7/16 inch (11mm) in diameter. Length must be sufficient to penetrate into solid wood at least 3/4 inch (19mm) or through plywood or oriented strand board by at least 1/8 inch (3.18mm).

1. Where nails are in contact with metal flashing, use nails made from same metal as flashing.

B. Felt Underlayment Nails: Aluminum, stainless-steel, or hot-dip galvanized-steel wire with low- profile capped heads or disc caps, 1-inch (25-mm) minimum diameter.

2.4 METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

A. General: Comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

1. Sheet Metal: Lead coated copper.

B. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of the item.

1. Step Flashings: Fabricate with a headlap of 2 inches (50 mm) and a minimum extension of 4 inches (100 mm) over the underlying asphalt shingle and up the vertical surface. 2. Open-Valley Flashings: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet (3 m) with 1-inch- (25-mm-) high, inverted-V profile at center of valley and equal flange widths of 12 inches (300 mm).

ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 3113 - 4 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

3. Drip Edges: Fabricate in lengths not exceeding 10 feet (3 m) with 2-inch (50-mm) roof- deck flange and 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) fascia flange with 3/8-inch (9.6-mm) drip at lower edge.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

1. Examine roof sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing and blocking or metal clips and that installation is within flatness tolerances. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and completely anchored; and that provision has been made for flashings and penetrations through asphalt shingles.

B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with underlayment manufacturer's written installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated unless more stringent requirements apply.

B. Single-Layer Felt Underlayment: Install on roof deck parallel with and starting at the eaves. Lap sides a minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) over underlying course. Lap ends a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm). Stagger end laps between succeeding courses at least 72 inches (1830 mm). Fasten with felt underlayment nails.

1. Install felt underlayment on roof deck not covered by self-adhering sheet underlayment. Lap sides of felt over self-adhering sheet underlayment not less than 3 inches (75 mm) in direction to shed water. Lap ends of felt not less than 6 inches (150 mm) over self- adhering sheet underlayment.

C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install, wrinkle free, on roof deck. Comply with low- temperature installation restrictions of underlayment manufacturer if applicable. Install at locations indicated below, lapped in direction to shed water. Lap sides not less than 3-1/2 inches (89 mm). Lap ends not less than 6 inches (150 mm) staggered 24 inches (600 mm) between courses. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within seven days.

1. Prime concrete and masonry surfaces to receive self-adhering sheet underlayment. 2. Eaves: Extend from edges of eaves 36 inches (914 mm) beyond interior face of exterior wall. 3. Valleys: Extend from lowest to highest point 18 inches (450 mm) on each side. 4. Ridges: Extend 36 inches (914 mm) on each side.

ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 3113 - 5 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

5. Sidewalls: Extend beyond sidewall 18 inches (450 mm), and return vertically against sidewall not less than 4 inches (100 mm). 6. Roof Slope Transitions: Extend 18 inches (450 mm) on each roof slope. 7. New Sloped Roof: Cover entire sloped roof area under new shingles.

3.3 METAL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install metal flashings and other sheet metal to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim."

1. Install metal flashings according to recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual" and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual."

B. Apron Flashings: Extend lower flange over and beyond each side of downslope asphalt shingles and up the vertical surface.

C. Step Flashings: Install with a headlap of 2 inches (50 mm) and extend over the underlying asphalt shingle and up the vertical surface. Fasten to roof deck only.

D. Open-Valley Flashings: Install centered in valleys, lapping ends at least 8 inches (200 mm) in direction to shed water. Fasten upper end of each length to roof deck beneath overlap.

1. Adhere 9-inch- (225-mm-) wide strip of self-adhering sheet to metal flanges and to self- adhering sheet underlayment.

E. Eave Drip Edges: Install eave drip edge flashings below underlayment and fasten to roof sheathing.

F. Pipe Flashings: Form flashing around pipe penetrations and asphalt shingles. Fasten and seal to asphalt shingles as recommended by manufacturer.

3.4 ASPHALT SHINGLE INSTALLATION

A. General: Install asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions, recommendations in ARMA's "Residential Asphalt Roofing Manual," and asphalt shingle recommendations in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual."

B. Install starter strip along lowest roof edge, consisting of an asphalt shingle strip with tabs removed at least 7 inches (175 mm) wide with self-sealing strip face up at roof edge.

1. Extend asphalt shingles 3/4 inch (19 mm) over fasciae at eaves and rakes. 2. Install starter strip along rake edge.

C. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure.

ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 3113 - 6 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

D. Install first and remaining courses of asphalt shingles stair-stepping diagonally across roof deck with manufacturer's recommended offset pattern at succeeding courses, maintaining uniform exposure.

E. Fasten asphalt shingle strips with a minimum of six roofing nails located according to manufacturer's written instructions.

1. Where roof slope is less than 4:12, seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots. 2. When ambient temperature during installation is below 50 deg F (10 deg C), seal asphalt shingles with asphalt roofing cement spots.

F. Open Valleys: Cut and fit asphalt shingles at open valleys, trimming upper concealed corners of shingle strips. Maintain uniform width of exposed open valley from highest to lowest point.

1. Set valley edge of asphalt shingles in a 3-inch- (75-mm-) wide bed of asphalt roofing cement. 2. Do not nail asphalt shingles to metal open-valley flashings.

G. Ridge Vents: Install continuous ridge vents over asphalt shingles according to manufacturer's written instructions. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.

H. Ridge Cap Shingles: Maintain same exposure of cap shingles as roofing shingle exposure. Lap cap shingles at ridges to shed water away from direction of prevailing winds. Fasten with roofing nails of sufficient length to penetrate sheathing.

1. Fasten ridge cap asphalt shingles to cover ridge vent without obstructing airflow.

3.5 ROOFING INSTALLER'S WARRANTY

A. WHEREAS of , herein called the "Roofing Installer," has performed roofing and associated work ("work") on the following project:

1. Owner: . 2. Address: . 3. Building Name/Type: . 4. Address: . 5. Area of Work: . 6. Acceptance Date: . 7. Warranty Period: . 8. Expiration Date: .

B. AND WHEREAS Roofing Installer has contracted (either directly with Owner or indirectly as a subcontractor) to warrant said work against leaks and faulty or defective materials and workmanship for designated Warranty Period,

C. NOW THEREFORE Roofing Installer hereby warrants, subject to terms and conditions herein set forth, that during Warranty Period he will, at his own cost and expense, make or cause to be made such repairs to or replacements of said work as are necessary to correct faulty and defective work and as are necessary to maintain said work in a watertight condition.

ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 3113 - 7 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

D. This Warranty is made subject to the following terms and conditions:

1. Specifically excluded from this Warranty are damages to work and other parts of the building, and to building contents, caused by:

a. Lightning; b. Peak gust wind speed exceeding 110 mph (m/sec); c. Fire; d. Failure of roofing system substrate, including cracking, settlement, excessive deflection, deterioration, and decomposition; e. Faulty construction of parapet walls, copings, chimneys, skylights, vents, equipment supports, and other edge conditions and penetrations of the work; f. Vapor condensation on bottom of roofing; and g. Activity on roofing by others, including construction contractors, maintenance personnel, other persons, and animals, whether authorized or unauthorized by Owner.

2. When work has been damaged by any of foregoing causes, Warranty shall be null and void until such damage has been repaired by Roofing Installer and until cost and expense thereof have been paid by Owner or by another responsible party so designated. 3. Roofing Installer is responsible for damage to work covered by this Warranty but is not liable for consequential damages to building or building contents resulting from leaks or faults or defects of work. 4. During Warranty Period, if Owner allows alteration of work by anyone other than Roofing Installer, including cutting, patching, and maintenance in connection with penetrations, attachment of other work, and positioning of anything on roof, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said alterations, but only to the extent said alterations affect work covered by this Warranty. If Owner engages Roofing Installer to perform said alterations, Warranty shall not become null and void unless Roofing Installer, before starting said work, shall have notified Owner in writing, showing reasonable cause for claim, that said alterations would likely damage or deteriorate work, thereby reasonably justifying a limitation or termination of this Warranty. 5. During Warranty Period, if original use of roof is changed and it becomes used for, but was not originally specified for, a promenade, work deck, spray-cooled surface, flooded basin, or other use or service more severe than originally specified, this Warranty shall become null and void on date of said change, but only to the extent said change affects work covered by this Warranty. 6. Owner shall promptly notify Roofing Installer of observed, known, or suspected leaks, defects, or deterioration and shall afford reasonable opportunity for Roofing Installer to inspect work and to examine evidence of such leaks, defects, or deterioration. 7. This Warranty is recognized to be the only warranty of Roofing Installer on said work and shall not operate to restrict or cut off Owner from other remedies and resources lawfully available to Owner in cases of roofing failure. Specifically, this Warranty shall not operate to relieve Roofing Installer of responsibility for performance of original work according to requirements of the Contract Documents, regardless of whether Contract was a contract directly with Owner or a subcontract with Owner's General Contractor.

E. IN WITNESS THEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed this day of , .

ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 3113 - 8 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

1. Authorized Signature: . 2. Name: . 3. Title: .

END OF SECTION

ASPHALT SHINGLES 07 3113 - 9

8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 07 6200

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications. 2. Formed wall sheet metal fabrications.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 2. Section 06 1053 - Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry: Wood nailers, curbs, and blocking. 3. Section 07 3113 – Asphalt Shingles: Installing sheet metal flashing and trim associated with shingle roofing.

1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans, elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembled work. Include the following: 1. Identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project. 2. Details for forming sheet metal flashing and trim, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions. 3. Details for joining, supporting, and securing sheet metal flashing and trim, including layout of fasteners, cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams. 4. Details of termination points and assemblies, including fixed points. 5. Details of edge conditions, including ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and counterflashings as applicable. 6. Details of special conditions. 7. Details of connections to adjoining work. 8. Detail formed flashing and trim at a scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on samples of size indicated below: 1. Anodized Aluminum Samples: Samples to show full range to be expected for each color required.

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 1 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.03 REFERENCES

A. Reference Standards: Applicable requirements of the latest published standards referenced herein apply to the work of this section. 1. Copper Development Association (CDA): a. "Copper in Architecture Handbook." Comply with applicable recommendations and details. Conform to dimensions and profiles shown. 2. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA): a. "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Comply with applicable recommendations and details. Conform to dimensions and profiles shown.

1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For qualified fabricator.

B. Maintenance Data: For sheet metal flashing, trim, and accessories to include in maintenance manuals.

C. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim similar to that required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim Standard: Comply with SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" unless more stringent requirements are specified or shown on Drawings.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.

B. Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and high humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

A. General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand wind loads, structural movement, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.

B. Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 degrees F, ambient; 180 degrees F, material surfaces.

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 2 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.02 SHEET METALS

A. General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective film before shipping.

B. Lead coated copper roofing sheet: Cold rolled; ASTM B 370 temper designation, H00; with following characteristics: 1. Lead-Coated Copper: ASTM B 101, cold-rolled copper sheet, not less than 20 oz./sq. ft. (0.7 mm thick), both sides coated with lead weighing not less than 12 nor more than 15 lb/100 sq. ft. (5.4 nor more than 6.8 kg/9.3 sq. m), unless otherwise indicated. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Hussey Copper Ltd. b. Revere Copper Products, Inc.

2.03 UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS

A. Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil- thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397.

B. Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.

C. Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized.

2.04 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal unless otherwise indicated.

B. Solder: 1. For Zinc-Tin Alloy-Coated Stainless Steel or Copper: ASTM B 32, 100 percent tin.

C. Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, and other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal. 1. General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head. a. Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps or factory-applied coating. b. Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal being fastened. c. Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internal gutter width.

D. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids, gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag, nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch wide and 1/8 inch thick.

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 3 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

E. Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

F. Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutylene plasticized; heavy bodied for hooked-type expansion joints with limited movement.

G. Epoxy Seam Sealer: Two-part, noncorrosive, aluminum seam-cementing compound, recommended by aluminum manufacturer for exterior nonmoving joints, including riveted joints.

H. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.

I. Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.

2.05 FABRICATION, GENERAL

A. General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metal thickness, and other characteristics of item indicated. Fabricate items at the shop to greatest extent possible. 1. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal. 2. Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication. 3. Form sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks and true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. 4. Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on faces exposed to view.

B. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to a tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to tolerances specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."

D. Sealed Joints: Form nonexpansion but movable joints in metal to accommodate elastomeric sealant.

E. Expansion Provisions: Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with butyl sealant concealed within joints.

F. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from compatible, noncorrosive metal.

G. Fabricate cleats and attachment devices of sizes as recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and by FMG Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for application, but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 4 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

H. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.

I. Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealant unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use.

J. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

2.06 STEEP-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS

A. Apron, Step, Cricket, Flashing, Counterflashing and Backer Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:

1. Lead Coated Copper: 20 oz./sq. ft.

2.07 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS

A. Flexible Flashing: For flashing not exposed to the exterior, use the following unless otherwise indicated:

1. Copper-Laminated Flashing: 5-oz./sq. ft. (1.5-kg/sq. m) copper sheet bonded with asphalt between 2 layers of glass-fiber cloth. Use only where flashing is fully concealed in masonry.

a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

1) Advanced Building Products Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. 2) Dayton Superior Corporation, Dur-O-Wal Division; Copper Fabric Thru- Wall Flashing. 3) Hohmann & Barnard, Inc.; H & B C-Fab Flashing. 4) Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Copper Fabric Flashing. 5) York Manufacturing, Inc.; Multi-Flash 500.

B. Adhesives, Primers, and Seam Tapes for Flexible Flashings: Flashing manufacturer's standard products or products recommended by flashing manufacturer for bonding flashing sheets to each other and to substrates.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates. 2. Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 5 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

3.02 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION

A. Polyethylene Sheet: Install polyethylene sheet with adhesive for anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped and taped joints of not less than 2 inches.

B. Felt Underlayment: Install felt underlayment with adhesive for temporary anchorage to minimize use of mechanical fasteners under sheet metal flashing and trim. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with lapped joints of not less than 2 inches.

C. Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. Apply primer if required by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of underlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer rather than nails for installing underlayment at low temperatures. Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches between courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover underlayment within 14 days.

3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, solder, welding rods, protective coatings, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system. 1. Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line and levels indicated. Provide uniform, neat seams with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant. 2. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal. 3. Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Anchor each cleat with two fasteners. Bend tabs over fasteners. 4. Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool marks. 5. Install sealant tape where indicated. 6. Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted. 7. Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.

B. Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals will contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by SMACNA. 1. Coat back side of uncoated aluminum and stainless-steel sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and trim will contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction. 2. Underlayment: Where installing metal flashing directly on cementitious or wood substrates, install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet or install a course of polyethylene sheet.

C. Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner or intersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficiently watertight, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filled with sealant concealed within joints.

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 6 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

D. Fastener Sizes: Use fasteners of sizes that will penetrate wood blocking not less than 1-1/4 inches for nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws; and will penetrate metal decking not less than recommended by fastener manufacturer to achieve maximum pull-out resistance.

E. Seal joints as shown and as required for watertight construction. 1. Where sealant-filled joints are used, embed hooked flanges of joint members not less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambient temperature at time of installation is moderate, between 40 and 70 degrees F, set joint members for 50 percent movement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures. Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 degrees F. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants.

F. Soldered Joints: Clean surfaces to be soldered, removing oils and foreign matter. Pre-tin edges of sheets to be soldered to a width of 1-1/2 inches, except reduce pre-tinning where pre-tinned surface would show in completed Work. 1. Do not solder aluminum sheet. 2. Pre-tinning is not required for zinc-tin alloy-coated stainless steel and zinc-tin alloy- coated copper. 3. Do not use torches for soldering. Heat surfaces to receive solder and flow solder into joint. Fill joint completely. Completely remove flux and spatter from exposed surfaces. 4. Stainless-Steel Soldering: Tin edges of uncoated sheets using solder recommended for stainless steel and acid flux. Promptly remove acid flux residue from metal after tinning and soldering. Comply with solder manufacturer's recommended methods for cleaning and neutralization.

3.04 ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metal manufacturer's written installation instructions, and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, set units true to line, and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant.

B. Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. Insert counterflashing behind exterior wall covering and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches over base flashing. Lap counterflashing joints a minimum of 4 inches and bed with sealant. Secure in a waterproof manner by means of lead wedges and sealant.

3.05 WALL FLASHING INSTALLATION

A. General: Install sheet metal wall flashing to intercept and exclude penetrating moisture according to SMACNA recommendations and as indicated. Coordinate installation of wall flashing with installation of wall-opening components such as windows, doors, and louvers.

B. Through-Wall Base Flashing: Installation of through-wall base flashing is specified in Section 04 4313 – Stone Masonry Veneer.

C. Opening Flashings in Frame Construction: Install continuous head, sill, and similar flashings to extend 4 inches beyond wall openings.

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 7 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

3.07 ERECTION TOLERANCES

A. Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

3.08 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.

B. Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.

C. Clean off excess sealants.

D. Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installed unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.

E. Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION

SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 07 6200 - 8 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 07 8123

INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes mastic and intumescent fire-resistive coatings (MIFRC).

1.3 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review products, design ratings, restrained and unrestrained conditions, thicknesses, and other performance requirements.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Shop Drawings: Structural framing plans indicating the following:

1. Extent of fireproofing for each construction and fire-resistance rating. 2. Applicable fire-resistance design designations of a qualified testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Minimum fireproofing thicknesses needed to achieve required fire-resistance rating of each structural component and assembly. 4. Treatment of fireproofing after application.

C. Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, in manufacturer's standard dimensions in size.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer and testing agency.

B. Product Certificates: For each type of fireproofing.

C. Evaluation Reports: For fireproofing, from ICC-ES.

INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING 07 8123 - 1 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

D. Field quality-control reports.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual certified, licensed, or otherwise qualified by fireproofing manufacturer as experienced and with sufficient trained staff to install manufacturer's products according to specified requirements.

B. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and to set quality standards for materials and execution.

1. Build mockup of each type of fireproofing and different substrate and each required finish as shown on Drawings. 2. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing. 3. Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

1.7 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not apply fireproofing when ambient or substrate temperature is 50 deg F (10 deg C) or lower unless temporary protection and heat are provided to maintain temperature at or above this level for 24 hours before, during, and for 24 hours after product application.

B. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces during and after application of fireproofing, providing complete air exchanges according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use natural means or, if they are inadequate, forced-air circulation until fireproofing dries thoroughly.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Assemblies: Provide fireproofing, including auxiliary materials, according to requirements of each fire-resistance design and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Source Limitations: Obtain fireproofing for each fire-resistance design from single source.

C. Fire-Resistance Design: Indicated on Drawings, tested according to ASTM E 119 or UL 263 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Steel members are to be considered unrestrained unless specifically noted otherwise.

D. Asbestos: Provide products containing no detectable asbestos.

INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING 07 8123 - 2 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.2 MASTIC AND INTUMESCENT FIRE-RESISTIVE COATINGS

A. MIFRC-1: Manufacturer's standard, factory-mixed formulation or factory-mixed, multicomponent system consisting of intumescent base coat and topcoat, and complying with indicated fire-resistance design.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Albi Manufacturing, Division of StanChem Inc. b. Carboline Company, subsidiary of RPM International, Fireproofing Products Div. c. International Paint Limited, subsidiary of Akzo Nobel N. V. d. Isolatek International.

2. Application: Designated for "interior general purpose" use by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Thickness: As required for fire-resistance design indicated, measured according to requirements of fire-resistance design. 4. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less. 5. Finish: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard finishes.

a. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.3 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that are compatible with fireproofing and substrates and are approved by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use in fire-resistance designs indicated.

B. Substrate Primers: Primers approved by fireproofing manufacturer and complying with required fire-resistance design by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Reinforcing Fabric: Glass- or carbon-fiber fabric of type, weight, and form required to comply with fire-resistance designs indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing manufacturer.

D. Reinforcing Mesh: Metallic mesh reinforcement of type, weight, and form required to comply with fire-resistance design indicated; approved and provided by fireproofing manufacturer. Include pins and attachment.

E. Topcoat: Suitable for application over applied fireproofing; of type recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer for each fire-resistance design.

INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING 07 8123 - 3 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for substrates and other conditions affecting performance of the Work and according to each fire-resistance design. Verify compliance with the following:

1. Substrates are free of dirt, oil, grease, release agents, rolling compounds, mill scale, loose scale, incompatible primers, paints, and encapsulants, or other foreign substances capable of impairing bond of fireproofing with substrates under conditions of normal use or fire exposure. 2. Objects penetrating fireproofing, including clips, hangers, support sleeves, and similar items, are securely attached to substrates. 3. Substrates receiving fireproofing are not obstructed by ducts, piping, equipment, or other suspended construction that will interfere with fireproofing application.

B. Conduct tests according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations to verify that substrates are free of substances capable of interfering with bond.

C. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Cover other work subject to damage from fallout or overspray of fireproofing materials during application.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of fireproofing.

C. Prime substrates where included in fire-resistance design and where recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer unless compatible shop primer has been applied and is in satisfactory condition to receive fireproofing.

D. For applications visible on completion of Project, repair substrates to remove surface imperfections that could affect uniformity of texture and thickness in finished surface of fireproofing. Remove minor projections and fill voids that would telegraph through fire- resistive products after application.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Construct fireproofing assemblies that are identical to fire-resistance design indicated and products as specified, tested, and substantiated by test reports; for thickness, primers, topcoats, finishing, and other materials and procedures affecting fireproofing work.

B. Comply with fireproofing manufacturer's written instructions for mixing materials, application procedures, and types of equipment used to mix, convey, and apply fireproofing; as applicable

INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING 07 8123 - 4 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

to particular conditions of installation and as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated.

C. Coordinate application of fireproofing with other construction to minimize need to cut or remove fireproofing.

1. Do not begin applying fireproofing until clips, hangers, supports, sleeves, and other items penetrating fireproofing are in place. 2. Defer installing ducts, piping, and other items that would interfere with applying fireproofing until application of fireproofing is completed.

D. Install auxiliary materials as required, as detailed, and according to fire-resistance design and fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations for conditions of exposure and intended use. For auxiliary materials, use attachment and anchorage devices of type recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

E. Spray apply fireproofing to maximum extent possible. Following the spraying operation in each area, complete the coverage by trowel application or other placement method recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

F. Extend fireproofing in full thickness over entire area of each substrate to be protected.

G. Install body of fireproofing in a single course unless otherwise recommended in writing by fireproofing manufacturer.

H. Provide a uniform finish complying with description indicated for each type of fireproofing material and matching finish approved for required mockups.

I. Cure fireproofing according to fireproofing manufacturer's written recommendations.

J. Do not install enclosing or concealing construction until after fireproofing has been applied, inspected, and tested and corrections have been made to deficient applications.

K. Finishes: Where indicated, apply fireproofing to produce the following finishes:

1. Manufacturer's Standard Finishes: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for each finish selected. 2. Spray-Textured Finish: Finish left as spray applied with no further treatment. 3. Rolled, Spray-Textured Finish: Even finish produced by rolling spray-applied finish with a damp paint roller to remove drippings and excessive roughness. 4. Skip-Troweled Finish: Even leveled surface produced by troweling spray-applied finish to smooth out the texture and neaten edges.

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Special Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified special inspector to perform the following special inspections:

1. Test and inspect as required by the IBC, 1704.11.

INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING 07 8123 - 5 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Perform the tests and inspections of completed Work in successive stages. Do not proceed with application of fireproofing for the next area until test results for previously completed applications of fireproofing show compliance with requirements. Tested values must equal or exceed values as specified and as indicated and required for approved fire-resistance design.

C. Fireproofing will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

1. Remove and replace fireproofing that does not pass tests and inspections, and retest. 2. Apply additional fireproofing, per manufacturer's written instructions, where test results indicate insufficient thickness, and retest.

D. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 CLEANING, PROTECTING, AND REPAIRING

A. Cleaning: Immediately after completing spraying operations in each containable area of Project, remove material overspray and fallout from surfaces of other construction and clean exposed surfaces to remove evidence of soiling.

B. Protect fireproofing, according to advice of manufacturer and Installer, from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes, so fireproofing will be without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

C. As installation of other construction proceeds, inspect fireproofing and repair damaged areas and fireproofing removed due to work of other trades.

D. Repair fireproofing damaged by other work before concealing it with other construction.

E. Repair fireproofing by reapplying it using same method as original installation or using manufacturer's recommended trowel-applied product.

END OF SECTION

INTUMESCENT MASTIC FIREPROOFING 07 8123 - 6 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 07 8413

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Penetrations in fire-resistance-rated walls. 2. Penetrations in horizontal assemblies.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 2. Section 07 8446 - Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: Joints in or between fire-resistance-rated construction, at exterior curtain-wall/floor intersections, and in smoke barriers.

1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product Schedule: For each penetration firestopping system. Include location and design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency. 1. Where Project conditions require modification to a qualified testing and inspecting agency's illustration for a particular penetration firestopping condition, submit illustration, with modifications marked, approved by penetration firestopping manufacturer's fire-protection engineer as an engineering judgment or equivalent fire- resistance-rated assembly.

B. Installer Certificates: From installer indicating penetration firestopping has been installed in compliance with requirements and manufacturer's written recommendations.

C. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for penetration firestopping.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A firm experienced in installing penetration firestopping similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful performance. Qualifications include having the necessary experience, staff, and training to install manufacturer's products per specified requirements. Manufacturer's willingness to sell its penetration firestopping products to Contractor or to Installer engaged by Contractor does not in itself confer qualification on buyer.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 8413 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Penetration firestopping shall comply with the following requirements: 1. Penetration firestopping tests are performed by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Penetration firestopping is identical to those tested per testing standard referenced in "Penetration Firestopping" article. Provide rated systems complying with the following requirements: a. Penetration firestopping products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Classification markings on penetration firestopping correspond to designations listed by UL in its "Fire Resistance Directory."

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install penetration firestopping when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by penetration firestopping manufacturers or when substrates are wet because of rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Install and cure penetration firestopping per manufacturer's written instructions using natural means of ventilations or, where this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.06 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of openings and penetrating items to ensure that penetration firestopping is installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of sleeves, openings, core-drilled holes, or cut openings to accommodate penetration firestopping.

C. Notify Owner's testing agency at least seven days in advance of penetration firestopping installations; confirm dates and times on day preceding each series of installations.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Grace, W. R. & Co. – Conn. 2. Hilti, Inc. 3. Nelson Firestop Products. 4. Specified Technologies Inc. 5. 3M Fire Protection Products.

2.02 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING

A. Provide penetration firestopping that is produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire- resistance rating of construction penetrated. Penetration firestopping systems shall be

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 8413 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

compatible with one another, with the substrates forming openings, and with penetrating items if any.

B. Penetrations in Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1. Fire-resistance-rated walls include fire partitions. 2. F-Rating: Not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated.

C. Penetrations in Horizontal Assemblies: Provide penetration firestopping with ratings determined per ASTM E 814 or UL 1479, based on testing at a positive pressure differential of 0.01-inch wg. 1. Horizontal assemblies include floors. 2. F-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated. 3. T-Rating: At least 1 hour, but not less than the fire-resistance rating of constructions penetrated except for floor penetrations within the cavity of a wall.

D. VOC Content: Provide penetration firestopping that complies with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L.

E. Accessories: Provide components for each penetration firestopping system that are needed to install fill materials and to maintain ratings required. Use only those components specified by penetration firestopping manufacturer and approved by qualified testing and inspecting agency for firestopping indicated. 1. Permanent forming/damming/backing materials, including the following: a. Slag-wool-fiber or rock-wool-fiber insulation. b. Sealants used in combination with other forming/damming/backing materials to prevent leakage of fill materials in liquid state. c. Fire-rated form board. d. Fillers for sealants. 2. Temporary forming materials. 3. Substrate primers. 4. Collars. 5. Steel sleeves.

2.03 FILL MATERIALS

A. Latex Sealants: Single-component latex formulations that do not re-emulsify after cure during exposure to moisture.

B. Firestop Devices: Factory-assembled collars formed from galvanized steel and lined with intumescent material sized to fit specific diameter of penetrant.

C. Intumescent Putties: Nonhardening dielectric, water-resistant putties containing no solvents, inorganic fibers, or silicone compounds.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 8413 - 3 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

D. Intumescent Wrap Strips: Single-component intumescent elastomeric sheets with aluminum foil on one side.

E. Mortars: Prepackaged dry mixes consisting of a blend of inorganic binders, hydraulic cement, fillers, and lightweight aggregate formulated for mixing with water at Project site to form a nonshrinking, homogeneous mortar.

F. Pillows/Bags: Reusable heat-expanding pillows/bags consisting of glass-fiber cloth cases filled with a combination of mineral-fiber, water-insoluble expansion agents, and fire-retardant additives. Where exposed, cover openings with steel-reinforcing wire mesh to protect pillows/bags from being easily removed.

G. Silicone Foams: Multicomponent, silicone-based liquid elastomers that, when mixed, expand and cure in place to produce a flexible, nonshrinking foam.

H. Silicone Sealants: Single-component, silicone-based, neutral-curing elastomeric sealants of grade indicated below: 1. Grade: Nonsag formulation for openings in vertical and sloped surfaces, unless indicated firestopping limits use of nonsag grade for both opening conditions.

2.04 MIXING

A. For those products requiring mixing before application, comply with penetration firestopping manufacturer's written instructions for accurate proportioning of materials, water (if required), type of mixing equipment, selection of mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other items or procedures needed to produce products of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for application indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for opening configurations, penetrating items, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean out openings immediately before installing penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and with the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of opening substrates and from penetrating items foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of penetration firestopping. 2. Clean opening substrates and penetrating items to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with penetration firestopping. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 8413 - 4 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent penetration firestopping from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of the Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove stains. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing firestopping's seal with substrates.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install penetration firestopping to comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and published drawings for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in the position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated. 1. After installing fill materials and allowing them to fully cure, remove combustible forming materials and other accessories not indicated as permanent components of firestopping.

C. Install fill materials for firestopping by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings, forming materials, accessories, and penetrating items as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by openings and penetrating items. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing the Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Where deficiencies are found or penetration firestopping is damaged or removed because of testing, repair or replace penetration firestopping to comply with requirements.

C. Proceed with enclosing penetration firestopping with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and installations comply with requirements.

3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to openings as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by penetration firestopping manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that penetration firestopping is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, immediately cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated penetration firestopping and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 8413 - 5 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

3.06 PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING SCHEDULE

A. Where UL-classified systems are indicated, they refer to system numbers in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under product Category XHEZ.

B. For each location where a fire-resistance-rated floor or wall assembly is penetrated, provide a UL-listed penetration firestopping system selected from the applicable UL number range scheduled below that complies with this section and that is suitable the penetration conditions indicated.

C. Firestopping with No Penetrating Items: 1. UL-Classified Systems: F-C- 1001-1999, W-J- 0001-0999, W-L- 0001-0999. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following: a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Intumescent putty. d. Mortar.

D. Firestopping for Metallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing: 1. UL-Classified Systems: F-C- 1001-1999, W-J- 1001-1999, W-L- 1001-1999. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following: a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Intumescent putty. d. Mortar.

E. Firestopping for Nonmetallic Pipes, Conduit, or Tubing: 1. UL-Classified Systems: F-C- 2001-2999, W-J- 2001-1999, W-L- 2001-1999. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following: a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Intumescent putty. d. Intumescent wrap strips. e. Firestop device.

F. Firestopping for Electrical Cables: 1. UL-Classified Systems: F-C- 3001-3999, W-J- 3001-3999, W-L- 3001-3999. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following: a. Latex sealant. b. Silicone sealant. c. Intumescent putty. d. Silicone foam. e. Pillows/bags.

G. Firestopping for Insulated Pipes: 1. UL-Classified Systems: F-C- 5001-5999, W-J- 5001-5999, W-L- 5001-5999. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following: a. Latex sealant. b. Intumescent putty. c. Silicone foam. d. Intumescent wrap strips.

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 8413 - 6 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

H. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Electrical Penetrants: 1. UL-Classified Systems: W-BJ- 6001-6999, W-L- 6001-6999. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following: a. Latex sealant. b. Intumescent putty. c. Mortar.

I. Firestopping for Miscellaneous Mechanical Penetrants: 1. UL-Classified Systems: F-C- 7001-7999, W-J- 7001-7999, W-L- 7001-7999. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following: a. Latex sealant. b. Mortar.

J. Firestopping for Groupings of Penetrants: 1. UL-Classified Systems: F-C- 8001-8999, W-J- 8001-8999, W-L- 8001-8999. 2. Type of Fill Materials: One or more of the following: a. Latex sealant. b. Mortar. c. Intumescent wrap strips. d. Firestop device. e. Intumescent composite sheet.

END OF SECTION

PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING 07 8413 - 7

8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 07 8446

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Fire-resistive joint systems for head-of-wall joints.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 2. Section 07 8413 - Penetration Firestopping: Systems installed in openings in walls and floors with and without penetrating items. 3. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Non-fire-resistive joint sealants.

1.02 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and maintain original fire-resistance rating of assembly in which fire-resistive joint systems are installed.

B. Joint Systems in and between Fire-Resistance-Rated Constructions: Provide systems with assembly ratings equaling or exceeding the fire-resistance ratings of construction that they join, and with movement capabilities indicated as determined by UL 2079. 1. Load-bearing capabilities as determined by evaluation during the time of test.

1.03 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For each fire-resistive joint system, show each kind of construction condition in which joints are installed; also show relationships to adjoining construction. Include fire- resistive joint system design designation of testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that demonstrates compliance with requirements for each condition indicated. 1. Submit documentation, including illustrations, from a qualified testing and inspecting agency that is applicable to each fire-resistive joint system configuration for construction and penetrating items.

1.04 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Product Certificates: For each type of fire-resistive joint system, signed by product manufacturer.

B. Qualification Data: For installer.

C. Research/Evaluation Reports: For each type of fire-resistive joint system.

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07 8446 - 1 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A firm that has been approved by FMG according to FMG 4991, "Approval of Firestop Contractors."

B. Installation Responsibility: Assign installation of through-penetration firestop systems and fire- resistive joint systems in Project to a single qualified installer.

C. Source Limitations: Obtain fire-resistive joint systems, for each kind of joint and construction condition indicated, through one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that comply with the following requirements and those specified in PART 1 "Performance Requirements" Article: 1. Fire-resistance tests are performed by a qualified testing and inspecting agency. A qualified testing and inspecting agency is UL or another agency performing testing and follow-up inspection services for fire-resistive joint systems acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Fire-resistive joint systems are identical to those tested per methods indicated in PART 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and comply with the following: a. Fire-resistive joint system products bear classification marking of qualified testing and inspecting agency. b. Fire-resistive joint systems correspond to those indicated by referencing system designations of the qualified testing and inspecting agency.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver fire-resistive joint system products to Project site in original, unopened containers or packages with qualified testing and inspecting agency's classification marking applicable to Project and with intact and legible manufacturers' labels identifying product and manufacturer, date of manufacture, lot number, shelf life, curing time, and mixing instructions for multicomponent materials.

B. Store and handle materials for fire-resistive joint systems to prevent their deterioration or damage due to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes.

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install fire-resistive joint systems when ambient or substrate temperatures are outside limits permitted by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers or when substrates are wet due to rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

B. Ventilate fire-resistive joint systems per manufacturer's written instructions by natural means or, if this is inadequate, forced-air circulation.

1.08 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate construction of joints to ensure that fire-resistive joint systems are installed according to specified requirements.

B. Coordinate sizing of joints to accommodate fire-resistive joint systems.

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07 8446 - 2 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

C. Notify inspecting agency at least seven days in advance of fire-resistive joint system installations; confirm dates and times on days preceding each series of installations.

D. Do not cover up fire-resistive joint system installations that will become concealed behind other construction until inspecting agency and building inspector of authorities having jurisdiction have examined each installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the fire-resistive joint systems indicated for each application in the Fire-Resistive Joint System Schedule at the end of PART 3.

2.02 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS

A. Compatibility: Provide fire-resistive joint systems that are compatible with joint substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer based on testing and field experience.

B. Accessories: Provide components of fire-resistive joint systems, including primers and forming materials, that are needed to install fill materials and to comply with PART 1 "Performance Requirements" Article. 1. Use only components specified by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer and approved by the qualified testing and inspecting agency for systems indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configurations, substrates, and other conditions affecting performance of work. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Surface Cleaning: Clean joints immediately before installing fire-resistive joint systems to comply with fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove from surfaces of joint substrates foreign materials that could interfere with adhesion of fill materials. 2. Clean joint substrates to produce clean, sound surfaces capable of developing optimum bond with fill materials. Remove loose particles remaining from cleaning operation. 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.

B. Priming: Prime substrates where recommended in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturer using that manufacturer's recommended products and methods. Confine primers to areas of bond; do not allow spillage and migration onto exposed surfaces.

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07 8446 - 3 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape to prevent fill materials of fire-resistive joint system from contacting adjoining surfaces that will remain exposed on completion of Work and that would otherwise be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods used to remove smears from fire-resistive joint system materials. Remove tape as soon as possible without disturbing fire-resistive joint system's seal with substrates or damaging adjoining surfaces.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install fire-resistive joint systems to comply with PART 1 "Performance Requirements" Article and fire-resistive joint system manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated.

B. Install forming/packing/backing materials and other accessories of types required to support fill materials during their application and in position needed to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths required to achieve fire ratings indicated.

C. Install fill materials for fire-resistive joint systems by proven techniques to produce the following results: 1. Fill voids and cavities formed by openings and forming/packing/backing materials as required to achieve fire-resistance ratings indicated. 2. Apply fill materials so they contact and adhere to substrates formed by joints. 3. For fill materials that will remain exposed after completing Work, finish to produce smooth, uniform surfaces that are flush with adjoining finishes.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspecting Agency: Engage a qualified independent inspecting agency to inspect fire-resistive joint systems and prepare inspection reports.

B. Testing Services: Schedule inspection of completed installations of fire-resistive joint systems to take place in successive stages as installation of fire-resistive joint systems proceeds. Do not proceed with installation of joint systems for the next area until inspecting agency determines completed work shows compliance with requirements. 1. Require inspecting agency to state in each report whether inspected fire-resistive joint systems comply with or deviate from requirements.

C. Remove and replace fire-resistive joint systems where inspections indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

D. Perform additional inspecting, at Contractor's expense, to determine compliance of replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

E. Proceed with enclosing fire-resistive joint systems with other construction only after inspection reports are issued and fire-resistive joint systems comply with requirements.

3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Clean off excess fill materials adjacent to joints as Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by fire-resistive joint system manufacturers and that do not damage materials in which openings occur.

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07 8446 - 4 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure fire- resistive joint systems are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. If damage or deterioration occurs despite such protection, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated fire-resistive joint systems immediately and install new materials to produce fire- resistive joint systems complying with specified requirements.

3.06 FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Designation System for Joints in or between Fire-Resistance-Rated Constructions: Alphanumeric systems listed in UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" under Product Category XHBN.

B. Head-of-Wall Fire-Resistive Joint Systems FRJS-1: 1. UL-Classified Systems: HW-D-0039, HW-D-0040, HW-D-0056. 2. Assembly Rating: Up to 2 hours. 3. Nominal Joint Width: 1 inch. 4. Movement Capabilities: Class III, 25 percent compression, 25 percent extension.

C. Head-of-Wall Fire-Resistive Joint Systems FRJS-2: 1. Available UL-Classified Systems: HW-D-0043, HW-D-0045, HW-D-0047. 2. Assembly Rating: 1 and 2 hour. 3. Nominal Joint Width: 3/4 inch. 4. Movement Capabilities: Class III – 25 percent compression and 25 percent extension. a. Movement Capabilities: Class II - 5 percent vertical shear.

END OF SECTION

FIRE-RESISTIVE JOINT SYSTEMS 07 8446 - 5

8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 07 9200

JOINT SEALANTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section includes: 1. Silicone joint sealants. 2. Urethane joint sealants. 3. Latex joint sealants. 4. Solvent-release-curing joint sealants. 5. Preformed joint sealants. 6. Acoustical joint sealants.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section. 2. Section 04 4300 Stone Masonry 3. Section 07 8446 - Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: Sealing joints in fire-resistance-rated construction. 4. Section 08 4410 Fire Rated Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall 5. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glazing sealants. 6. Section 09 2900 - Gypsum Board: Sealing perimeter joints. 7. Section 09 3000 - Tiling: Sealing tile joints. 8. Section 09 5113 - Acoustical Panel Ceilings: Sealing edge moldings at perimeters with acoustical sealant. 9. Section 32 1373 - Concrete Paving Joint Sealants: Sealing joints in pavements, walkways, and curbing.

1.02 DEFINITIONS A. Interior Sealant: Sealant, glazing compound or sealant primer used inside the building’s weatherproofing system. B. VOC: Volatile organic compound.

1.03 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING A. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below, samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants. 1. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrates. 2. Submit not fewer than eight pieces of each kind of material, including joint substrates, shims, joint-sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 3. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 4. For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including use of specially formulated primers. 5. Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit joint preparation data that are based on previous testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for

JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 1 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

adhesion to, and compatibility with, joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted. B. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project joint substrates as follows: 1. Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect. 2. Conduct field tests for each application indicated below: a. Each kind of sealant and joint substrate indicated. 3. Notify Architect 15 days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected. 4. Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative present. a. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. 1) For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 5. Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively, retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained. 6. Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will be considered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.

1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each joint sealant product indicated. B. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing the full range of colors available for each product exposed to view. C. Samples for Verification: For each kind and color of joint sealant required, provide samples with joint sealants in 1/2 inch wide joints formed between two 6 inch long strips of material matching the appearance of exposed surfaces adjacent to joint sealants.

1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS A. Joint Sealant Schedule: Include the following information: 1. Joint sealant application, joint location, and designation. 2. Joint sealant manufacturer and product name. 3. Joint sealant formulation. 4. Joint sealant color. B. Qualification Data: For qualified installer. C. Product Certificates: For each kind of joint sealant and accessory, from manufacturer. D. Sealant, Waterproofing, and Restoration Institute (SWRI) Validation Certificate: For each sealant specified to be validated by SWRI's Sealant Validation Program. E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, indicating that sealants comply with requirements. F. Preconstruction Compatibility and Adhesion Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:

JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 2 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

1. Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and adhesion with joint sealants. 2. Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. G. Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methods resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing" article. H. Field-Adhesion Test Reports: For each sealant application tested. I. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who has completed joint sealant applications similar in material, design and extent to that indicated for this project and that have resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.. B. Source Limitations: Obtain each kind of joint sealant from single source from single manufacturer. C. Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency. 1. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing indicated. 2. Test according to SWRI's Sealant Validation Program for compliance with requirements specified by reference to ASTM C 920 for adhesion and cohesion under cyclic movement, adhesion-in-peel, and indentation hardness. D. Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other sections that are indicated to receive joint sealants specified in this section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this section. E. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions: 1. When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint sealant manufacturer or are below 40 degrees F. 2. When joint substrates are wet. 3. Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint sealant manufacturer for applications indicated. 4. Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint substrates.

1.08 WARRANTY A. Special Installer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion. B. Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which joint-sealant manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace those that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 3 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

C. Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from the following: 1. Movement of the structure caused by structural settlement or errors attributable to design or construction resulting in stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's written specifications for sealant elongation and compression. 2. Disintegration of joint substrates from natural causes exceeding design specifications. 3. Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents. 4. Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL A. Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with one another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by joint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. B. VOC Content of Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers for use inside the weatherproofing system that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Part 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): 1. Architectural Sealants: 250 g/L. 2. Sealant Primers for Nonporous Substrates: 250 g/L. 3. Sealant Primers for Porous Substrates: 775 g/L. C. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Sealants: Provide sealants and sealant primers that comply with the following chemical restrictions: 1. Aromatic Compounds: Sealants shall not contain aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings), fiberous talc or asbestos, formaldehyde, halo-generated solvents, mercury, lead, cadmium, hexavalent chromium, or their components. 2. Restricted Components: Sealants shall not contain any of the following: a. Butyl rubber. b. Mercury. c. Neoprene. d. Nitrile. e. Styrene butadi-ene rubber (SBR). D. Liquid-Applied Joint Sealants: Comply with ASTM C 920 and other requirements indicated for each liquid-applied joint sealant specified, including those referencing ASTM C 920 classifications for type, grade, class, and uses related to exposure and joint substrates. 1. Suitability for Immersion in Liquids. Where sealants are indicated for Use I for joints that will be continuously immersed in liquids, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1247. Liquid used for testing sealants is deionized water, unless otherwise indicated. E. Stain-Test-Response Characteristics: Where sealants are specified to be nonstaining to porous substrates, provide products that have undergone testing according to ASTM C 1248 and have not stained porous joint substrates indicated for Project.

JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 4 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.02 SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS A. Type JS-S-1; Single-Component, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 100/50, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation: 756 SMS. B. Type JS-S-2; Multicomponent, Nonsag, Neutral-Curing Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Tremco Incorporated: Spectrem 4TS. C. Type JS-S-3; Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Neutral Curing, Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: a. Pecora Corporation: 898. D. Type JS-S-4; Mildew-Resistant, Single-Component, Acid Curing, Silicone Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use NT. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Omniplus. b. Dow Corning Corporation; 786 Mildew Resistant. c. Momentive Performance Materials (formerly GE Silicones): SCS1700. d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200 Sanitary.

2.03 URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS

A. Type JS-U-1; Single-Component, Nonsag, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920. Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use T. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems: Sonolastic NP1. b. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division: Sikaflex - 1a. c. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 116. B. Type JS-U-2; Single-Component, Pourable, Traffic-Grade, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25, for Use T. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic SL 1. b. Pecora Corporation; Urexpan NR-201. c. Sika Corporation, Construction Products Division: 1c SL. d. Tremco Incorporated; Vulkem 45. C. Type JS-U-3; Multicomponent, Nonsag, Urethane Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920, Grade NS, Class 25, for Use M, G, A. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems; Sonolastic NP 2. b. Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II. c. Tremco Incorporated; 240 or 240FC.

2.04 LATEX JOINT SEALANTS A. Type JS-L-1; Latex Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, paintable, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. BASF Building Systems: Sonolac.

JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 5 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

b. Bostik, Inc.: Chem-Calk 600. c. Pecora Corporation: AC-20+. d. Tremco Incorporated: Tremflex 834.

2.05 MINERAL WOOL A. Type MW-1; Mineral Wool Insulation: Insulation to be packed into joint between curtainwall and adjacent construction.

2.06 PREFORMED JOINT SEALANTS

A. Preformed Foam Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard preformed, precompressed, open-cell foam sealant manufactured from urethane foam with minimum density of 10 lb/cu. ft. (160 kg/cu. m) and impregnated with a nondrying, water-repellent agent. Factory produce in precompressed sizes in roll or stick form to fit joint widths indicated; coated on one side with a pressure-sensitive adhesive and covered with protective wrapping.

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Dayton Superior Specialty Chemicals; Polytite Standard. b. EMSEAL Joint Systems, Ltd.; Emseal 25V. c. Sandell Manufacturing Co., Inc.; Polyseal.

2.07 ACOUSTICAL JOINT SEALANTS A. Type JS A-1; Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complying with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: a. OSI Sealants, Inc.; SC-175 Acoustical Sound Sealant. b. Pecora Corporation: AC-20 FTR or AIS-919. c. USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.

2.08 JOINT SEALANT BACKING A. General: Provide sealant backings of material that are nonstaining; are compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, and other joint fillers; and are approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field experience and laboratory testing. B. Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), and of size and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance. C. Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer for preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint. Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 6 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.09 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant to joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests. B. Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealant backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substrates and adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants to joint substrates. C. Masking Tape: Nonstaining, nonabsorbent material compatible with joint sealants and surfaces adjacent to joints.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION A. Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting joint- sealant performance. B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements: 1. Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant, including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing, water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost. 2. Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond with joint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming or blowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following: a. Concrete. b. Unit masonry, brick and stone. c. Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile. d. Portlant cement plaster (stucco). 3. Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete. 4. Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain, harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporous joint substrates include the following: a. Metal. b. Glass. c. Porcelain enamel. d. Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile. B. Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates unless designated in writing by joint sealant manufacturer not to be primed, based on preconstruction joint sealant substrate tests. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces.

JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 7 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

C. Masking Tape: Use masking tape where required to prevent contact of sealant or primer with adjoining surfaces that otherwise would be permanently stained or damaged by such contact or by cleaning methods required to remove sealant smears. Remove tape immediately after tooling without disturbing joint seal.

3.03 INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS A. General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products and applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply. B. Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants as applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated. C. Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required to produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. 1. Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings. 2. Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings. 3. Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application and replace them with dry materials. D. Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants and backs of joints. E. Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings are installed: 1. Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates. 2. Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration. 3. Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability. F. Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins, tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beads of configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant with sides of joint. 1. Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints. 2. Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor sealants or adjacent surfaces. 3. Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Provide flush joint profile where indicated per Figure 8B in ASTM C 1193. 5. Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated per Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193. a. Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints. G. Installation of Preformed Silicone-Sealant System: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Apply masking tape to each side of joint, outside of area to be covered by sealant system. 2. Apply silicone sealant to each side of joint to produce a bead of size complying with preformed silicone-sealant system manufacturer's written instructions and covering a bonding area of not less than 3/8 inch. Hold edge of sealant bead 1/4 inch inside masking tape. 3. Within 10 minutes of sealant application, press silicone extrusion into sealant to wet extrusion and substrate. Use a roller to apply consistent pressure and ensure uniform contact between sealant and both extrusion and substrate.

JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 8 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

4. Complete installation of sealant system in horizontal joints before installing in vertical joints. Lap vertical joints over horizontal joints. At ends of joints, cut silicone extrusion with a razor knife. H. Installation of Preformed Foam Sealants: Install each length of sealant immediately after removing protective wrapping. Do not pull or stretch material. Produce seal continuity at ends, turns, and intersections of joints. For applications at low ambient temperatures, apply heat to sealant in compliance with sealant manufacturer's written instructions. I. Acoustical Sealant Installation: At sound-rated assemblies and elsewhere as indicated, seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows: 1. Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows: a. Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and joint substrate. b. Perform one test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or one test per each floor per elevation. 2. Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab, in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521. a. For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side. 3. Inspect tested joints and report on the following: a. Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids. b. Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements. c. Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion passes sealant manufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria. 4. Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesion results and percent elongations, sealant fill, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions. 5. Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealant contacts original sealant. B. Evaluation of Field-Adhesion Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing or noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applications until test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 9 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

3.05 CLEANING A. Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and with cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which joints occur.

3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and from damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration or damage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cut out and remove damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repaired areas are indistinguishable from original work.

3.07 JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE A. Exterior joints in traffic surfaces sloped not greater than 5 percent from horizontal. 1. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints in brick and stone pavers. b. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. c. Joints in stone paving units, including steps. d. Joints between different materials listed above. 2. Joint Sealant: Type JS-U-2. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors B. Exterior joints in traffic surfaces sloped not greater than 12 percent from horizontal. 1. Joint Locations: a. Control and expansion joints in brick and stone pavers. b. Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs. c. Joints between different materials listed above. 2. Joint Sealant: Type JS-U-1. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. C. Exterior joints in vertical surfaces in dimension stone cladding and stone masonry. 1. Joint Locations: a. Joints between different materials listed above. b. Perimeter joints between materials listed above and door and window frames. 2. Silicone Joint Sealant: Type JS-S-1. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. D. Exterior joints in sheet metal work. 1. Joint Locations: a. Concealed sealant bead in sheet metal and flashing work. b. Bedding for thresholds. c. Other work where little or no movement can be expected. 2. Silicone Joint Sealant: Type JS-SR-2. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: White.

E. Exterior joints in curtainwall: 1. Joint Locations: a. Horizontal and Vertical joints between curtainwall and existing and new construction. Mineral wool shall not be exposed to exterior. Install sealant ½” minimum deep on exterior side of joint. 2. MW-1 Mineral Wool

JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 10 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

F. Interior joints in vertical surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: Exposed interior joints. 2. Silicone Joint Sealant: Type JS-L-1. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: White. G. Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: Control and expansion joints in concrete flooring. 2. Joint Sealant: Type JS-SR-1. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors H. Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Sealant Locations: a. Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters. b. Tile control and expansion joints. 2. Joint Sealant: Type JS-S-3 or Type JS-S-4. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors. I. Interior acoustical joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces. 1. Joint Locations: Acoustical joints in gypsum board partitions. 2. Joint Sealant: Type JS-A-1. 3. Joint-Sealant Color: Manufacturer’s standard.

END OF SECTION

JOINT SEALANTS 07 9200 - 11

8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 08 0001

DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General Conditions and Division 01 Specification sections, apply to work of this section.

B. Technical requirements for each type of door, frame, hardware and accessory item are specified in other Division 08 sections, or in sections referenced therein.

1.02 SUMMARY:

A. Provide, for each opening: doors, frames, hardware sets, glazing and other features as scheduled.

1. For any opening appearing on the drawings but not scheduled or incompletely scheduled herein, provide doors, frames, hardware sets, glazing other features as scheduled for the room or space most closely equivalent in size, fire rating, adjacent construction, and use.

2. Number of pages in this section: 1(this page) + [1] schedule pages.

PARTS 2 & 3 PRODUCTS & EXECUTION: NOT USED.

END OF SECTION

DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE 08 0001 - 1 D O O R S C H E D U L E

DOOR INFORMATION FRAME INFO. DETAILS OPN'G. INFO.

OPN'G. DOOR DOOR ROOM DOOR DOOR DOOR DOOR FRAME FRAME FRAME HEAD JAMB SILL FIRE HDWR REMARK NO. WIDTH HEIGHT ROOM NAME NO. MAT'L FIN. TYPE GLAZ. MAT'L FIN. TYPE DETAIL DETAIL DETAIL RATING SET NO.

BASEMENT

002 EXIST. 3'-0" 6'-8" EXISTING OFFICE 002 EX-WD EXIST. B MG-1 EX-HM PTD. EXIST. EXIST. EXIST. EXIST. N/A 1 1

FIRST FLOOR

101 3'-0" 6'-10" RESTROOM 101 WD FACT A N/A HM STAIN HM-1 2/A-502 2/A-502 N/A N/A 2 102 3'-0" 6'-10" RESTROOM 102 WD FACT A N/A HM STAIN HM-1 2/A-502 2/A-502 N/A N/A 2 107 3'-6" & 1'-5" 7'-0" EXIST ADULT COLLECTION 107 HM FACT D IG-1 HM FACT HM-2 3/A-502 3/A-502 N/A N/A 4 2 110 3'-0" 7'-0" NEW VESTIBULE 110 ALUM FACT C FRG-1 ALUM FACT AL-1 6/A-602 4&5/A-602 N/A N/A 3 3

SEE NOTES AND REMARKS BELOW DOOR REMARKS GENERAL NOTES 1 New lite in existing solid core wood door. A. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 08 7110 FOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE. 2 Insulated door, verify and match existing opening height & width B. REFER TO DWG A6.01 FOR DOOR AND FRAME TYPES 3 Door and hardware by fire-rated curtain wall manufacturer C. SEE SPECIFICATION SECTION 08 8000 FOR GLASS TYPES

ABBREVIATION LEGEND WD. WOOD EX-WD EXISTING WOOD FACT. FACTORY FINISH, ALL DOORS TO BE FACTORY FINISHED, U.N.O. EX-H.M. EXISTING HOLLOW METAL H.M. HOLLOW METAL ALUM. ALUMINUM N/A NOT APPLICABLE PTD PAINTED

DOOR AND FRAME SCHEDULE 8318.02 : 8-31-2015 08 0001 - 2 Gladwyne Library 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 08 1113

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Hollow metal doors and frames.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 2. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Door hardware for hollow metal doors. 3. Sections of Division 09 for Painting: Field painting interior hollow metal doors and frames. 4. Sections of Division 26: Electrical connections including conduit and wiring for door controls and operators.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.

B. Standard Hollow Metal Work: Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, core descriptions, fire-resistance rating, temperature-rise ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Include the following: 1. Elevations of each door design. 2. Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses. 3. Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses. 4. Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware. 5. Details of each different wall opening condition. 6. Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections. 7. Details of accessories. 8. Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing. 9. Details of conduit and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.

C. Other Action Submittals: 1. Schedule: Provide a schedule of hollow metal work prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, using same reference numbers for details and openings as those on Drawings. Coordinate with door hardware schedule.

D. Oversize Construction Certification: For assemblies required to be fire rated and exceeding limitations of labeled assemblies.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 1 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

E. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for each type of hollow metal door and frame assembly.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain hollow metal work from single source from single manufacturer.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit and Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. 1. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.

B. Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambs and mullions.

C. Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a vertical position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch- high wood blocking. Do not store in a manner that traps excess humidity. 1. Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Benchmark; a division of Therma-Tru Corporation. 2. Ceco Door Products; an Assa Abloy Group company. 3. Curries Company; an Assa Abloy Group company. 4. Mesker Door Inc. 5. Pioneer Industries, Inc. 6. Steelcraft; an Ingersoll-Rand company. 7. Windsor Republic Doors.

2.02 MATERIALS

A. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposed applications.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 2 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surface defects; pickled and oiled.

C. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; with minimum G60 (Z180) or A60 (ZF180) metallic coating.

D. Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591/A 591M, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z coating designation; mill phosphatized. 1. For anchors built into exterior walls, steel sheet complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M or ASTM A 1011/A 1011M, hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M, Class B.

E. Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153/A 153M.

F. Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollow metal frames of type indicated.

G. Grout: ASTM C 476, except with a maximum slump of 4 inches (102 mm), as measured according to ASTM C 143/C 143M.

H. Mineral-Fiber Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing); consisting of fibers manufactured from slag or rock wool with 6- to 12-lb/cu. ft. density; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-development indexes of 25 and 50, respectively; passing ASTM E 136 for combustion characteristics.

I. Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.

J. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12, compounded for 15-mil dry film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components, and other deleterious impurities.

2.03 STANDARD HOLLOW METAL DOORS

A. General: Provide doors of design indicated, not less than thickness indicated; fabricated with smooth surfaces, without visible joints or seams on exposed faces unless otherwise indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8. 1. Design: Flush panel or embossed panel, as indicated. 2. Core Construction: Manufacturer's standard polystyrene, polyurethane, or polyisocyanurate with vertical steel-stiffener core. a. Thermal-Rated (Insulated) Doors: Where indicated, provide doors fabricated with thermal-resistance value (R-value) of not less than 12.3 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu (2.166 K x sq. m/W) when tested according to ASTM C 1363. 1) Locations: Exterior doors. 3. Vertical Edges for Single-Acting Doors: Epoxy filled, seamless. a. Beveled Edge: 1/8 inch in 2 inches. 4. Top and Bottom Edges: Epoxy filled, seamless, closed with flush 0.042-inch- thick minimum, end closures or inverted channels of same material as face sheets. 5. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117, "Manufacturing Tolerances for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 3 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Exterior Doors: Face sheets fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. Provide doors complying with requirements indicated below by referencing ANSI/SDI A250.8 for level and model and ANSI/SDI A250.4 for physical performance level: 1. Level 3 and Physical Performance Level A (Extra Heavy Duty), Model 2 (Seamless). 2. All exterior doors shall be factory finished.

C. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcing plates from same material as door face sheets.

D. Fabricate concealed stiffeners and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

2.04 HOLLOW METAL FRAMES

A. General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.

B. Exterior Frames: Fabricated from metallic-coated steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: 0.053-inch- (1.3-mm-) thick steel sheet. 4. All exterior frames shall be factory finished.

C. Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet. 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners. 2. Fabricate frames as full profile welded unless otherwise indicated. 3. Frames for Wood Doors: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet. 4. Frames for Borrowed Lights: 0.053-inch- thick steel sheet.

D. Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from same material as frames.

2.05 FRAME ANCHORS

A. Jamb Anchors: 1. Masonry Type: Adjustable strap-and-stirrup or T-shaped anchors to suit frame size, not less than 0.042 inch thick, with corrugated or perforated straps not less than 2 inches wide by 10 inches long; or wire anchors not less than 0.177 inch thick. 2. Stud-Wall Type: Designed to engage stud, welded to back of frames; not less than 0.042-inch thick. 3. Postinstalled Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- diameter bolts with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcement plate, welded to frame at each anchor location.

B. Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.042 inch thick, and as follows: 1. Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Clip-type anchors, with two holes to receive fasteners. 2. Separate Topping Concrete Slabs: Adjustable-type anchors with extension clips, allowing not less than 2-inch height adjustment. Terminate bottom of frames at finish floor surface.

2.06 STOPS AND MOLDINGS

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 4 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

A. Moldings for Glazed Lites in Doors: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as door face sheet in which they are installed.

B. Fixed Frame Moldings: Formed integral with hollow metal frames, a minimum of 5/8 inch high unless otherwise indicated.

C. Loose Stops for Glazed Lites in Frames: Minimum 0.032 inch thick, fabricated from same material as frames in which they are installed.

2.07 ACCESSORIES

A. Mullions and Transom Bars: Join to adjacent members by welding or rigid mechanical anchors.

B. Ceiling Struts: Minimum 1/4-inch-thick by 1-inch- wide steel.

C. Grout Guards: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.016 inch thick.

2.08 FABRICATION

A. Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal to required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment.

B. Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.

C. Hollow Metal Doors: 1. Exterior Doors: Provide weep-hole openings in bottom of exterior doors to permit moisture to escape. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. 2. Glazed Lites: Factory cut openings in doors.

D. Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations, provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames. 1. Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and invisible. 2. Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless otherwise indicated. 3. Grout Guards: Weld guards to frame at back of hardware mortises in frames to be grouted. 4. Floor Anchors: Weld anchors to bottom of jambs and mullions with at least four spot welds per anchor. 5. Jamb Anchors: Provide number and spacing of anchors as follows: a. Masonry Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Two anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Three anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Four anchors per jamb from 90 to 120 inches high. 4) Four anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 120 inches high.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 5 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

b. Stud-Wall Type: Locate anchors not more than 18 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 32 inches o.c. and as follows: 1) Three anchors per jamb up to 60 inches high. 2) Four anchors per jamb from 60 to 90 inches high. 3) Five anchors per jamb from 90 to 96 inches high. 4) Five anchors per jamb plus 1 additional anchor per jamb for each 24 inches (610 mm) or fraction thereof above 96 inches high. 5) Two anchors per head for frames above 42 inches wide and mounted in metal-stud partitions. c. Postinstalled Expansion Type: Locate anchors not more than 6 inches from top and bottom of frame. Space anchors not more than 26 inches o.c. 6. Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped doors, drill stops to receive door silencers as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. a. Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers. b. Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.

E. Fabricate concealed stiffeners, edge channels, and hardware reinforcement from either cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet.

F. Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templates furnished as specified in Section 09 71 00 - Door Hardware. 1. Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8. 2. Reinforce doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised and surface-mounted door hardware. 3. Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware. 4. Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with sections of Division 26.

G. Stops and Moldings: Provide stops and moldings around glazed lites where indicated. Form corners of stops and moldings with butted or mitered hairline joints. 1. Single Glazed Lites: Provide fixed stops and moldings welded on secure side of hollow metal work. 2. Multiple Glazed Lites: Provide fixed and removable stops and moldings so that each glazed lite is capable of being removed independently. 3. Provide fixed frame moldings on outside of exterior and on secure side of interior doors and frames. 4. Provide loose stops and moldings on inside of hollow metal work. 5. Coordinate rabbet width between fixed and removable stops with type of glazing and type of installation indicated.

2.09 STEEL FINISHES

A. Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating. 1. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate; compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 6 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Factory-Applied Paint Finish: Manufacturer's standard, complying with ANSI/SDI A250.3 for performance and acceptance criteria. 1. Color and Gloss: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.

C. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory. Restore exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.

B. Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances: 1. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. 2. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. 3. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. 4. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor.

C. Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; comply with Drawings and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.11. 1. Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. a. At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 7 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

b. Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, field splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make splice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. c. Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening. d. Install door silencers in frames before grouting. e. Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properly set and secured. f. Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim as necessary to comply with installation tolerances. g. Field apply bituminous coating to backs of frames that are filled with grout containing antifreezing agents. 2. Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure with postinstalled expansion anchors. a. Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of postinstalled expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings. 3. Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames. 4. Masonry Walls: Coordinate installation of frames to allow for solidly filling space between frames and masonry with grout. 5. In-Place Concrete or Masonry Construction: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 6. In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with postinstalled expansion anchors through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces. 7. Ceiling Struts: Extend struts vertically from top of frame at each jamb to overhead structural supports or substrates above frame unless frame is anchored to masonry or to other structural support at each jamb. Bend top of struts to provide flush contact for securing to supporting construction. Provide adjustable wedged or bolted anchorage to frame jamb members. 8. Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumb to the following tolerances: a. Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb perpendicular to frame head. b. Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall. c. Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and perpendicular to plane of wall. d. Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs at floor.

C. Hollow Metal Doors: Fit hollow metal doors accurately in frames, within clearances specified below. Shim as necessary. 1. Non-Fire-Rated Standard Steel Doors: a. Jambs and Head: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. b. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: 1/8 inch plus or minus 1/16 inch. c. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Threshold: Maximum 3/8 inch. d. Between Bottom of Door and Top of Finish Floor (No Threshold): Maximum 3/4 inch.

D. Glazing: Comply with installation requirements in Section 08 8000 – Glazing, and with hollow metal manufacturer's written instructions.

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 8 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

1. Secure stops with countersunk flat- or oval-head machine screws spaced uniformly not more than 9 inches o.c. and not more than 2 inches o.c. from each corner.

3.04 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection. Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, including hollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.

B. Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.

C. Metallic-Coated Surfaces: Clean abraded areas and repair with galvanizing repair paint according to manufacturer's written instructions.

END OF SECTION

HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 08 1113 - 9

8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 08 1416

FLUSH WOOD DOORS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Solid-core doors with wood-veneer, faces. 2. Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 2. Section 08 7100 - Door Hardware: Door hardware for flush wood doors. 3. Section 08 8000 - Glazing: Glass view panels in flush wood doors.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings. Include factory-finishing specifications.

B. Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door; construction details not covered in Product Data; location and extent of hardware blocking; and other pertinent data. 1. Indicate dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware. 2. Indicate dimensions and locations of cutouts. 3. Indicate requirements for veneer matching. 4. Indicate doors to be factory finished and finish requirements. 5. Indicate fire ratings for fire doors. 6. Samples for Initial Finish Selection: Custom match color and finish of existing interior architectural woodwork.

C. Samples for Verification: 1. Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches, for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set of three samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in the finished work. 2. Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches, with door faces and edgings representing typical range of color and grain for each species of veneer and solid lumber required. 3. Frames for light openings, 6 inches long, for each material, type, and finish required.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Quality Standard: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated."

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.

C. Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until building is enclosed, wet work is complete, and HVAC system is operating and will maintain temperature and relative humidity at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form, signed by manufacturer, installer, and Contractor, in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that are defective in materials or workmanship, have warped (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84- inch section, or show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span. 1. Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or replacement of defective doors. 2. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time from date of Substantial Completion: a. Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. 2. Eggers Industries; Architectural Door Division. 3. Graham Manufacturing Corp. 4. Marshfield Door Company. 5. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. 6. VT Industries Inc.

2.02 DOOR CONSTRUCTION, GENERAL

A. Adhesives: Do not use adhesives containing urea formaldehyde.

B. Doors for Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium, with Grade AA faces. 2. Species and Cut: Maple, plain sliced. 3. Veneer Match: Slip 4. Veneer Assembly: Running 5. Pairs of Doors: Pair Match

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.03 SOLID-CORE DOORS

A. Structural Composite Lumber Cores: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Blocking: Provide wood blocking in SCL-core doors as needed to eliminate through- bolting hardware. as follows: a. 5-inch top-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have closers. b. 5-inch bottom-rail blocking, in exterior doors and doors indicated to have kick, mop, or armor plates. c. 5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have exit devices.

B. Interior Veneer-Faced Doors: 1. Core: Structural composite lumber. 2. Construction: Five plies with stiles and rails bonded to core, then entire unit abrasive planed before veneering.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated, with the following uniform clearances and bevels, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Comply with clearance requirements of referenced quality standard for fitting. Comply with requirements in NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors.

B. Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply with DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, DHI A115-W series standards, and hardware templates. 1. Coordinate measurements of hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before factory machining.

C. Openings: Cut and trim openings through doors to comply with applicable requirements of referenced standards for kind(s) of door(s) required. 1. Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.

2.05 FACTORY FINISHING

A. General: Comply with AWI's "Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards Illustrated" for factory finishing.

B. Finish doors at factory.

C. Transparent Finish: 1. Grade: Premium. 2. Finish: AWI System TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Staining: Custom match color and finish of existing interior architectural woodwork. 4. Effect: Filled finish. 5. Sheen: Custom match color and finish of existing interior architectural woodwork

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and installed door frames before hanging doors.

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 3 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs. 2. Reject doors with defects.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Hardware: For installation, see Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.

B. Manufacturer's Written Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions, referenced quality standard, and as indicated. 1. Install fire-rated doors in corresponding fire-rated frames according to NFPA 80.

C. Job-Fitted Doors: Align and fit doors in frames with uniform clearances and bevels as indicated below; do not trim stiles and rails in excess of limits set by manufacturer or permitted for fire- rated doors. Machine doors for hardware. Seal cut surfaces after fitting and machining. 1. Clearances: Provide 1/8 inch at heads, jambs, and between pairs of doors. Provide 1/8- inch from bottom of door to top of decorative floor finish or covering. Where threshold is shown or scheduled, provide 1/4 inch from bottom of door to top of threshold. a. Comply with NFPA 80 for fire-rated doors. 2. Bevel non-fire-rated doors 1/8 inch in 2 inches (3-1/2 degrees) at lock and hinge edges.

D. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.

3.03 ADJUSTING

A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.

B. Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or do not comply with requirements. Doors may be repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.

END OF SECTION

FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08 1416 - 4 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 08 3113

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. Access Door: The terms “access door” and “access panel” are synonymous and apply to doors ranging from 6 inches square to 48 inches in size installed in walls, ceilings and floors to permit operation and maintenance of devices concealed by such construction and otherwise inaccessible.

1.03 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of access door and frame indicated. Include construction details, fire ratings, materials, individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details of access doors and frames for each type of substrate. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

C. Access Door and Frame Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types, locations, sizes, latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access doors and frames through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Fire-Rated Access Doors and Frames: Units complying with NFPA 80 that are identical to access door and frame assemblies tested for fire-test-response characteristics per the following test method and that are listed and labeled by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction: 1. NFPA 252 for vertical access doors and frames. 2. ASTM E 119 or UL 263 for horizontal access doors and frames.

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 3113 - 1 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

C. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard-size units, which may vary slightly from sizes indicated.

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Verification: Determine specific locations and sizes for access doors needed to gain access to concealed plumbing, mechanical, or other concealed work, and indicate in the schedule specified in "Submittals" Article.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 STEEL MATERIALS

A. Steel Sheet: Uncoated cold-rolled steel sheet substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.

B. Steel Finishes: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 1. Surface Preparation for Steel Sheet: Clean surfaces to comply with SSPC-SP 1, "Solvent Cleaning," to remove dirt, oil, grease, or other contaminants that could impair paint bond. Remove mill scale and rust, if present, from uncoated steel, complying with SSPC- SP 5/NACE No. 1, "White Metal Blast Cleaning," or SSPC-SP 8, "Pickling." 2. Factory-Primed Finish: Apply shop primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.

C. Drywall Beads: Edge trim formed from 0.0299-inch zinc-coated steel sheet formed to receive joint compound and in size to suit thickness of gypsum board.

2.02 ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Acudor Products, Inc. 2. Dur-Red Products. 3. J. L. Industries, Inc. 4. Karp Associates, Inc. 5. Larsen's Manufacturing Company. 6. Milcor Inc. 7. Nystrom, Inc. 8. Williams Bros. Corporation of America (The).

B. Flush Access Doors and Frames with Exposed Trim: Fabricated from steel sheet. 1. Locations: CMU and tiled wall surfaces. 2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal, set flush with exposed face flange of frame. 3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal with 1-1/4-inch- wide, surface-mounted trim. 4. Hinges: Spring-loaded, concealed-pin type.

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 3113 - 2 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

5. Lock: Cylinder.

C. Flush Access Doors with Trimless Frames: Fabricated from steel sheet. 1. Locations: Gypsum board wall and ceiling surfaces. 2. Door: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal, set flush with surrounding finish surfaces. 3. Frame: Minimum 0.060-inch- thick sheet metal with drywall bead flange to suit adjacent construction. 4. Hinges: Spring-loaded, concealed-pin type. 5. Lock: Cylinder.

2.03 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation.

B. Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, roller marks, rolled trade names, or roughness.

C. Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachment devices and fasteners of type required to secure access panels to types of supports indicated. 1. For trimless frames with drywall bead, provide edge trim for gypsum board gypsum base securely attached to perimeter of frames. 2. For trimless frames with plaster bead for full-bed plaster applications, provide zinc- coated expanded metal lath and exposed casing bead welded to perimeter of frames. 3. Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal framing. 4. Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors. Furnish adjustable metal masonry anchors.

D. Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed. 1. For cylinder lock, furnish two keys per lock and key all locks alike.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.

B. Set frames accurately in position and attach securely to supports with plane of face panels aligned with adjacent finish surfaces.

C. Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 3113 - 3 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust doors and hardware after installation for proper operation.

B. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.

END OF SECTION

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 08 3113 - 4 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 08 4410

FIRE-RATED GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.02 SECTION INCLUDES

A. Fire-rated glazed aluminum curtain wall including frame and glazing. B. Doors for fire-rated glazed aluminum curtain walls.

1.03 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM E119 Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. ASTM E2010 Standard Test Method for Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Window Assemblies. 3. ASTM E 283-04, Test Method for Determining Rate of Airflow Through Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen. 4. ASTM E 330-02, Test Method for Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference. 5. ASTM E 331-00, Test Method for Water Penetration of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls and Doors by Uniform Static Air Pressure Difference.

B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 80: Standard for Fire Doors and Fire Windows. 2. NFPA 257: Standard on Fire Test for Window and Glass Block Assemblies.

C. Uniform Building Code (UBC): 1. UBC-7-4: Methods for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies.

D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): 1. UL 9: Fire Tests of Window Assemblies. 2. UL 263: Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials

E. Standard Council of Canada: 1. ULC Standard CAN4-S101: Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. ULC Standard CAN4-S106: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.

F. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1. ANSI Z97.1 Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings – Safety Performance Specifications and Methods of Test.

G. Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC): 1. CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Categories I and II: Safety Standard for Glazing Materials.

FIRE-RATED GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08 4410 - 1 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

H. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA) 1. AAMA 501.1-05, Standard Test Method for Metal Curtain Walls for Water Penetration Using Dynamic Pressure.

1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Performance: Requirements:

1. Fire Rating: 60 minutes. 2. Certification: Windows shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E 2010, NFPA 252, UBC 7-4, UL263, CAN4-S106. 3. Testing Laboratory: Fire tests shall be conducted by an approved independent testing laboratory, similar to Underwriter’s Laboratories, Inc. 4. Air Infiltration: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E283 at a minimum frame size of 97" x 145". Air infiltration rate shall not exceed 0.00 cfm/ft of area at a static air pressure differential of 8 psf. 5. Static Water Resistance: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E331 at a minimum frame size of 97" x 145". There shall be no leakage as defined in test method at a static pressure differential of 8 psf. 6. Dynamic Water Resistance: The test specimen shall be tested in accordance with AAMA 501.1 at a minimum frame size of 97" x 145". There shall be no leakage as defined in test method at a dynamic pressure differential of 8 psf. 7. Uniform Load Deflection: A minimum static air pressure difference of 100 psf shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E330. There shall be no deflection in excess of L/175 of the span of any framing member. (This only cover the CW2-EI60 system) 8. Uniform Load Structural Test: A minimum static air pressure difference of 150 psf shall be applied in the positive and negative direction in accordance with ASTM E330. 9. Thermal Transmittance (U-value): When tested to AAMA Specification 503.1, the thermal transmittance (U-value) shall not be more than 0.48 BTU/hr/sf/˚F.

1.05 SUBMITTALS

A. Provide listed submittals in accordance with Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Submittal Procedure Section. 1. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes. 2. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layouts, profiles and product components. 3. Samples: Submit samples for finishes, colors and textures. 4. Technical Information: Submit latest edition of manufacturer’s product data providing product description, technical data and installation instructions. 5. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glazed aluminum curtain walls and for glass (glazing units) indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 6. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

FIRE-RATED GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08 4410 - 2 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Listings and Labels: Fire rated framing and glazing shall be under current follow-up services by an approved independent agency and maintain a current listing or certification. Assemblies shall be labeled in accordance with limits of listings.

B. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Ordering: Comply with manufacturer’s ordering instructions and lead-time requirements to avoid construction delays.

B. Delivery: Deliver materials to specified destination in manufacturer’s packaging undamaged, complete with installation instructions.

C. Storage and Protection: Store off ground, under cover, protected from weather, direct sunlight, construction activities and at temperature conditions recommended by manufacturer, +10°F to +110°F.

D. Handling: Protect materials and finish during handling and installation to prevent damage.

1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify actual measurements for openings by field measurements before fabrication. Show recorded measurements on shop drawings. Coordinate field measurements and fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid construction delays.

1.09 WARRANTY

A. Special Assembly Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of glazed aluminum curtain walls that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection. b. Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements. c. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering. d. Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas. e. Failure of operating components.

2. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion

B. Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replace aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. 1. Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following: a. Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244. b. Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214. c. Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.

FIRE-RATED GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08 4410 - 3 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2. Warranty Period: a. High-Performance Organic Finishes: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. b. Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finishes: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Aluflam North America; CW2-EI60 and CW-E160 fire-rated glazed aluminum curtain wall systems, as described below. 1. Fire-rated glazed aluminum curtain wall system shall be provided as a complete system, including but not necessarily limited to aluminum framing members, doors, fire-rated glazing, glazing accessories, brake metal covers, and all other components necessary to make a complete system, conforming with UL Design X633. 2. Substitutions: In accordance with requirements for Pre-Bid Substitutions in Document 00 2213 - Supplementary Instructions to Bidders.

2.02 MATERIALS – ALUMINUM FRAMING

A. Frame construction: Integral structure, pressure plate, and cap from extruded aluminum profiles. Filled internally with cement composite material.

B. Dimensions: 1. Provide glazed aluminum curtain wall system with dimensions noted below or as required to comply with performance requirements. a. Curtain Wall System CW-1: CW2-EI60. Perimeter framing face dimension: 2 inches; Depth of vertical framing: 7-5/8 inches; Depth of horizontal framing: 7-13/16 inches. b. Curtain Wall System CW-2: CW-EI60. Perimeter framing face dimension: 2 inches; Depth of vertical framing: 5-3/16 inches; Depth of horizontal framing: 5 inches.

C. Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining, nonferrous shims for aligning system components.

D. Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleeding fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

E. Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch (25.4 mm) that accommodate fabrication and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended by manufacturer.

F. Concealed Flashing: Dead-soft, 0.018-inch- (0.457-mm-) thick stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M of type recommended by manufacturer.

G. Framing Sealants: Manufacturer's standard sealants.

H. Assembly: Frame corners assembled with mechanical fasteners – in factory or in the field.

I. Sealing: Framing system shall insulate against effects of fire, smoke, and heat transfer from either side. Perimeter of the framing system to the rough opening shall be firmly packed with mineral wool

FIRE-RATED GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08 4410 - 4 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

insulation.

2.03 MATERIALS – FIRE RESISTANT GLAZING

A. Assemblies shall be glazed with 60 minute rated fire resistant glazing as follows: 1. Insulating Fire-Resistant Glazing FRG-1: 1 9/16 inches thick SGG Contraflam 60-3 fire resistant glazing material as manufactured by Vetrotech Saint-Gobain (www.vetrotechusa.com). a. Insulating unit shall be provided with ¼” airgap and ¼” low-E coated outboard glass lite. Installation conditions shall be analyzed to assure that fire-rated glazing is not exposed to temperatures outside the 10 – 110 degrees F limits. b. Individual lites shall be permanently identified with a listing mark. c. Glazing material installed in “Hazardous Locations” (subject to human impact) shall be certified to meet the applicable requirements for fire rated assemblies referenced in ANSI Z97.1 Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used In Buildings and/or CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials

2. Non-insulating Fire-Resistant Glazing FRG-2: 1 inch thick SGG Contraflam 60-N2 fire resistant glazing material as manufactured by Vetrotech Saint-Gobain (www.vetrotechusa.com).

B. Individual lites shall be permanently identified with a listing mark.

C. Glazing material installed in “Hazardous Locations” (subject to human impact) shall be certified to meet the applicable requirements for fire rated assemblies referenced in ANSI Z97.1 Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used In Buildings and/or CPSC 16 CFR 1201 Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials

D. Visible daylight transmission shall be a minimum of 81%. Glazing material shall be optically clear, colorless and free from unusual distortion.

2.04 MATERIALS – ALUMINUM DOORS

A. Manufacturer: Aluflam North America.

B. Frame Construction: Integral structure and glazing stops from extruded and thermally broken aluminum profiles. Filled internally with cement composite material.

C. Dimensions: 1. Depth of door framing: 3-3/8 inches 2. Door top rail face dimension: 3-9/16 inches 3. Door vertical stile face dimension: 3-9/16 inches 4. Door cross rail face dimension: 3-9/16 inches 5. Door bottom rail face dimension: 10 inches

D. Assembly: Frame corners assembled by means of crimped and bonded miter joints.

E. Sealing: Framing system shall insulated against effects of fire, smoke, and heat transfer from either side. Perimeter of the framing system to the rough opening shall be firmly packed with mineral wool insulation.

FIRE-RATED GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08 4410 - 5 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

F. Door Hardware: Hardware shall be supplied from door manufacturer’s standard recommended hardware groups as indicated below: 1. Operating hardware for single doors. Each to have the following: Quantity Description Manufacturer/Model Finish 1 Surface applied door closer LCN 4020 series Aluminum 3 Surface applied hinges (Qty 4 on Dr Hahn A925 series Aluminum 90 min door) 1 Narrow stile mortise lock Accurate 8600 series Stainless (front) 1 Cylinder lock Schlage compatible Satin chrome 1 Rim based exit device Dorma 9700 Stainless 1 10” bottom kickplate Aluflam Match door finish 1 Automatic floor seal Planet MF Aluminum

2. See door schedule for balance of hardware.

2.05 MATERIALS – GLAZING AND ASSEMBLY ACCESSORIES

A. Fasteners: All fasteners, setting pads, and glazing clips, shall be stainless or zinc-plated steel.

B. Glazing Accessories: The glazing material perimeter shall be separated from the perimeter framing system with approved flame retardant intumescent glazing tape. Ceramic setting blocks shall be placed between the metal setting pads and the glazing material. Setting pads and blocks provided by manufacturer.

2.06 FABRICATION

A. Curtainwall frames shall be furnished pre-assembled or K-D. Curtainwall assemblies shall be field glazed.

B. Door frames and door leaves shall be furnished pre-assembled. Door assemblies shall be field glazed.

C. Door assemblies shall be factory prepared for field mounting of hardware.

D. Fabrication Dimensions: Fabricate to approved dimensions. Contractor shall guarantee dimensions within required tolerance (+ - 1/8”). Obtain approved shop drawings prior to fabrication.

2.07 FINISHES

A. Framing shall be chemically cleaned and pretreated, then finished on all exposed areas with: 1. 3 Coat Fluoropolymer: custom color to match Architect’s sample.

B. Protect finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Slight variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable.

FIRE-RATED GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08 4410 - 6 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine area to receive curtainwall and doors. Openings shall be plumb, square and within allowable tolerances. Notify Architect of conditions that would adversely affect installation or subsequent use. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected.

3.02 INSTALLATION

A. Curtainwall, glazing and door installation shall be by a specialty contractor with appropriate experience qualifications; and in strict accordance with the approved shop drawings.

3.03 CLEANING

A. Cleaning: Remove temporary coverings and protection of adjacent work areas. Glass and frame should be cleaned using soft clean cloth, chamois leathers, sponges or soft paper. Use clean warm water with a mild detergent. Do not use detergent that contains either alkaline, acids or fluoride. Abrasive cleaning methods can damage surfaces. Clean prior to owner’s acceptance. Remove construction debris from project site and legally dispose of debris.

END OF SECTION

FIRE-RATED GLAZED ALUMINUM CURTAIN WALLS 08 4410 - 7

8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 08 7100

DOOR HARDWARE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Commercial door hardware for the following:

a. Swinging doors.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 8 Section "Hollow Metal Doors and Frames" 2. Division 8 Section "Flush Wood Doors" 3. Division 8 Section "Fire-Rated Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls"

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include installation details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified door hardware, indicating the following:

1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following:

a. System schematic. b. Point-to-point wiring diagram. c. Riser diagram. d. Elevation of each door.

2. Detail interface between electrified door hardware and access fire alarm, control, and security building control system.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available for each type of door hardware indicated.

DOOR HARDWARE 08 7110 - 1 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

1. Samples will be returned to Contractor. Units that are acceptable and remain undamaged through submittal, review, and field comparison process may, after final check of operation, be incorporated into the Work, within limitations of keying requirements.

D. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams. Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.

1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's "Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule." 2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening.

a. Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3.

3. Content: Include the following information:

a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door hardware item. b. Manufacturer of each item. c. Fastenings and other pertinent information. d. Location of each door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on floor plans and in door and frame schedule. e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in schedule. f. Mounting locations for door hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. h. Description of each electrified door hardware function, including location, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems.

1) Sequence of Operation: Include description of component functions that occur in the following situations: authorized person wants to enter; authorized person wants to exit; unauthorized person wants to enter; unauthorized person wants to exit.

4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of the Door Hardware Schedule. 5. Submittal Sequence: Submit initial draft of final schedule along with essential Product Data to facilitate the fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction schedule. Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule after Samples, Product Data, coordination with Shop Drawings of other work, delivery schedules, and similar information has been completed and accepted.

E. Keying Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing Owner's final keying instructions for locks. Include schematic keying diagram and index each key set to unique door designations.

DOOR HARDWARE 08 7110 - 2 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

F. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of electrified door hardware certifying that products furnished comply with requirements.

1. Certify that door hardware approved for use on types and sizes of labeled fire doors complies with listed fire door assemblies.

G. Qualification Data: For firms and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article.

1. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses of architects and owners, and other information specified.

H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, indicating current products comply with requirements.

I. Maintenance Data: For each type of door hardware to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 1.

J. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

B. Supplier Qualifications: Door hardware supplier with warehousing facilities in Project's vicinity and who is or employs a qualified Architectural Hardware Consultant, available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about door hardware and keying.

1. Electrified Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: An experienced door hardware supplier who has completed projects with electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance, and who is acceptable to manufacturer of primary materials.

a. Engineering Responsibility: Prepare data for electrified door hardware, including Shop Drawings, based on testing and engineering analysis of manufacturer's standard units in assemblies similar to those indicated for this Project.

2. Scheduling Responsibility: Preparation of door hardware and keying schedules.

C. Architectural Hardware Consultant Qualifications: A person who is currently certified by the Door and Hardware Institute as an Architectural Hardware Consultant and who is experienced in providing consulting services for door hardware installations that are comparable in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project.

1. Electrified Door Hardware Qualifications: Experienced in providing consulting services for electrified door hardware installations.

DOOR HARDWARE 08 7110 - 3 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

D. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware from a single manufacturer, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Provide electrified door hardware from same manufacturer as mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated. Manufacturers that are listed to perform electrical modifications, by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, are acceptable.

E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following:

1. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities (ADAAG)," ANSI A117.1, FED-STD-795, "Uniform Federal Accessibility Standards," as follows:

a. Handles, Pulls, Latches, Locks, and other Operating Devices: Shape that is easy to grasp with one hand and does not require tight grasping, tight pinching, or twisting of the wrist. b. Door Closers: Comply with the following maximum opening-force requirements indicated:

1) Interior Hinged Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied perpendicular to door. 2) Sliding or Folding Doors: 5 lbf (22.2 N) applied parallel to door at latch. 3) Fire Doors: Minimum opening force allowable by authorities having jurisdiction.

c. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high, Not more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) high for exterior sliding doors. Bevel raised thresholds with a slope of not more than 1:2.

2. NFPA 101: Comply with the following for means of egress doors:

a. Latches, Locks, and Exit Devices: Not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to release the latch. Locks shall not require the use of a key, tool, or special knowledge for operation. b. Delayed-Egress Locks: Lock releases within 15 seconds after applying a force not more than 15 lbf (67 N) for not more than 3 seconds. c. Door Closers: Not more than 30 lbf (133 N) to set door in motion and not more than 15 lbf (67 N) to open door to minimum required width. d. Thresholds: Not more than 1/2 inch (13 mm) high.

3. Electrified Door Hardware: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: Provide door hardware for assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to NFPA 252.

1. Test Pressure: Test at atmospheric pressure.

DOOR HARDWARE 08 7110 - 4 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

G. Keying Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." Incorporate keying conference decisions into final keying schedule after reviewing door hardware keying system including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Function of building, flow of traffic, purpose of each area, degree of security required, and plans for future expansion. 2. Preliminary key system schematic diagram. 3. Requirements for key control system. 4. Address for delivery of keys.

H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings."

I. All Electric Door Hardware shall be furnished and installed by the General Contractor. All Electric Door Hardware shall be wired by the Electrical Contractor. Both the Electrical & General Contractor shall meet and coordinate all work before proceeding.

J. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Division 1 Section "Project Meetings." Review methods and procedures related to electrified door hardware including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in and other preparatory work performed by other trades. 2. Review sequence of operation for each type of electrified door hardware. 3. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 4. Review required testing, inspecting, and certifying procedures.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up for door hardware delivered to Project site.

B. Tag each item with Door Number related to the final Approved Door Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or package.

C. Deliver keys to manufacturer of key control system, or Owner as Directed.

D. Deliver keys to Owner by registered mail or overnight package service.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of recessed pivots and closers with floor construction. Cast anchoring inserts into concrete. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

B. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames, and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing door hardware. Check Shop Drawings of

DOOR HARDWARE 08 7110 - 5 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

other work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing door hardware to comply with indicated requirements.

C. Electrical System Roughing-in: Coordinate layout and installation of electrified door hardware with connections to power supplies, fire alarm system and detection devices, access control system, security system, and building control system.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents.

B. Special Warranty: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace components of door hardware that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage. 2. Faulty operation of operators and door hardware. 3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.

C. Warranty Period for Locksets: Seven, (7) years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Warranty Period for Manual Closers: Ten, (10) years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.

E. Warranty Period for Exit Devices: Five, (5) years from date of Substantial Completion, unless otherwise indicated.

1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE

A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal and replacement of door hardware.

B. Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full maintenance by skilled employees of door hardware Installer. Include quarterly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper door hardware operation. Provide parts and supplies as used in the manufacture and installation of original products.

C. Engage a factory authorized service representative to train Owner’s maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

DOOR HARDWARE 08 7110 - 6 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE

A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in this Section, door hardware sets indicated in door and frame schedule, and the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3.

1. Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and named manufacturer's products. Retain subparagraph below for electrified door hardware. 2. Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and interface with other building control systems indicated.

B. Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware designations, as follows:

1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing minimum requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware Schedule. 2. References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and requirements for description, quality, and function.

2.2 HINGES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Butt Hinges: a. Stanley Commercial Hardware

B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Hinges ANSI/BHMA Standard A156.1 Grade 1

C. Template Requirements: Except for hinges and pivots to be installed entirely (both leaves) into wood doors and frames, provide only template-produced units.

D. Concealed bearings are made from engineered polymer material with PTFE and Aramid fiber; bearing is maintenance free, no oil, no grease.

E. Butt hinges equipped with easily seated, non-rising pin. Hole in bottom of pin enables quick pin removal for ease of installation.

F. Hinge Base Metal: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the following: 1. Exterior Butt Hinges: Stainless Steel or Brass or Bronze 2. Interior Butt Hinges: Steel or Brass or Bronze

G. Hinge Options: Comply with the following where indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule or on Drawings:

1. Hospital Tips: Slope ends of hinge barrel. 2. Maximum Security Pin: Fix pin in hinge barrel after it is inserted.

DOOR HARDWARE 08 7110 - 7 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

3. Nonremovable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while door is closed; for the following applications:

a. Outswinging exterior doors. b. Outswinging corridor doors with locks.

H. Fasteners: Comply with the following:

1. Machine Screws: For metal doors and frames. Install into drilled and tapped holes. 2. Wood Screws: For wood doors and frames. 3. Threaded-to-the-Head Wood Screws: For fire-rated wood doors. 4. Screws: Phillips flat-head screws; machine screws drilled and tapped holes for metal doors, wood screws for wood doors and frames. Finish screw heads to match surface of hinges.

2.3 LOCKS AND LATCHES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Mechanical Locks and Latches: a. Best Lock Corporation

B. Standards: Comply with the following:

1. Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2.

C. Bored Locks: ANSI A156.2, BHMA Series 4000, Grade 1, and is UL Listed.

D. Certified Products: Provide door hardware listed in the following BHMA directories:

1. Mechanical Locks and Latches: BHMA's "Directory of Certified Locks & Latches."

E. Lock Trim: Comply with the following:

1. Lever: Cylindrical Locks & Latches, Zinc material with a minimum wall thickness of .060 2. Dummy Trim: Match lever lock trim and escutcheons.

F. Lock Functions: Function numbers and descriptions indicated in the Door Hardware Schedule comply with the following:

1. Bored Locks: BHMA A156.2.

G. Lock Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled fire door requirements, and as follows:

1. Bored Locks: Minimum 9/16-inch latch bolt throw. 2. Deadbolts: Minimum 1-inch bolt throw.

H. Backset: 2-3/4 inches (70 mm), unless otherwise indicated.

DOOR HARDWARE 08 7110 - 8 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

I. Cylindrical Locks & Latches to have solid shank with no opening for access to keyed lever keeper.

2.4 DOOR BOLTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Flush Bolts: a. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc. b. Burns Manufacturing Company, Inc.

B. Standards: Comply with the following: 1. Automatic and Self-Latching Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.3. 2. Manual Flush Bolts: BHMA A156.16.

C. Flush Bolts: BHMA Grade 1, designed for mortising into door edge.

D. Bolt Throw: Comply with testing requirements for length of bolts to comply with labeled fire door requirements, and as follows:

1. Mortise Flush Bolts: Minimum 3/4-inch (19-mm) throw.

2.5 EXIT DEVICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Precision Hardware, Inc.

B. Standard: BHMA A156.3.

1. BHMA Grade: Grade 1

C. Certified Products: Provide exit devices listed in BHMA's "Directory of Certified Exit Devices."

D. Panic Exit Devices: Listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305.

E. Fire Exit Devices: Complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire and panic protection, based on testing according to UL 305 and NFPA 252.

F. Warranty: Exit device to have published Five (5) Year Warranty.

G. Exit device shall be “touch pad” type with a touch pad that shall extend a minimum of one half (1/2) of the door width.

H. Exit device shall have a one-quarter (1/4) gap between the face of the door and the touch bar channel eliminating the need for shims or cutting away the glass molding.

DOOR HARDWARE 08 7110 - 9 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

I. Exit device lock stile chassis shall be investment cast steel. Stamped steel units will not be accepted. All device latch bolts shall be stainless steel and shall be deadlocking type.

J. Exit device strikes shall be adjustable type investment cast stainless steel.

K. Exit device shall include sound reduction dampening for both depression and extension of the touch pad.

L. Exit device end cap shall be all metal and secured with a bracket that interlocks both at the touch bar channel base and hinge side filler to prevent end cap “peel-back”.

M. All exposed surfaces of the exit device housing shall be no less than 14 gauge brass or bronze; or no less than 16 gauge stainless steel. Aluminum housing type exit devices are not acceptable.

N. Dummy Push Bar: Nonfunctioning push bar matching functional push bar.

1. Operation: Rigid

O. Outside Trim: Lever, Lever with cylinder, Pull, Pull with cylinder, material and finish to match locksets, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Match design for locksets and latchsets, unless otherwise indicated.

2.6 CYLINDERS AND KEYING

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cylinders: a. Russwin Cylinders to Match Existing

B. Standards: Comply with the following:

1. Cylinders: BHMA A156.5.

C. Cylinder Grade: BHMA Grade 1, Cylinders: Manufacturer's standard tumbler type, constructed from brass or bronze, stainless steel, or nickel silver, and complying with the following:

1. Number of Pins: Seven. 2. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and straight- or clover-type cam. 3. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and raised trim ring. 4. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks.

D. Keying System: Unless otherwise indicated, provide a factory-registered keying system complying with the following requirements: 1. Existing System: Master key or grand master key locks to Owner's existing system.

2. Quantity: In addition to one extra blank key for each lock, provide the following:

a. Cylinder Change Keys: Three.

DOOR HARDWARE 08 7110 - 10 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

b. Master Keys: Five. c. Grand Master Keys: Five. d. Great-Grand Master Keys: Five.

2.7 STRIKES

A. Standards: Comply with the following:

1. Strikes for Bored Locks and Latches: BHMA A156.2.

B. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard strike with strike box for each latch or lock bolt, with curved lip extended to protect frame, finished to match door hardware set, unless otherwise indicated, and as follows:

1. Flat-Lip Strikes: For locks with three-piece antifriction latch bolts, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Extra-Long-Lip Strikes: For locks used on frames with applied wood casing trim. 3. Aluminum-Frame Strike Box: Provide manufacturer's special strike box fabricated for aluminum framing.

2.8 ACCESSORIES FOR PAIRS OF DOORS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Astragals: a. Stanley Commercial Hardware b. Architectural Builders Hardware, Inc.

B. Standards: Comply with the following:

1. Coordinators: BHMA A156.3. 2. Removable Mullions: BHMA A156.3.

2.9 CLOSERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Surface-Mounted Closers: a. Stanley Commercial Hardware

B. Standards: Comply with the following:

1. Closers: BHMA A156.4.

C. Surface Closers: BHMA Grade 1

DOOR HARDWARE 08 7110 - 11 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

D. Certified Products: Provide door closers listed in BHMA's "Directory of Certified Door Closers."

E. Size of Units: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for size of door closers depending on size of door, exposure to weather, and anticipated frequency of use. Provide factory-sized closers, adjustable to meet field conditions and requirements for opening force.

2.10 PROTECTIVE TRIM UNITS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Metal Protective Trim Units: a. Burns Manufacturing Company, Inc. b. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc.

B. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.6.

C. Materials: Fabricate protection plates from the following: 1. Stainless Steel: 0.050 inch (1.3 mm) thick; beveled 4 sides.

D. Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard exposed fasteners for door trim units consisting of either machine or self-tapping screws.

E. Furnish protection plates sized 2” less than door width on push side and 1” less than door width on pull side, by height specified in Door Hardware Schedule.

2.11 STOPS AND HOLDERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Architectural Builders Hardware Mfg., Inc. 2. Triangle Brass Manufacturing Company, Inc.

B. Standards: Comply with the following:

1. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA A156.16. 2. Door Silencers: BHMA A156.16.

C. Stops and Bumpers: BHMA Grade 1

D. Silencers for Metal Door Frames: BHMA Grade 1; neoprene or rubber, minimum diameter 1/2 inch (13 mm); fabricated for drilled-in application to frame.

2.12 DOOR GASKETING

DOOR HARDWARE 08 7110 - 12 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Door Gasketing: a. Reese Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. National Guard Products, Inc.

2. Door Bottoms: a. Reese Manufacturing Co., Inc. b. National Guard Products

B. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.22.

C. General: Provide continuous weather-strip gasketing on exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where indicated or scheduled. Provide noncorrosive fasteners for exterior applications and elsewhere as indicated.

1. Perimeter Gasketing: Apply to head and jamb, forming seal between door and frame. 2. Meeting Stile Gasketing: Fasten to meeting stiles, forming seal when doors are closed. 3. Door Bottoms: Apply to bottom of door, forming seal with threshold when door is closed.

D. Air Leakage: Not to exceed 0.50 cfm per foot (0.000774 cu. m/s per m) of crack length for gasketing other than for smoke control, as tested according to ASTM E 283.

E. Smoke-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for smoke- control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.

1. Provide smoke-labeled gasketing on 20-minute-rated doors and on smoke-labeled doors.

F. Fire-Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 10B or NFPA 252.

G. Sound-Rated Gasketing: Assemblies that are listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency, for sound ratings indicated, based on testing according to ASTM E 1408.

H. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.

I. Gasketing Materials: Comply with ASTM D 2000 and AAMA 701/702.

2.13 THRESHOLDS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Reese Manufacturing Co., Inc. 2. National Guard Products, Inc.

B. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.21.

DOOR HARDWARE 08 7110 - 13 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.14 FABRICATION

A. Manufacturer's Nameplate: Do not provide manufacturers' products that have manufacturer's name or trade name displayed in a visible location (omit removable nameplates) except in conjunction with required fire-rated labels and as otherwise approved by Architect.

1. Manufacturer's identification will be permitted on rim of lock cylinders only.

B. Base Metals: Produce door hardware units of base metal, fabricated by forming method indicated, using manufacturer's standard metal alloy, composition, temper, and hardness. Furnish metals of a quality equal to or greater than that of specified door hardware units and BHMA A156.18 for finishes. Do not furnish manufacturer's standard materials or forming methods if different from specified standard.

C. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws according to commercially recognized industry standards for application intended. Provide Phillips flat-head screws with finished heads to match surface of door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Concealed Fasteners: For door hardware units that are exposed when door is closed, except for units already specified with concealed fasteners. Do not use through bolts for installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed unless it is the only means of securely attaching the door hardware. Where through bolts are used on hollow door and frame construction, provide sleeves for each through bolt. 2. Steel Machine or Wood Screws: For the following fire-rated applications:

a. Mortise hinges to doors. b. Strike plates to frames. c. Closers to doors and frames.

3. Steel Through Bolts: For the following fire-rated applications, unless door blocking is provided:

a. Surface hinges to doors. b. Closers to doors and frames. c. Surface-mounted exit devices.

4. Spacers or Sex Bolts: For through bolting of hollow metal doors. 5. Fasteners for Wood Doors: Comply with requirements of DHI WDHS.2, "Recommended Fasteners for Wood Doors."

2.15 FINISHES

A. Standard: Comply with BHMA A156.18.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations

DOOR HARDWARE 08 7110 - 14 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

D. BHMA Designations: Comply with base material and finish requirements indicated by the following:

1. BHMA 600: Primed for painting, over steel base metal. 2. BHMA 626: Satin chromium plated over nickel, over brass or bronze base metal. 3. BHMA 628: Satin aluminum, clear anodized, over aluminum base metal. 4. BHMA 630: Satin stainless steel, over stainless steel base metal. 5. BHMA 652: Satin chromium plated over nickel, over steel base metal. 6. BHMA 689: Aluminum painted, over any base metal.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine doors and frames, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor construction, and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine roughing-in for electrical power systems to verify actual locations of wiring connections before electrified door hardware installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Steel Doors and Frames: Comply with DHI A115 series.

1. Surface-Applied Door Hardware: Drill and tap doors and frames according to SDI 107.

B. Wood Doors: Comply with DHI A115-W series.

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations:

1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 2. Custom Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for Builders' Hardware for Custom Steel Doors and Frames." 3. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."

DOOR HARDWARE 08 7110 - 15 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Install each door hardware item to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on substrates involved.

1. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce attachment substrates as necessary for proper installation and operation. 2. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors according to industry standards.

C. Key Control System: Place keys on markers and hooks in key control system cabinet, as determined by final keying schedule. Supply key cabinet with 25% expansion. Factory install keys in cabinet or in field with owner’s representative. Key cabinet to be supplied with a “Complete System” equal to the Telkee System.

D. Boxed Power Supplies: Locate power supplies as indicated or, if not indicated, above accessible ceilings, in equipment room. Verify location with Architect.

1. Configuration: Provide one power supply for each door opening. 2. Configuration: Provide the least number of power supplies required to adequately serve doors with electrified door hardware.

E. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant: Owner or Architect will engage a qualified independent Architectural Hardware Consultant to perform inspections and to prepare inspection reports.

1. Independent Architectural Hardware Consultant will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether door hardware is properly installed and adjusted.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced accessibility requirements.

1. Spring Hinges: Adjust to achieve positive latching when door is allowed to close freely from an open position of 30 degrees. 2. Electric Strikes: Adjust horizontal and vertical alignment of keeper to properly engage lock bolt.

DOOR HARDWARE 08 7110 - 16 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

3. Door Closers: Adjust sweep period so that, from an open position of 70 degrees, the door will take at least 3 seconds to move to a point 3 inches (75 mm) from the latch, measured to the leading edge of the door.

B. Six-Month Adjustment: Approximately six months after date of Substantial Completion, Installer shall perform the following:

1. Examine and readjust each item of door hardware as necessary to ensure function of doors, door hardware, and electrified door hardware. 2. Consult with and instruct Owner's personnel on recommended maintenance procedures. 3. Replace door hardware items that have deteriorated or failed due to faulty design, materials, or installation of door hardware units.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.

B. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper function and finish.

C. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain door hardware and door hardware finishes.

3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SCHEDULE

Hardware Set #: 0001 - EXISTING TO REMAIN 002

Opening to Have:

Qty Description Finish Mfg 1 INSTALL NEW VISION LITE KIT 1 REUSE EXISTING HARDWARE (ALL)

Hardware Set #: 0002 - SGL DRS WD & HMF 101 102

Opening to Have:

Qty Description Finish Mfg 3 HINGE CB168 4.5 x 4.5 652 STANLEY 1 PRIVACY LOCKSET 93K0-L-14C-S3 626 BEST 1 DOOR CLOSER D-4551 x REG 689 STANLEY 1 KICK PLATE 10" x 2" LDW .050 x B4E x CTSK 630 TRIMCO 1 MOP PLATE 6" x 1" LDW .050 x B4E x CTSK 630 TRIMCO 1 WALL STOP 1270WV 630 TRIMCO 3 SILENCERS 1229A GRAY TRIMCO

DOOR HARDWARE 08 7110 - 17 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

Hardware Set #: 0003 - PRS DRS HMD & HMF EXTERIOR 107

Opening to Have:

Qty Description Finish Mfg 6 HINGE CB199 4.5 x 4.5 x NRP 630 STANLEY 2 FLUSH BOLT 3917 1" x 6-3/4" x 12" 626 TRIMCO 2 MORTISE CYLINDER 1020 x 114 x A02 626 CORBIN 1 ASTRAGAL A548S x SQUARE EDGE x FULL HEIGHT 630 ABH 1 POWER SUPPLY ELR-151 600 PRECISION 1 MORTISE EXIT DEVICE ELR-2303CD x 4903D x S983 630 PRECISION 1 DOOR CLOSER D-4550 x HCS x SRI 689 STANLEY 2 KICK PLATE 10" x 1" LDW .050 x B4E x CTSK 630 TRIMCO 1 REMOTE DOOR CONTROL 15-2-3 x SPDT x MO x MA 714 SDC 1 TEAR DROP SEAL 797B x HEAD & JAMBS BLK REESE 1 TEAR DROP SEAL 797B x ASTRAGAL x FULL HEIGHT BLK REESE 1 RAIN DRIP R201A x FULL WIDTH + 4" 628 REESE 1 THRESHOLD S483APR x SRS x FHSL x FULL WIDTH 628 REESE 2 DOOR SWEEP 772A x FULL WIDTH 628 REESE 1 POWER TRANSFER PT-3V x 18" SDC

Hardware Set #: 0004 - SGL ALUM DRS & ALUM FR EXTERIOR 110

Opening to Have:

Qty Description Finish Mfg 1 RIM / MORTISE CYLINDER PER APPROVED HARDWARE 626 CORBIN 1 ALL HARDWARE BY ALUFLAM-USA

END OF SECTION

DOOR HARDWARE 08 7110 - 18 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 08 8000

GLAZING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes glazing for the following products and applications, including those specified in other Sections where glazing requirements are specified by reference to this Section:

1. Doors. 2. Interior borrowed lites. 3. Exterior windows.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 08 Section "Flush Wood Doors." 2. Division 08 Section "Fire-Rated Glazed Aluminum Curtain Walls", for fire-rated glass provided as part of the Fire-Rated Glazed Aluminum Curtain Wall system.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referenced glazing publications.

B. Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.

C. Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loads (where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defective manufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight; deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.

B. Delegated Design: Design glass, including comprehensive engineering analysis according to ASTM E 1300 by a qualified professional engineer, using the following design criteria:

GLAZING 08 8000 - 1 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

1. Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings. 2. Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass to resist design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load. 3. Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass deflection at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch (25 mm), whichever is less. 4. Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within individual glass lites.

C. Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass framing members and glazing components.

1. Temperature Change: 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material surfaces.

1.5 PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING

A. Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glazing material type, tape sealant, gasket, glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazing sealants.

1. Testing will not be required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products and glazing materials matching those submitted. 2. Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, and glazing channel substrates. 3. Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, sealant backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials. 4. Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work. 5. For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective measures including the use of specially formulated primers.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each glass product and glazing material indicated.

B. Glass Samples: For each glass product; 12 inches (300 mm) square.

C. Glazing Accessory Samples: For gaskets, sealants and colored spacers, in 12-inch (300-mm) lengths. Install sealant Samples between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system.

D. Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

E. Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.

GLAZING 08 8000 - 2 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

F. Qualification Data: For installer.

G. Product Certificates: For glass and glazing products, from manufacturer.

H. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for tinted glass, coated glass, insulating glass, glazing sealants and glazing gaskets.

1. For glazing sealants, provide test reports based on testing current sealant formulations within previous 36-month period.

I. Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.

J. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certified under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.

B. Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to the NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.

C. Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain tinted float glass, coated float glass, laminated glass and insulating glass from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.

D. Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each product and installation method.

E. Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers and organizations below, unless more stringent requirements are indicated. Refer to these publications for glazing terms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

1. GANA Publications: GANA's "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and GANA's "Glazing Manual." 2. IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

F. Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing labeling is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certification label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shall indicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glass complies.

G. Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least one component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.

H. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.

1. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel, equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays. 2. Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.

GLAZING 08 8000 - 3 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass and glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.

1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channel substrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

1. Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C).

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer's standard form in which coated-glass manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and other indications of deterioration in coating.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

C. Manufacturer's Special Warranty on Insulating Glass: Manufacturer's standard form in which insulating-glass manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glass units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failure of hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning insulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction of vision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.

1. Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass lites in thicknesses as needed to comply with requirements indicated.

1. Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: Not less than 6.0 mm.

B. Strength: Where float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, Kind HS heat-treated float glass, or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where heat-strengthened glass is indicated, provide Kind HS heat- treated float glass or Kind FT heat-treated float glass as needed to comply with "Performance

GLAZING 08 8000 - 4 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered or safety glass is indicated, provide Kind FT heat-treated float glass unless noted otherwise.

C. Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, as indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:

1. For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites 6.0 mm thick. 2. For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and for each lite. 3. U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F (W/sq. m x K). 4. Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program. 5. Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.

2.2 GLASS PRODUCTS

A. Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Quality-Q3, Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated.

B. Heat-Treated Float Glass: ASTM C 1048; Type I; Quality-Q3; Class I (clear) unless otherwise indicated; of kind and condition indicated.

1. Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated. 2. For uncoated glass, comply with requirements for Condition A. 3. For coated vision glass, comply with requirements for Condition C (other coated glass).

D. Insulating-Glass Units, General: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by a dehydrated interspace, and complying with ASTM E 774 for Class CBA units and with requirements specified in this Article and in Part 2 "Insulating-Glass Units" Article.

1. Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) glass lites for all units. 2. Overall Unit Thickness and Thickness of Each Lite: Dimensions indicated for insulating- glass units are nominal and the overall thicknesses of units are measured perpendicularly from outer surfaces of glass lites at unit's edge. 3. Sealing System: Dual seal, with primary and secondary sealants as follows:

a. Manufacturer's standard sealants.

4. Spacer Specifications: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction complying with the following requirements:

a. Spacer Material: Aluminum with mill or clear anodic finish. b. Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or blend of both.

GLAZING 08 8000 - 5 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.3 GLAZING GASKETS

A. Dense Compression Gaskets: Molded or extruded gaskets of profile and hardness required to maintain watertight seal, made from one of the following:

1. Neoprene complying with ASTM C 864. 2. EPDM complying with ASTM C 864. 3. Silicone complying with ASTM C 1115. 4. Thermoplastic polyolefin rubber complying with ASTM C 1115.

2.4 GLAZING SEALANTS

A. General:

1. Compatibility: Provide glazing sealants that are compatible with one another and with other materials they will contact, including glass products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and field experience. 2. Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation. 3. VOC Content: For sealants used inside of the weatherproofing system, not more than 250 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D. 4. Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.

2.5 GLAZING TAPES

A. Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape; nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod as recommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying with ASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

1. AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated. 2. AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure. 3. AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.

B. Expanded Cellular Glazing Tapes: Closed-cell, PVC foam tapes; factory coated with adhesive on both surfaces; and complying with AAMA 800 for the following types:

1. AAMA 810.1, Type 1, for glazing applications in which tape acts as the primary sealant. 2. AAMA 810.1, Type 2, for glazing applications in which tape is used in combination with a full bead of liquid sealant.

GLAZING 08 8000 - 6 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.6 MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS

A. General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with a proven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.

B. Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.

C. Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.

D. Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer to maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.

E. Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).

F. Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density to control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

G. Perimeter Insulation for Fire-Resistive Glazing: Product that is approved by testing agency that listed and labeled fire-resistant glazing product with which it is used for application and fire- protection rating indicated.

2.7 FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS

A. Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and face clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of product manufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

B. Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.

2.8 MONOLITHIC-GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type MG-1: Clear fully tempered float glass.

1. Thickness: 6.0 mm. 2. Provide safety glazing labeling.

2.9 INSULATING-GLASS TYPES

A. Glass Type IG-1: Low-e-coated, clear insulating glass.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. AGC Flat Glass North America (formerly AFG).

GLAZING 08 8000 - 7 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

b. Guardian Industries Corp. c. J. E. Berkowitz. d. Pilkington Building Products North America. e. PPG Industries. f. Viracon.

2. Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch (25 mm). 3. Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6.0 mm. 4. Outdoor Lite: Clear fully tempered float glass. 5. Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface. 6. Interspace Content: Argon. 7. Indoor Lite: Clear fully tempered float glass. 8. Visible Light Transmittance: 70 percent minimum. 9. Winter Nighttime U-Factor: 0.29 maximum. 10. Summer Daytime U-Factor: 0.27 maximum. 11. Shading Coefficient: 44 percent maximum. 12. Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: 0.38 maximum. 13. Provide safety glazing labeling.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:

1. Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at corners. 2. Presence and functioning of weep systems. 3. Minimum required face and edge clearances. 4. Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. Remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.

B. Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so that exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that will leave visible marks in the completed work.

GLAZING 08 8000 - 8 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

3.3 GLAZING, GENERAL

A. Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazing materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazing publications.

B. Adjust glazing channel dimensions as required by Project conditions during installation to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and face clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.

C. Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from Project site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass is glass with edge damage or other imperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass and impair performance and appearance.

D. Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstruction testing.

E. Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications, unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitable for heel bead.

F. Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.

G. Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches (1270 mm).

1. Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapes are used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply with system performance requirements. 2. Provide 1/8-inch (3-mm) minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

H. Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazing channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referenced glazing publications.

I. Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.

J. Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.

K. Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket on opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected to movement.

L. Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasket manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

GLAZING 08 8000 - 9 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

3.4 TAPE GLAZING

A. Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with or protrude slightly above sightline of stops.

B. Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make them fit opening.

C. Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first and then to jambs. Cover horizontal framing joints by applying tapes to jambs and then to heads and sills.

D. Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints in tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.

E. Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.

F. Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.

G. Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against tape by inserting dense compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasket applications at corners and work toward centers of openings.

H. Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.

3.5 GASKET GLAZING (DRY)

A. Cut compression gaskets to lengths recommended by gasket manufacturer to fit openings exactly, with allowance for stretch during installation.

B. Insert soft compression gasket between glass and frame or fixed stop so it is securely in place with joints miter cut and bonded together at corners.

C. Installation with Pressure-Glazing Stops: Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks and press firmly against soft compression gasket. Install dense compression gaskets and pressure- glazing stops, applying pressure uniformly to compression gaskets. Compress gaskets to produce a weathertight seal without developing bending stresses in glass. Seal gasket joints with sealant recommended by gasket manufacturer.

D. Install gaskets so they protrude past face of glazing stops.

3.6 SEALANT GLAZING (WET)

A. Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites and glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channel and blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and in position to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.

B. Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealant to glass and channel surfaces.

GLAZING 08 8000 - 10 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

C. Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.

3.7 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Protect exterior glass from damage immediately after installation by attaching crossed streamers to framing held away from glass. Do not apply markers to glass surface. Remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.

B. Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

C. Examine glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervals during construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains; remove as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

D. Remove and replace glass that is broken, chipped, cracked, or abraded or that is damaged from natural causes, accidents, and vandalism, during construction period.

E. Wash glass on both exposed surfaces in each area of Project not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections that establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

GLAZING 08 8000 - 11

8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 09 2116

GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies for the following:

1. Shaft-wall enclosures.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 07 Section "Fire-Resistive Joint Systems" for head-of-wall assemblies that incorporate gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each gypsum board shaft-wall assembly indicated.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined according to ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: Provide materials and construction identical to those of assemblies tested according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by a testing and inspecting agency.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, and bundles bearing brand name and identification of manufacturer or supplier.

B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, direct sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.

C. Stack panels flat on leveled supports off floor or slab to prevent sagging.

GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 09 2116 - 1 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or with gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install interior products until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. BPB America Inc. 2. CertainTeed Corp. 3. G-P Gypsum. 4. Lafarge North America Inc. 5. National Gypsum Company. 6. USG Corporation.

2.2 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES, GENERAL

A. Provide materials and components complying with requirements of fire-resistance-rated assemblies indicated.

1. Provide panels in maximum lengths available to eliminate or minimize end-to-end butt joints. 2. Provide auxiliary materials complying with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations.

2.3 PANEL PRODUCTS

A. Gypsum Liner Panels: Comply with ASTM C 442/C 442M.

1. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type X: Manufacturer's proprietary liner panels with moisture- and mold-resistant core and surfaces; comply with ASTM D 3273.

GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 09 2116 - 2 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

a. Core: 1 inch (25.4 mm) thick. b. Long Edges: Double bevel.

B. Gypsum Board: As specified in Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board."

2.4 NON-LOAD-BEARING STEEL FRAMING

A. Framing Members: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.

B. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60 (Z180), hot-dip galvanized, unless otherwise indicated.

2.5 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced product standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

B. Trim Accessories: Cornerbead, edge trim, and control joints of material and shapes specified in Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" that comply with gypsum board shaft-wall assembly manufacturer's written recommendations for application indicated.

C. Gypsum Board Joint-Treatment Materials: As specified in Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board."

D. Laminating Adhesive: Adhesive or joint compound recommended by manufacturer for directly adhering gypsum face-layer panels to backing-layer panels in multilayer construction.

E. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated.

1. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

F. Track Fasteners: Power-driven fasteners of size and material required to withstand loading conditions imposed on shaft-wall assemblies without exceeding allowable design stress of track, fasteners, or structural substrates in which anchors are embedded.

1. Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualified testing agency.

G. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing), produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool.

1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly.

GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 09 2116 - 3 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

H. Acoustical Sealant: As specified in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants."

2.6 GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT-WALL ASSEMBLIES

A. Fire-Resistance Rating: As indicated.

B. STC Rating: As indicated.

C. Studs: Manufacturer's standard profile for repetitive members, corner and end members, and fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

1. Depth: As indicated. 2. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm).

D. Runner Tracks: Manufacturer's standard J-profile track with long-leg length as standard with manufacturer, but at least 2 inches (51 mm) long and in depth matching studs.

1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0329 inch (0.84 mm).

E. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Dietrich Metal Framing; The System by Metal-Lite, Inc. b. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak attached to studs with Fire Trak Slip Clip.

F. Room-Side Finish: As indicated.

G. Shaft-Side Finish: As indicated by fire-resistance-rated assembly design designation.

H. Insulation: Sound attenuation blankets.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies attach or abut, with Installer present, including hollow-metal frames, elevator hoistway door frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing. Examine for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 09 2116 - 4 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies to comply with requirements of fire- resistance-rated assemblies indicated, manufacturer's written installation instructions, and the following:

1. ASTM C 754 for installing steel framing except comply with framing spacing indicated. 2. Division 09 Section "Gypsum Board" for applying and finishing panels.

B. Do not bridge architectural or building expansion joints with shaft-wall assemblies; frame both sides of expansion joints with furring and other support.

C. Install supplementary framing in gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies around openings and as required for blocking, bracing, and support of gravity and pullout loads of fixtures, equipment, services, heavy trim, furnishings, and similar items that cannot be supported directly by shaft- wall assembly framing.

D. At penetrations in shaft wall, maintain fire-resistance rating of shaft-wall assembly by installing supplementary steel framing around perimeter of penetration and fire protection behind boxes containing wiring devices, elevator call buttons, elevator floor indicators, and similar items.

E. Isolate perimeter of gypsum panels from building structure to prevent cracking of panels, while maintaining continuity of fire-rated construction.

F. Firestop Tracks: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated.

G. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect, while maintaining fire-resistance rating of gypsum board shaft-wall assemblies.

H. Seal gypsum board shaft walls with acoustical sealant at perimeter of each assembly where it abuts other work and at joints and penetrations within each assembly. Install acoustical sealant to withstand dislocation by air-pressure differential between shaft and external spaces; maintain an airtight and smoke-tight seal; and comply with ASTM C 919 requirements or with manufacturer's written instructions, whichever are more stringent.

I. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch (3mm) from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

B. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, or mold damaged.

1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, and irregular shape.

GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 09 2116 - 5 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

END OF SECTION

GYPSUM BOARD SHAFT WALL ASSEMBLIES 09 2116 - 6 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 09 2216

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies. 2. Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Evaluation Reports: For dimpled steel studs and runners and firestop tracks, from ICC-ES.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporate non- load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.02 FRAMING SYSTEMS

A. Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated. 1. Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise indicated. 2. Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.

B. Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645. Use either steel studs and runners or dimpled steel studs and runners.

1. Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch.

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 1 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

2. Dimpled Steel Studs and Runners: a. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.015 inch. b. Depth: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide the following: 1. Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. a. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1) Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track. 2) Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD or VertiTrack VTD Series. 3) Telling Industries; Vertical Slip Track or Vertical Slip Track II.

D. Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movement of structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness not less than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System attached to studs with Fire Trak Posi Klip. b. Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System. c. Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD or VertiTrack VTD Series.

E. Backing Channel: Steel, channel-shaped, fabricated for flush fit between stud spacing indicated; capable of resisting a single concentrated load of 250 lbs applied in any direction, at any point, and transferring this load through the fasteners to the studs. 1. Basis-of-Design Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Metal Lite, Inc.; Flush Mount or Notch-Tite. a. Substitutions: In accordance with requirements for Pre-Bid Substitutions in Document 00 22 13 - Supplementary Instructions to Bidders. 2. Flat Strap Backing Plate: Not permitted to be used for support of grab bars, hand rails, shelves, cabinets, or other wall-mounted items.

F. Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges. 1. Depth: 1-1/2 inches. 2. Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel.

G. Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645. 1. Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch. 2. Depth: 7/8 inch.

2.03 SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.

B. Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.

C. Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed of main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 2 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems. b. Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System. c. USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.

2.04 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards. 1. Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and other properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.

B. Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide the following: 1. Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates, with installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-in anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overhead structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have been installed to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their full strength. 1. Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of time needed for coordination and construction.

3.03 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Installation Standard: ASTM C 754. 1. Gypsum Board Assemblies: Comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing installation.

B. Install supplementary framing, and backing to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars, toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.

C. Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.

D. Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. Frame both sides of joints independently.

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 3 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

3.04 INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES

A. Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings required by referenced installation standards for assembly types. 1. Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 2. Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.

B. Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls, install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.

C. Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.

D. Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports or substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspended ceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling. 1. Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies. 2. Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs. a. Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated. b. Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearance from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly. c. Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overhead structure.

3. Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framing required above door heads. 4. Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solid structure. a. Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance- rated assembly indicated. 5. Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.

E. Direct Furring: 1. Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

F. Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inch from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

3.05 INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS

A. Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structure to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 4 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Suspend hangers from building structure as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system. a. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 2. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalent devices. a. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced installation standards. 3. Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail. 4. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. 5. Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend through forms. 6. Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck. 7. Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.

C. Seismic Bracing: Sway-brace suspension systems with hangers used for support.

D. Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meet vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fit into wall track.

E. Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measured lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that will receive finishes.

END OF SECTION

NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 09 2216 - 5

8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 09 2900

GYPSUM BOARD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Interior gypsum board. 2. Tile backing panels.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 2. Section 06 1600 - Sheathing: Gypsum sheathing for exterior walls. 3. Section 07 8446 - Fire-Resistive Joint Systems: Head-of-wall assemblies using gypsum board. 4. Section 09 2216 - Non-Structural Metal Framing: Non-structural framing and suspension systems that support gypsum board panels.

1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

B. Samples: For the following products: 1. Trim Accessories: Full-size sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory indicated.

1.03 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported on risers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.

1.04 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.

B. Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.

C. Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL

A. Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and that correspond with support system indicated.

2.02 PERFORMANCE CRITERIA

A. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.

B. STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by an independent testing agency.

2.03 INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. CertainTeed Corp. 2. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC. 3. Lafarge North America Inc. 4. National Gypsum Company. 5. USG Corporation.

B. Gypsum Wallboard, Regular Type: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch, except where indicated as 1/2 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

C. Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. 1. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

D. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. With moisture- and mold-resistant core and paper surfaces. 1. Thickness: Match existing, as indicated on drawings. 2. Long Edges: Tapered.

2.04 TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's standard edges. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. CertainTeed Corp.; GlasRoc Tile Backer. b. Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer. 2. Core: 5/8 inch, Type X. 3. Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10.

GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.05 TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047. 1. Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet, rolled zinc, plastic, or paper-faced galvanized steel sheet. 2. Shapes: a. Cornerbead. b. Bullnose bead. c. LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. d. L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound. e. Expansion (control) joint. f. Curved-Edge Cornerbead: With notched or flexible flanges.

B. Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Fry Reglet Corp. b. Gordon, Inc. c. Pittcon Industries. 2. Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5. 3. Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified.

2.06 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.

B. Joint Tape: 1. Interior Gypsum Board: Paper. 2. Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with other compounds applied on previous or for successive coats. 1. Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use setting-type taping compound. 2. Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges, use setting-type taping compound. a. Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories. 3. Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound. 4. Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

D. Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels: 1. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer.

2.07 AUXILIARY MATERIALS

A. General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer's written recommendations.

GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 3 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Steel Drill Screws: ASTM C 1002, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Use screws complying with ASTM C 954 for fastening panels to steel members from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick. 2. For fastening cementitious backer units, use screws of type and size recommended by panel manufacturer.

C. Sound Attenuation Blankets: ASTM C 665, Type I (blankets without membrane facing) produced by combining thermosetting resins with mineral fibers manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool. 1. Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Comply with mineral-fiber requirements of assembly. 2. Acoustical Joint Sealant: Type JS-A-1 as specified in Section 07 95 00 - Joint Sealants.

D. Thermal Insulation: As specified in Section 07 2100 - Thermal Insulation.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.

B. Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL

A. Comply with ASTM C 840.

B. Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than one framing member.

C. Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.

D. Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control joints at corners of framed openings.

E. Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.

F. Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc., except in chases braced internally. 1. Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area. 2. Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.

GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 4 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

3. Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- wide joints to install sealant.

G. Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, except floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edges of panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.

H. Attachment to Steel Framing: Attach panels so leading edge or end of each panel is attached to open (unsupported) edges of stud flanges first.

I. STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings and penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces of partitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer's written recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or through assemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.

J. Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installed after panels have been installed on one side.

3.03 APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD

A. Install interior gypsum board in the following locations: 1. Type X: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 2. Glass-Mat Interior Type: Where wall tile finish is indicated and interior vertical surfaces of Toilet Rooms and Janitor Closets. 3. Moisture- and Mold-Resistant Type: Basement, except Toilet Rooms and Janitor Closets.

B. Single-Layer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of panels. b. At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. 3. Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.

C. Multilayer Application: 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framing members and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallel base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance- rated assembly. 2. On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offset at least one stud or furring member with base-layer

GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 5 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions. 3. Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with steel drill screws.

3.04 APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS

A. Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions and install where indicated. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut other construction or penetrations.

B. Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniform plane across panel surfaces.

3.05 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES

A. General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used for panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Control Joints: Install control joints according to ASTM C 840 and in specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect.

C. Interior Trim: Install in the following locations: 1. Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated. 2. Bullnose Bead: Use at outside corners where indicated. 3. LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges. 4. L-Bead: Use where indicated.

D. Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.

3.06 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD

A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads, surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptly remove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.

B. Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.

C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended to receive tape.

D. Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840: 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated. 2. Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile. 3. Level 4: At panel surfaces that will be exposed to view. a. Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in painting sections of Division 09.

E. Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 6 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

F. Cementitious Backer Units: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3.07 PROTECTION

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywall surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.

B. Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, and other causes during remainder of the construction period.

C. Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged. 1. Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration, sagging, or irregular shape. 2. Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface contamination and discoloration.

END OF SECTION

GYPSUM BOARD 09 2900 - 7

8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 09 3000

TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Ceramic tile. 2. Stone thresholds. 3. Crack isolation membrane.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 2. Section 07 9200 - Joint Sealants: Sealing of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile surfaces. 3. Section 09 2900 - Gypsum Board: Glass-mat, water-resistant backer board.

1.02 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to Work of this section unless otherwise specified.

B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in "American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."

C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated.

D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.

1.03 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028: 1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.60 wet; minimum 0.70 dry.

1.04 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces.

TILING 09 3000 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

C. Samples for Verification: 1. Full-size units of each type and composition of tile and for each color and finish required. 2. Stone thresholds in 6-inch lengths.

1.05 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For qualified installer.

B. Master Grade Certificates: For each shipment, type, and composition of tile, signed by tile manufacturer and installer.

C. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer.

D. Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product.

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from one source or producer. 1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or producer.

C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this section from a single manufacturer for each product: 1. Stone thresholds. 2. Crack isolation membrane.

D. Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site. 1. Review requirements in ANSI A108.01 for substrates and for preparation by other trades.

1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages.

B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location.

C. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing.

D. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.

TILING 09 3000 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.08 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 PRODUCTS, GENERAL

A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other PART 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.

C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved samples.

D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated.

E. Factory-Applied Temporary Protective Coating: Where indicated under tile type, protect exposed surfaces of tile against adherence of mortar and grout by precoating with continuous film of petroleum paraffin wax, applied hot. Do not coat unexposed tile surfaces.

2.02 TILE PRODUCTS

A. Tile Type CT-1: Factory-mounted glazed ceramic mosaic tile. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings. a. Substitutions: In accordance with requirements for Pre-Bid Substitutions in Document 00 2213 - Supplementary Instructions to Bidders 2. Composition: Impervious natural clay or porcelain. 3. Module Size: 2 by 2 inches. 4. Thickness: 1/4 inch. 5. Face: Plain with cushion edges. 6. Surface: Smooth, without abrasive admixture.

TILING 09 3000 - 3 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

7. Tile Color and Pattern: As indicated by manufacturer's designations. 8. Grout Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range. 9. Trim Units: Coordinated with sizes and coursing of adjoining flat tile where applicable and matching characteristics of adjoining flat tile. Provide shapes as follows, selected from manufacturer's standard shapes: a. Base Cove: Flat top cove, module size 2 by 2 inches. b. External Corners for Thin-Set Mortar Installations: Surface bullnose, module size 2 by 2 inches. c. Internal Corners: Field-butted square corners. For coved base and cap, use angle pieces designed to fit with stretcher shapes.

2.03 THRESHOLDS

A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor finishes. 1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above adjacent floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface.

B. Marble Thresholds: ASTM C 503, with a minimum abrasion resistance of 10 per ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish. 1. Description: Uniform, fine- to medium-grained white stone with gray veining. 2. Description: Match Architect's sample.

2.04 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE

A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies with ANSI A118.12 for high performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.

B. Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheet: Nonplasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with nonwoven polyester fabric; 0.030-inch nominal thickness. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Daltile; Division of Dal-Tile International Inc.; Dalseal TS or Dalseal CIS. b. Noble Company (The); Nobleseal TS or Nobleseal CIS.

2.05 SETTING MATERIALS

A. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. b. Bostik, Inc. c. Custom Building Products. d. Laticrete International, Inc. e. MAPEI Corporation. f. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company. 2. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for nonsagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.

TILING 09 3000 - 4 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.06 GROUT MATERIALS

A. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3. 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Laticrete International, Inc.; SpectraLOCK PRO Grout, or comparable product by one of the following: a. MAPEI Corporation. b. TEC; a subsidiary of H. B. Fuller Company.

2.07 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS

A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply with the following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants. 1. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Use primers, backer rods, and sealant accessories recommended by sealant manufacturer.

B. Colors: Provide colors of exposed sealants to match colors of grout in tile adjoining sealed joints unless otherwise indicated.

C. One-Part, Mildew-Resistant Silicone Sealant: ASTM C 920; Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and, as applicable to nonporous joint substrates indicated, O; formulated with fungicide, intended for sealing interior ceramic tile joints and other nonporous substrates that are subject to in-service exposures of high humidity and extreme temperatures. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Dow Corning Corporation; Dow Corning 786. b. GE Silicones; a division of Momentive Performance Materials; Sanitary 1700. c. Pecora Corporation; Pecora 898 Sanitary Silicone Sealant. d. Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 600 White.

2.08 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated.

B. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

2.09 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT

A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written instructions.

B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions.

C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

TILING 09 3000 - 5 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. 2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar comply with surface finish requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding.

3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed. 4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar with trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile- setting material manufacturer.

B. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

3.03 TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

TILING 09 3000 - 6 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in grid pattern unless otherwise indicated. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. 2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align joints. 3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated.

E. Joint Width: Unless otherwise indicated, install tile with 1/8 inch joint width:

F. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction, and isolation joints directly above where joints occur in existing concrete substrates. 1. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. 2. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 3. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 07 92 00 - Joint Sealants.

G. Stone Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise indicated. 1. Do not extend crack isolation membrane under thresholds set in latex-portland cement mortar. Fill joints between such thresholds and adjoining tile set on cleavage membrane with elastomeric sealant.

3.04 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION

A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate.

B. Do not install tile or setting materials over crack isolation membrane until membrane has cured.

3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTING

A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of foreign matter. 1. Remove grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

TILING 09 3000 - 7 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent drain clogging.

B. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.

C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed.

D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces.

3.06 TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE

A. Interior Floor Installations, Wood Subfloor: 1. Tile Installation F141: Cement mortar bed (thickset) with cleavage membrane; TCA F141 and ANSI A108.1C. a. Tile Type: Type CT-1. b. Thin-Set Mortar for Cured-Bed Method: Latex- portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.

B. Interior Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring: 1. Tile Installation W245: Thin-set mortar on coated glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum backer board; TCA W245. a. Tile Type: Type CT-1. b. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. c. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.

END OF SECTION

TILING 09 3000 - 8 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 09 5113

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, prepared on Samples of size indicated below. 1. Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- square samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture. 2. Exposed Suspension System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 12-inch- long samples of each type, finish, and color.

1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shown and coordinated with each other, based on input from installers of the items involved: 1. Ceiling suspension system members. 2. Method of attaching hangers to building structure. 3. Ceiling-mounted items including lighting fixtures, diffusers, grilles, speakers, sprinklers, access panels, and special moldings. 4. Minimum Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch = 1 foot (1:48).

B. Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system through one source from a single manufacturer.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Complying with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials as determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver acoustical panels, suspension system components, and accessories to Project site in original, unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 5113 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

will be protected against damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination, and other causes.

B. Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moisture content.

C. Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1.07 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of acoustical panels and suspension system with other construction that penetrates ceilings or is supported by them, including light fixtures, HVAC equipment, fire-suppression system, and partition assemblies.

1.08 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed. 2. Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL

A. Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that comply with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and light reflectances, unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface per ASTM E 795.

B. Broad Spectrum Antimicrobial Fungicide and Bactericide Treatment: Where indicated, provide acoustical panels treated with manufacturer's standard antimicrobial formulation that inhibits fungus, mold, mildew, and gram-positive and gram-negative bacteria and showing no mold, mildew, or bacterial growth when tested according to ASTM D 3273 and evaluated according to ASTM D 3274 or ASTM G 21.

C. Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.

2.02 ACOUSTICAL PANELS FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING TYPE APC-1

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Cirrus.

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 5113 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

2. CertainTeed Ceilings; Cashmere. 3. USG Interiors, Inc.; Eclipse ClimaPlus.

B. Color: White.

C. Light Reflectance (LR): Not less than 0.82.

D. Noise Reduction Coefficient (NRC): Not less than 0.60.

E. Ceiling Attenuation Class (CAC): Not less than 35.

F. Edge/Joint Detail: Square.

G. Thickness: 3/4 inch.

H. Modular Size: 24 by 48 inches.

I. Antimicrobial Treatment: Broad spectrum fungicide and bactericide based.

J. Suspension System: Type APG-1.

2.03 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL

A. Metal Suspension System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspension systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirements in ASTM C 635.

B. Finishes and Colors, General: Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. Provide manufacturer's standard factory-applied finish for type of system indicated.

C. Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

D. Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper. 2. Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at 3 times hanger design load (ASTM C 635, Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.135-inch- diameter wire.

E. Hold-Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced 24 inches o.c. on all cross tees.

2.04 METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM FOR ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILING TYPE APG-1

A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Prelude XL. 2. CertainTeed Ceilings; Classic Stab System. 3. USG Interiors, Inc.; DX.

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 5113 - 3 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed from cold-rolled steel sheet, prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 653/A 653M, not less than G30 (Z90) coating designation, with prefinished 15/16-inch- wide metal caps on flanges. 1. Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system. 2. End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) type. 3. Face Design: Flat, flush. 4. Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet. 5. Cap Finish: Painted white.

2.05 METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by same manufacturer as for suspension system and acoustical panels.

B. Roll-Formed, Sheet-Metal Edge Moldings and Trim: Type and profile indicated or, if not indicated, manufacturer's standard moldings for edges and penetrations that comply with seismic design requirements; formed from sheet metal of same material, finish, and color as that used for exposed flanges of suspension system runners. 1. Provide manufacturer's standard edge moldings that fit acoustical panel edge details and suspension systems indicated and that match width and configuration of exposed runners, unless otherwise indicated. 2. For lay-in panels with reveal edge details, provide. 3. For circular penetrations of ceiling, provide edge moldings fabricated to diameter required to fit penetration exactly.

2.06 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Acoustical Sealant for Exposed Joints: Type JS-L-1, nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant as specified in Section 07 9200 – Joint Sealants.

B. Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints: Type JS-SR-2, nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber sealant as specified in Section 07 92 00 – Joint Sealants.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilings attach or abut, with installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other sections that affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at opposite edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shown on reflected ceiling plans.

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 5113 - 4 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636 and seismic design requirements indicated, per manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling Systems Handbook."

B. Suspend ceiling hangers from building's structural members and as follows: 1. Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum that are not part of supporting structure or of ceiling suspension system. 2. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 3. Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions; offset resulting horizontal forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means. 4. Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that interfere with location of hangers at spacings required to support standard suspension system members, install supplemental suspension members and hangers in form of trapezes or equivalent devices. 5. Secure wire hangers to ceiling suspension members and to supports above with a minimum of three tight turns. Connect hangers directly either to structures or to inserts, eye screws, or other devices that are secure and appropriate for substrate and that will not deteriorate or otherwise fail due to age, corrosion, or elevated temperatures. 6. Do not support ceilings directly from permanent metal forms or floor deck. Fasten hangers to cast-in-place hanger inserts, postinstalled mechanical or adhesive anchors, or power-actuated fasteners that extend through forms into concrete. 7. When steel framing does not permit installation of hanger wires at spacing required, install carrying channels or other supplemental support for attachment of hanger wires. 8. Do not attach hangers to steel deck tabs. 9. Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck. Attach hangers to structural members. 10. Space hangers not more than 48 inches o.c. along each member supported directly from hangers, unless otherwise indicated; provide hangers not more than 8 inches from ends of each member. 11. Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads within performance limits established by referenced standards and publications.

C. Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns. Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching to permanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete with cast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.

D. Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and where necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels. 1. Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings before they are installed. 2. Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 3 inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet. Miter corners accurately and connect securely. 3. Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.

E. Install suspension system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. Remove and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 5113 - 5 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

F. Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension system runners and edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit. 1. For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of suspension system runners and moldings. 2. For reveal-edged panels on suspension system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm contact with top surface of runner flanges. 3. Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer. 4. Install hold-down clips in areas indicated and in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructions, unless otherwise indicated. 5. Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire- resistance-rated assembly.

3.04 CLEANING

A. Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, and suspension system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup of minor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned and repaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.

END OF SECTION

ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 09 5113 - 6 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 09 6229

CORK FLOORING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Cork rubber floor tile.

B. Related Sections:

1. Division 09 Section "Resilient Base and Accessories" for resilient base, reducer strips, and other accessories installed with cork floorings.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: For each type of cork flooring. Include cork flooring layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosing partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

1. Show details of special patterns.

C. Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each shade, pattern, and finish of cork flooring required.

D. Maintenance Data: For each type of cork flooring to include in maintenance manuals.

1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class II, not less than 0.22 W/sq. cm.

B. Product Certificates: For cork floating floor system, from manufacturer, certifying that MDF core contains no urea-formaldehyde resins.

CORK FLOORING 09 6229 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store cork flooring and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C) or more than 90 deg F (32 deg C). Store cork flooring on flat surfaces.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F (18 deg C) or more than 75 deg F (24 deg C) where relative humidity is between 45 and 65 percent, in spaces to receive cork flooring during the following time periods:

1. 72 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 72 hours after installation.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 65 deg F (18 deg C) or more than 75 deg F (24 deg C).

C. Close spaces to traffic during cork flooring installation.

D. Close spaces to traffic for 72 hours after cork flooring installation.

E. Install cork flooring after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Cork Flooring: Furnish 1 box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, shade, pattern, and finish of cork flooring installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.2 CORK RUBBER FLOOR TILE – CRT-1

A. Cork Rubber Floor Tile: Composed of 70 percent natural cork granules and 30 percent rubber granules combined with fade-resistant pigments; homogeneous and uniform in composition throughout the tile thickness.

B. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products indicated on Drawings.

1. Substitutions: In accordance with requirements for Pre-Bid Substitutions in Document 00 2213 - Supplementary Instructions to Bidders.

CORK FLOORING 09 6229 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

C. Provide cork rubber floor tile made with adhesives and binders that do not contain urea- formaldehyde resins.

D. Thickness: Nominal 0.125 inch (3.2 mm).

E. Size: 24 by 24 inches (610 by 610 mm).

F. Texture: Lightly textured wear surface.

G. Colors and Patterns: As indicated by manufacturer's designations.

2.3 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based or blended hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by cork flooring manufacturer for applications indicated.

B. Adhesive: Water-resistant products as recommended by manufacturer to suit cork flooring and substrate conditions indicated.

1. Use adhesives that have a VOC content of not more than 50 g/L when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

C. Moisture Barrier: Cork flooring manufacturer’s recommended product.

2.4 FIELD-APPLIED FINISHES

A. Cork Rubber Tile Sealer: Product as recommended by cork rubber floor tile manufacturer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of cork flooring.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to cork flooring manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of cork flooring.

CORK FLOORING 09 6229 - 3 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound and remove bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.

C. Install moisture barrier on all concrete slab-on-grade substrates before installing cork flooring.

D. Do not install cork flooring until materials are same temperature as space where they are to be installed.

1. Move cork flooring products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 72 hours in advance of installation.

E. Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by cork flooring products.

3.3 FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with cork flooring manufacturer's written instructions for installing cork flooring.

B. Mix floor tiles from each carton together to ensure uniform distribution of shade.

C. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed floor tiles.

D. Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles at opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal less than one-half tile at perimeter.

E. Lay floor tiles square with room axis.

F. Apply adhesive to substrate and set floor tiles in adhesive.

G. Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures including built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.

H. Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to center of door openings.

I. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

3.4 FIELD-APPLIED FINISHES

A. Finish Coatings: Apply two coats.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting cork flooring.

B. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.

CORK FLOORING 09 6229 - 4 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

C. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.

D. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

E. Protect cork flooring products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

F. Cover cork flooring until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

CORK FLOORING 09 6229 - 5

8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 09 6513

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Resilient base.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated, in manufacturer's standard-size samples but not less than 12 inches long, of each resilient product color, texture, and pattern required.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency. 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambient temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 degrees F or more than 90 degrees F.

1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 degrees F or more than 95 degrees F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods: 1. 48 hours before installation. 2. During installation. 3. 48 hours after installation.

B. Until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 degrees F or more than 95 degrees F.

C. Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 6513 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.06 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color, pattern, and size of resilient product installed.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 RESILIENT BASE TYPE RB-1

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide Roppe Corporation, USA; Series 700, or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. 2. Burke Mercer Flooring Products; Division of Burke Industries, Inc. 3. Flexco, Inc. 4. Nora Rubber Flooring; Freudenberg Building Systems, Inc.

B. Resilient Base Standard: ASTM F 1861. 1. Material Requirement: Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset). 2. Manufacturing Method: Group I (solid, homogeneous). 3. Styles: Cove (base with toe) for use at resilient floor coverings and hard surfaced floors; Straight (flat or toeless) for use at carpet floor covering.

C. Minimum Thickness: 0.125 inch.

D. Height: 4 inches.

E. Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.

F. Outside Corners: Preformed.

G. Inside Corners: Preformed.

H. Finish: Satin.

I. Color: As indicated by manufacturer’s designations.

2.02 INSTALLATION MATERIALS

A. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient products and substrate conditions indicated. 1. Use adhesives that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24): a. Cove Base Adhesives: Not more than 50 g/L. b. Rubber Floor Adhesives: Not more than 60 g/L.

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 6513 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits that might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilient products.

B. Do not install resilient products until they are same temperature as the space where they are to be installed. 1. Move resilient products and installation materials into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation.

C. Sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products immediately before installation.

3.03 RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.

B. Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.

C. Install resilient base in lengths as long as practicable without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent pieces aligned.

D. Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates.

E. Do not stretch resilient base during installation.

F. Preformed Corners: Install preformed corners before installing straight pieces.

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protection of resilient products.

B. Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient product installation: 1. Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces. 2. Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly. 3. Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 6513 - 3 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

C. Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.

D. Cover resilient products until Substantial Completion.

END OF SECTION

RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09 6513 - 4 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 09 6813

TILE CARPETING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes 1. Modular, tufted and fusion-bonded tufted carpet tile.

1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics, durability, and fade resistance. Include sample warranty.

B. Shop Drawings: Show the following: 1. Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are required in carpet tiles. 2. Carpet tile type, color, and dye lot. 3. Type of subfloor. 4. Pattern of installation. 5. Pattern type, location, and direction. 6. Pile direction. 7. Type, color, and location of insets and borders. 8. Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips. 9. Transition details to other flooring materials.

C. Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each sample with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size sample. 2. Exposed Edge Stripping and Accessory: 12-inch- long samples.

D. Product Schedule: Use same room and product designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For installer.

B. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Include recommended installation method for Project substrates.

TILE CARPETING 09 6813 - 1 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.04 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For carpet tile to include in maintenance manuals specified in Division 01. Include the following: 1. Methods for maintaining carpet tile, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule. 2. Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet tile.

B. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this section.

1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who is certified by the Floor Covering Installation Board or who can demonstrate compliance with its certification program requirements.

B. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide products with the critical radiant flux classification indicated in PART 2, as determined by testing identical products per ASTM E 648 by an independent testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 5, "Storage and Handling."

1.07 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.2, "Site Conditions; Temperature and Humidity" and Section 7.12, "Ventilation."

B. Environmental Limitations: Do not install carpet tiles until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

C. Do not install carpet tiles over concrete slabs until slabs have cured and are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive and concrete slabs have pH range recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

1.08 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty for Carpet Tiles: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet tile installation that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet tile due to unusual traffic, failure of substrate, vandalism, or abuse. 2. Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling, snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, and delamination. 1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

TILE CARPETING 09 6813 - 2 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish extra materials described below, before installation begins, that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Carpet Tile: Full-size units equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less than 10 sq. yd.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 CARPET TILE TYPE CPT-1

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings. 1. Substitutions: In accordance with requirements for Pre-Bid Substitutions in Document 00 2213 - Supplementary Instructions to Bidders.

B. Colors, Textures, and Patterns: Match colors, textures, and patterns as indicated by manufacturer’s designations for each carpet product specified.

C. Fiber Content: 100 percent Type 6, 6 nylon, Post-consumer content

D. Fiber Type: Universal.

E. Pile Characteristic: Tufted Textured Loop.

F. Pile Thickness: 0.077 inch, 2.0 mm for finished carpet tile.

G. Stitches: 8 stitches per inch.

H. Gage: 1/12.

I. Surface Pile Weight: 18.0 oz/sq. yd.

J. Primary Backing: GlasBac Tile.

K. Size: 20 by 20 inches (50 by 50 cm).

L. Dye Method: 100% Solution dyed.

M. Performance Characteristics: As follows: 1. Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm per ASTM E 648. 2. Electrostatic Propensity: Less than 3.0 kV per AATCC 134. 3. Environmental Requirements: Provide carpet tile that complies with testing and product requirements of Carpet and Rug Institute's "Green Label Plus" program.

2.02 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES

A. Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

TILE CARPETING 09 6813 - 3 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Manufacturer’s standard TacTiles carpet tile corner connectors, with adhesive on one side.Moisture Barrier: Carpet tile manufacturer’s recommended product; MoistureGuard 2.0.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpet tile performance. Examine carpet tile for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.

B. For wood subfloors, verify the following:

1. Underlayment over subfloor complies with requirements specified in Division 06 Section "Rough Carpentry." 2. Underlayment surface is free of irregularities and substances that may interfere with adhesive bond or show through surface.

3. adhesive bond or show through surface.

C. For painted subfloors, verify the following:

1. Perform bond test recommended in writing by adhesive manufacturer.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 6.2, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates indicated to receive carpet tile installation.

B. Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fill cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8 inch wide or wider and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more stringent requirements are required by manufacturer's written instructions.

C. Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet tile.

D. Install moisture barrier on all concrete slab-on-grade substrates before installing carpet tile.

3.03 INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 14, "Carpet Modules," and with carpet tile manufacturer's written installation instructions.

B. Installation Method: Install carpet tiles without adhesive, using manufacturer’s standard TacTiles carpet tile corner connectors, as recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer. Install connectors with adhesive side facing up, lay carpet tile corners down on adhesive side of connectors, allowing carpet floor to float above substrate.

TILE CARPETING 09 6813 - 4 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

C. Maintain dye lot integrity. Do not mix dye lots in same area.

D. Cut and fit carpet tile to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture including cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended by carpet tile manufacturer.

E. Extend carpet tile into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges, alcoves, and similar openings.

F. Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeating on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.

G. Install pattern parallel to walls.

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet tile: 1. Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by carpet tile manufacturer. 2. Remove yarns that protrude from carpet tile surface. 3. Vacuum carpet tile using commercial machine with face-beater element.

B. Protect installed carpet tile to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protection of Indoor Installations."

C. Protect carpet tile against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writing by carpet tile manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

TILE CARPETING 09 6813 - 5

8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 09 9100

PAINTING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Surface preparation and field application of paint systems on exterior and interior substrates as scheduled at the end of this section.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section. 2. Section 05 1200 - Structural Steel Framing: Shop priming of metal substrates with primers specified in this section. 3. Section 09 9300 - Staining and Transparent Finishing: Surface preparation and the application of wood stains and transparent finishes on interior wood substrates.

1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Samples for Verification: For each type of paint system and in each color and gloss of topcoat indicated. 1. Submit samples on rigid backing, 8 inches square. 2. Step coats on samples to show each coat required for system. 3. Label each coat of each sample. 4. Label each sample for location and application area.

C. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to paint system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules.

1.03 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Coating Maintenance Manual: Provide coating maintenance manual including area summary with finish schedule, area detail designating location where each product/color/finish was used, product data pages, material safety data sheets, care and cleaning instructions, touch-up procedures, and color samples of each color and finish used.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Mockups: Apply benchmark samples of each paint system indicated and each color and finish selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

PAINTING 09 9100 - 1 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each paint system specified in PART 3. a. Wall and Ceiling Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Apply benchmark samples after permanent lighting and other environmental services have been activated. 3. Final approval of color selections will be based on benchmark samples. a. If preliminary color selections are not approved, apply additional benchmark samples of additional colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 degrees F. 1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

1.06 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Apply paints only when temperature of surfaces to be painted and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 degrees F.

B. Do not apply paints when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 degrees F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MANUFACTURERS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Benjamin Moore & Co. 2. The Sherwin-Williams Company.

2.02 PAINT, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each paint system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a paint system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in paint system and on substrate indicated.

B. VOC Content of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide products that comply with the following limits for VOC content, exclusive of colorants added to a tint base, when calculated according to 40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24); these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1. Flat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 50 g/L. 2. Nonflat Paints, Coatings, and Primers: VOC content of not more than 150 g/L. 3. Anti-Corrosive Paints Applied to Ferrous Metals: VOC not more than 250 g/L.

PAINTING 09 9100 - 2 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

4. Primers, Sealers, and Undercoaters: VOC content of not more than 200 g/L.

C. Chemical Components of Field-Applied Interior Paints and Coatings: Provide topcoat paints and anti-corrosive and anti-rust paints applied to ferrous metals that comply with the following chemical restrictions; these requirements do not apply to paints and coatings that are applied in a fabrication or finishing shop: 1. Aromatic Compounds: Paints and coatings shall not contain more than 1.0 percent by weight of total aromatic compounds (hydrocarbon compounds containing one or more benzene rings). 2. Restricted Components: Paints and coatings shall not contain any of the following: a. Acrolein. b. Acrylonitrile. c. Antimony. d. Benzene. e. Butyl benzyl phthalate. f. Cadmium. g. Di (2-ethylhexyl) phthalate. h. Di-n-butyl phthalate. i. Di-n-octyl phthalate. j. 1,2-dichlorobenzene. k. Diethyl phthalate. l. Dimethyl phthalate. m. Ethylbenzene. n. Formaldehyde. o. Hexavalent chromium. p. Isophorone. q. Lead. r. Mercury. s. Methyl ethyl ketone. t. Methyl isobutyl ketone. u. Methylene chloride. v. Naphthalene. w. Toluene (methylbenzene). x. 1,1,1-trichloroethane. y. Vinyl chloride.

D. Colors: 1. Exterior Topcoats: Match Architect’s sample. 2. Interior Topcoats: As noted on Drawings by reference to manufacturer’s color designations.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Substrates: When measured with an electronic moisture meter as follows: 1. Masonry (Clay and CMU): 12 percent.

PAINTING 09 9100 - 3 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2. Gypsum Board: 12 percent. 3. Plaster: 12 percent.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Begin coating application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces are dry. 1. Beginning coating application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions applicable to substrates indicated.

B. Remove plates, machined surfaces, and similar items already in place that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because of size or weight of item, provide surface- applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. After completing painting operations, use workers skilled in the trades involved to reinstall items that were removed. Remove surface-applied protection if any. 2. Do not paint over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

C. Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of paints, including dirt, oil, grease, and incompatible paints and encapsulants. 1. Remove incompatible primers and reprime substrate with compatible primers as required to produce paint systems indicated.

D. Concrete Masonry Substrates: Remove efflorescence and chalk. Do not paint surfaces if moisture content or alkalinity of surfaces to be painted exceeds that permitted in manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Steel Substrates: Remove rust and loose mill scale. Clean using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer.

F. Existing Painted Steel Substrates: Prepare surfaces using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer, including removal of rust and loose paint.

G. Gypsum Board and Plaster Substrates: Do not begin paint application until finishing compound is dry and sanded smooth.

H. Existing Painted Gypsum Board and Plaster Substrates: Prepare surfaces using methods recommended in writing by paint manufacturer. Avoid abrading gypsum board face paper.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Apply paints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for paint and substrate indicated. 2. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. Before final installation, paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only.

PAINTING 09 9100 - 4 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

3. Paint front and backsides of access panels, removable or hinged covers, and similar hinged items to match exposed surfaces.

B. Tint each undercoat a lighter shade to facilitate identification of each coat if multiple coats of same material are to be applied. Tint undercoats to match color of topcoat, but provide sufficient difference in shade of undercoats to distinguish each separate coat.

C. If undercoats or other conditions show through topcoat, apply additional coats until cured film has a uniform paint finish, color, and appearance.

D. Apply paints to produce surface films without cloudiness, spotting, holidays, laps, brush marks, roller tracking, runs, sags, ropiness, or other surface imperfections. Cut in sharp lines and color breaks.

E. Painting Mechanical and Electrical Work: Paint items exposed in occupied spaces including, but not limited to, the following:

1. Mechanical Work: a. Uninsulated metal piping. b. Pipe hangers and supports. c. Visible portions of internal surfaces of metal ducts, without liner, behind air inlets and outlets. d. Mechanical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting. 2. Electrical Work: a. Electrical equipment that is indicated to have a factory-primed finish for field painting.

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing of Paint Materials: Owner reserves the right to invoke the following procedure at any time and as often as Owner deems necessary during the period when paints are being applied: 1. Owner will engage the services of a qualified testing agency to sample paint materials being used. Samples of material delivered to Project site will be taken, identified, sealed, and certified in presence of Contractor. 2. Testing agency will perform tests for compliance with product requirements. 3. Owner may direct Contractor to stop applying paints if test results show materials being used do not comply with product requirements. Contractor shall remove noncomplying- paint materials from Project site, pay for testing, and repaint surfaces painted with rejected materials. Contractor will be required to remove rejected materials from previously painted surfaces if, on repainting with complying materials, the two paints are incompatible.

3.05 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing paint application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paints by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

PAINTING 09 9100 - 5 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from paint application. Correct damage to work of other trades by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces.

3.06 PAINTING SCHEDULE A. Painting System 1 - Exterior Ferrous Metals, Galvanized, Alkyd, Three Coat: 1. Primer: One coat. a. Benjamin Moore & Co.: I.M.C. Acrylic Metal Primer, M04. b. MAB Paints: Rust-O-Lastic Hydro Prime, 073-189. c. Sherwin-Williams Company: ProIndustrial Pro-Cryl Universal Primer. 2. Gloss Finish: Two coats. a. Benjamin Moore & Co.: Impervo Alkyd High Gloss Metal and Wood Enamel, 133. b. MAB Paints: Rust-O-Lastic Finish Coating, 074 Line. c. Sherwin-Williams Company: Industrial Enamel, B54Z Series. B. Painting System 2 - Exterior Ferrous Metals, Primed and Unprimed, Alkyd, Three Coat: 1. Primer: One coat. a. Benjamin Moore & Co.: I.M.C. Alkyd Metal Primer, CM06. b. MAB Paints: Rust-O-Lastic Anti-Corrosive Primer, 073 Line. c. Sherwin-Williams Company: Kem Bond HS Universal Primer, B50 Series. 2. Gloss Finish: Two coats. a. Benjamin Moore & Co.: Impervo Alkyd High Gloss Metal and Wood Enamel, 133. b. MAB Paints: Rust-O-Lastic Finish Coating, 074 Line. c. Sherwin-Williams Company: Industrial Enamel, B54Z Series. C. Painting System 3 – Interior Concrete Block and Concrete, Latex, Four Coat 1. Block Filler: One coat: a. Benjamin Moore & Co.: IMC Latex Block Filler, M88. b. MAB Paints: Block Kote #2000, 064-140. c. Sherwin-Williams Company: PrepRite Block Filler, B25W25. 2. Primer: One coat. a. Benjamin Moore & Co.: Eco Spec Interior Primer Sealer, 231. b. Enviro Pure Latex Primer, 037-195. c. Sherwin-Williams Company: ProMar 200 Low VOC Interior Latex Primer, B28W600. 3. Flat Finish: Two coats. a. Benjamin Moore & Co.: Eco Spec Interior Latex Flat, 219. b. MAB Paints: Enviro Pure Latex Flat, 040 line. c. Sherwin-Williams Company: ProMar 200 Low VOC Interior Latex Flat, B30-600 Series. D. Painting System 4 - Interior Ferrous Metal, Latex, Three Coat: 1. Primer: One coat. a. Benjamin Moore & Co.: Acrylic Metal Primer, M04. b. Sherwin-Williams Company: DTM Acrylic Primer/Finish, B66W1. 2. Semi Gloss Finish: Two coats. a. Benjamin Moore & Co.: Eco Spec Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel, 224.

PAINTING 09 9100 - 6 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

b. Sherwin-Williams Company: DTM Acrylic finish, semi-gloss. E. Painting System 5 - Interior Wood, Latex, Three Coat: 1. Primer: One coat. a. Benjamin Moore & Co.: Eco Spec Interior Primer Sealer, 231. b. Sherwin-Williams Company: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Primer. 2. Semi Gloss Finish: Two coats. a. Benjamin Moore & Co.: Eco Spec Interior Latex Semi-Gloss Enamel, 224. b. Sherwin-Williams Company: ProMar 200 Zero VOC semi-gloss. F. Painting System 6 - Interior Gypsum Board and Plaster, Latex, Three Coat: 1. Primer: One coat (spot prime exiting work). a. Benjamin Moore & Co.: Eco Spec Interior Primer Sealer, 231. b. Sherwin-Williams Company: ProMar 200 Zero VOC Primer. 2. Flat Finish (Ceilings): Two coats. a. Benjamin Moore & Co.: Eco Spec Interior Latex Flat, 219. b. Sherwin-Williams Company: ProMar 200 Zero VOC flat. 3. Eggshell Finish (Other Surfaces): Two coats. a. Benjamin Moore & Co.: Eco Spec Interior Latex Eggshell Enamel, 223. b. Sherwin-Williams Company: ProMar 200 Zero VOC eggshell.

END OF SECTION

PAINTING 09 9100 - 7

8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 09 9300

STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Surface preparation and application of wood finishes on new and existing interior wood substrates.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include preparation requirements and application instructions.

B. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.

C. Samples for Verification: For each type of finish system and in each color and gloss of finish indicated. 1. Submit samples on representative samples of actual wood substrates, 8 inches square or 8 inches long. 2. Label each sample for location and application area.

D. Product List: For each product indicated, include the following: 1. Cross-reference to finish system and locations of application areas. Use same designations indicated on Drawings and in schedules. 2. VOC content.

1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Mockups: Apply mockups of each finish system indicated and each color selected to verify preliminary selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution. 1. Architect will select one surface to represent surfaces and conditions for application of each type of finish system and substrate. a. Vertical and Horizontal Surfaces: Provide samples of at least 100 sq. ft. b. Other Items: Architect will designate items or areas required. 2. Final approval of stain color selections will be based on mockups. a. If preliminary stain color selections are not approved, apply additional mockups of additional stain colors selected by Architect at no added cost to Owner.

1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in well-ventilated areas with ambient temperatures continuously maintained at not less than 45 degrees F.

STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 09 9300 - 1 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

1. Maintain containers in clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue. 2. Remove rags and waste from storage areas daily.

1.05 FIELD CONDITIONS

A. Apply finishes only when temperature of surfaces to be finished and ambient air temperatures are between 50 and 95 degrees F.

B. Do not apply finishes when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; at temperatures less than 5 degrees F above the dew point; or to damp or wet surfaces.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Material Compatibility: 1. Provide materials for use within each finish system that are compatible with one another and substrates indicated, under conditions of service and application as demonstrated by manufacturer, based on testing and field experience. 2. For each coat in a finish system, provide products recommended in writing by manufacturers of topcoat for use in finish system and on substrate indicated.

B. VOC Content: Provide products that comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction.

C. Stain Colors: Match Architect's samples.

2.02 WOOD FILLER

A. Wood Filler Paste: Solvent-based, high solids, clear paste filler, for open grained woods.

B. Wood Filler Stick: Hard beeswax tinted to match adjacent wood being filled.

2.03 STAIN

A. Wood Stain: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Benjamin Moore & Co.; Benwood Interior Penetrating Stain, 234. b. ICI Paints; Devoe/Fuller Penchrome, DF2XX. c. PPG Architectural Finishes, Inc.; REZ Interior Wood Stain, Semi Transparent, 72- 560. d. The Sherwin-Williams Company; Wood Classics Interior Oil 250 Stain, A49-800 series.

2.05 POLYURETHANE VARNISHES

A. Varnish, Interior, Waterbased Polyurethane, Satin Finish: 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. The Sherwin-Williams Company; Wood Classics Waterborne Polyurethane Varnish, Satin, A68 series

STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 09 9300 - 2 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with applicator present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moisture content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. 1. Thoroughly examine surfaces scheduled to be painted prior to commencement of work. Report in writing any condition that may affect proper application. Do not commence work until such defects have been corrected. 2. Where materials are being applied over previously coated surfaces, apply samples and perform in place test to check for compatibility, adhesion and film integrity of new materials to existing stained and finished surfaces. Report in writing any condition that may affect application, appearance or performance of the stain system. 3. Painting of surface constitutes contractor's acceptance of surface and responsibility for any paint failure.

B. Maximum Moisture Content of Interior Wood Substrates: 13 percent, when measured with an electronic moisture meter.

C. Verify suitability of substrates, including surface conditions and compatibility with existing finishes and primers.

D. Proceed with finish application only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1. Beginning finish application constitutes Contractor's acceptance of substrates and conditions.

3.02 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual" applicable to existing substrates indicated.

B. Interior Wood Substrates – New Work: 1. Scrape and clean knots, and apply coat of knot sealer before applying primer. 2. Apply wood filler paste to open-grain woods, as defined in "MPI Architectural Painting Specification Manual," to produce smooth, glasslike finish. 3. Sand surfaces that will be exposed to view and dust off.

3.03 APPLICATION

A. Apply finishes according to manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations in "MPI Maintenance Repainting Manual." 1. Use applicators and techniques suited for finish and substrate indicated. 2. Finish surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed surfaces. 3. Do not apply finishes over labels of independent testing agencies or equipment name, identification, performance rating, or nomenclature plates.

B. Apply finishes to produce surface films without cloudiness, holidays, lap marks, brush marks, runs, ropiness, or other surface imperfections.

STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 09 9300 - 3 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

3.04 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. At end of each workday, remove rubbish, empty cans, rags, and other discarded materials from Project site.

B. After completing finish application, clean spattered surfaces. Remove spattered materials by washing, scraping, or other methods. Do not scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces.

C. Protect work of other trades against damage from finish application. Correct damage by cleaning, repairing, replacing, and refinishing, as approved by Architect, and leave in an undamaged condition.

D. At completion of construction activities of other trades, touch up and restore damaged or defaced finished wood surfaces.

3.05 INTERIOR WOOD-FINISH-SYSTEM SCHEDULE

A. Wood substrates, including wood wall and ceiling board and trim – New Work. 1. Polyurethane Varnish over Stain System: a. Stain: One coat stain, semi-transparent, for interior wood. b. Varnish: Two coats varnish, interior, waterborne polyurethane, satin.

END OF SECTION

STAINING AND TRANSPARENT FINISHING 09 9300 - 4 8318.02 | 10-9-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 10 1100

VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Tackboards.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Tackboard: Framed or unframed, tackable, visual display board assembly.

B. Visual Display Board Assembly: Visual display surface that is factory fabricated into composite panel form, either with or without a perimeter frame; includes chalkboards, markerboards, and tackboards.

C. Visual Display Surface: Surfaces that are used to convey information visually, including surfaces of chalkboards, markerboards, tackboards, and surfacing materials that are not fabricated into composite panel form but are applied directly to walls.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for visual display surfaces.

B. Shop Drawings: For visual display surfaces. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Show locations of panel joints. 2. Show locations of special-purpose graphics for visual display surfaces. 3. Include sections of typical trim members.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of visual display surface indicated, for units with factory-applied color finishes, and as follows:

1. Actual sections of tackboard assembly.

VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 10 1100 - 1 8318.02 | 10-9-2015 Gladwyne Library

2. Fabric swatches of vinyl-fabric-faced tack assemblies. 3. Include accessory Samples to verify color selected.

D. Samples for Verification: For each type of visual display surface indicated.

1. Visual Display Surface: Not less than 8-1/2 by 11 inches (215 by 280 mm), mounted on substrate indicated for final Work. Include one panel for each type, color, and texture required. 2. Trim: 6-inch- (152-mm-) long sections of each trim profile. 3. Display Rail: 6-inch- (152-mm-) long sections. 4. Accessories: Full-size Sample of each type of accessory.

E. Product Schedule: For visual display surfaces. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

F. Qualification Data: For qualified Installer.

G. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency, for surface-burning characteristics of fabrics.

H. Maintenance Data: For visual display surfaces to include in maintenance manuals.

I. Warranties: Sample of special warranties.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: Obtain visual display surfaces from single source from single manufacturer.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver factory-built visual display surfaces, including factory-applied trim where indicated, completely assembled in one piece without joints, where possible. If dimensions exceed maximum manufactured panel size, provide two or more pieces of equal length as acceptable to Architect. When overall dimensions require delivery in separate units, prefit components at the factory, disassemble for delivery, and make final joints at the site.

B. Store visual display surfaces vertically with packing materials between each unit.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install visual display surfaces until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is

VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 10 1100 - 2 8318.02 | 10-9-2015 Gladwyne Library

complete, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

B. Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of construction contiguous with visual display surfaces by field measurements before fabrication.

1. Allow for trimming and fitting where taking field measurements before fabrication might delay the Work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS, GENERAL

A. Natural Cork Sheet: Seamless, single-layer, compressed fine-grain cork sheet; bulletin board quality; face sanded for natural finish with surface-burning characteristics indicated.

B. Vinyl Fabric: Mildew resistant, washable, complying with FS CCC-W-408D, Type II, burlap weave; weighing not less than 13 oz./sq. yd. (440 g/sq. m); with surface-burning characteristics indicated.

C. Hardboard: ANSI A135.4, tempered.

D. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-1, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.

E. Fiberboard: ASTM C 208.

F. Extruded Aluminum: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063.

2.2 TACKBOARD ASSEMBLIES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. AARCO Products, Inc. 2. ADP Lemco, Inc. 3. Bangor Cork Company, Inc. 4. Best-Rite Manufacturing. 5. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. 6. Egan Visual Inc. 7. Ghent Manufacturing, Inc. 8. Marsh Industries, Inc.; Visual Products Group. 9. Platinum Visual Systems; a division of ABC School Equipment, Inc. 10. PolyVision Corporation; a Steelcase company.

B. Vinyl-Fabric-Faced Tackboard TB-1: 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick, vinyl-fabric-faced cork sheet factory laminated to 1/4-inch- (6-mm-) thick hardboard backing.

VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 10 1100 - 3 8318.02 | 10-9-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.3 CHALKBOARD, MARKERBOARD AND TACKBOARD ACCESSORIES

A. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricated from not less than 0.062-inch- (1.57-mm-) thick, extruded aluminum; of size and shape indicated on Drawings.

1. Field-Applied Trim: Manufacturer's standard, snap-on trim with no visible screws or exposed joints.

2.4 FABRICATION

A. Visual Display Boards: Field assemble visual display boards unless otherwise indicated.

1. Where factory-applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to visual display boards at manufacturer's factory before shipment.

B. Modular Visual Display Boards: Fabricated with integral panel clips attached to core material.

C. Aluminum Frames and Trim: Fabricate units straight and of single lengths, keeping joints to a minimum. Miter corners to a neat, hairline closure.

1. Where factory-applied trim is indicated, trim shall be assembled and attached to visual display units at manufacturer's factory before shipment.

2.5 GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS

A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes.

B. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

C. Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

2.6 ALUMINUM FINISHES

A. Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.

2.7 VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACE SCHEDULE

A. Tackboard TB-1: Field assembled.

1. Tack Surface: Vinyl-fabric-faced tackboard assembly.

a. Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors.

2. Corners: Square.

VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 10 1100 - 4 8318.02 | 10-9-2015 Gladwyne Library

3. Width: As indicated on Drawings. 4. Height: As indicated on Drawings. 5. Mounting: Wall. 6. Mounting Height: As indicated on Drawings. 7. Edges: Concealed by trim.

a. Field-Applied Aluminum Trim: Manufacturer's standard style, with clear anodic finish.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, surface conditions of wall, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

B. Examine walls and partitions for proper preparation and backing for visual display surfaces.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.

B. Clean substrates of substances that could impair the performance of and affect the smooth, finished surfaces of visual display boards, including dirt, mold, and mildew.

C. Prepare surfaces to achieve a smooth, dry, clean surface free of flaking, unsound coatings, cracks, defects, projections, depressions, and substances that will impair bond between visual display surfaces and wall surfaces.

3.3 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. General: Install visual display surfaces in locations and at mounting heights indicated on Drawings, or if not indicated, at heights indicated below. Keep perimeter lines straight, level, and plumb. Provide grounds, clips, backing materials, adhesives, brackets, anchors, trim, and accessories necessary for complete installation.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF FIELD-FABRICATED VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS AND ASSEMBLIES

A. Field-Assembled Visual Display Units: Coordinate field-assembled units with grounds, trim, and accessories indicated. Join parts with a neat, precision fit.

VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 10 1100 - 5 8318.02 | 10-9-2015 Gladwyne Library

1. Make joints only where total length exceeds maximum manufactured length. Fabricate with minimum number of joints, balanced around center of board, as acceptable to Architect and as indicated on approved Shop Drawings. 2. Where size of visual display boards or other conditions require support in addition to normal trim, provide structural supports or modify trim as indicated or as selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard structural support accessories to suit conditions indicated.

3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Clean visual display surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Attach one cleaning label to visual display surface in each room.

B. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled areas.

C. Cover and protect visual display surfaces after installation and cleaning.

END OF SECTION

VISUAL DISPLAY SURFACES 10 1100 - 6 8318.02 | 10-8-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 10 1400

SIGNAGE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following: 1. Panel signs.

B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary information and directional signs. 2. Division 22 for labels, tags, and nameplates for plumbing systems and equipment. 3. Division 23 for labels, tags, and nameplates for HVAC systems and equipment. 4. Division 26 for labels, tags, and nameplates for electrical equipment.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines: U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's "Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities; Architectural Barriers Act (ABA) Accessibility Guidelines."

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

B. Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details for signs. 1. Show sign mounting heights, locations of supplementary supports to be provided by others, and accessories. 2. Provide message list, typestyles, graphic elements, including tactile characters and Braille, and layout for each sign.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of actual units or sections of units showing the full range of colors available for the following: 1. Phenolic photopolymer.

D. Samples for Verification: For each of the following products and for the full range of color, texture, and sign material indicated, of sizes indicated: 1. Panel Signs: Not less than 12 inches (305 mm) square.

SIGNAGE 10 1400 - 1 8318.02 | 10-8-2015 Gladwyne Library

2. Accessories: Manufacturer's full-size unit.

E. Sign Schedule: Use same designations indicated on Sign Schedule at the end of this section.

F. Qualification Data: For Installer and fabricator.

G. Maintenance Data: For signs to include in maintenance manuals.

H. Warranty: Special warranty specified in this Section.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Fabricator of products.

B. Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom-fabricate products similar to those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in- service performance.

C. Source Limitations for Signs: Obtain each sign type indicated from one source from a single manufacturer.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable provisions in ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines, ICC/ANSI A117.1 and with code provisions as adopted by authorities having jurisdiction. 1. Interior Code Signage: Provide signage as required by accessibility regulations and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. These include, but are not limited to, the following: a. Elevator Signs: Sign Type C, see plan for elevator entrance locations. Text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction, indicating that in case of fire elevators are out of service and exits should be used instead. Provide one sign at each hall push-button station, unless otherwise indicated. b. Signs for Accessible Spaces: Sign Types scheduled as accessible.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Field Measurements: Verify recess openings by field measurements before fabrication and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate placement of anchorage devices with templates for installing signs.

1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of signs that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:

SIGNAGE 10 1400 - 2 8318.02 | 10-8-2015 Gladwyne Library

a. Deterioration of metal and polymer finishes beyond normal weathering. b. Deterioration of embedded graphic image, colors and sign lamination. 2. Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Acrylic Sheet: ASTM D 4802, Category A-1 (cell-cast sheet), Type UVA (UV absorbing).

2.2 PANEL SIGNS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. APCO Graphics, Inc. 2. ASI-Modulex, Inc. 3. Best Sign Systems Inc. 4. Innerface Sign Systems, Inc. 5. Mohawk Sign Systems.

B. Interior Panel Signs: Provide smooth sign panel surfaces constructed to remain flat under installed conditions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1/16 inch (1.5 mm) measured diagonally from corner to corner, complying with the following requirements: 1. Laminated, Etched Photopolymer: Raised graphics with Braille 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) above surface with contrasting colors as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range and laminated to acrylic back. 2. Edge Condition: Square cut. 3. Corner Condition: Rounded to 1/2 inch radius. 4. Mounting: Unframed. a. Wall mounted with two-face tape and silicone adhesive. b. Manufacturer's standard anchors for substrates encountered. 5. Custom Paint Colors: Match Pantone color matching system. 6. Tactile Characters: Characters and Grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch (0.8 mm) above surface with contrasting colors, complying with ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC/ANSI A117.1.

2.3 FABRICATION

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard signs of configurations indicated. 1. Conceal fasteners if possible; otherwise, locate fasteners where they will be inconspicuous.

2.4 FINISHES, GENERAL

A. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.

SIGNAGE 10 1400 - 3 8318.02 | 10-8-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are not acceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.

B. Verify that items, including anchor inserts, are sized and located to accommodate signs.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Locate signs and accessories where indicated, using mounting methods of types described and complying with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Install signs level, plumb, and at heights indicated, with sign surfaces free of distortion and other defects in appearance. 2. Interior Wall Signs: Install signs on walls adjacent to latch side of door where applicable. Where not indicated or possible, such as double doors, install signs on nearest adjacent walls. Locate to allow approach within 3 inches (75 mm) of sign without encountering protruding objects or standing within swing of door.

B. Wall-Mounted Signs: Comply with sign manufacturer's written instructions except where more stringent requirements apply. 1. Two-Face Tape: Mount signs to smooth, nonporous surfaces. Do not use this method for vinyl-covered or rough surfaces. 2. Silicone-Adhesive Mounting: Attach signs to irregular, porous, or vinyl-covered surfaces. Use two-face tape to hold sign in place until adhesive has fully cured. 3. Shim Plate Mounting: Provide 1/8-inch- thick, concealed aluminum shim plates with predrilled and countersunk holes, at locations indicated, and where other mounting methods are not practicable. Attach plate with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate. Attach panel signs to plate using method specified above. 4. Mechanical Fasteners: Use nonremovable mechanical fasteners placed through predrilled holes. Attach signs with fasteners and anchors suitable for secure attachment to substrate as recommended in writing by sign manufacturer. 5. Signs Mounted on Glass: Provide matching opaque plate on opposite side of glass to conceal mounting materials.

SIGNAGE 10 1400 - 4 8318.02 | 10-8-2015 Gladwyne Library

3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. After installation, clean soiled sign surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect signs from damage until acceptance by Owner.

3.4 PANEL SIGN SCHEDULE

A. Sign Type A: Room Name.

1. Sign Size: 8” x 8” 2. Material: Laminated, Etched Photopolymer 3. Background Finish/Color: As selected 4. Character Finish/Color: As selected 5. Character Size: As approved by Architect to accommodate required copy 6. Text/Message: (Room Name) 7. Room: Staff Workroom. 8. Quantity: Refer to floor plans for room designation.

B. Sign Type B: Accessible Toilet Rooms.

1. Sign Size: 8” x 8” 2. Material: Laminated, Etched Photopolymer 3. Background Finish/Color: As selected 4. Character Finish/Color: As selected 5. Character Size: As approved by Architect to accommodate required copy 6. Text/Message: “Toilet” 7. Graphic: Yes; Universal Accessibility Symbol and Male and Female Figure. 8. Room: Restrooms 101 and 102. 9. Quantity: Refer to floor plans.

C. Sign Type C: Interior Code Signage (message)

1. Sign Size: minimum 8” x 8” 2. Material: Laminated, Etched Photopolymer 3. Background Finish/Color: As selected 4. Character Finish/Color: As selected 5. Character Size: As approved by Architect to accommodate required copy 6. Text/Message: As required by authorities having jurisdiction. See par. 1.5.D.1. 7. Message Slot: No 8. Room: At all required locations. See par. 1.5.D.1. 9. Quantity: Four (one at each elevator entrance).

D. Room names and numbers are subject to revision when shop drawings are submitted.

END OF SECTION

SIGNAGE 10 1400 - 5

8318.02 | 10-8-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 10 2800

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Public-use and private-use toilet room accessories. 2. Childcare accessories.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.02 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include the following: 1. Construction details and dimensions. 2. Anchoring and mounting requirements, including requirements for cutouts in other work and substrate preparation. 3. Material and finish descriptions. 4. Features that will be included for Project. 5. Manufacturer's warranty.

B. Samples: Full size, for each accessory item to verify design, operation, and finish requirements. 1. Approved full-size Samples will be returned and may be used in the Work.

C. Product Schedule: Indicating types, quantities, sizes, and installation locations by room of each accessory required. 1. Identify locations using room designations indicated. 2. Identify products using designations indicated.

1.03 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For toilet and bath accessories to include in maintenance manuals.

B. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Source Limitations: For products listed together in the same Part 2 articles, obtain products from single source from single manufacturer.

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 2800 - 1 8318.02 | 10-8-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.05 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate accessory locations with other work to prevent interference with clearances required for access by people with disabilities, and for proper installation, adjustment, operation, cleaning, and servicing of accessories.

B. Deliver inserts and anchoring devices set into concrete or masonry as required to prevent delaying the Work.

1.06 WARRANTY

A. Mirror Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to replace mirrors that develop visible silver spoilage defects and that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Warranty Period: 15 years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 MATERIALS

A. Stainless Steel: ASTM A 666, Type 304, 0.031-inch minimum nominal thickness unless otherwise indicated.

B. Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Designation CS (cold rolled, commercial steel), 0.036- inch minimum nominal thickness.

C. Galvanized-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, with G60 hot-dip zinc coating.

D. Galvanized-Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153/A 153M, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication.

E. Fasteners: Screws, bolts, and other devices of same material as accessory unit and tamper-and- theft resistant where exposed, and of galvanized steel where concealed.

F. Mirrors: ASTM C 1503, Mirror Glazing Quality, clear-glass mirrors, nominal 6.0 mm thick.

G. ABS Plastic: Acrylonitrile-butadiene-styrene resin formulation.

2.02 TOILET ACCESSORIES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated or comparable product by one of the following: 1. A & J Washroom Accessories, Inc. 2. American Specialties, Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation.

B. Grab Bars TA-01, TA-02 & TA-03: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; B-6806 Series Concealed Mounting Grab Bar. 2. Mounting: Flanges with concealed fasteners. 3. Material: Stainless steel, 0.05 inch (1.3 mm) thick.

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 2800 - 2 8318.02 | 10-8-2015 Gladwyne Library

a. Finish: Smooth, No. 4 finish (satin). 4. Outside Diameter: 1-1/2 inches (38 mm). 5. Configuration and Length: As indicated on Drawings.

C. Toilet Tissue (Jumbo-Roll) Dispenser Type TA-04: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; B-2892 Classic Series Twin Jumbo-roll Toilet Tissue Dispenser. 2. Description: Two-roll unit with sliding panel to expose other roll. 3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Capacity: 10-inch- diameter rolls. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 6. Lockset: Tumbler type. 7. Refill Indicator: Pierced slots at front.

D. Seat-Cover Dispenser Type TA-05: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; B-4221 Contura Series Seat-Cover Dispenser. 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Minimum Capacity: 250 seat covers. 4. Exposed Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

E. Sanitary-Napkin Disposal Unit Type TA-06: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; B-270 Contura Series Sanitary Napkin Disposal. 2. Mounting: Surface mounted. 3. Cover: Hinged, disposal-opening cover. 4. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

F. Robe Hook Type TA-07: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; B-76717 Classic Series Single Robe Hook. 2. Description: Single-prong unit. 3. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin).

G. Combination Towel (Folded) Dispenser/Waste Receptacle Type TA-08: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; B-43944 Contura Series paper Towel Despenser/Waste Receptacle. 2. Description: Combination unit for dispensing C-fold or multifold towels, with removable waste receptacle. 3. Mounting: Recessed with projecting receptacle. a. Designed for nominal 4-inch wall depth. 4. Minimum Towel-Dispenser Capacity: 600 C-fold or 800 multifold paper towels. 5. Minimum Waste-Receptacle Capacity: 15 gal. 6. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin). 7. Liner: Reusable, vinyl waste-receptacle liner. 8. Lockset: Tumbler type for towel-dispenser compartment.

H. Soap Dispenser Type TA-09: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Kimberly Clark; KIM92144 Professional Skin Cassette Soap Dispenser and KIM 91070 Mounting Bracket. 2. Description: Designed for dispensing soap in foam form.

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 2800 - 3 8318.02 | 10-8-2015 Gladwyne Library

3. Mounting: Surface mounted. 4. Size: 5 inches wide by 5-1/4 inches deep by 8-3/8 inches high. 5. Capacity: 1000 ml. 6. Materials: High-impact ABS plastic. 7. Color: White.

I. Mirror Unit Type TA-10: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.; B-293 Series Tilt Mirror. 2. Frame: Stainless steel, fixed tilt. a. Corners: Welded and ground smooth. 3. Hangers: Produce rigid, tamper- and theft-resistant installation, using method indicated below. a. Wall bracket of galvanized steel, equipped with concealed locking devices requiring a special tool to remove. 4. Size: 24- by 36- inch.

J. TA-11: Not Used

2.03 CHILDCARE ACCESSORIES

A. Basis-of-Design Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated on Drawings or comparable product by one of the following: 1. Bradley Corporation. 2. Brocar Products, Inc.

B. Diaper-Changing Station Type TA-12: 1. Basis-of-Design Product: Koala Kare Products; KB110-SSWM Horizontal Wall Mounted . 2. Description: Horizontal unit that opens by folding down from stored position and with child-protection strap.

3. Mounting: Surface mounted, with unit projecting not more than 4 inches (100 mm) from wall when closed. 4. Operation: By pneumatic shock-absorbing mechanism. 5. Material and Finish: Stainless steel, No. 4 finish (satin), with replaceable insulated polystyrene tray liner and rounded plastic corners. 6. Liner Dispenser: Built in.

2.04 FABRICATION

A. General: Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, and exposed edges rolled. Hang doors and access panels with full-length, continuous hinges. Equip units for concealed anchorage and with corrosion-resistant backing plates.

B. Keys: Provide universal keys for internal access to accessories for servicing and resupplying. Provide minimum of six keys to Owner's representative.

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 2800 - 4 8318.02 | 10-8-2015 Gladwyne Library

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 INSTALLATION

A. Install accessories according to manufacturers' written instructions, using fasteners appropriate to substrate indicated and recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units level, plumb, and firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated.

B. Grab Bars: Install to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf, when tested according to ASTM F 446.

3.02 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Adjust accessories for unencumbered, smooth operation. Replace damaged or defective items.

B. Remove temporary labels and protective coatings.

C. Clean and polish exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written recommendations.

END OF SECTION

TOILET, BATH, AND LAUNDRY ACCESSORIES 10 2800 - 5

8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 14 2400

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (BASE BID)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes machine room-less, hole-less hydraulic passenger elevators.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 01 5000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for temporary use of elevators for construction purposes. 2. Section 03 3000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in concrete. 3. Section 04 2000 "Unit Masonry" for setting sleeves, inserts, and anchoring devices in masonry and for grouting elevator entrance frames installed in masonry walls. 4. Section 05 1200 "Structural Steel Framing" for the following: a. Attachment plates, angle brackets, and other preparation of structural steel for fastening guide-rail brackets. b. Hoist beams. c. Structural-steel shapes for subsills that are part of steel frame.

5. Section 05 5000 "Metal Fabrications" for the following: a. Attachment plates and angle brackets for supporting guide-rail brackets. b. Hoist beams. c. Structural-steel shapes for subsills. d. Pit ladders. e. Cants in hoistways made from steel sheet. 6. Section 09 6229 "Cork Flooring"for finish flooring in elevator cars. 7. Section 22 1429 "Sump Pumps" for sump pumps, sumps, and sump covers in elevator pits. 8. Section 27 1500 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for telephone service for elevators. 9. Section 28 3111 "Extend Existing Fire-Alarm System" for smoke detectors in elevator lobbies to initiate emergency recall operation and for connection to elevator controllers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions in ASME A17.1/CSA B44 apply to work of this Section.

B. Service Elevator: A passenger elevator that is also used to carry freight.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (BASE BID) 14 2400 - 1 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Include capacities, sizes, performances, operations, safety features, finishes, and similar information. Include product data for car enclosures, hoistway entrances, and operation, control, and signal systems.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, elevations, sections, and large-scale details indicating service at each landing, machine room layout, coordination with building structure, relationships with other construction, and locations of equipment. 2. Include large-scale layout of car-control station. 3. Indicate maximum dynamic and static loads imposed on building structure at points of support, and maximum and average power demands.

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For finishes involving color selection.

D. Samples for Verification: For exposed car, hoistway door and frame, and signal equipment finishes; 3-inch- (75-mm-) square Samples of sheet materials; and 4-inch (100-mm) lengths of running trim members.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

B. Seismic Qualification Certificates: For elevator equipment, accessories, and components, from manufacturer. 1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether withstand certification is based on actual test of assembled components or on calculation. 2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions. 3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is based and their installation requirements.

C. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by elevator manufacturer certifying that hoistway, pit, and machine room layout and dimensions, as shown on Drawings, and electrical service, as shown and specified, are adequate for elevator system being provided.

D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Operation and Maintenance Data: For elevators to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. 1. In addition to items specified in Section 01 7823 "Operation and Maintenance Data," include diagnostic and repair information available to manufacturer's and Installer's maintenance personnel.

B. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (BASE BID) 14 2400 - 2 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

C. Continuing Maintenance Proposal: Submit a continuing maintenance proposal from Installer to Owner with terms, conditions, and obligations as set forth in, and in same form as, "Draft of Elevator Maintenance Agreement" at end of this Section, starting on date initial maintenance service is concluded.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or an authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle materials, components and equipment in manufacturer's protective packaging. Store materials, components, and equipment off of ground, under cover, and in a dry location.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate installation of sleeves, block outs, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and other items that are embedded in concrete or masonry for elevator equipment. Furnish templates, sleeves, elevator equipment with integral anchors, and installation instructions and deliver to Project site in time for installation.

B. Coordinate locations and dimensions of other work relating to hydraulic elevators including pit ladders; sumps and floor drains in pits; entrance subsills; electrical service; and electrical outlets, lights, and switches in hoistways, pits, and machine rooms.

1.10 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair, restore, or replace elevator work that fails in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1. Failures include, but are not limited to, operation or control system failure, including excessive malfunctions; performances below specified ratings; excessive wear; unusual deterioration or aging of materials or finishes; unsafe conditions; need for excessive maintenance; abnormal noise or vibration; and similar unusual, unexpected, and unsatisfactory conditions. 2. Warranty Period: Two year(s) from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BASIC REQUIREMENTS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements described herein, provide a machine room-less, hole- less, hydraulic elevator.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (BASE BID) 14 2400 - 3 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Source Limitations: Obtain elevator and major elevator components, including pump-and-tank units, plunger-cylinder assemblies, jacks, controllers, signal fixtures, door operators, car frames, cars, and entrances from single manufacturer.

C. Serviceability: All serviceable components shall be accessed from inside the building enclosure. It is noted that three of the hoistway walls are constructed using a glazed aluminum curtain wall, and one of those walls is an exterior building wall. Service access may not be through any of the three glazed aluminum curtain walls. 1. Locate controller at floor 3 (building first floor) in the hoistway enclosure wall (existing building wall) immediately adjacent to the hoistway entrance.

D. Elevator and all associated components and accessories must fit inside the hoistway as it is currently documented on the drawings. The hoistway cannot be enlarged to accommodate the elevator specified in this Section.

E. Structural Support: Elevator and all associated components and accessories must work with the structural steel support system and attachment points shown on the drawings. Contractor shall compensate the Owner for any redesign of the structural steel support system and any additional steel that may be required to accommodate the elevator.

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.

B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section 407 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC A117.1.

2.3 ELEVATORS

A. Elevator System, General: Manufacturer's standard elevator systems. Unless otherwise indicated, manufacturers' standard components shall be used, as included in standard elevator systems and as required for complete system.

B. Elevator Description: 1. Elevator Number: 1. 2. Type: Hole-less, machine room-less, beside-the-car, telescoping, dual cylinder. 3. Rated Load: 2100 lb (953 kg). 4. Rated Speed: 45 fpm to 150 fpm. 5. Number of Stops: Four 6. Entrances: Front and rear. 7. Operation System: Selective-collective automatic. 8. Auxiliary Operations: a. Battery-powered lowering. b. Automatic dispatching of loaded car. c. Nuisance call cancel.

9. Security Features: Keyswitch operation, keypad operation, and car-to-lobby feature. a. Allow Owner to lock-out access to any floor of building via keypad.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (BASE BID) 14 2400 - 4 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

10. Dual Car-Control Stations: Provide two car-control stations, one adjacent to both the front and rear doors; equip only one with required keyswitches, if any. 11. Car Enclosures: a. Inside Width: 68 inches from side wall to side wall. b. Inside Depth: 51 inches from back wall to front wall (return panels). c. Inside Height: 94 inches to underside of ceiling. d. Front and Rear Walls (Return Panels): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish with integral car door frames. e. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. f. Side Wall Panels: Glass. g. Door Faces (Interior): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. h. Door Sills: Aluminum, mill finish. i. Ceiling: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish, with 6 to 9 LED light fixtures. j. Handrails: 1-1/2 inches round satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish, at sides of car. k. Floor prepared to receive cork rubber floor tile as specified in Section 09 6229 "Cork Flooring". l. Floor Thickness, Including Setting Materials: 5/16 inch above plywood subfloor.

12. Hoistway Entrances: a. Width: 36 inches. b. Height: 84 inches. c. Type: Single-speed side sliding. d. Frames: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. e. Doors: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. f. Sills: Aluminum, mill finish.

13. Hall Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. 14. Additional Requirements: a. Provide inspection certificate in each car, mounted under acrylic cover with frame made from satin bronze, lacquered. b. Provide hooks for protective pads and one complete set of full-height protective pads. c. Car shall be provided with factory installed air conditioning system.

2.4 SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

A. Power Unit (Oil Pumping and Control Mechanism): Self-contained unit located in the elevator pit consisting of the following items: 1. NEMA 4/Sealed Oil reservoir with tank cover including vapor removing tank breather. 2. Oil hydraulic pump. 3. Electric motor. 4. Electronic oil control valve with the following components built into single housing; high pressure relief valve, check valve, automatic unloading up start valve, lowering and leveling valve, and electro-magnetic controlling solenoids.

B. Pump Units: Positive-displacement type with a maximum of 10 percent variation between no load and full load and with minimum pulsations.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (BASE BID) 14 2400 - 5 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

C. Motor: Standard manufacturer’s motor specifically designed for oil-hydraulic elevator service. Duty rating – motors shall be capable of 80 starts per hour with a 30% motor run time during each start.

D. Oil Control Unit: Provide the following components built into a single housing (welded manifolds with separate valves to accomplish each function are not acceptable). Adjustments shall be accessible and be made without removing the assembly from the oil line: 1. Relief Valve: Adjustable and capable of bypassing the total oil flow without increasing back pressure more than 10 percent above that required to barely open the valve. 2. Up Start and Stop Valve: Adjustable and designed to bypass oil flow during start and stop of motor pump assembly. Valve shall close slowly, gradually diverting oil to or from the jack unit, ensuring smooth up starts and up stops. 3. Check Valve: Designed to close quietly without permitting any perceptible reverse flow. 4. Lowering Valve and Leveling Valve: Adjustable for down start speed, lowering speed, leveling speed and stopping speed to ensure smooth "down" starts and stops. Leveling valve shall be designed to level the car to the floor in the direction the car is traveling after slowdown is initiated. 5. Provide with constant speed regulation in both up and down direction. Feature shall compensate for load changes, oil temperature, and viscosity changes.

E. Solid State Starting: Provide electronic starter featuring adjustable starting currents.

F. Provide secondary hydraulic power source (powered by 110VAC single phase) to allow elevator to raise (reposition) in the event of a system component failure, such as pump motor, starter, etc.

G. Jack Unit: Of sufficient size to lift the gross load the height specified. Factory test jack to insure adequate strength and freedom from leakage. Brittle material, such as gray cast iron, is prohibited in the jack construction. 1. Provide the following jack type: Twin post holeless telescopic 2-stage. Two jacks piped together, mounted one on each side of the car with each having two telescopic sections designed to extend in a synchronized manner when oil is pumped into the Assembly. 2. Each jack section will be guided from within the casing or the plunger assembly used to house the section. 3. Each plunger shall have a high pressure sealing system which will not allow for seal movement or displacement during the course of operation. 4. Each Jack Assembly shall have a check valve built into the assembly to allow for automatically re-syncing the two plunger sections by moving the jack to its fully contracted position. 5. Jack shall be designed to be mounted on the pit floor or in a recess in the pit floor. Each jack section shall have a bleeder valve to discharge any air trapped in the section.

H. Automatic Self-Leveling: Provide each elevator car with a self-leveling feature to automatically bring the car to the landings and correct for overtravel or undertravel. Self-leveling shall, within its zone, be automatic and independent of the operating device. The car shall be maintained approximately level with the landing irrespective of its load.

I. Wiring: Provide all necessary hoistway wiring in accordance with the National Electrical Code.

J. Pit Moisture/Water Sensor: Provide sensor located approximately 1 foot above the pit floor. Upon activation, elevator shall perform “flooded pit operation”, which shall run the car up to

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (BASE BID) 14 2400 - 6 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

the designated floor, cycle the doors and shut down and trip the circuit breaker shunt to remove 3 phase power from all equipment, including pit equipment.

K. Hydraulic Silencers: System shall have hydraulic silencer containing pulsation-absorbing material in blowout-proof housing at pump unit.

L. Piping: Size, type, and weight of piping as recommended by elevator manufacturer, with flexible connectors to minimize sound and vibration transmissions from power unit. 1. Casing for Underground Piping: Schedule 40 PVC pipe complying with ASTM D 1785, joined with PVC fittings complying with ASTM D 2466 and solvent cement complying with ASTM D 2564.

M. Hydraulic Fluid: Nontoxic, biodegradable, fire-resistant fluid made from vegetable oil with antioxidant, anticorrosive, antifoaming, and metal-passivating additives and approved by elevator manufacturer for use with elevator equipment.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Hydro Safe" by Hydro Safe Oil Division, Inc.

N. Motorized Oil Line Shut-off Valve: Provide valve that can be remotely operated from the controller landing service panel. 1. Provide a means for manual operation at the valve in the pit.

O. Inserts: Furnish required concrete and masonry inserts and similar anchorage devices for installing guide rails, machinery, and other components of elevator work. Device installation is specified in another Section.

P. Car Frame and Platform: Welded or bolted steel units.

Q. Guides: Roller guides; polymer-coated, nonlubricated sliding guides; or sliding guides with guide-rail lubricators. Provide guides at top and bottom of car and counterweight frames.

2.5 OPERATION SYSTEMS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system as required to provide type of operation indicated.

B. Auxiliary Operations: In addition to primary operation system features, provide the following operational features for elevator: 1. Single-Car Battery-Powered Lowering: If power fails and car is at a floor, it remains at that floor, opens its doors, and shuts down. If car is between floors, it is lowered to a preselected floor, opens its doors, and shuts down. If car is below the preselected floor, it is lowered to the next lower floor, opens its doors, and shuts down. System includes rechargeable battery and automatic recharging system. 2. Automatic Dispatching of Loaded Car: When car load exceeds 80 percent of rated capacity, doors start closing. 3. Nuisance Call Cancel: When car calls exceed a preset number while car load is less than a predetermined weight, all car calls are canceled. Preset number of calls and predetermined weight can be adjusted.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (BASE BID) 14 2400 - 7 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

C. Security Features: Provide the following security features, where indicated. Security features shall not affect emergency firefighters' service. 1. Keyswitch Operation: Push buttons are activated and deactivated by security keyswitches at car-control stations. Key is removable in either position.

2. Keypad Operation: Allows each landing to be restricted or unrestricted. When a restricted landing button is pressed, a "Restricted Floor" lamp lights and remains lit until landing access code has been entered into a keypad or predetermined time period has elapsed. Car calls for restricted landings do not register until landing access code is entered into keypad within predetermined time period after landing button is pressed. a. Access codes are programmed at each car operating panel using a security keyswitch. Keypad operation can be activated and deactivated by security keyswitch at main landing.

3. Car-to-Lobby Feature: Feature, activated by keyswitch at main lobby, that causes car to return immediately to lobby and open doors for inspection. On deactivation by keyswitch, calls registered before keyswitch activation are completed and normal operation is resumed.

2.6 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES

A. Infrared Array: Provide door reopening device with uniform array of 36 or more microprocessor-controlled, infrared light beams projecting across car entrance. Interruption of one or more light beams shall cause doors to stop and reopen.

B. Nudging Feature: After car doors are prevented from closing for predetermined adjustable time, through activating door reopening device, a loud buzzer shall sound and doors shall begin to close at reduced kinetic energy.

2.7 CAR ENCLOSURES

A. General: Provide enameled-steel car enclosures to receive removable wall panels, with removable car roof, access doors, power door operators, and air conditioning. 1. Provide standard railings complying with ASME A17.1/CSA B44 on car tops where required by ASME A17.1/CSA B44.

B. Materials and Finishes: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:

1. Subfloor: Exterior, underlayment grade plywood, not less than 5/8-inch (15.9-mm) nominal thickness. 2. Floor Finish: Cork rubber floor tile as specified in Section 09 6229. 3. Stainless-Steel Wall Panels: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless- steel sheet. 4. Glass Wall Panels: Manufacturer’s standard tempered and / or laminated glass panels, thickness as required to withstand Code required impact loads for guardrail systems. 5. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment. 6. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front and rear walls of car.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (BASE BID) 14 2400 - 8 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

7. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel sheet or by laminating stainless-steel sheet to exposed faces and edges of enameled cold- rolled steel doors using adhesive that fully bonds metal to metal without telegraphing or oil-canning. 8. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on car doors. 9. Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick. 10. Metal Ceiling: Flush panels, with six to nine LED downlights. Align ceiling panel joints with joints between wall panels. 11. Handrails: Manufacturer's standard handrails, of shape, metal, and finish indicated.

2.8 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES

A. Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Manufacturer's standard horizontal-sliding, door-and-frame hoistway entrances complete with track systems, hardware, sills, and accessories. Frame size and profile shall accommodate hoistway wall construction.

1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, frames shall be self-supporting with reinforced head sections.

B. Fire-Rated Hoistway Entrance Assemblies: Door and frame assemblies shall comply with NFPA 80 and be listed and labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction based on testing at as close-to-neutral pressure as possible according to NFPA 252 or UL 10B. 1. Fire-Protection Rating: 1-1/2 hours.

C. Materials and Fabrication: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 1. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel sheet or by laminating stainless-steel sheet to exposed faces and edges of enameled cold- rolled steel doors using adhesive that fully bonds metal to metal without telegraphing or oil-canning. 2. Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed from stainless-steel sheet. 3. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel sheet. 4. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on doors matching door edges. 5. Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick. 6. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M.

2.9 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT

A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with LEDs.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (BASE BID) 14 2400 - 9 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2. Provide "No Smoking" sign matching car-control station, either integral with car-control station or mounted adjacent to it, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Engrave “Elevator Number 1” and “Capacity 2100 lbs.” in control station.

C. Emergency Communication System: Two-way voice communication system, with visible signal, which dials preprogrammed number of monitoring station and does not require handset use. System is contained in flush-mounted cabinet, with identification, instructions for use, and battery backup power supply.

D. Car Position Indicator: Provide illuminated, digital-type car position indicator, located above car door or above car-control station. Also, provide audible signal to indicate to passengers that car is either stopping at or passing each of the floors served. Include travel direction arrows if not provided in car-control station.

E. Hall Push-Button Stations: Provide one hall push-button station at each landing. 1. Provide units with flat faceplate for mounting with body of unit recessed in wall. 2. Equip units with buttons for calling elevator and for indicating applicable direction of travel.

F. Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows; but provide single arrow at terminal landings. Provide manufacturer's standard wall-mounted units, for mounting above entrance frames.

G. Hall Annunciator: With each hall lantern, provide audible signals indicating car arrival and direction of travel. Signals sound once for up and twice for down. 1. At manufacturer's option, audible signals may be placed on cars.

H. Hall Position Indicators: Provide illuminated, digital-display-type position indicators, located above hoistway entrance at first floor. Provide units with flat faceplate for mounting and with body of unit recessed in wall. 1. Integrate first-floor hall lanterns with hall position indicators.

I. Emergency Pictorial Signs: Fabricate from materials matching hall push-button stations, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction, indicating that in case of fire elevators are out of service and exits should be used instead. Provide one sign at each hall push-button station unless otherwise indicated.

2.10 FINISH MATERIALS

A. General: Provide the following materials for exposed parts of elevator car enclosures, car doors, hoistway entrance doors and frames, and signal equipment as indicated.

B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed, matte finish.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.

D. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.

E. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (BASE BID) 14 2400 - 10 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

F. Glass: Provide Kind FT (fully tempered) heat-treated float glass (ASTM C 1048) and /or laminated glass (ASTM C 1172) with polyvinyl butyral interlayers, as required to meet performance requirements.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine elevator areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work. Verify critical dimensions and examine supporting structure and other conditions under which elevator work is to be installed.

B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install cylinder plumb and accurately centered for elevator car position and travel. Anchor securely in place, supported at pit floor and braced at intervals as needed to maintain alignment. Anchor cylinder guides at spacing needed to maintain alignment and avoid overstressing guides.

B. Welded Construction: Provide welded connections for installing elevator work where bolted connections are not required for subsequent removal or for normal operation, adjustment, inspection, maintenance, and replacement of worn parts. Comply with AWS workmanship and welding operator qualification standards.

C. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts to minimize vibration transmission to structure and structure-borne noise due to elevator system.

D. Install piping above the floor, where possible. Install underground piping in casing.

E. Lubricate operating parts of systems as recommended by manufacturers.

F. Alignment: Coordinate installation of hoistway entrances with installation of elevator guide rails for accurate alignment of entrances with car. Where possible, delay installation of sills and frames until car is operable in shaft. Reduce clearances to minimum, safe, workable dimension at each landing.

G. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch (6 mm), up or down, regardless of load and travel direction.

H. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.

I. Locate hall signal equipment for elevators as follows, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Locate hall push-button stations at location most convenient for approaching passengers. 2. Place hall lanterns either above or beside each hoistway entrance.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (BASE BID) 14 2400 - 11 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

3. Mount hall lanterns at a minimum of 72 inches (1829 mm) above finished floor.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Acceptance Testing: On completion of elevator installation and before permitting elevator use (either temporary or permanent), perform acceptance tests as required and recommended by ASME A17.1/CSA B44 and by governing regulations and agencies.

B. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times that tests are to be performed on elevators.

3.4 PROTECTION

A. Temporary Use: Comply with the following requirements for elevator used for construction purposes: 1. Provide car with temporary enclosure, either within finished car or in place of finished car, to protect finishes from damage. 2. Provide strippable protective film on entrance and car doors and frames. 3. Provide padded wood bumpers on entrance door frames covering jambs and frame faces. 4. Provide other protective coverings, barriers, devices, signs, and procedures as needed to protect elevator and elevator equipment. 5. Do not load elevators beyond their rated weight capacity. 6. Engage elevator Installer to provide full maintenance service. Include preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleanup, and adjustment as necessary for proper elevator operation at rated speed and capacity. Provide parts and supplies same as those used in the manufacture and installation of original equipment. 7. Engage elevator Installer to restore damaged work, if any, so no evidence remains of correction. Return items that cannot be refinished in the field to the shop, make required repairs and refinish entire unit, or provide new units as required.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate and perform general day-to –day inspection of elevator.

B. Check operation of elevator with Owner's personnel present before date of Substantial Completion and again not more than one month before end of warranty period. Determine that operation systems and devices are functioning properly.

3.6 MAINTENANCE

A. Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, maintenance service shall include 24 months' full maintenance by skilled employees of elevator Installer. Include monthly preventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication, cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper elevator operation. Parts and supplies shall be manufacturer's authorized replacement parts and supplies. 1. Perform maintenance during normal working hours.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (BASE BID) 14 2400 - 12 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2. Include 24-hour-per-day, 7-day-per-week emergency callback service with response time of two hours or less. END OF SECTION

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (BASE BID) 14 2400 - 13

8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 14 2401

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (ALTERNATE BID)

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes machine room-less, hole-less hydraulic passenger elevators.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions in ASME A17.1/CSA B44 apply to work of this Section.

B. Service Elevator: A passenger elevator that is also used to carry freight.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (ALTERNATE BID) 14 2401 - 1 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

C. Samples for Initial Selection: For finishes involving color selection.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer.

D. Sample Warranty: For special warranty.

1.6 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

B. Inspection and Acceptance Certificates and Operating Permits: As required by authorities having jurisdiction for normal, unrestricted elevator use.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (ALTERNATE BID) 14 2401 - 2 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Elevator manufacturer or an authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle materials, components and equipment in manufacturer's protective packaging. Store materials, components, and equipment off of ground, under cover, and in a dry location.

1.9 COORDINATION

1.10 WARRANTY

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 BASIC REQUIREMENTS

A. Subject to compliance with requirements described herein, provide a machine room-less, hole- less, hydraulic elevator.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (ALTERNATE BID) 14 2401 - 3 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with ASME A17.1/CSA B44.

B. Accessibility Requirements: Comply with Section 407 in the U.S. Architectural & Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines and with ICC A117.1.

2.3 ELEVATORS

9. Security Features: Keyswitch operation, keypad operation, and car-to-lobby feature. a. Allow Owner to lock-out access to any floor of building via keypad.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (ALTERNATE BID) 14 2401 - 4 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

10. Dual Car-Control Stations: Provide two car-control stations, one adjacent to both the front and rear doors; equip only one with required keyswitches, if any. 11. Car Enclosures: a. Inside Width: 68 inches from side wall to side wall. b. Inside Depth: 51 inches from back wall to front wall (return panels). c. Inside Height: 94 inches to underside of ceiling. d. Front and Rear Walls (Return Panels): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish with integral car door frames. e. Car Fixtures: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. f. Side Wall Panels: Plastic laminate. 1) Exterior face of side wall panels shall have a painted, finished appearance, as they will be visible through the glass hoistway enclosure walls. g. Reveals: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. h. Door Faces (Interior): Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish. i. Door Sills: Aluminum, mill finish. j. Ceiling: Satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish, with 6 to 9 LED light fixtures. k. Handrails: 1-1/2 inches round satin stainless steel, No. 4 finish, at sides of car. l. Floor prepared to receive cork rubber floor tile as specified in Section 09 6229 "Cork Flooring". m. Floor Thickness, Including Setting Materials: 5/16 inch above plywood subfloor.

2.4 SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (ALTERNATE BID) 14 2401 - 5 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Pump Units: Positive-displacement type with a maximum of 10 percent variation between no load and full load and with minimum pulsations.

E. Solid State Starting: Provide electronic starter featuring adjustable starting currents.

F. Provide secondary hydraulic power source (powered by 110VAC single phase) to allow elevator to raise (reposition) in the event of a system component failure, such as pump motor, starter, etc.

I. Wiring: Provide all necessary hoistway wiring in accordance with the National Electrical Code.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (ALTERNATE BID) 14 2401 - 6 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

J. Pit Moisture/Water Sensor: Provide sensor located approximately 1 foot above the pit floor. Upon activation, elevator shall perform “flooded pit operation”, which shall run the car up to the designated floor, cycle the doors and shut down and trip the circuit breaker shunt to remove 3 phase power from all equipment, including pit equipment.

K. Hydraulic Silencers: System shall have hydraulic silencer containing pulsation-absorbing material in blowout-proof housing at pump unit.

1. Product: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide "Hydro Safe" by Hydro Safe Oil Division, Inc.

N. Motorized Oil Line Shut-off Valve: Provide valve that can be remotely operated from the controller landing service panel. 1. Provide a means for manual operation at the valve in the pit.

P. Car Frame and Platform: Welded or bolted steel units.

Q. Guides: Roller guides; polymer-coated, nonlubricated sliding guides; or sliding guides with guide-rail lubricators. Provide guides at top and bottom of car and counterweight frames.

2.5 OPERATION SYSTEMS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard microprocessor operation system as required to provide type of operation indicated.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (ALTERNATE BID) 14 2401 - 7 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

3. Nuisance Call Cancel: When car calls exceed a preset number while car load is less than a predetermined weight, all car calls are canceled. Preset number of calls and predetermined weight can be adjusted.

2.6 DOOR REOPENING DEVICES

2.7 CAR ENCLOSURES

B. Materials and Finishes: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following:

1. Subfloor: Exterior, underlayment grade plywood, not less than 5/8-inch (15.9-mm) nominal thickness. 2. Floor Finish: Cork rubber floor tile as specified in Section 09 6229. 3. Stainless-Steel Wall Panels: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless- steel sheet. 4. Plastic-Laminate Wall Panels: Plastic laminate adhesively applied to manufacturer's standard honeycomb core with plastic-laminate panel backing and

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (ALTERNATE BID) 14 2401 - 8 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

manufacturer's standard protective edge trim. Panels have a flame-spread index of 25 or less, when tested according to ASTM E 84. Plastic-laminate color, texture, and pattern as selected by Architect from plastic-laminate manufacturer's full range. a. Exterior face of wall panels shall have a painted, finished appearance, as it will be visible through the glass hoistway enclosure walls. 5. Fabricate car with recesses and cutouts for signal equipment. 6. Fabricate car door frame integrally with front and rear walls of car. 7. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel sheet or by laminating stainless-steel sheet to exposed faces and edges of enameled cold- rolled steel doors using adhesive that fully bonds metal to metal without telegraphing or oil-canning. 8. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on car doors. 9. Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick. 10. Metal Ceiling: Flush panels, with six to nine LED downlights. Align ceiling panel joints with joints between wall panels. 11. Handrails: Manufacturer's standard handrails, of shape, metal, and finish indicated.

2.8 HOISTWAY ENTRANCES

1. Where gypsum board wall construction is indicated, frames shall be self-supporting with reinforced head sections.

C. Materials and Fabrication: Manufacturer's standards, but not less than the following: 1. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel sheet or by laminating stainless-steel sheet to exposed faces and edges of enameled cold- rolled steel doors using adhesive that fully bonds metal to metal without telegraphing or oil-canning. 2. Stainless-Steel Frames: Formed from stainless-steel sheet.Steel Subframes: Formed from cold- or hot-rolled steel sheet, with factory-applied enamel finish or rust-resistant primer. Fabricate to receive applied finish as indicated. 3. Stainless-Steel Doors: Flush, hollow-metal construction; fabricated from stainless-steel sheet. 4. Sight Guards: Provide sight guards on doors matching door edges. 5. Sills: Extruded metal, with grooved surface, 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) thick. 6. Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complying with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (ALTERNATE BID) 14 2401 - 9 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.9 SIGNAL EQUIPMENT

A. General: Provide hall-call and car-call buttons that light when activated and remain lit until call has been fulfilled. Fabricate lighted elements with LEDs.

B. Car-Control Stations: Provide manufacturer's standard recessed car-control stations. Mount in return panel adjacent to car door unless otherwise indicated. 1. Mark buttons and switches for required use or function. Use both tactile symbols and Braille. 2. Provide "No Smoking" sign matching car-control station, either integral with car-control station or mounted adjacent to it, with text and graphics as required by authorities having jurisdiction. 3. Engrave “Elevator Number 1” and “Capacity 2100 lbs.” in control station.

F. Hall Lanterns: Units with illuminated arrows; but provide single arrow at terminal landings. Provide manufacturer's standard wall-mounted units, for mounting above entrance frames.

2.10 FINISH MATERIALS

A. General: Provide the following materials for exposed parts of elevator car enclosures, car doors, hoistway entrance doors and frames, and signal equipment as indicated.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (ALTERNATE BID) 14 2401 - 10 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, commercial steel, Type B, exposed, matte finish.

C. Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304.

D. Stainless-Steel Tubing: ASTM A 554, Grade MT 304.

E. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B 221 (ASTM B 221M), Alloy 6063.

F. Plastic Laminate: High-pressure type complying with NEMA LD 3, Type HGS for flat applications and Type BKV for panel backing.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

B. Prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 INSTALLATION

C. Sound Isolation: Mount rotating and vibrating equipment on vibration-isolating mounts to minimize vibration transmission to structure and structure-borne noise due to elevator system.

D. Install piping above the floor, where possible. Install underground piping in casing.

E. Lubricate operating parts of systems as recommended by manufacturers.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (ALTERNATE BID) 14 2401 - 11 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

G. Leveling Tolerance: 1/4 inch (6 mm), up or down, regardless of load and travel direction.

H. Set sills flush with finished floor surface at landing. Fill space under sill solidly with nonshrink, nonmetallic grout.

3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

B. Advise Owner, Architect, and authorities having jurisdiction in advance of dates and times that tests are to be performed on elevators.

3.4 PROTECTION

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to operate and perform general day-to –day inspection of elevator.

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (ALTERNATE BID) 14 2401 - 12 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

3.6 MAINTENANCE

HYDRAULIC ELEVATORS (ALTERNATE BID) 14 2401 - 13

8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 22 0719

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping insulation. B. Jackets and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping. B. Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping: Placement of hangers and hanger inserts. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C177 - Standard Test Method for Steady-State Heat Flux Measurements and Thermal Transmission Properties by Means of the Guarded Hot Plate Apparatus; 2013. B. ASTM C547 - Standard Specification for Mineral Fiber Pipe Insulation; 2012. C. ASTM C795 - Standard Specification for Thermal Insulation for Use in Contact with Austenitic Stainless Steel; 2008 (Reapproved 2013). D. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2014. E. ASTM E96/E96M - Standard Test Methods for Water Vapor Transmission of Materials; 2013. F. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006. G. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product. B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours.

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 0719 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723. 2.02 GLASS FIBER A. Manufacturers: 1. Knauf Insulation: www.knaufusa.com. 2. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. 3. Owens Corning Corp: www.owenscorning.com. 4. CertainTeed Corporation;: www.certainteed.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; rigid molded, noncombustible. 1. 'K' value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 850 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. C. Insulation: ASTM C547 and ASTM C795; semi-rigid, noncombustible, end grain adhered to jacket. 1. 'K' value: ASTM C177, 0.24 at 75 degrees F. 2. Maximum service temperature: 650 degrees F. 3. Maximum moisture absorption: 0.2 percent by volume. D. Vapor Barrier Jacket: White Kraft paper with glass fiber yarn, bonded to aluminized film; moisture vapor transmission when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M of 0.02 perm- inches. 2.03 JACKETS A. PVC Plastic. 1. Manufacturers: a. Johns Manville Corporation: www.jm.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2. Jacket: One piece molded type fitting covers and sheet material, off-white color. a. Minimum Service Temperature: 0 degrees F. b. Maximum Service Temperature: 150 degrees F. c. Moisture Vapor Permeability: 0.002 perm inch, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E96/E96M. d. Thickness: 10 mil. e. Connections: Brush on welding adhesive. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. C. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature:

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 0719 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1. Provide vapor barrier jackets, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples and vapor barrier mastic. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with molded insulation of like material and thickness as adjacent pipe. Finish with glass cloth and vapor barrier adhesive or PVC fitting covers. D. Glass fiber insulated pipes conveying fluids above ambient temperature: 1. Provide standard jackets, with or without vapor barrier, factory-applied or field-applied. Secure with self-sealing longitudinal laps and butt strips with pressure sensitive adhesive. Secure with outward clinch expanding staples. 2. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe. Finish with glass cloth and adhesive or PVC fitting covers. E. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. 5. Insert material: Hydrous calcium silicate insulation or other heavy density insulating material suitable for the planned temperature range. F. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 07 84 00. G. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 10 feet above finished floor): Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting. H. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping. I. Heat Traced Piping: Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material, thickness, and finish as adjoining pipe. Size large enough to enclose pipe and heat tracer. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping. 3.03 SCHEDULES A. Plumbing Systems: 1. Domestic Hot Water Supply: a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1-1/2" and smaller shall be 1” thick. b. Glass Fiber Insulation: 2" and larger shall be 1-1/2” thick. 2. Domestic Cold Water: a. Glass Fiber Insulation: 1-1/2" and smaller shall be 1/2” thick. b. Glass Fiber Insulation: 2" and larger shall be 1” thick. 3. Roof Drainage Above Grade: 1" Thick down to floor

END OF SECTION

PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION 22 0719 - 3

8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 22 1005

PLUMBING PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pipe, pipe fittings, valves, and connections for piping systems. 1. Sanitary sewer. 2. Domestic water. 3. Gas. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping. B. Section 22 05 48 - Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. C. Section 22 05 53 - Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment. D. Section 22 07 19 - Plumbing Piping Insulation. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings: Classes 150 and 300; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2011. B. ASME B16.4 - Gray Iron Threaded Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2011. C. ASME B16.18 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2012 (ANSI B16.18). D. ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2013. E. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2012 (ANSI/ASME B31.1). F. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2014 (ANSI/ASME B31.9). G. ASME BPVC-IX - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section IX - Welding, Brazing, and Fusing Qualifications; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2013. H. ASTM A47/A47M - Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings; 1999 (Reapproved 2014). I. ASTM A53/A53M - Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc- Coated, Welded and Seamless; 2012. J. ASTM A234/A234M - Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High Temperature Service; 2013. K. ASTM B32 - Standard Specification for Solder Metal; 2008 (Reapproved 2014). L. ASTM B42 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Pipe, Standard Sizes; 2010. M. ASTM B88 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube; 2009. N. ASTM B88M - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tube (Metric); 2013.

PLUMBING PIPING 22 1005 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

O. ASTM B813 - Standard Specification for Liquid and Paste Fluxes for Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube; 2010. P. ASTM B828 - Standard Practice for Making Capillary Joints by Soldering of Copper and Copper Alloy Tube and Fittings; 2002 (Reapproved 2010). Q. ASTM D1785 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40, 80, and 120; 2012. R. ASTM D2239 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe (SIDR-PR) Based on Controlled Inside Diameter; 2012. S. ASTM D2241 - Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pressure-Rated Pipe (SDR Series); 2009. T. ASTM D2447 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80, Based on Outside Diameter; 2003. U. ASTM D2466 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40; 2013. V. ASTM D2564 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems; 2012. W. ASTM D2609 - Standard Specification for Plastic Insert Fittings for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe; 2002 (Reapproved 2009). X. ASTM D2665 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings; 2014. Y. ASTM D2846/D2846M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems; 2009b. Z. ASTM D2855 - Standard Practice for Making Solvent-Cemented Joints with Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Pipe and Fittings; 1996 (Reapproved 2010). AA. ASTM D3034 - Standard Specification for Type PSM Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2014. AB. ASTM F437 - Standard Specification for Threaded Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80; 2009. AC. ASTM F438 - Standard Specification for Socket-Type Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 40; 2009. AD. ASTM F439 - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe Fittings, Schedule 80; 2013. AE. ASTM F441/F441M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe, Schedules 40 and 80; 2013. AF. ASTM F442/F442M - Standard Specification for Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe (SDR-PR); 2013. AG. ASTM F477 - Standard Specification for Elastomeric Seals (Gaskets) for Joining Plastic Pipe; 2010. AH. ASTM F493 - Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Chlorinated Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (CPVC) Plastic Pipe and Fittings; 2010. AI. ASTM F679 - Standard Specification for Poly(Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Large-Diameter Plastic Gravity Sewer Pipe and Fittings; 2013. AJ. ASTM F708 - Standard Practice for Design and Installation of Rigid Pipe Hangers; 1992 (Reapproved 2008).

PLUMBING PIPING 22 1005 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

AK. AWWA C105/A21.5 - Polyethylene Encasement for Ductile-Iron Pipe Systems; American Water Works Association; 2010 (ANSI/AWWA C105/A21.5). AL. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains; American Water Works Association; 2005 (ANSI/AWWA C651). AM. CISPI 301 - Standard Specification for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; 2009. AN. CISPI 310 - Specification for Coupling for Use in Connection with Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste, and Vent Piping Applications; Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute; 2011 AO. ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2012. AP. ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Masonry Elements; 2012. AQ. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2013. AR. ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2013. AS. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection, Application, and Installation; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2009. AT. MSS SP-70 - Cast Iron Gate Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends; Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry, Inc.; 2011. AU. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code; National Fire Protection Association; 2012. AV. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2014. AW. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data on pipe materials, pipe fittings, valves, and accessories. Provide manufacturers catalog information. Indicate valve data and ratings. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves. D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Gladwyne Library's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Valve Repacking Kits: One for each type and size of valve. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Perform work in accordance with applicable codes. B. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body. C. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME BPVC-IX and applicable state labor regulations. D. Welder Qualifications: Certified in accordance with ASME BPVC-IX. E. Identify pipe with marking including size, ASTM material classification, ASTM specification, potable water certification, water pressure rating. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Perform Work in accordance with State of Pennsylvania plumbing code.

PLUMBING PIPING 22 1005 - 3 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Conform to applicable code for installation of backflow prevention devices. C. Provide certificate of compliance from authority having jurisdiction indicating approval of installation of backflow prevention devices. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept valves on site in shipping containers with labeling in place. Inspect for damage. B. Provide temporary protective coating on cast iron and steel valves. C. Provide temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation. D. Protect piping systems from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of the work, and isolating parts of completed system. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install underground piping when bedding is wet or frozen. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide piping, pipe fittings, and solder and flux (if used), that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content; label pipe and fittings. 2.02 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gasket and stainless steel clamp and shield assemblies. B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D2665, ASTM D3034, or ASTM F679. 1. Fittings: PVC. 2. Joints: Push-on, using ASTM F477 elastomeric gaskets. 2.03 SANITARY SEWER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Cast Iron Pipe: CISPI 301, hubless, service weight. 1. Fittings: Cast iron. 2. Joints: CISPI 310, neoprene gaskets and stainless steel clamp-and-shield assemblies. B. PVC Pipe: ASTM D1785 Schedule 40, or ASTM D2241 SDR 26 for not less than 150 psi pressure rating. 1. Fittings: ASTM D2466, PVC. 2. Joints: Solvent welded, with ASTM D2564 Solvent cement. 3. PVC shall not be utilized in a plenum rated ceiling. 2.04 WATER PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Copper Pipe: ASTM B42, hard drawn. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22 wrought copper and bronze. 2. Joints: ASTM B 32, alloy Sn95 solder. B. PE Pipe: ASTM D2239, or ASTM D2447 Schedule 40. 1. Fittings: ASTM D2609, PE. 2. Joints: Mechanical with stainless steel clamp. 2.05 WATER PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Copper Tube(Domestic Water 2" and below): ASTM B88 (ASTM B88M), Type L (B), Drawn (H). 1. Fittings: ASME B16.18, cast copper alloy or ASME B16.22, wrought copper and bronze.

PLUMBING PIPING 22 1005 - 4 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

2. Joints: ASTM B32, alloy Sn95 solder. B. Steel Pipe (Domestic Water above 2"): ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40, galvanized, using one of the following joint types: 1. Threaded Joints: ASME B16.4 cast iron fittings 2. Grooved Joints: AWWA C606 grooved pipe, cast iron fittings, and mechanical couplings. C. CPVC Pipe: ASTM D2846/D2846M, ASTM F441/F441M, or ASTM F442/F442M. 1. Fittings: CPVC; ASTM D2846/D2846M, ASTM F437, ASTM F438, or ASTM F439. 2. Joints: ASTM D2846/D2846M, solvent weld with ASTM F493 solvent cement. 2.06 NATURAL GAS PIPING, BURIED WITHIN 5 FEET OF BUILDING A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type. 2. Joints: ASME B31.1, welded. 3. Jacket: AWWA C105/A21.5 polyethylene jacket or double layer, half-lapped 10 mil polyethylene tape. 2.07 NATURAL GAS PIPING, ABOVE GRADE A. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53/A53M Schedule 40 black. 1. Fittings: ASME B16.3, malleable iron, or ASTM A234/A234M, wrought steel welding type. 2. Joints: NFPA 54, threaded or welded to ASME B31.1. 2.08 FLANGES, UNIONS, AND COUPLINGS A. Unions for Pipe Sizes 3 Inches and Under: 1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded unions. 2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 bronze unions with soldered joints. B. Flanges for Pipe Size Over 1 Inch: 1. Ferrous pipe: Class 150 malleable iron threaded or forged steel slip-on flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. 2. Copper tube and pipe: Class 150 slip-on bronze flanges; preformed neoprene gaskets. C. Mechanical Couplings for Grooved and Shouldered Joints: Two or more curved housing segments with continuous key to engage pipe groove, circular C-profile gasket, and bolts to secure and compress gasket. 1. Dimensions and Testing: In accordance with AWWA C606. 2. Housing Material: Provide ASTM A47/A47M malleable iron or ductile iron, galvanized. 3. Natural Gas Gasket materials: Gaskets for natural gas piping shall be equal to Flexitallic Sigma 500 series. 4. Gasket Material: EPDM suitable for operating temperature range from minus 30 degrees F to 230 degrees F. 5. Bolts and Nuts: Hot dipped galvanized or zinc-electroplated steel. 2.09 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS A. Provide hangers and supports that comply with MSS SP-58. 1. If type of hanger or support for a particular situation is not indicated, select appropriate type using MSS SP-58 recommendations. 2. Overhead Supports: Individual steel rod hangers attached to structure or to trapeze hangers. 3. Trapeze Hangers: Welded steel channel frames attached to structure. 4. Vertical Pipe Support: Steel riser clamp. B. Plumbing Piping - Drain, Waste, and Vent:

PLUMBING PIPING 22 1005 - 5 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1. Conform to ASME B31.9. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Multiple or Trapeze Hangers: Steel channels with welded spacers and hanger rods. C. Plumbing Piping - Water: 1. Conform to ASME B31.9. 2. Hangers for Pipe Sizes 1/2 Inch to 1-1/2 Inches: Malleable iron, adjustable swivel, split ring. 3. Hangers for Cold Pipe Sizes 2 Inches and Over: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 4. Hangers for Hot Pipe Sizes 2 Inches to 4 Inches: Carbon steel, adjustable, clevis. 5. Copper Pipe Support: Carbon steel ring, adjustable, copper plated. D. Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows: 1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193. 2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01. 3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193. 4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106. 5. Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308. 6. Manufacturers: a. Powers Fasteners, Inc: www.powers.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.10 GATE VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com. 2. Conbraco Industries; ______: www.apollovalves.com. 3. Nibco, Inc; ______: www.nibco.com. 4. Milwaukee Valve Company; ______: www.milwaukeevalve.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. 2 Inches and Larger: 1. MSS SP-70, Class 125, iron body, bronze trim, outside screw and yoke, handwheel, solid wedge disc, flanged ends. Provide chain-wheel operators for valves 6 inches and larger mounted over 8 feet above floor. 2.11 BALL VALVES A. Manufacturers: 1. Tyco Flow Control: www.tycoflowcontrol.com. 2. Conbraco Industries; ______: www.apollovalves.com. 3. Nibco, Inc; ______: www.nibco.com. 4. Milwaukee Valve Company; ______: www.milwaukeevalve.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Construction, 4 Inches and Smaller: MSS SP-110, Class 150, 400 psi CWP, bronze, two piece body, chrome plated brass ball, regular port, teflon seats and stuffing box ring, blow-out proof stem, lever handle with balancing stops, solder ends with union. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that excavations are to required grade, dry, and not over-excavated.

PLUMBING PIPING 22 1005 - 6 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

3.02 PREPARATION A. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe. B. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly. C. Prepare piping connections to equipment with flanges or unions. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Vent piping within a plenum rated ceiling must meet the code required smoke and flame spread ratings. If the material specified to be used does not meet the 25/50 smoke / flame spread rating it will be the installing contractors responsibility to insulate the portion of this piping within the plenum. C. Provide non-conducting dielectric connections wherever jointing dissimilar metals. D. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Route parallel and perpendicular to walls. E. Install piping to maintain headroom, conserve space, and not interfere with use of space. F. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations. G. Provide clearance in hangers and from structure and other equipment for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings. Refer to Section 22 07 19. H. Provide access where valves and fittings are not exposed. I. Copper Pipe and Tube: Make soldered joints in accordance with ASTM B828, using specified solder, and flux meeting ASTM B813; in potable water systems use flux also complying with NSF 61 and NSF 372. J. PVC Pipe: Make solvent-welded joints in accordance with ASTM D2855. K. Sleeve pipes passing through partitions, walls and floors. L. Inserts: 1. Provide inserts for placement in concrete formwork. 2. Provide inserts for suspending hangers from reinforced concrete slabs and sides of reinforced concrete beams. 3. Provide hooked rod to concrete reinforcement section for inserts carrying pipe over 4 inches. 4. Where concrete slabs form finished ceiling, locate inserts flush with slab surface. 5. Where inserts are omitted, drill through concrete slab from below and provide through- bolt with recessed square steel plate and nut above slab. M. Pipe Hangers and Supports: 1. Install in accordance with ASME B31.9. 2. Support horizontal piping as scheduled. 3. Install hangers to provide minimum 1/2 inch space between finished covering and adjacent work. 4. Place hangers within 12 inches of each horizontal elbow. 5. Use hangers with 1-1/2 inch minimum vertical adjustment. Design hangers for pipe movement without disengagement of supported pipe. 6. Provide copper plated hangers and supports for copper piping. 3.04 APPLICATION A. Install gate or ball valves for shut-off and to isolate equipment, part of systems, or vertical risers.

PLUMBING PIPING 22 1005 - 7 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Install globe valves for throttling, bypass, or manual flow control services. C. Provide plug valves in natural gas systems for shut-off service. 3.05 TOLERANCES A. Drainage Piping: Establish invert elevations within 1/2 inch vertically of location indicated and slope to drain at minimum of 1/4 inch per foot slope. B. Water Piping: Slope at minimum of 1/32 inch per foot and arrange to drain at low points. 3.06 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM A. Prior to starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean. B. Ensure Ph of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric). C. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual. D. Bleed water from outlets to ensure distribution and test for disinfectant residual at minimum 15 percent of outlets. E. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours. F. If final disinfectant residual tests less than 25 mg/L, repeat treatment. G. Flush disinfectant from system until residual equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L. H. Take samples no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 10 percent of outlets and from water entry, and analyze in accordance with AWWA C651. 3.07 SCHEDULES A. Pipe Hanger Spacing: 1. Metal Piping: a. Pipe size: 1/2 inches to 1-1/4 inches: 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 6.5 ft. 2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inches. b. Pipe size: 1-1/2 inches to 2 inches: 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft. 2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch. c. Pipe size: 2-1/2 inches to 3 inches: 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft. 2) Hanger rod diameter: 1/2 inch. d. Pipe size: 4 inches to 6 inches: 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 10 ft. 2) Hanger rod diameter: 5/8 inch. 2. Plastic Piping: a. All Sizes: 1) Maximum hanger spacing: 6 ft. 2) Hanger rod diameter: 3/8 inch.

END OF SECTION

PLUMBING PIPING 22 1005 - 8 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 22 1006

PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Roof and floor drains. B. Cleanouts. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 22 10 05 - Plumbing Piping. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME A112.6.3 - Floor and Trench Drains; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2001 (R2007). B. NSF 61 - Drinking Water System Components - Health Effects; 2012. C. NSF 372 - Drinking Water System Components - Lead Content; 2011. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide component sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions, weights, and placement of openings and holes. D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment, cleanouts, backflow preventers, water hammer arrestors, and other appertanences. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with not less than three years documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept specialties on site in original factory packaging. Inspect for damage. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Specialties in Potable Water Supply Systems: Provide products that comply with NSF 61 and NSF 372 for maximum lead content. 2.02 DRAINS A. Manufacturers: 1. Josam Company: www.josam.com. 2. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com. 3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Floor Drain: 1. ASME A112.6.3; lacquered cast iron or stainless steel, two piece body with double drainage flange, weep holes, reversible clamping collar, and round, adjustable nickel- bronze strainer.

PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 1006 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.03 CLEANOUTS A. Manufacturers: 1. Jay R. Smith Manufacturing Company: www.jayrsmith.com. 2. Josam Company: www.josam.com. 3. Zurn Industries, Inc: www.zurn.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Floor Areas: 1. Lacquered cast iron body with anchor flange, reversible clamping collar, threaded top assembly, and round gasketed scored cover in service areas and round gasketed depressed cover to accept floor finish in finished floor areas. C. Cleanouts at Interior Finished Wall Areas: 1. Line type with lacquered cast iron body and round epoxy coated gasketed cover, and round stainless steel access cover secured with machine screw. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout plugs with mixture of graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanout for rodding of drainage system. C. Install floor cleanouts at elevation to accommodate finished floor. D. Install approved portable water protection devices on plumbing lines where contamination of domestic water may occur; on boiler feed water lines, janitor rooms, fire sprinkler systems, premise isolation, irrigation systems, flush valves, interior and exterior hose bibbs. E. Install water hammer arrestors complete with accessible isolation valve on cold water supply piping to flush valve water closets.

END OF SECTION

PLUMBING PIPING SPECIALTIES 22 1006 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 23 0000

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Work under this Section is subject to the requirements of the Contract Documents, including the Drawings, General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 of the Specifications.

B. This section is hereby made a part of all other sections of Division 23, 21, 22 & 26 as fully as if repeated in each therein.

1.2 GENERAL PROVISIONS

A. The conditions of Division 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS apply to each and every Contract and Contractor or other person or persons supplying any material or labor entering this building, either directly or indirectly.

B. Mechanical and Electrical Contractors are bound by provisions of Conditions as described above.

C. Five (5) Sub-Contractors will be covered by these General Requirements. They are: 1. Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning. 2. Plumbing and Drainage. 3. Fire Suppression. 4. Electrical. 5. ATC (Direct Digital Controls).

D. For simplicity, these Sub-Contracts and Sub-Contractors will be referred to further herein as the HVAC, Plumbing, DDC Controls and Electrical Contracts or Contractors.

E. The term "Mechanical Contractor" shall mean the HVAC, Plumbing, and DDC Controls Contractors.

1.3 DESCRIPTION

A. The Drawings and Specifications shall be understood to cover systems of Plumbing, Fire Protection, Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning, Temperature Control, Laboratory Gases, and Insulation and Pipe Covering as shown on the drawings and as specified. The drawings and specifications are to be taken together. Work specified and not shown, or work shown and not specified, shall be as binding as though required by both, the drawings and specifications.

B. Minor items and accessories or devices reasonably inferable as necessary to the complete and proper operation of any system shall be provided for such systems, whether or not they are specifically called for by the specifications or the drawings.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

A. Exposed: Open to view inside the building.

B. Concealed: Any piping, ductwork or equipment not considered exposed to view. For example, spaces between ceiling and floor construction above; between double walls; furred-in areas; pipe and duct shafts, etc.

C. Conditioned: Forced supply or return air, which has been heated or cooled.

D. HVAC: Heating, Ventilating, and Air-Conditioning.

E. Fixture Runout: Branch pipe connection to a terminal unit.

F. Mechanical Equipment Room: Any room or confined space, such as a penthouse, pump room, fan room, or service room, where mechanical equipment is located.

G. “Where exposed to people’s contact” (Not including maintenance personnel): Being capable of being reached without the use of a ladder.

H. Exposed: In plain view of the end-user and occupants of any space other than mechanical or service spaces.

1.5 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. It is the intent of the specifications and drawings to include under each item all materials, apparatus and labor necessary to properly install, equip, adjust and put into perfect operation the respective portions of the installations specified and to so interconnect the various items or sections of the work as to form a complete and properly operating whole.

B. Any apparatus, machinery or small items not mentioned in detail which may be found necessary to complete or perfect any portion of the installation in a substantial manner and in compliance with the requirements stated, implied or intended shall be furnished without extra cost to the Owner. This shall include all materials, devices or methods peculiar to the machinery, apparatus or systems furnished and installed by the HVAC, Plumbing, DDC Controls and Electrical Contractors.

C. In referring to drawings, figured dimensions take precedence over scale measurements. Discrepancies must be referred to the Architect for decision. Each Contractor shall certify and verify all dimensions before ordering material or commencing work.

D. Any work called for in the specifications, but not mentioned or shown on the drawings, or called for on the drawings, but not mentioned in the specifications, shall be furnished as though called for in both.

E. When any device or part of equipment is herein referred to in the singular number, such as "the pump" such reference shall be deemed to apply to as many such devices as required to complete the installation.

F. The term "Provide" shall mean "Furnish and Install". Neither term will be used generally in these specifications, but will be assumed. The term "Furnish" shall mean to obtain and deliver on the job for installation by other trades.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

G. The Drawings are essentially diagrammatic in nature and show general arrangement of the equipment, piping, ductwork, accessories, etc. Because of the small scale of the Drawings, it is not possible to show each offsets, fittings, and accessories, which may be required. Carefully investigate the structural conditions, Architectural Drawings, Equipment Drawings, and the finished conditions of the work and arrange such work accordingly, furnish any fittings, pipe accessories that may be required to meet such conditions.

H. Any changes from the plans necessary to make the work conform to building as constructed and to fit work of other trades, or to conform to rules of the governing authorities and regulations, shall be met by the Contractor without extra cost to the Building Owner/Tenant.

I. The layout of the piping, ductwork, equipment, etc., as shown on the Drawings shall be checked and exact locations shall be determined by the dimensions of equipment approved and Contractor shall obtain the Architect/Engineer's approval for any revised layout before the apparatus is installed. The Contractor shall consult the Architectural, Structural, and Equipment Drawings for the dimensions, locations of partitions, locations and sizes of structural supports, foundations, to coordinate installation and penetrations, etc.

J. Contractor shall also refer to the Architectural Plans for details and large scale Drawings and to approved Shop Drawing of equipment furnished under other Contracts or Sections of the Specifications for exact location of service connections. The equipment Shop Drawings will be furnished to the Contractor before roughing in. Contractor shall not install any piping or ductwork for said equipment until they have received approved Coordination Drawings for same.

1.6 LAWS, ORDINANCES, REGULATIONS AND PERMITS

A. The entire HVAC, Plumbing, DDC Controls and Electrical Systems in all and or part shall conform to all pertinent laws, ordinances and regulations of all bodies having jurisdiction, notwithstanding anything in these drawings or specifications to the contrary.

B. The work shall be installed in conformity with the City, State and Federal, or Board of Underwriters' laws, regulations, rules, or ordinances in effect and governing same, such rules and regulations and local ordinances to be considered part of these Specifications. Contractor shall be held strictly responsible for any violation of same and shall change their work to conform without additional cost to Building Owner/Tenant.

C. Each Contractor shall pay all fees and obtain and pay for all permits and inspections required by any authority having jurisdiction in connection with their work.

D. Electrical work shall comply with the requirements of the National Electrical Code, NFPA and other boards and departments having local jurisdiction. Electrical Contractor shall obtain and pay for Certifications of Inspection by an authorized Electrical Inspection Agency and by local, municipal and state approving agencies. The materials, in general, shall be Underwriters' Laboratories listed and shall bear UL label.

E. Fire Protection Contractor to complete a "Material & Test Certificate" for above ground piping and/or for underground piping upon completion of work.

F. Fire Protection Contractor should notify Fire Marshal upon completion of the system, giving the

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 3 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

Fire Marshal a minimum of five (5) days notice.

1.7 EXISTING UTILITIES

A. Location of utilities as shown on the drawings has been determined from the best available information and is given for the convenience of the Contractor; however, Building Owner/Tenant does not assume responsibility in the event that during construction, utilities other than those shown may be encountered, and that the actual location of those which are shown may be different from the location as shown on the plans.

B. The Contractor shall be responsible for any interference with or damage to any existing utilities, and shall repair or replace same with the least possible delay.

C. The Contractor shall notify Architect/Engineer of any broken or open pipes discovered during construction.

1.8 CONNECTIONS TO UTILITIES

A. Apply for and obtain services from utility companies and municipalities. All charges for which utility companies and municipalities must be reimbursed shall be paid for by the respective Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.9 TESTS

A. The following requirements are supplementary to tests specified for individual equipment or systems in Mechanical and Electrical work sections. 1. Give written notice of date of test in ample time to all concerned.

B. Concealed or insulated work shall remain uncovered until all required tests have been completed; but if construction schedule requires, arrange for prior tests on parts of systems as approved.

C. As soon as conditions permit, conduct preliminary tests of equipment to ascertain compliance with specified requirements. Make needed changes, adjustments and/or replacements as preliminary tests may indicate, prior to acceptance tests.

D. Conduct pressure, performance and operating tests as specified or required for each system or equipment unit in the presence of the Architect, Engineer or Owner as well as a representative of agencies having jurisdiction.

E. Obtain Certificates of Approval and/or Acceptance as specified or required in compliance with regulations of agencies having jurisdiction. Work shall not be deemed complete until such Certificates have been delivered to the Architect.

F. Testing shall prove conclusively that Mechanical and Electrical systems operate properly, efficiently and quietly in accordance with intent of drawings and specifications.

1.10 CONTINUITY OF SERVICES (SHUTDOWN AND NOTIFICATIONS)

A. It is imperative that service interruptions on the various existing utilities be held to an absolute

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 4 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

minimum. Wherever possible, the Contractor shall provide suitable temporary services or connections, where continuity of service for essential systems can be maintained by this means. It will be the Building Owner's/Tenant's final prerogative to decide which systems are to be considered as essential, and to establish the maximum allowable shutdown time, if any, for each system.

B. Generally, no action shall be taken by the Mechanical and Electrical Contractors that will interrupt any of the existing building services for this building or any other building until previously arranged with the Architect and Owner or their authorized representative.

C. The Building Owner/Tenant will require not less than 72 hours advance notice, in writing, that an interruption of service in any system is desired. Such notice shall identify the system or systems involved, and shall be submitted in duplicate, one (1) copy of which will be signed and returned by the Building Owner's/Tenant's authorized representative stating whether the requested shutdown will be permitted or not.

D. Should any service be interrupted by these Contractors, the Contractor causing such interruption shall provide immediately all labor, including overtime if necessary, and all material and equipment necessary for restoration of such service.

1.11 ENTRANCE OF EQUIPMENT

A. Each Contractor shall perform all necessary rigging required for completion of work under their contract.

B. Contractor shall be responsible to repair all damage as a result of rigging and/or bringing equipment into the building. All damaged items shall be restored back to their original condition at no additional cost to the Owner.

1.12 VISIT TO SITE

A. Due to the nature of the work involved under this contract, all bidders are required to thoroughly examine the site.

B. Bidding Contractors shall thoroughly review Contract Documents prior to visiting the site, take Contract Documents to site and thoroughly explore to any extent necessary, the existing conditions as relating to fulfilling the requirements of this Contract.

C. If discrepancies are noted between requirements of Contract Documents and existing conditions, Contractor shall so indicate to the Architect during bidding period and receive clarification before bidding. Failure to comply with this requirement will result in Architect’s interpretation during the construction period and the Architect’s decision will be final and binding as the sole interpreter of the contract requirements.

D. Extras will not be considered for any work relating to connections with existing systems or adaptability of new systems to existing structures.

E. Submission of proposals shall be considered evidence that Contractors have complied with the requirements of this Article.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 5 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.13 LINES AND LEVELS

A. At the job site, the Contractor shall layout and establish the lines and levels necessary for this work by using Bench Marks.

1.14 OVERTIME WORK

A. It is contemplated that work included be done during regular working hours on a "straight time" basis.

B. Where a shutdown of essential utilities is required for final connections or "cross overs", the Building Owner/Tenant and Architect shall be notified well in advance and approval obtained before proceeding with the work. The period of interruption of services shall be held to the minimum required to complete the work. If overtime work is required, this overtime shall be included as a part of the base bid.

1.15 INSTRUCTING OWNER'S PERSONNEL

A. After all tests and adjustments have been made, each Contractor shall fully instruct the representatives of the Owner in all details of operation of the equipment installed under their contract.

B. Each Contractor shall operate their equipment for sufficient length of time to satisfy the Architect that requirements of the Contract Documents have been fulfilled.

C. All training will be video taped by the Contractor. Provide three (3) copies to the Maintenance Superintendent.

D. Operation & Maintenance Manuals for all Equipment and Systems must be submitted before any Instruction to Owner’s Personnel are scheduled.

1.16 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

A. Each Contractor shall provide three (3) copies of printed instructions to the Architect upon completion of installation. Instructions shall be bound in separate, hardback, 3-ring or 3 D-ring looseleaf binders.

B. Instruction books shall be prepared by sections and contain detailed start-up, operating and maintenance instructions for all components of all systems, including wiring, and piping diagrams necessary for clarity. The cover of each binder shall be identified with the name of the project and the words "Operating and Maintenance Instructions".

C. Each section shall have labeled tabs and be clearly marked with equipment or system name and contain detailed parts list data, ordering information and the name, address and telephone number of the closest supply source.

D. All instructional data shall be neatly and completely prepared to the satisfaction of the Architect.

E. Operation & Maintenance Manuals for all Equipment and Systems must be submitted before any Instruction to Owner’s Personnel are scheduled.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 6 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.17 GUARANTEE

A. All material, equipment and workmanship provided by each Contractor shall be in first class operating condition in every respect at time of acceptance by Owner. Acceptance by the Owner shall be by letter to this effect written to each Contractor.

B. Each Contractor shall unconditionally guarantee in writing all materials, equipment and workmanship for a period of one (1) year from date of acceptance by Owner unless a longer period is stipulated under specified headings. During the guarantee period each Contractor shall repair or replace, at their own expense, any materials, equipment or workmanship in which defects may develop and they shall also provide free service for all equipment and systems involved in their contract during this guarantee period.

C. Guarantee shall also include restoration to its original condition of all adjacent work that must be disturbed in fulfilling this guarantee.

D. All such repairs and/or replacements shall be made without delay and at the convenience of the Owner.

E. Repairs or replacements shall bear an additional twelve (12) months guarantee from the time repair or replacement is complete. This requirement shall be binding, even though it will exceed product guarantees normally furnished by some manufacturers.

F. Guarantees furnished by Subcontractors and/or Equipment Manufacturers shall be countersigned by the related Contractor for joint and/or individual responsibility for subject item.

G. Manufacturer’s equipment guarantees or warranties extending beyond the guarantee period described above shall be transferred to the Owner along with the contractor's guarantees.

H. Note that guarantees shall run from the date of final payment for the complete project, not from the date of installation of, or payment for an item or device.

1.18 MINOR DEVIATIONS

A. The dimensions of equipment hereinafter specified or indicated on the Drawings are intended to establish the outlines and characteristics of such equipment in general. Minor deviations in dimensions will be permitted to allow the manufacturers specified to bid on their nearest stock equipment, provided the specified ratings are met or exceeded.

B. Where manufacturers' catalog numbers or types are mentioned in the Specifications or indicated on the Drawings, they are intended to be used as a guide only and shall not be interpreted as taking precedence over the basic rating and duty specified. In all cases, manufacturers shall verify the duty specified with particular characteristics of the equipment they intend to offer for approval and shall also pay the additional charges as may be required under other Divisions.

1.19 SHOP DRAWINGS

A. Submit twelve (12) copies of shop drawings for all material and equipment as noted in Manufacturer's and Sub-Contractors List, except where indicated otherwise further herein.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 7 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Prior to submission of shop drawings, the Contractor shall notify the Architect of any site conditions differing from those indicated or specified.

C. Prepare shop drawings by careful reference to drawings and specifications.

D. Identify each shop drawing by Job Name and reference to applicable Specification Article number.

E. Shop drawing data for all equipment shall include, but not be limited to, the following: 1. Manufacturers' catalog designation, photographs and specifications. 2. Full electrical data, including specifically, electrical characteristics. 3. Dimensions, capacities, ratings, material and finish. 4. Such other detailed information as required for proper evaluation.

F. Review Time: 1. Allow two (2) weeks for the Engineer's processing of each submittal, exclusive of Owner’s, Architect’s or others in the processing chain. Allow a longer time period where processing must be delayed for coordination with subsequent submittals.

G. Submission of shop drawings for electric motor starters shall include a tabulation listing: 1. The equipment the starter is intended to control. 2. Horsepower. 3. Voltage. 4. Phase. 5. Full load amperes. 6. The manufacturer's number or type. 7. Overload heater numbers and amperage. 8. Quantity of auxiliary contacts. 9. Pushbutton arrangement. 10. Pilot light arrangement if applicable.

H. Each Contractor shall examine all shop drawings before submission for review. Each Contractor shall then forward all shop drawings with their initialed acceptance stamp and by so doing the Contractor thereby represents that they have determined and verified all field measurements, field construction criteria, materials, dimensions, catalog numbers, and similar data, have notified the Architect Engineer of site conditions varying from those indicated or specified, and that they have checked and coordinated each item with other applicable accepted shop drawings and the contract requirements. Shop drawings and catalog data submitted without the Contractor's stamp of acceptance will be returned to the Contractor without review.

I. Shop drawings smaller than 8-1/2 x 11 shall be secured to letter size paper of this size.

J. Material and equipment installed or used without shop drawing review are subject to rejection by the Engineer.

K. The HVAC Contractor shall prepare 1/4-inch minimum scale sheet metal shop drawings at the earliest practical time and coordinate these drawings with the other contractors prior to erection of the sheet metal work in order to effect timely resolution of all conflicts with the work of other contractors.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 8 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

L. Corrections or comments made on shop drawings during review by the Engineer does not relieve the Contractor from compliance with requirements of the drawings and specifications. Such review shall be only for general conformance with the design concept and general compliance with the information given in the Contract Documents. It shall not include review of quantities, dimensions, weights or gauges, fabrication processes, construction methods, coordination with the work of other trades, or construction safety precautions, all of which are the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Review of a specific item shall not indicate acceptance of an assembly of which the item is a component. The Engineer shall not be responsible for any deviations from the Contract Documents not clearly noted by the Contractor, nor shall the Engineer review partial submissions or those for which submissions for correlated items have not been received. The Contractor is responsible for: confirming and correlating all quantities, clearance and dimensions, selecting fabrication processes and techniques of construction, coordinating work with that of all other trades, and performing their work in a safe and satisfactory manner.

M. Furnish two (2) black or blue line print sets of the pipe layouts, duct layouts and equipment drawings on ¼” = 1’-0” scale plans using AutoCAD Release 2004 or 2006. The drawings shall show the coordination between new work and existing system conditions; include a symbol list, title block information, drawing titles, key plan, north arrow, room names and numbers, match lines; pipe heights; details of congested areas; and a typical elevation showing discipline coordination. The sheet size for floor plans and associated details shall match the Design Drawing sheet size. The ductwork layout shall be shown in double line. The drawing’s layering system shall comply with the Building Owner’s/Tenant’s AutoCAD Standards Manual.

N. Any shop drawing or submittal requiring more than two (2) resubmissions for approval, the Contractor shall pay the Engineer $250.00 per resubmitted item, until approval is granted. Payment must be received prior to the Engineer’s review.

O. Electronic drawing files in AutoCAD, Release 2004 will be available to the Sub-contractors through the General Contractor. If electronic drawing files are requested, the Engineer shall provide compact diskettes (CDs) to the Contractor containing the mechanical, plumbing, gas, fire protection, and electrical floor plans.

1.20 AS-BUILT DRAWINGS

A. During the course of the work, maintain a record set of drawings on which shall be marked the actual physical location of all piping, valves, equipment, conduit, outlets, access panels, controls, actuators, etc.

B. Include all Addendum, Change Orders and construction field directives (responses to RFI’s) on the As-Built Drawings.

C. At project completion, obtain a clean set of prints and a AutoCAD 2000 CD from the Engineer, and make a set of reproducibles. Neatly transfer all the recorded as-built information on both the reproducibles and AutoCAD 2000 CD.

D. Provide two (2) prints of these reproducibles, along with the reproducibles themselves and CAD CD, to the Engineer. In addition, attach one (1) complete set of prints to each of the OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS specified previously herein.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 9 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.21 PUNCH LIST CLOSE-OUT

A. Each Contractor shall carefully read and review each punch list item.

B. Contractors shall review the contract documents and job correspondence minutes relating to punch listed items to assure thorough understanding thereof within three (3) working days after receipt of the punch list.

C. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to contact the author of the punch list to resolve any items in question, including factual inclusion of the punch listed items, as part of the work covered by the contract documents as basic services.

D. In the absence of such contact, the Contractor agrees to comply with all items in the punch list.

E. Upon resolution of the final punch list items, reduce the action taken to writing on the Contractor's company letterhead, and state, for the record, by reference to each punch list item, thereby absolving the Architect of the responsibility of repeatedly visiting the site to verify completion of final punch list items. The Contractor's letter is to be termed "Final Punch List Resolution Letter."

F. Contractor must clearly state where exceptions are taken.

G. Approval of final payments for work done by the Contractor will be granted upon receipt and acceptance of the "Final Resolution Letter."

1.22 TEMPORARY FACILITIES, UTILITIES AND HEATING

A. Refer to Section TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS in Division 1 of these specifications.

1.23 RELATED REQUIREMENTS SPECIFIED ELSEWHERE

A. Summary of Work

B. Project Meetings

C. Construction Schedules

D. Temporary Facilities

E. Project Closeout

F. Project Record Documents

PART 2 - MATERIALS

2 .1 MANUFACTURER'S AND SUB-CONTRACTORS LIST

A. Before ordering any material or equipment unit, and not later than twenty (20) working days after signing of contracts each Contractor shall submit a list of Manufacturers, Sub-Contractors and

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 10 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

Suppliers showing make, type, manufacturers name and trade designation of all materials, and equipment, proposed for use under this contract. List shall be prepared by reference to specifications.

B. The list, when accepted, shall be supplementary to specifications, and no variations therefrom will be permitted except with the approval of the Architect.

C. No shop drawings will be processed until the Contractor has satisfactorily completed the requirements of this Article.

2 .2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. All materials and equipment shall be new, unless noted otherwise, and shall conform to the grade, quality and standards specified herein.

B. All equipment offered under these specifications shall be limited to products regularly produced and recommended for service ratings in accordance with engineering data or other comprehensive literature made available to the public and in effect at the time of opening of bids.

C. Items such as valves, motors, starting equipment, vibration isolating devices, lamps, and all other equipment and material, where applicable and practicable, shall each be of one manufacturer.

D. Equipment shall be installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's instructions for type and capacity of each piece of equipment used. Contractors shall obtain these instructions which will be considered part of these specifications. Type, capacity and application of equipment shall be suitable and shall operate satisfactorily for the purpose intended in the HVAC, Plumbing and Electrical Systems.

2 .3 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. See General Conditions.

2 .4 EQUIPMENT VARIATIONS

A. The materials and products mentioned in these specifications are given to establish a standard of quality, design and performance. The phrases "equivalent acceptable", "or equal", "equal to", and “approved substitute” shall be used to indicate that other similar products may be used provided such substitutes are accepted by the Architect as meeting all standards necessary to perform the function intended. Where three (3) or more manufacturers are mentioned for an item, selection shall be made from among those manufacturers. Specific products listed without reference to equals or substitutions shall be provided as specified, unless a written request for substitution is submitted to the Architect for approval ten (10) days prior to the date for receipt of bids. Such request shall include a complete description of the proposed substitute, along with sufficient documentation and other information necessary for a complete evaluation of the proposed substitution. If approved, substitute product will be listed in an addendum so that all bidders are alerted to it.

B. The Contract Documents have been prepared to provide for the incorporation of at least one of the specified items or assemblies of every category of materials, products or pieces of equipment. In the event that the incorporation into the work of an approved substituted item or assembly will require revisions or additions to the contractual requirements of either the contractor proposing

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 11 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

the substitution or any other contractor, the contractor proposing the substitution shall bear the cost of such revisions or additions to the work of all trades affected, and shall pay for all engineering or architectural services required at no change in the contract sum.

2 .5 VIBRATION ELIMINATION

A. The Mechanical and Electrical Contractors shall provide vibration isolation support provisions for all moving or rotating equipment, machinery and transformers when such provisions are not furnished and/or integrally mounted by the equipment manufacturers. They shall be equal to Amber/Booth Company or Korfund Company, Inc., and installed in accordance with vibration isolation manufacturers' recommendations unless specified otherwise herein.

B. Provide all rotating or moving machinery or equipment suspended from building structure with approved resilient suspension mountings.

C. Provide the equivalent of Flexonics Corp. metallic vibration isolating connections between all pumps and connecting piping.

D. All electrical connections to moving or vibrating equipment, such as motors, generators, transformers, etc., shall be made by use of flexible metallic conduit.

E. No rigid pipes, ducts, conduit or other extended machine assemblies connected to vibration isolated equipment shall be tied in directly with the building construction. Such elements shall be connected to the equipment through flexible fittings, and be supported by isolating equipment as required.

F. All systems shall operate free from objectionable vibration and noise resulting therefrom, and each Contractor shall take all necessary steps required to achieve this result without additional cost to the Owner.

2 .6 INSERTS, HANGER SUPPORTS, CLAMPS, FASTENINGS

A. All materials, designs and types of inserts, hanger supports and clamps shall meet the requirements of the Manufacturers Standardization Society Document MSS-SP-58, latest edition, and also Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., National Electrical Code and Factory Mutual Engineering Division Standards where applicable. Insert, hanger support and clamp types referenced herein are shown in MSS-SP-58.

B. Each Contractor shall be responsible for and provide all necessary inserts, hanger supports, fastenings, clamps and attachments necessary for support of their work. The types of all inserts, hanger supports, fastenings, clamps and attachments to be used shall be selected to suit both new and existing building construction conditions and applied for the purposes intended.

C. In new overhead cast-in-place concrete construction, provide type 18 steel concrete inserts and fasten to form work before concrete is cast. For cast concrete floor or roof sections too thin to permit the use of inserts extend the hanger rod through the slab and terminate with a nut and large washer, recessed into the top face of the slab as approved by the Architect.

D. For Mechanical systems, clamps and attachments to steel beams and bar joists shall be made using types 20, 21, 23, 25, 27, 28, 29 or 30 as applicable to suit conditions of construction. Clamps and attachments shall be selected on the basis of the required load to be supported.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 12 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

Provide all necessary steel angle iron or channel between bar joists, or steel beams where direct attachment cannot be made. No holes are to be drilled or burned in structural building steel for hanger rod supports.

E. Metallic masonry anchors shall be provided for all pre-cast concrete, masonry and cast concrete construction, and may be provided as an alternate for cast-in-place construction. Locate in pre-cast and cast-in-place concrete as directed by the Architect. Dynabolt, Ram-In and/or Tru-Bolt masonry anchors as manufactured by Ramset shall be provided as recommended by the anchor manufacturer for the various applications, stresses and services involved. Redhead, Hilti or Wej-It equivalents acceptable. Installation of masonry anchors shall be accomplished by pre-drilling concrete or masonry to diameters and depths required to properly accommodate anchor bolts.

F. Toggle bolts may be used in dry wall and lath and block plaster walls. The use of toggle bolts shall be restricted to the weight limitations imposed by the toggle bolt manufacturer for the size used.

G. Except where noted otherwise herein, attachment to wood or material of similar fibrous nature shall be made with lag screws and/or wood screws of required size.

H. Screws with wooden or plastic plugs, or lead caulking anchors are not acceptable.

2 .7 ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS

A. Each Mechanical and Electrical Contractor shall furnish and locate for installation under General Construction, all access doors and panels for concealed portions of Mechanical and Electrical work requiring accessibility for operation and maintenance of their installed work.

B. Minimum door size of 24" x 18" unless shown, specified or approved otherwise.

C. Sixteen (16) gauge minimum doors with screw fasteners and painted finish. They shall be equal to Inryco/Milcor, Karp Associates as follows:

WALL OR CEILING SURFACES INRYCO/MILCOR, KARP

Drywall (ceiling) DW KSTDW Drywall (wall) DW KDW Hard Plaster & Ceramic Type K DSC-214PL Unplastered Masonry & Concrete M DSC-214M Acoustic Tile AT KST

D. Underwriters "B" label access doors where required for access to shafts, corridors, and where located in fire walls and partitions.

E. No access panels shall be installed without specific approval of the Architect as to location. The proposed location of panels of each Contractor shall be reviewed with the Architect by the General Contractor's Job Superintendent before installation of equipment or panels. Controversies must be resolved at no cost to the Owner.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 13 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

2 .8 ANCHOR BOLTS

A. Mechanical and Electrical Contractors shall provide and set in place at the time foundations, bases or curbs are poured or formed, all necessary anchor bolts as required for the various equipment specified herein. They shall be hook type anchor bolts of proper size and length to suit the apparatus. Set bolts in pipe sleeves of approximately twice the bolt diameter and of length equal to the embedded length of the bolt, with sleeves terminating flush with finished surfaces of foundations, bases or curbs.

B. When the equipment is set in its proper position and aligned with the anchor bolts, the space between the anchor bolts and the inside wall of the sleeves shall be completely filled with non-shrink cementitious grout equal to Crystex as manufactured by L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc., Master Builders or approved equal.

C. Each Contractor shall assume all responsibility for the location of all anchor bolts for the equipment furnished by them under these specifications, and must have a representative present at the time foundations, bases or curbs are poured or formed.

D. All anchor bolts shall be of sufficient strength to withstand any loading imposed by the attached materials or equipment.

2 .9 SLEEVES

A. Each Contractor shall furnish and set all sleeves required for their work and be fully responsible for the final and permanent locations thereof.

B. Sleeves shall be provided in the following locations: 1. All pipes passing through all cast-in-place concrete construction and masonry walls. 2. All conduits passing through cast-in-place waterproof concrete construction and waterproof masonry walls.

C. Sleeves shall extend through construction and be finished flush with each surface except where noted otherwise. Each sleeve shall provide for a minimum ½" clearance around pipe, or its covering in the instance of pipe covered with insulation.

D. All sleeves in waterproof walls shall be fitted and sealed with positive hydrostatic "Link Seals" as manufactured by Thunderline Corporation. Sleeves shall be sized accordingly. Link Seals shall be placed around piping and/or conduit and inserted into the void between inner wall of sleeve and piping and/or conduit. Tighten link seals as required for watertight seal.

E. All sleeves shall be Schedule 40 steel pipe finished with smooth edges. Sleeves in waterproof walls shall be fabricated with minimum 1/4" thick rectangular steel plate placed around mid-point of sleeve, continuously welded to sleeve and then the entire/plate assembly placed into proper position prior to erection of walls. Otherwise sleeves shall be provided with a minimum of three (3) lugs for anchoring.

F. Voids between sleeves and piping or conduit, where located in fire partitions or masonry walls, shall be packed with mineral fiber rope, with fire-rate link seals or foamed with proper 3M fire-rate fitted foam.

G. All sleeves shall be set prior to or during erection of walls. Cutting or drilling of walls after

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 14 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

erection will not be permitted.

H. If sleeves are omitted or located incorrectly the particular contractor who is at fault shall at their own expense, engage the trade which originally installed the work to cut and patch to the satisfaction of the Architect.

I. Any pipe or conduit that must pass through pre-cast floors and will be exposed in finished areas that have floor drains including areas such as Janitors Closets, Toilet Rooms and the like shall be made watertight by use of "Link Seals" inserted into void between piping and/or conduit and openings thereof.

J. All openings for piping and conduit in existing masonry or concrete work shall be neatly coredrilled.

2 .10 MANUFACTURER'S NAMEPLATES

A. Each major component of the equipment shall have the manufacturer's name, address, model number and rating on a plate securely affixed in a conspicuous place. The nameplate of a distributing agent is not acceptable. ASME Code ratings, or other data, which is die-stamped into the surface of the equipment, shall be in a visible location.

2 .11 PIPING AND EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION

A. Pipe markers shall be "Setmark" snap on type "SNA" as manufactured by "Seton Identification Products", 20 Thompson Road, P.O. Box 819, Branford, CT 06405-0819 (1-800-243-6624). Pipe markers shall comply with OSHA Standards with wording and color coding conforming to ANSI A13.1-1981 scheme for identification of piping otherwise.

B. Mark all systems of piping with markers on piping system near or on each valve, on 12 foot maximum centers and in every change in direction.

C. Markers shall indicate the following: 1. Pipe contents in legend form. 2. Size of piping. 3. Direction of flow in piping.

D. Stenciling in accordance with standards published by the Mechanical Contractors Association of America, Part V may be provided in lieu of pipe markers.

E. Identify all valves, controls, dampers and other parts of mechanical systems by means of 2" round brass, aluminum or plastic tags. Tags shall have engraved or stamped letters or numbers 1/2" high. Fasten tags securely with brass "S" hooks or chains. Brass tags shall be style 300BL, aluminum tags shall be style 2070 and plastic tags shall be Setonite; all as manufactured by Seton Identification Products.

F. Provide framed valve chart showing location, number and service or function of each tagged item. Frame charts in approved frame with clear Lucite front, secured to walls in location as directed. Provide two (2) separate copies of each chart, permanently bound and covered as two (2) separate items.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 15 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

G. Identify all mechanical and electrical equipment as to nature, service and purpose by means of permanently attached phenolic Setonite nameplates having dull black outside and white core. Nameplates of approved size, beveled edges and engraved through outside to core; as manufactured by Seton Identification Products.

H. Identify by stenciling similar information thereon, in letters of approved size and working, all concealed mechanical equipment.

I. Identify all valve locations, on the runners of the ceiling grid with neatly typed and color coordinated labels. Review color selection with Owner and Engineer.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 METHOD OF PROCEDURE

A. The drawings accompanying these specifications are diagrammatic and intended to cover the approximate and relative locations of the HVAC, Plumbing, DDC Controls and Electrical Systems.

B. Installation, connection and interconnection of all components of these systems shall be complete and made in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions and best trade practices.

C. Each Contractor shall erect all parts of equipment to be furnished under their contract at such time and in such manner as not to delay or interfere with other Contractors on the work.

D. All piping, conduit and duct work shall be plugged as required during construction to prevent entering of dirt.

E. Before material is ordered or any work performed, each Contractor shall verify all measurements, including lines, grades, pipes, conduit and duct work elevations at the building and shall be responsible for the correctness thereof. No extra compensation will be allowed on account of differences between actual dimensions and measurements and those indicated in the Contract Documents. Any discrepancies discovered shall be submitted to the Architect for consideration before proceeding with the work.

F. Each Contractor shall lay out their work and be responsible for the establishment of heights, grades, etc., for all interior and exterior piping, drains, fixtures, conduit, duct work, etc., included in Contract Documents, in strict accordance with the intent expressed thereby; and all the physical conditions to be met at the building and finished grade, and shall be responsible for accuracy thereof. The establishment of the location of all work shall be performed in consideration of the finished work. In case of conflict, equipment and/or materials shall be relocated without cost to the Owner, as directed by the Architect, regardless of which equipment was installed first.

G. Each Contractor shall cooperate with other Contractors for the proper securing and anchoring of all work included within these specifications. Extraordinary care shall be used in the erection and installation of all equipment and materials to avoid marring surfaces of the work of other Contractors, as each Contractor will be held financially responsible for all such injury caused by the lack of precaution and due to negligence on the part of their workers.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 16 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

H. Do not run pipe or conduit for Mechanical and Electrical Systems in any concrete slab three inches (3") or less in thickness. Do not place any pipe or conduit in any slab where the outside diameter of the pipe or conduit is more than one-quarter the thickness of the slab.

I. All piping, duct work, conduit and other Mechanical and Electrical materials and equipment shown to be mounted below ceilings are to be kept as close to ceiling areas as possible unless otherwise noted.

J. Items such as valves, dampers, cleanouts, etc. that will be concealed in construction shall be installed and so arranged as to be fully accessible for adjustment, service and maintenance.

3.2 ERECTION AND WORKMANSHIP

A. Contractor shall adapt their work to job conditions and make such changes as required and permitted by the Architect/Engineer such as moving their work to clear beams, joists, light fixtures, etc., adjusting risers, avoiding interferences with windows and openings, etc., raising or lowering their work to permit the passing of ductwork or the work of other trades etc., as required or as job conditions dictate, without any additional cost to the Building Owner/Tenant.

B. The workmanship shall be first class in every respect and shall be performed only by skilled mechanics, recognized as such in their respective trades.

3.3 PROTECTION

A. All piping, materials and accessories having finished polished chromium plated surfaces and machines with finished or unpainted surfaces of equipment furnished under these specifications shall be given a thick coat of a neutral protection grease and carefully covered with thick cloth or heavy building paper held securely in place to protect the finish against damage during the entire period of construction. Equipment shall also be protected by use of canvas tarps, vinyl sheeting or similar materials held securely in place.

B. All openings in pipes, fittings, duct work, conduit and all other materials shall be effectively sealed to exclude dirt, sand, and other foreign materials.

C. Exercise every precaution to exclude dust, dirt and all other foreign materials from switchgear rooms, transformers, and all mechanical equipment rooms during construction. Rooms and equipment contained therein shall be vacuum cleaned at regular intervals. All relays, meters and mechanical equipment contained with electrical components shall be protected with heavy paper held in place with approved mastic tape to exclude fine dust and particles. Sufficient electric heaters shall be installed and maintained in equipment rooms and transformer compartments to keep equipment dry during construction.

D. Any such fixtures, equipment or apparatus damaged prior to final acceptance of the work shall be restored to its original condition or replaced with a new one.

3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. New Construction:

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 17 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1. Each Contractor shall provide and set all sleeves, inserts and other items required for the installation of their work and shall be responsible for their final and permanent locations. 2. Each of these Contractors shall confer with and give the General Prime Contractor complete information as to size of openings in all construction, so that such openings may be provided as the building progresses. 3. If openings are omitted or incorrect through failure of these Contractors to follow these instructions, the particular Contractor shall, at their own expense, engage the trade which originally installed the work to cut and patch to the satisfaction of the Architect.

B. Existing Construction: 1. The General Contractor shall perform all cutting and patching required for the work of all trades. 2. Each of these Contractors shall confer with and give the General Contractor complete information as to size of openings in all construction, so that such openings may be provided as the building progresses. 3. If openings are omitted or incorrect through failure of the Contractor to follow these instructions, the particular Contractor shall, at their own expense, engage the trade which originally installed the work to cut and patch to the satisfaction of the Architect. 4. All openings for pipe and conduit shall be neatly coredrilled.

3.5 CONCRETE AND MASONRY WORK

A. Mechanical and Electrical Contractors shall provide all cast-in-place concrete, pre-cast concrete and masonry work (brick and block) required for completion of their contracts.

B. The Architect shall review and approve materials used.

C. Unless shown or specified otherwise, all equipment foundations shall be six inches (6") minimum from floor, of sufficient mass, and secured to the floor.

3.6 SUPPORTS

A. Except where noted otherwise in the specifications and shown on drawings, each Contractor shall provide all materials, equipment supports, supplies and labor necessary as required to adequately support, brace and strengthen equipment and materials furnished as part of their contract.

B. The design, materials, fabrication and erection of structural steel supports shall conform to "Specification for Design, Fabrication and Erection of Structural Steel for Buildings" of the American Institute of Steel Construction, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges". Welding where required shall conform to "Code of Arc and Gas Welding in Building Construction" of the American Welding Society.

C. All steel supports shall be primed (primer plus two (2) coats) before and finish-painted after installation.

3.7 LINTELS

A. The General Contractor will furnish and install all lintels required for the installation and

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 18 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

completion of all work of Mechanical and Electrical Contractors, provided that the General Contractor is advised in advance of such requirements.

B. Failure to give proper notice and/or to comply with the above requires the Sub-Contractor involved to be financially liable for all work and material necessary for the completion of required work.

3.8 ESCUTCHEONS

A. Except as noted otherwise, the Mechanical and Electrical Contractors shall provide heavy solid pattern, steel, cast iron or malleable iron escutcheons with set screws and prime coat of paint on all uninsulated piping and conduit exposed to view within structure where passing through floors, partitions, walls or ceilings. Escutcheons are not required in equipment rooms, boiler rooms or other unfinished areas.

B. For piping with sleeves extending above floor, provide escutcheons with deep recesses.

C. Provide solid pattern, smooth chrome plated cast brass escutcheons for all chrome plated pipe fixture connections.

D. Provide nickel plated cast iron escutcheons where pipes pass through toilet rooms, walls or ceilings.

E. Provide collars of angle fabrication for duct passing through floors, walls and ceilings in finished areas.

3.9 MACHINERY GUARDS

A. Provide approved expanded sheet steel metal guards over all belt drives, couplings and other moving equipment to protect personnel from injury.

3.10 FLASHING

A. Base and counter flashings shall be provided by the respective Contractor where work penetrates roof construction.

3.11 PAINTING AND FINISHING

A. All painting, generally, will be provided by the General Contractor, except where specifically noted otherwise in the Mechanical and Electrical Specifications.

B. Equipment and material furnished with factory enamel finish will not be painted unless finish has been damaged, in which case the equipment or material shall be refinished by the Contractor who furnished it, to the satisfaction of the Architect.

C. Do not paint nameplates, labels, tags, stainless steel, or chromium-plated items such as valve stems, motor shafts, levers, handles, trim strips, etc.

D. Ductwork behind the grilles, registers, diffusers, etc. which is exposed to view through the units, shall be given one (1) coat of primer and a finish coat of flat black paint.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 19 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

E. No work shall be allowed to develop rust during the course of the work. Work showing evidence of rust or other corrosion shall be immediately scraped clean and rust primed with an approved primer.

3.12 LUBRICATION

A. Each Contractor shall be responsible for the proper and necessary lubrication of any items of operating, rotating or moving equipment which they will furnish, install or which must operate as part of the systems on which they work.

B. When an item of operating equipment is furnished and installed by a Contractor, it will be their responsibility to accomplish the lubrication.

C. When an item of operating equipment is furnished by one Contractor and the installation by another, it shall be the responsibility of the Contractor furnishing the equipment to apply the lubricants.

D. All rotating or moving equipment shall be lubricated prior to energizing and operating the equipment. Should the Contractor responsible for the lubrication fail to apply lubricants prior to initial start-up and the equipment is damaged as a result of their negligence, that Contractor shall be required to provide all corrective action necessary including replacement, if required, for the proper operation of equipment.

E. Lubrication shall be accomplished in the manner prescribed or recommended by the manufacturer of the specific item. For motor driven equipment this precaution of lubrication will apply individually to the driver and the driven.

F. The lubricants shall be of the type, grade, specification and manufacture as prescribed or recommended by the manufacturer of the specific equipment item.

G. The Contractor who supplies any item of rotating equipment will have the responsibility of securing written instructions on the lubricating procedure and shall furnish not less than one year's supply of all necessary lubricants properly identified so they can be replaced.

H. Any moving or rotating equipment furnished by the Owner that is to be installed, reused and/or serviced shall also be lubricated. Except where noted otherwise in the Mechanical and Electrical specifications, the Contractor installing, reusing and or servicing all such equipment shall be responsible for the proper lubrication thereof including obtaining proper lubricating instructions from the various manufacturers involved, furnishing and applying the necessary lubricants and leaving the Owner with a one (1) year’s supply of lubricant.

3.13 MECHANICAL - ELECTRICAL COORDINATION

A. Equipment electrical current characteristics as shown on electrical drawings. Refer to article "Current Characteristics and Load Ratings of Motors and Equipment", Section 16100, ELECTRICAL-BASIC MATERIALS AND METHODS.

B. The nameplate voltage of all motors furnished with mechanical equipment shall be within the range of the voltage shown for use with the motor as the upper limit, and 5% less than this voltage as the lower limit.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 20 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

C. Each Mechanical Contractor shall furnish all motors, float and pressure switches, temperature control, other special automatic controls as noted in the HVAC and Plumbing Specifications, and all motor starters for all equipment furnished under their contract except where noted otherwise.

D. All starters shall be provided by the electrical contractor. Starters and fuses are sized based on the standard of design for the HVAC equipment. Should any piece of HVAC equipment change in model, size or manufacturer, and subsequently, the fuse, overload or starter size be required to be changed, the mechanical contractor, or contractor initiating such change shall bear all costs thereto, of the electrical contractor or any other contractor affected by such change.

E. All electrical equipment furnished by the Mechanical Contractors shall be as recommended by the Mechanical Equipment manufacturers, in accordance with the Electrical Specification for similar items, and of such type as to work properly with automatic temperature control sequences where required.

F. The Electrical Contractor shall provide all starters, combination starter disconnects, controllers, push-buttons, safety switches for motors, and wiring from starters to motors and install equipment furnished to them by mechanical contractors, unless otherwise indicated in the Mechanical Specifications.

G. Where controllers and/or starters are furnished as an integral part of any equipment, the contractor supplying the equipment shall furnish complete wiring between controllers, starters and motors.

H. Electrical Contractor shall provide disconnect switches for all equipment under all contracts, except where such switches are an integral part of equipment, or specified with such equipment.

I. Mechanical Contractor shall set all motors and furnish, set and pipe as necessary, float switches, temperature control and other special automatic temperature controls.

J. Mechanical Contractor shall provide all control wiring specified in their respective section of the specification. The Electrical Contractor shall provide all other wiring required for the completion of the work of the Mechanical Contractors.

K. Mechanical Contractor shall furnish the Electrical Contractor with complete wiring diagrams as required.

L. Any electrical work performed by either Mechanical Contractor or their Sub-Contractors shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the ELECTRICAL Section of these specifications.

3.14 ELECTRICAL MOTORS AND STARTERS

A. All motors furnished by Mechanical Contractors, unless specified to the contrary in Mechanical Specifications, shall conform to the following requirements: 1 Characteristics, dimensions, tolerances, temperature rise, insulation, rating, noise, vibration, and all other characteristics in accordance with the latest standards of IEEE or NEMA. 2 Unless required by the driven unit, motors shall have normal starting torque, NEMA Design B characteristics. Horsepower rating of motors shall be equal to or greater than that required by driven equipment. Current density design of motor rating shall be limited so

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 21 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

that overload protection provided by standard motor starters will be adequate to prevent damaging overheating during stall, single phasing or slightly prolonged acceleration. 3 Use NEMA Class A or B insulation with motor frames amply sized to prove 1.15 service factor and an ambient of 40EC. maximum. Insulation systems shall be designed for an average life of 60,000 hours. 4 Each motor shall be mounted on the same bedplate as the equipment driven and be complete with pulleys, slide rails or flexible couplings as required. 5 Each Contractor is responsible in each instance for the proper selection of motors of suitable characteristics with details submitted for approval to the Architect prior to installation.

B. All starters furnished by all Contractors shall conform with the following requirements, unless specified to the contrary in the Electrical Specifications: 1 All starters for 3-phase equipment shall be fully enclosed, across-the-line type equipped with thermal overload protection for all three phases, low voltage protection, all necessary auxiliary contacts as required and indicating pilot lights. Starters which are controlled automatically shall have two-wire control with "ON-OFF-AUTO" switches. Starters which are controlled manually shall have 3-wire control with Start-Stop pushbuttons. 2 All 3-phase starters remotely controlled shall have 120 volt coils and control transformers with disconnecting means. 3 Starters for single phase motors shall be manual toggle switches with thermal overload protection and pilot light. Omit pilot light for unit heaters. 4 General Purpose NEMA-1 enclosure for indoor use under normal atmospheric conditions. Watertight enclosure NEMA-4 or NEMA-5 for outdoor use or where starters are subjected to the splashing or dripping of water. Explosion-proof enclosure NEMA-7, 9 or 12 for dusty or hazardous locations as required by Article 500 of the National Electrical Code.

C. All controllers, starters and other electrical components furnished as an integral part of any apparatus shall be furnished complete with integral wiring as required.

D. So far as is practicable, all motors and starters shall be of one manufacturer. Equal to General Electric, Westinghouse or Square D.

E. Submit motor and starter data sheet.

F. Refer to Specification Section 16100 for further starter requirements.

3.15 ELECTRICAL PROVISIONS FOR PACKAGED MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT

A. Unless otherwise noted in Mechanical Specifications, all packaged equipment furnished by Mechanical Contractors shall be complete with the following electrical provisions: 1. General compliance with provisions of the preceding Article, ELECTRICAL MOTORS AND STARTERS. 2. All refrigeration compressor motors shall operate at 90% minimum power factor. 3. Starting electrical characteristics of all motors and/or starters as approved by local utility company and Electrical Engineer.

B. Local and National NBFU approved, factory installed and wired starting, operating and control equipment, terminating in terminal strip for single power wiring connections by Electrical

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 22 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

Contractor/Sub-Contractor where required. These provisions shall conform with the ELECTRICAL Section of these specifications, generally and specifically, they shall include approved branch fuses for branch power circuits.

3.16 PIPING AND CONDUIT UNDER FLOORS

A. Wherever piping, conduit, ducts or piping enclosures are run under a floor slab on grade, the work is to be installed after the General Contractor has brought the sub-grade to the proper level.

B. The Mechanical and Electrical Contractors shall excavate and backfill for the installation of all of their respective work. The excavation of the sub-grade where required for the installation of the work shall be performed including that for piping, conduit, ducts and piping enclosures. When the installation is completed and satisfactorily tested, the remaining space shall be filled with crushed stone or other material similar to that to be used by the General Contractor for the sub-base. The backfill shall be stabilized by hand or pneumatic tamping as directed by the Architect and shall be returned to the original sub-grade level.

C. No piping, conduit, ducts or piping enclosures shall be installed in the stone sub-base which is part of the General Contractor's work unless specific permission is granted by the Architect.

D. Where piping is noted to be installed in enclosures, such as split terra cotta pipe, necessary protection of the insulation, arrangement and installation shall be as hereinafter described in the detailed specifications.

E. Where required by drawing notes, specifications, or Electrical Code, conduits installed under floors shall be encased in concrete, conforming to that specified under "Cast-In-Place Concrete".

3.17 REMOVAL AND RELOCATION

A. Mechanical and Electrical Contractors shall perform all removal and relocation work required for completion of systems in their contracts.

B. Removals shown on drawings are a general indication only, and may not necessarily indicate the full extent of removals which may be required to complete this work.

C. Where existing partitions, walls, ceilings and floors are to be removed, all ducts, piping, conduits, materials, fixtures and equipment attached or fastened thereto or within shall be carefully removed.

D. Where work under this contract interferes with the existing construction, duct work, piping, conduit or equipment, remove all such materials and reroute to clear the obstruction. Provide additional piping, conduits, ducts, and material of the same design and quality if the piping and/or conduit is to be continued in use.

E. Disconnect and remove all accessible piping, conduit, duct work, materials, fixtures and equipment not required in the new systems. Plug all outlets at the main or riser connection.

F. Removed materials not desired by the Owner and not to be reset and not specified nor indicated to be reused, shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be promptly removed from site.

G. All demolition work is subject to the direction and approval of the Architect and shall be

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 23 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

performed in such manner as not to interfere with the normal operation of the building.

H. Equipment Pad Removal: 1. The Mechanical/Electrical Contractor shall remove all concrete pads and equipment support structure material not indicated or specified for reuse. Concrete pads shall be removed to one (1) inch below adjacent concrete floor surface. 2. Reinforcement and anchor bolts shall be cut off at or below level of pad removal. a. Resurface area level with adjacent concrete floor surface using a heavy duty aggregate concrete topping consisting of Portland cement Type I or Type III conforming to ASTM C150 with aggregate graded by weight to pass sieves as follows:

Fine (Thin Coat) or Coarse (Heavy Coat) 3/8" 100% 1/2" 100% No. 4 95 - 100% 3/8" 30 - 50% No. 8 65 - 80% No. 4 0 - 15% No. 16 45 - 65% No. 8 0 - 5% No. 30 25 - 45% No. 100 0 - 5%

b. Topping mix shall contain a high range water-reducing admixture (super plasticizer) ASTM C494, Type F or Type G. c. Contractor shall coat surface with epoxy bonding agent prior to application of concrete topping. d. Mix design shall produce a heavy-duty concrete topping with the following characteristics:

Compressive Strength 5000 psi at 28 days Slump 8" maximum Water to Cement Ratio 0.44.

3.18 MECHANICAL WORK EXPOSED TO WEATHER

A. General: Provide protection for the ferrous metal portions of mechanical work exposed to weather including equipped fans, piping and accessories, supports and other items.

3.19 SAFETY MEASURES TO BE TAKEN

A. The Architect/Engineer has not been retained nor compensated to provide design and construction review services relating to the Contractor's safety precautions or to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures required for the Contractor to perform their work. The Contractor will be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site, including safety of the people and property during performance of the work. This requirement will apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours. The Architect's/Engineer's observations of the Contractor's performance are not intended to include review of the adequacy of the Contractor's safety measures in, on or near the construction site. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to comply with "Safety and Health Regulations for Construction", Volume 36, No. 75, part II of the Federal Register by the U.S. Department of Labor. Contractor shall be responsible for providing any such safety measures and shall consult with the State or Federal Safety Inspector for interpretation whenever in doubt as to whether safe conditions do or do not exist; or whether they are or are not in compliance with State or Federal Regulations.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 24 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

3.20 MANUFACTURER'S RECOMMENDATIONS

A. The materials and/or equipment shall be installed in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.

3.21 INTERFERENCES

A. Before making any installation, the work of the trades must be coordinated and the necessary changes shall be made to avoid interferences or improper effect on work to be performed by any other Section. In the event that interferences develop, the Architect's/Engineer’s decision will be final and no additional compensation will be allowed for moving of misplaced piping, ducts, conduit and/or equipment.

3.22 CLEANING

A. Premises shall be maintained in an orderly fashion at all times during the construction period. Remove any cartons, containers, crates, etc., as soon as their contents have been removed, and remove the debris as soon as possible.

B. Each Contractor and/or Sub-Contractor who is responsible for execution of individual sections of work shall be responsible for the following: 1. Removal of all lumber, refuse, metal, piping and debris from site resulting from their work. 2. Cleaning drippings resulting from their work, etc., from finished work of other trades. 3. Cleaning, polishing, waxing of their work as required. 4. The cartons, debris, etc., shall be removed from the site and premises at the sole expense of the Contractor.

C. After testing, and acceptance of all work by the Architect Engineer and the Owner, each Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment and material involved in their Contract to the satisfaction of the Architect Engineer.

D. At the completion of the work, the Contractor shall clean the work, equipment, etc., free from dust, etc., and leave the work area in good housekeeping fashion in a manner acceptable to the Building Owner's/Tenant's Representative.

E. All heating and cooling coils shall be free of residue and oil prior to start-up. Any extraneous cleaning and venting of the facilities caused by a failure to clean coils shall be the direct responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor.

3.23 OPERATING WITHOUT FILTERS

A. Do not operate or permit supply system to be operated without filters.

B. When directed, during construction period, operate system with the filters in place and the caulking complete.

C. Clean inside of ducts and equipment and perform the repairs with filters in place and the caulking of filter frames completed.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 25 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

D. After construction is finished, replace the filters with second set of clean filters.

3.24 TEMPORARY HEATING

A. The Contractor shall make provisions for the use of any permanent heating equipment, ducts and fan systems required for temporary heat as soon as the building is enclosed, during the heating season.

B. The Contractor will be responsible for any heating and ventilating equipment used and shall pay for any labor and fuel required for their operation.

C. Under no circumstances shall any items of new air handling equipment be operated for temporary heat or ventilation without filters in place. If the unit is used before construction is completed, the filters shall be replaced before the building is accepted by the Building Owner/Tenant. This set of filters shall not be considered as the spare set of filters hereinafter specified.

3.25 TEMPORARY LIGHT AND POWER

A. The Contractor shall provide temporary light and power feeders throughout the building during the construction as specified in the GENERAL CONDITIONS.

3.26 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Filter Media:

B. Furnish two (2) extra complete sets of the specified filter media for each air-handling unit to be used after the construction phase. One (1) set shall be installed after the construction phase set has been removed and the second set shall be turned over to the Building Owner/Tenant at the time of Building Owner's/Tenant's acceptance of the air handling system.

C. Fan Belts: 1. Furnish one (1) set of spare fan belts of proper size and type for each main air handling system. Spare belts shall be turned over to the Building Owner/Tenant at the time of Building Owner's/Tenant's acceptance of the air handling system.

3.27 START UP AND SERVICING OF EQUIPMENT AND SYSTEMS

A. After work has been completed under the Mechanical and Electrical contracts, and prior to final acceptance tests, each Contractor shall have manufacturers or their authorized agents of the equipment and material installed, completely check their equipment and put it into actual operation. In each case, the respective Contractor shall have the manufacturers thoroughly check the complete installation of the equipment produced by them for proper and correct operation under the service intended.

B. Six (6) months after final acceptance of the work under each of the Mechanical and Electrical contracts, each of the Contractors shall have the manufacturers again check their equipment for proper operation and lubrication. Coincidentally, these contractors shall assure that the building custodian is properly instructed in the servicing of the equipment.

C. Prior to expiration of the guarantee period, each contractor shall check all equipment, materials and systems installed under their contract, make necessary adjustments and/or replacements, and

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 26 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

leave systems in first class operating condition.

3.28 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING

A. Each Contractor shall perform all excavation, backfilling and pumping necessary for completion of work under their contract, unless noted otherwise. All excavation shall be considered classified.

B. Remove from premises, or deposit as directed by the Architect, all material excavated and not required or suitable for backfilling.

C. Carefully remove and store topsoil, shrubbery and sod until underground work is complete and trenches are backfilled and then re-install. Replace any damaged items to the satisfaction of the Architect.

D. Trench depth shall allow adequate cover over piping, ducts and conduit. Walls shall be perpendicular to the top of piping and ducts and conduit trench bottoms shall be instrument graded in the direction of flow as required. Earth shall be scooped out under pipe hubs to provide a solid bearing for the pipe duct or conduit on undisturbed earth. Cinder fill, stones or bricks beneath piping duct or conduit are prohibited.

E. Each Contractor shall provide sheathing, shoring and bracing in accordance with OSHA and local authorities safety regulations as necessary to complete their excavation and backfilling work. They shall exercise every precaution necessary to prevent accident, injury or death to any human and damage to property of others. Remove all sheathing, shoring and bracing upon completion of work.

F. It shall be the responsibility of each Contractor to check with the various utility companies for location of their facilities in the work area and make the necessary arrangements to avoid damage to their property. Each Contractor is responsible for damage during excavation to existing piping or equipment. Such damage shall be repaired promptly without cost to the Owner.

G. Backfill after inspection and approval. Backfill shall be made with clean earth, free from rocks, frozen particles, debris or other foreign materials. Deposit in uniform layers not over six inches (6") thick with each layer mechanically tamped before the next layer is applied. When approved backfill material is not available from the site, each Contractor, at their own expense, shall provide additional select backfill to complete installation. Partial backfill on piping with all joints exposed is mandatory for all underground gas and underground domestic water systems. Final backfill only after testing procedures have been approved.

H. All trenches that pass under wall foundations shall be backfilled with lean concrete, full height, directly under wall footing, and at a 1:1 slope away from wall or column footing. Trenches that are parallel with and deeper than wall foundations shall be backfilled with lean concrete on a 1:1 slope away from the bottom of the wall or column footing.

I. Each Contractor shall perform all cutting and patching to sidewalks, curbs, bituminous paving, walls, etc. required by performance of excavation and backfilling. Install and maintain temporary paving as directed by the Architect Engineer. Make repairs to sidewalks in complete blocks, partial patching will not be acceptable. Provide all materials for patching in strict accordance with applicable Articles of the General Construction Specifications.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 27 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

J. Where rock is encountered during installation of underground piping systems, carry trenches to a point six inches (6") below invert of pipe and provide a six inch (6") layer of crushed stone or gravel as a cushion.

K. All excavation work shall include all pumping equipment, materials and labor necessary to keep all excavations free of water. Provide well points as required with disposition of water as directed by the Architect.

L. Each Contractor shall provide suitable indemnity for all accidents to humans, animals or equipment caused by their excavating and backfilling work. They shall provide suitable guards, barricades, lights, red lanterns or flares and take the necessary precaution for an approved and safe installation. All trenches shall be backfilled at the end of each working day. Where a trench must be left open, provide coverings of adequate size and strength over entire open area.

3.29 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING

A. Piping Systems: Install pipe markers on each system. Include arrows showing normal direction of flow. 1. Plastic markers, with application systems. Install on insulation segment if required for hot, uninsulated piping. 2. Locate pipe markers as follows if piping is exposed in finished spaces, machine rooms, and accessible maintenance spaces, such as shafts, tunnels, plenums, and exterior nonconcealed locations: a. Near each valve and control device. b. Near each branch, excluding short takeoffs for fixtures and terminal units. Mark each pipe at branch, if flow pattern is not obvious. c. Near locations if pipes pass through walls, floors, ceilings, or enter non-accessible enclosures. d. At access doors, manholes, and similar access points that permit view of concealed piping. e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination. f. Spaced at maximum of 12-foot intervals along each run. g. On piping above removable acoustical ceilings, except omit intermediately spaced markers. h. Special “Asbestos Free” markers must be spaced at a maximum of 50-foot intervals.

B. Equipment: Install engraved plastic-laminate sign or equipment marker on or near each major item of mechanical equipment. 1 Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4-inch high lettering for name of unit if viewing distance is less than 24 inches, 1/2-inch high lettering for distances up to 72 inches, and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering two-thirds to three-fourths of size of principal lettering. 2 Text of Signs: Provide name of identified unit. Include text to distinguish between multiple units, inform user of operational requirements, indicate safety and emergency precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.

C. Duct Systems: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, intake, and relief ducts with duct markers; or provide stenciled signs and arrows, showing duct system service and direction of flow. 1. Location: In each space, if ducts are exposed or concealed by removable ceiling system, locate signs near points where ducts enter into space and at maximum intervals of 50 feet.

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 28 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

D. Adjusting: Relocate identifying devices as necessary for unobstructed view in finished construction.

END OF SECTION

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL 23 0000 - 29

8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 23 0553

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Nameplates. B. Tags. C. Pipe Markers. D. Ceiling Tacks 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers; 2007. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. List: Submit list of wording, symbols, letter size, and color coding for mechanical identification. C. Chart and Schedule: Submit valve chart and schedule, including valve tag number, location, function, and valve manufacturer's name and model number. D. Product Data: Provide manufacturers catalog literature for each product required. E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate special procedures, and installation. F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of tagged valves. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION APPLICATIONS A. Air Handling Units: Nameplates. B. Air Terminal Units: Tags. C. Control Panels: Nameplates. D. Heat Transfer Equipment: Nameplates. E. Major Control Components: Nameplates. F. Piping: Tags. G. Pumps: Nameplates. H. Tanks: Nameplates. I. Valves: Tags and ceiling tacks where located above lay-in ceiling. J. Water Treatment Devices: Nameplates. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com. B. Champion America, Inc: www.Champion-America.com. C. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com/aec.

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0553 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

D. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.03 NAMEPLATES A. Description: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved letters. 1. Letter Color: White. 2. Letter Height: 1/4 inch. 3. Background Color: Black. 2.04 TAGS A. Plastic Tags: Laminated three-layer plastic with engraved black letters on light contrasting background color. Tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter. B. Metal Tags: Brass with stamped letters; tag size minimum 1-1/2 inch diameter with smooth edges. C. Valve Tag Chart: Typewritten letter size list in anodized aluminum frame. 2.05 PIPE MARKERS A. Color: Conform to ASME A13.1. B. Plastic Pipe Markers: Factory fabricated, flexible, semirigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering; minimum information indicating flow direction arrow and identification of fluid being conveyed. 2.06 CEILING TACKS A. Description: Steel with 3/4 inch diameter color coded head. B. Color code as follows: 1. HVAC Equipment: Yellow. 2. Fire Dampers and Smoke Dampers: Red. 3. Heating/Cooling Valves: Blue. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install nameplates with corrosive-resistant mechanical fasteners, or adhesive. Apply with sufficient adhesive to ensure permanent adhesion and seal with clear lacquer. B. Install tags with corrosion resistant chain. C. Install plastic pipe markers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Install underground plastic pipe markers 6 to 8 inches below finished grade, directly above buried pipe. E. Identify air handling units, pumps, heat transfer equipment, tanks, and water treatment devices with plastic nameplates. Small devices, such as in-line pumps, may be identified with tags. F. Identify control panels and major control components outside panels with plastic nameplates. G. Identify thermostats relating to terminal boxes or valves with nameplates. H. Identify valves in main and branch piping with tags. I. Locate ceiling tacks to locate valves or dampers above lay-in panel ceilings. Locate in corner of panel closest to equipment.

END OF SECTION

IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 23 0553 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 23 0593

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of air systems. B. Testing, adjustment, and balancing of hydronic systems. C. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems. D. Commissioning activities. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 40 00: Employment of testing agency and payment for services. B. Section 01 91 13: Commissioning requirements that apply to all types of work. C. Section 23 08 00 - Commissioning of HVAC. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NEBB (TAB) - Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems; National Environmental Balancing Bureau; 2005, Seventh Edition. B. SMACNA (TAB) - HVAC Systems Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2002. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. TAB Plan: Submit a written plan indicating the testing, adjusting, and balancing standard to be followed and the specific approach for each system and component. 1. Submit to DEDC, LLC. 2. Include at least the following in the plan: a. List of all air flow, water flow, sound level, system capacity and efficiency measurements to be performed and a description of specific test procedures, parameters, formulas to be used. b. Copy of field checkout sheets and logs to be used, listing each piece of equipment to be tested, adjusted and balanced with the data cells to be gathered for each. c. Discussion of what notations and markings will be made on the duct and piping drawings during the process. d. Final test report forms to be used. e. Detailed step-by-step procedures for TAB work for each system and issue, including: 1) Terminal flow calibration (for each terminal type). 2) Diffuser proportioning. 3) Branch/submain proportioning. 4) Total flow calculations. 5) Rechecking. 6) Diversity issues. f. Expected problems and solutions, etc. g. Details of how TOTAL flow will be determined; for example:

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1) Air: Sum of terminal flows via control system calibrated readings or via hood readings of all terminals, supply (SA) and return air (RA) pitot traverse, SA or RA flow stations. 2) Water: Pump curves, circuit setter, flow station, ultrasonic, etc. h. Confirmation of understanding of the outside air ventilation criteria under all conditions. i. Method of verifying and setting minimum outside air flow rate will be verified and set and for what level (total building, zone, etc.). j. Procedures for formal deficiency reports, including scope, frequency and distribution. C. Final Report: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. 1. Revise TAB plan to reflect actual procedures and submit as part of final report. 2. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for DEDC, LLC and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. 3. Include actual instrument list, with manufacturer name, serial number, and date of calibration. 4. Form of Test Reports: Where the TAB standard being followed recommends a report format use that; otherwise, follow ASHRAE Std 111. 5. Units of Measure: Report data in both I-P (inch-pound) and SI (metric) units. 6. Include the following on the title page of each report: a. Name of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. b. Address of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. c. Telephone number of Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Agency. d. Project name. e. Project location. f. Project Engineer. g. Project Contractor. h. Report date. PART 2 - PRODUCTS - NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. TAB contractor shall review all of the drawings with special attention to the controls drawings as there is additional instruction on the drawings and sequence of operation as to how balancing shall be performed and what information the controls contractor is required to obtain. B. TAB contractor shall perform ductwork leak tests prior to installation of ceiling. TAB contractor shall schedule this work thru the mechanical contractor. C. Perform total system balance in accordance with one of the following: 1. NEBB Procedural Standards for Testing Adjusting Balancing of Environmental Systems. 2. SMACNA (TAB). D. Begin work after completion of systems to be tested, adjusted, or balanced and complete work prior to Substantial Completion of the project. E. Where HVAC systems and/or components interface with life safety systems, including fire and smoke detection, alarm, and control, coordinate scheduling and testing and inspection procedures with the authorities having jurisdiction. F. TAB Agency Qualifications: 1. Company specializing in the testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems specified in this section.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

2. Certified by one of the following: a. NEBB, National Environmental Balancing Bureau: www.nebb.org. b. TABB, The Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Bureau of National Energy Management Institute: www.tabbcertified.org. G. TAB Supervisor and Technician Qualifications: Certified by same organization as TAB agency. 3.02 EXAMINATION A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following conditions: 1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters. 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 6. Fans are rotating correctly. 7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. 9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 10. Air outlets are installed and connected. 11. Duct system leakage is minimized. 12. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented. 13. Pumps are rotating correctly. 14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place. 15. Service and balance valves are open. B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies that will or could prevent proper system balance. C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.03 PREPARATION A. Hold a pre-balancing meeting at least one week prior to starting TAB work. 1. Require attendance by all installers whose work will be tested, adjusted, or balanced. B. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make instruments available to DEDC, LLC to facilitate spot checks during testing. 3.04 ADJUSTMENT TOLERANCES A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and plus or minus 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems. B. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within plus or minus 10 percent of design. 3.05 RECORDING AND ADJUSTING A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 - 3 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

3.06 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities at site altitude. B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of duct. C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. D. Adjust distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable drafts and noise. E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to extend that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters. F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. 3.07 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities. B. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gauges to determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow metering devices are not installed, base flow balance on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in the system. C. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunction with air balancing. D. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer elements. E. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and fittings. Do not use service or shut-off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point. 3.08 COMMISSIONING A. See Sections 01 91 13 and 23 08 00 for additional requirements. B. Perform prerequisites prior to starting commissioning activities. C. Fill out Prefunctional Checklists for: 1. Air side systems. 2. Water side systems. D. Furnish to the Commissioning Authority, upon request, any data gathered but not shown in the final TAB report. E. Re-check a random sample equivalent to 10 percent of the final TAB report data as directed by Commissioning Authority. 1. Original TAB agency shall execute the re-checks, witnessed by the Commissioning Authority. 2. Use the same test instruments as used in the original TAB work. 3. Failure of more than 10 percent of the re-checked items of a given system shall result in the rejection of the system TAB report; rebalance the system, provide a new system TAB report, and repeat random re-checks. 4. For purposes of re-check, failure is defined as follows: a. Air Flow of Supply and Return: Deviation of more than 10 percent of instrument reading.

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 - 4 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

b. Minimum Outside Air Flow: Deviation of more than 20 percent of instrument reading; for inlet vane or VFD OSA compensation system using linear proportional control, deviation of more than 30 percent at intermediate supply flow. c. Temperatures: Deviation of more than one degree F. d. Air and Water Pressures: Deviation of more than 10 percent of full scale of test instrument reading. e. Sound Pressures: Deviation of more than 3 decibels, with consideration for variations in background noise. 5. For purposes of re-check, a whole system is defined as one in which inaccuracies will have little or no impact on connected systems; for example, the air distribution system served by one air handler or the hydronic chilled water supply system served by a chiller or the condenser water system. F. In the presence of the Commissioning Authority, verify that: 1. Final settings of all valves, splitters, dampers and other adjustment devices have been permanently marked. 2. The air system is being controlled to the lowest possible static pressure while still meeting design loads, less diversity; this shall include a review of TAB methods, established control setpoints, and physical verification of at least one leg from fan to diffuser having all balancing dampers wide open and that during full cooling of all terminal units taking off downstream of the static pressure sensor, the terminal unit on the critical leg has its damper 90 percent or more open. 3. The water system is being controlled to the lowest possible pressure while still meeting design loads, less diversity; this shall include a review of TAB methods, established control setpoints, and physical verification of at least one leg from the pump to the coil having all balancing valves wide open and that during full cooling the cooling coil valve of that leg is 90 percent or more open. 3.09 SCOPE A. Test, adjust, and balance the following: 1. Plumbing Pumps 2. HVAC Pumps 3. Air Cooled Water Chillers 4. Air Coils 5. Air Handling Units 6. Fans 7. Air Filters 8. Air Terminal Units 9. Air Inlets and Outlets 3.10 MINIMUM DATA TO BE REPORTED A. Electric Motors: 1. Manufacturer 2. Model/Frame 3. HP/BHP 4. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load 5. RPM 6. Service factor 7. Sheave Make/Size/Bore B. V-Belt Drives: 1. Identification/location

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 - 5 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

2. Required driven RPM 3. Driven sheave, diameter and RPM 4. Belt, size and quantity 5. Motor sheave diameter and RPM 6. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and actual C. Pumps: 1. Identification/number 2. Manufacturer 3. Size/model 4. Impeller 5. Service 6. Design flow rate, pressure drop, BHP 7. Actual flow rate, pressure drop, BHP 8. Discharge pressure 9. Suction pressure 10. Total operating head pressure D. Air Cooled Condensers: 1. Identification/number 2. Location 3. Manufacturer 4. Model number 5. Serial number 6. Entering DB air temperature, design and actual 7. Leaving DB air temperature, design and actual 8. Number of compressors E. Chillers: 1. Identification/number 2. Manufacturer 3. Capacity 4. Model number 5. Serial number 6. Evaporator entering water temperature, design and actual 7. Evaporator leaving water temperature, design and actual 8. Evaporator pressure drop, design and actual 9. Evaporator water flow rate, design and actual 10. Condenser entering water temperature, design and actual 11. Condenser pressure drop, design and actual 12. Condenser water flow rate, design and actual F. Heat Exchangers: 1. Identification/number 2. Location 3. Service 4. Manufacturer 5. Model number 6. Serial number 7. Steam pressure, design and actual 8. Primary water entering temperature, design and actual 9. Primary water leaving temperature, design and actual

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 - 6 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

10. Primary water flow, design and actual 11. Primary water pressure drop, design and actual 12. Secondary water leaving temperature, design and actual 13. Secondary water leaving temperature, design and actual 14. Secondary water flow, design and actual 15. Secondary water pressure drop, design and actual G. Cooling Coils: 1. Identification/number 2. Location 3. Service 4. Manufacturer 5. Air flow, design and actual 6. Entering air DB temperature, design and actual 7. Entering air WB temperature, design and actual 8. Leaving air DB temperature, design and actual 9. Leaving air WB temperature, design and actual 10. Water flow, design and actual 11. Water pressure drop, design and actual 12. Entering water temperature, design and actual 13. Leaving water temperature, design and actual 14. Saturated suction temperature, design and actual 15. Air pressure drop, design and actual H. Heating Coils: 1. Identification/number 2. Location 3. Service 4. Manufacturer 5. Air flow, design and actual 6. Water flow, design and actual 7. Water pressure drop, design and actual 8. Entering water temperature, design and actual 9. Leaving water temperature, design and actual 10. Entering air temperature, design and actual 11. Leaving air temperature, design and actual 12. Air pressure drop, design and actual I. Air Moving Equipment: 1. Location 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number 4. Serial number 5. Arrangement/Class/Discharge 6. Air flow, specified and actual 7. Return air flow, specified and actual 8. Outside air flow, specified and actual 9. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual 10. Inlet pressure 11. Discharge pressure 12. Sheave Make/Size/Bore

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 - 7 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

13. Number of Belts/Make/Size 14. Fan RPM J. Return Air/Outside Air: 1. Identification/location 2. Design air flow 3. Actual air flow 4. Design return air flow 5. Actual return air flow 6. Design outside air flow 7. Actual outside air flow 8. Return air temperature 9. Outside air temperature 10. Required mixed air temperature 11. Actual mixed air temperature 12. Design outside/return air ratio 13. Actual outside/return air ratio K. Exhaust Fans: 1. Location 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number 4. Serial number 5. Air flow, specified and actual 6. Total static pressure (total external), specified and actual 7. Inlet pressure 8. Discharge pressure 9. Sheave Make/Size/Bore 10. Number of Belts/Make/Size 11. Fan RPM L. Duct Traverses: 1. System zone/branch 2. Duct size 3. Area 4. Design velocity 5. Design air flow 6. Test velocity 7. Test air flow 8. Duct static pressure 9. Air temperature 10. Air correction factor M. Duct Leak Tests: 1. Description of ductwork under test 2. Duct design operating pressure 3. Duct design test static pressure 4. Duct capacity, air flow 5. Maximum allowable leakage duct capacity times leak factor 6. Test apparatus a. Blower b. Orifice, tube size

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 - 8 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

c. Orifice size d. Calibrated 7. Test static pressure 8. Test orifice differential pressure 9. Leakage N. Air Monitoring Stations: 1. Identification/location 2. System 3. Size 4. Area 5. Design velocity 6. Design air flow 7. Test velocity 8. Test air flow O. Terminal Unit Data: 1. Manufacturer 2. Type, constant, variable, single, dual duct 3. Identification/number 4. Location 5. Model number 6. Size 7. Minimum static pressure 8. Minimum design air flow 9. Maximum design air flow 10. Maximum actual air flow 11. Inlet static pressure

END OF SECTION

TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 23 0593 - 9

8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 23 0719

HVAC PIPING INSULATION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Piping insulation. B. Jackets and accessories. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM C534/C534M - Standard Specification for Preformed Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Thermal Insulation in Sheet and Tubular Form; 2013. B. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2014. C. NFPA 255 - Standard Method of Test of Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; National Fire Protection Association; 2006. D. UL 723 - Standard for Test for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide product description, thermal characteristics, list of materials and thickness for each service, and locations. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the Products specified in this section with not less than three years of documented experience. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Accept materials on site, labeled with manufacturer's identification, product density, and thickness. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient conditions required by manufacturers of each product. B. Maintain temperature before, during, and after installation for minimum of 24 hours. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 REQUIREMENTS FOR ALL PRODUCTS OF THIS SECTION A. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread/Smoke developed index of 25/50, maximum, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723. 2.02 HYDROUS CALCIUM SILICATE A. Manufacturers: 1. Johns Manville Corporation; Model ______: www.jm.com.

HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 0719 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.03 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR INSULATION A. Manufacturer: 1. Armacell LLC; ______: www.armacell.us. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Insulation: Preformed flexible elastomeric cellular rubber insulation complying with ASTM C534/C534M Grade 3; use molded tubular material wherever possible. 1. Minimum Service Temperature: -40 degrees F. 2. Maximum Service Temperature: 220 degrees F. 3. Connection: Waterproof vapor barrier adhesive. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that piping has been tested before applying insulation materials. B. Verify that surfaces are clean and dry, with foreign material removed. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Exposed Piping: Locate insulation and cover seams in least visible locations. C. Insulated pipes conveying fluids below ambient temperature: Insulate entire system including fittings, valves, unions, flanges, strainers, flexible connections, pump bodies, and expansion joints. D. Inserts and Shields: 1. Application: Piping 1-1/2 inches diameter or larger. 2. Shields: Galvanized steel between pipe hangers or pipe hanger rolls and inserts. 3. Insert location: Between support shield and piping and under the finish jacket. 4. Insert configuration: Minimum 6 inches long, of same thickness and contour as adjoining insulation; may be factory fabricated. E. Continue insulation through walls, sleeves, pipe hangers, and other pipe penetrations. Finish at supports, protrusions, and interruptions. At fire separations, refer to Section 07 84 00. F. Pipe Exposed in Mechanical Equipment Rooms or Finished Spaces (less than 10 feet above finished floor): Finish with canvas jacket sized for finish painting. G. Exterior Applications: Provide vapor barrier jacket. Insulate fittings, joints, and valves with insulation of like material and thickness as adjoining pipe, and finish with glass mesh reinforced vapor barrier cement. Cover with aluminum jacket with seams located on bottom side of horizontal piping. Provide two coats of UV resistant finish for flexible elastomeric cellular insulation without jacketing. 3.03 SCHEDULE A. Cooling Systems: 1. Refrigerant Suction: 1/2" Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation

END OF SECTION

HVAC PIPING INSULATION 23 0719 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 23 2300

REFRIGERANT PIPING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes refrigerant piping used for air-conditioning applications.

1.3 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Line Test Pressure for Refrigerant R-22: 1. Suction Lines for Air-Conditioning Applications: 185 psig. 2. Suction Lines for Heat-Pump Applications: 325 psig. 3. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: 325 psig.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of valve and refrigerant piping specialty indicated. Include pressure drop, based on manufacturer's test data, for the following: 1. Thermostatic expansion valves. 2. Solenoid valves. 3. Hot-gas bypass valves. 4. Filter dryers. 5. Strainers. 6. Pressure-regulating valves.

B. Shop Drawings: Show layout of refrigerant piping and specialties, including pipe, tube, and fitting sizes, flow capacities, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, oil traps, double risers, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationships between piping and equipment. 1. Shop Drawing Scale: 1/4 inch equals 1 foot. 2. Refrigerant piping indicated on Drawings is schematic only. Size piping and design actual piping layout, including oil traps, double risers, specialties, and pipe and tube sizes to accommodate, as a minimum, equipment provided, elevation difference between compressor and evaporator, and length of piping to ensure proper operation and compliance with warranties of connected equipment.

C. Field quality-control test reports.

D. Operation and Maintenance Data: For refrigerant valves and piping specialties to include in maintenance manuals.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 2300 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

A. Comply with ASHRAE 15, "Safety Code for Refrigeration Systems."

B. Comply with ASME B31.5, "Refrigeration Piping and Heat Transfer Components."

1.6 PRODUCT STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Store piping in a clean and protected area with end caps in place to ensure that piping interior and exterior are clean when installed.

1.7 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate size and location of roof curbs, equipment supports, and roof penetrations. These items are specified in Division 07 Section "Roof Accessories."

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 COPPER TUBE AND FITTINGS

A. Copper Tube: ASTM B 280, Type ACR.

B. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ASME B16.22.

C. Wrought-Copper Unions: ASME B16.22.

D. Solder Filler Metals: ASTM B 32. Use 95-5 tin antimony or alloy HB solder to join copper socket fittings on copper pipe.

E. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8.

F. Flexible Connectors: 1. Body: Tin-bronze bellows with woven, flexible, tinned-bronze-wire-reinforced protective jacket. 2. End Connections: Socket ends. 3. Offset Performance: Capable of minimum 3/4-inch misalignment in minimum 7-inch-long assembly. 4. Pressure Rating: Factory test at minimum 500 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 250 deg F.

2.2 VALVES AND SPECIALTIES

A. Check Valves: 1. Body: Ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; globe pattern. 2. Bonnet: Bolted ductile iron, forged brass, or cast bronze; or brass hex plug. 3. Piston: Removable polytetrafluoroethylene seat. 4. Closing Spring: Stainless steel.

B. Service Valves: 1. Body: Forged brass with brass cap including key end to remove core. 2. Core: Removable ball-type check valve with stainless-steel spring. 3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Copper spring.

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 2300 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

5. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig.

C. Solenoid Valves: Comply with ARI 760 and UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL. 1. Body and Bonnet: Plated steel. 2. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel. 3. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Threaded. 5. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location with 1/2-inch conduit adapter, and 24-V AC coil. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F. 8. Manual operator.

D. Safety Relief Valves: Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an NRTL. 1. Body and Bonnet: Ductile iron and steel, with neoprene O-ring seal. 2. Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. 3. Seat Disc: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 4. End Connections: Threaded. 5. Working Pressure Rating: 400 psig. 6. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

E. Thermostatic Expansion Valves: Comply with ARI 750. 1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Forged brass or steel. 2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. 3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos. 4. Capillary and Bulb: Copper tubing filled with refrigerant charge. 5. Suction Temperature: 40 deg F. 6. Superheat: Nonadjustable. 7. Reverse-flow option (for heat-pump applications). 8. End Connections: Socket, flare, or threaded union. 9. Working Pressure Rating: 450 psig.

F. Hot-Gas Bypass Valves: Comply with UL 429; listed and labeled by an NRTL. 1. Body, Bonnet, and Seal Cap: Ductile iron or steel. 2. Diaphragm, Piston, Closing Spring, and Seat Insert: Stainless steel. 3. Packing and Gaskets: Non-asbestos. 4. Solenoid Tube, Plunger, Closing Spring, and Seat Orifice: Stainless steel. 5. Seat: Polytetrafluoroethylene. 6. Equalizer: External. 7. Electrical: Molded, watertight coil in NEMA 250 enclosure of type required by location with 1/2-inch conduit adapter, and 24-V AC coil. 8. End Connections: Socket. 9. Set Pressure: 10. Throttling Range: Maximum 5 psig. 11. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 12. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

G. Moisture/Liquid Indicators: 1. Body: Forged brass. 2. Window: Replaceable, clear, fused glass window with indicating element protected by

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 2300 - 3 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

filter screen. 3. Indicator: Color coded to show moisture content in ppm. 4. Minimum Moisture Indicator Sensitivity: Indicate moisture above 60 ppm. 5. End Connections: Socket or flare. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

H. Replaceable-Core Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730. 1. Body and Cover: Painted-steel shell with ductile-iron cover, stainless-steel screws, and neoprene gaskets. 2. Filter Media: 10 micron, pleated with integral end rings; stainless-steel support. 3. Desiccant Media: Activated alumina or charcoal. 4. End Connections: Socket. 5. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential measurement. 6. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig. 7. Rated Flow: 8. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 9. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

I. Permanent Filter Dryers: Comply with ARI 730. 1. Access Ports: NPS 1/4 connections at entering and leaving sides for pressure differential measurement. 2. Maximum Pressure Loss: 2 psig. 3. Rated Flow: 4. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 5. Maximum Operating Temperature: 240 deg F.

J. Mufflers: 1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating. 2. End Connections: Socket or flare. 3. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 4. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.

K. Receivers: Comply with ARI 495. 1. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code; listed and labeled by an NRTL. 2. Comply with UL 207; listed and labeled by an NRTL. 3. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating. 4. Tappings: Inlet, outlet, liquid level indicator, and safety relief valve. 5. End Connections: Socket or threaded. 6. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 7. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.

L. Liquid Accumulators: Comply with ARI 495. 1. Body: Welded steel with corrosion-resistant coating. 2. End Connections: Socket or threaded. 3. Working Pressure Rating: 500 psig. 4. Maximum Operating Temperature: 275 deg F.

2.3 REFRIGERANTS

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 2300 - 4 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Atofina Chemicals, Inc. 2. DuPont Company; Fluorochemicals Div. 3. Honeywell, Inc.; Genetron Refrigerants. 4. INEOS Fluor Americas LLC.

C. ASHRAE 34, R-22: Monochlorodifluoromethane.

D. ASHRAE 34, R-134a: Tetrafluoroethane.

E. ASHRAE 34, R-407C: Difluoromethane/Pentafluoroethane/1,1,1,2-Tetrafluoroethane.

F. ASHRAE 34, R-410A: Pentafluoroethane/Difluoromethane.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PIPING APPLICATIONS FOR REFRIGERANT R-22

A. Suction Lines NPS 1-1/2 and Smaller for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

B. Suction Lines NPS 2 to NPS 4 for Conventional Air-Conditioning Applications: Copper, Type ACR, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

C. Hot-Gas and Liquid Lines: Copper, Type ACR, annealed-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with brazed joints.

D. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping: Copper, Type ACR, drawn-temper tubing and wrought-copper fittings with soldered joints.

E. Safety-Relief-Valve Discharge Piping.

3.2 VALVE AND SPECIALTY APPLICATIONS

A. Install service valves for gage taps at inlet and outlet of hot-gas bypass valves and strainers if they are not an integral part of valves and strainers.

B. Install a check valve at the compressor discharge and a liquid accumulator at the compressor suction connection.

C. Except as otherwise indicated, install diaphragm packless valves on inlet and outlet side of filter dryers.

D. Install solenoid valves upstream from each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at top.

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 2300 - 5 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

E. Install thermostatic expansion valves as close as possible to distributors on evaporators. 1. Install valve so diaphragm case is warmer than bulb. 2. Secure bulb to clean, straight, horizontal section of suction line using two bulb straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at bottom of the line. 3. If external equalizer lines are required, make connection where it will reflect suction-line pressure at bulb location.

F. Install safety relief valves where required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe safety-relief-valve discharge line to outside according to ASHRAE 15.

G. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid line at the inlet of the thermostatic expansion valve or at the inlet of the evaporator coil capillary tube.

H. Install strainers upstream from and adjacent to the following unless they are furnished as an integral assembly for device being protected: 1. Solenoid valves. 2. Thermostatic expansion valves. 3. Hot-gas bypass valves. 4. Compressor.

I. Install filter dryers in liquid line between compressor and thermostatic expansion valve, and in the suction line at the compressor.

J. Install flexible connectors at compressors.

3.3 PIPING INSTALLATION

A. Drawing plans, schematics, and diagrams indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems; indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated unless deviations to layout are approved on Shop Drawings.

B. Install refrigerant piping according to ASHRAE 15.

C. Install piping in concealed locations unless otherwise indicated and except in equipment rooms and service areas.

D. Install piping indicated to be exposed and piping in equipment rooms and service areas at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are prohibited unless specifically indicated otherwise.

E. Install piping above accessible ceilings to allow sufficient space for ceiling panel removal.

F. Install piping adjacent to machines to allow service and maintenance.

G. Install piping free of sags and bends.

H. Install fittings for changes in direction and branch connections.

I. Select system components with pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure.

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 2300 - 6 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

J. Refer to Division 23 Sections "Instrumentation and Control for HVAC" and "Sequence of Operation" for solenoid valve controllers, control wiring, and sequence of operation.

K. Install piping as short and direct as possible, with a minimum number of joints, elbows, and fittings.

L. Arrange piping to allow inspection and service of refrigeration equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for service and inspection. Install access doors or panels as specified in Division 08 Section "Access Doors and Frames" if valves or equipment requiring maintenance is concealed behind finished surfaces.

M. Install refrigerant piping in protective conduit where installed belowground.

N. Install refrigerant piping in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where exposed to mechanical injury.

O. Slope refrigerant piping as follows: 1. Install horizontal hot-gas discharge piping with a uniform slope downward away from compressor. 2. Install horizontal suction lines with a uniform slope downward to compressor. 3. Install traps and double risers to entrain oil in vertical runs. 4. Liquid lines may be installed level.

P. When brazing or soldering, remove solenoid-valve coils and sight glasses; also remove valve stems, seats, and packing, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties. Do not apply heat near expansion-valve bulb.

3.4 PIPE JOINT CONSTRUCTION

A. Ream ends of pipes and tubes and remove burrs. Bevel plain ends of steel pipe.

B. Remove scale, slag, dirt, and debris from inside and outside of pipe and fittings before assembly.

C. Brazed Joints: Construct joints according to AWS's "Brazing Handbook," Chapter "Pipe and Tube." 1. Use Type BcuP, copper-phosphorus alloy for joining copper socket fittings with copper pipe. 2. Use Type BAg, cadmium-free silver alloy for joining copper with bronze or steel.

3.5 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hanger, support, and anchor products are specified in Division 23 Section "Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment."

B. Install the following pipe attachments: 1. Adjustable steel clevis hangers for individual horizontal runs less than 20 feet long. 2. Roller hangers and spring hangers for individual horizontal runs 20 feet or longer. 3. Pipe Roller: MSS SP-58, Type 44 for multiple horizontal piping 20 feet or longer, supported on a trapeze. 4. Spring hangers to support vertical runs.

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 2300 - 7 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

5. Copper-clad hangers and supports for hangers and supports in direct contact with copper pipe.

C. Install hangers for copper tubing with the following maximum spacing and minimum rod sizes: 1. NPS 1/2: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 2. NPS 5/8: Maximum span, 60 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 3. NPS 1: Maximum span, 72 inches; minimum rod size, 1/4 inch. 4. NPS 1-1/4: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 5. NPS 1-1/2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 6. NPS 2: Maximum span, 96 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 7. NPS 2-1/2: Maximum span, 108 inches; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 8. NPS 3: Maximum span, 10 feet; minimum rod size, 3/8 inch. 9. NPS 4: Maximum span, 12 feet; minimum rod size, 1/2 inch.

D. Support multifloor vertical runs at least at each floor.

3.6 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Perform tests and inspections and prepare test reports.

B. Tests and Inspections: 1. Comply with ASME B31.5, Chapter VI. 2. Test refrigerant piping, specialties, and receivers. Isolate compressor, condenser, evaporator, and safety devices from test pressure if they are not rated above the test pressure. 3. Test high- and low-pressure side piping of each system separately at not less than the pressures indicated in Part 1 "Performance Requirements" Article.

a. Fill system with nitrogen to the required test pressure. b. System shall maintain test pressure at the manifold gage throughout duration of test. c. Test joints and fittings with electronic leak detector or by brushing a small amount of soap and glycerin solution over joints. d. Remake leaking joints using new materials, and retest until satisfactory results are achieved.

3.7 SYSTEM CHARGING

A. Charge system using the following procedures: 1. Install core in filter dryers after leak test but before evacuation. 2. Evacuate entire refrigerant system with a vacuum pump to 500 micrometers. If vacuum holds for 12 hours, system is ready for charging. 3. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas, allowing pressure to build up to 2 psig. 4. Charge system with a new filter-dryer core in charging line.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat.

B. Adjust high- and low-pressure switch settings to avoid short cycling in response to fluctuating suction pressure.

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 2300 - 8 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

C. Adjust set-point temperature of air-conditioning or chilled-water controllers to the system design temperature.

D. Perform the following adjustments before operating the refrigeration system, according to manufacturer's written instructions: 1. Open shutoff valves in condenser water circuit. 2. Verify that compressor oil level is correct. 3. Open compressor suction and discharge valves. 4. Open refrigerant valves except bypass valves that are used for other purposes. 5. Check open compressor-motor alignment and verify lubrication for motors and bearings.

E. Replace core of replaceable filter dryer after system has been adjusted and after design flow rates and pressures are established.

END OF SECTION

REFRIGERANT PIPING 23 2300 - 9

8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 23 3100

HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal ductwork. B. Casing and plenums. C. Duct cleaning. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 23 07 13 - Duct Insulation: External insulation and duct liner. B. Section 23 33 00 - Air Duct Accessories. C. Section 23 37 00 - Air Outlets and Inlets. D. Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A36/A36M - Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel; 2012. B. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated (Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process; 2013. C. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials; 2014. D. ICC-ES AC01 - Acceptance Criteria for Expansion Anchors in Masonry Elements; 2012. E. ICC-ES AC106 - Acceptance Criteria for Predrilled Fasteners (Screw Anchors) in Masonry Elements; 2012. F. ICC-ES AC193 - Acceptance Criteria for Mechanical Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2013. G. ICC-ES AC308 - Acceptance Criteria for Post-Installed Adhesive Anchors in Concrete Elements; 2013. H. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2012. I. NFPA 90B - Standard for the Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air Conditioning Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2012. J. NFPA 96 - Standard for Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Operations; National Fire Protection Association; 2014. K. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2005. L. SMACNA (LEAK) - HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual; Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors' National Association; 2012, 2nd Edition. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for duct materials.

HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 3100 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

C. Shop Drawings: Indicate duct fittings, particulars such as gages, sizes, welds, and configuration prior to start of work for Low pressure class and higher systems. D. Test Reports: Indicate pressure tests performed. Include date, section tested, test pressure, and leakage rate, following SMACNA (LEAK). E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of ducts and duct fittings. Record changes in fitting location and type. Show additional fittings used. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A, NFPA 90B, and NFPA 96 standards. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install duct sealants when temperatures are less than those recommended by sealant manufacturers. B. Maintain temperatures within acceptable range during and after installation of duct sealants. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 DUCT ASSEMBLIES A. Regulatory Requirements: Construct ductwork to NFPA 90A standards. B. All Ducts: Galvanized steel, or Manufactured Non-Metallic Ductwork. C. Low Pressure Supply (System with Cooling Coils): 2 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel. D. Medium and High Pressure Supply: 4 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel. E. Return and Relief: 1 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel. F. General Exhaust: 1 inch w.g. pressure class, galvanized steel. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel for Ducts: Hot-dipped galvanized steel sheet, ASTM A653/A653M FS Type B, with G90/Z275 coating. B. Joint Sealers and Sealants: Non-hardening, water resistant, mildew and mold resistant. 1. Type: Heavy mastic or liquid used alone or with tape, suitable for joint configuration and compatible with substrates, and recommended by manufacturer for pressure class of ducts. 2. VOC Content: Not more than 250 g/L, excluding water. 3. Surface Burning Characteristics: Flame spread of zero, smoke developed of zero, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84. 4. For Use With Flexible Ducts: UL labeled. 5. Products: a. Carlisle HVAC Products; Hardcast Iron-Grip 601 Water Based Duct Sealant: www.carlislehvac.com. b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. C. Hanger Rod: ASTM A36/A36M; steel, galvanized; threaded both ends, threaded one end, or continuously threaded. D. Hanger Fasteners: Attach hangers to structure using appropriate fasteners, as follows: 1. Concrete Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193. 2. Masonry Wedge Expansion Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC01. 3. Concrete Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC193.

HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 3100 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

4. Masonry Screw Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC106. 5. Concrete Adhesive Type Anchors: Complying with ICC-ES AC308. 2.03 DUCTWORK FABRICATION A. Fabricate and support in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated. B. Provide duct material, gages, reinforcing, and sealing for operating pressures indicated. C. Construct T's, bends, and elbows with radius of not less than 1-1/2 times width of duct on centerline. Where not possible and where rectangular elbows must be used, provide air foil turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation. D. Provide turning vanes of perforated metal with glass fiber insulation when acoustical lining is indicated. E. Increase duct sizes gradually, not exceeding 15 degrees divergence wherever possible; maximum 30 degrees divergence upstream of equipment and 45 degrees convergence downstream. F. Fabricate continuously welded round and oval duct fittings in accordance with SMACNA (DCS). G. Where ducts are connected to exterior wall louvers and duct outlet is smaller than louver frame, provide blank-out panels sealing louver area around duct. Use same material as duct, painted black on exterior side; seal to louver frame and duct. 2.04 MANUFACTURED DUCTWORK AND FITTINGS A. Manufactured Non-Metallic Ductwork: 1. Products: a. Ductwork system materials including panels, adhesives, tapes, sealants, flanges and gaskets to be as a matched system listed by Underwriter's Laboratory to the UL-181 standard as a Class 1 air duct. b. Duct air leakage rates to be in compliance with SMACNA Class 3 HVAC Duct Construction Standards, latest version per applicable leakage class based on pressure. c. The panel shall be manufactured of CFC/HCFC-free rigid material thermobonded on both sides to a factory-applied.001"(25 micron) aluminum foil facing reinforced with a fiberglass scrim. The thermal conductivity shall be no greater than 0.13BTU in/hr x sq.ft x degree F(.018W/m x deg. C), and the density of the material shall not be less than 3.5 pcf(56 Kg/sq.m) with a minimum compressive strength of 28 psi (.2 MPa). d. The standard thermal rating to be a minimum of an R-6.0 (1.2 RSI) e. Installed ducting system must be warranted for a minimum of ten years from installation. 2. Application: a. All fabricated duct segment fittings shall be designed in accordance with SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards, latest edition. 3. Duct Installation: a. All exterior mounted ductwork shall be protected against the elements with a non- duct penetrating weatherproof finish. Duct segments shall incorporate 6.0 mils thickness 5-ply aluminum, zero permeability, absolute vapor barrier self-adhesive jacketing. All external seams and joints shall be fully sealed with joint and seam tape during the installation process. 4. Manufacturers: a. KoolDuct; www.ptmmanufacturing.com b. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Flexible Ducts: Black polymer film supported by helically wound spring steel wire.

HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 3100 - 3 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1. UL labeled. 2. Insulation: Fiberglass insulation with aluminized vapor barrier film. 3. Pressure Rating: 4 inches WG positive and 1" inches WG negative. 4. Maximum Velocity: 4000 fpm. 5. Temperature Range: Minus 20 degrees F to 175 degrees F. 6. Manufacturers: a. Thermaflex Model M-KE. b. Hart and Cooley Model F216. c. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.05 CASINGS A. Fabricate casings in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and construct for operating pressures indicated. B. Mount floor mounted casings on 4 inch high concrete curbs. At floor, rivet panels on 8 inch centers to angles. Where floors are acoustically insulated, provide liner of galvanized 18 gage, 0.0478 inch expanded metal mesh supported at 12 inch centers, turned up 12 inches at sides with sheet metal shields. C. Reinforce door frames with steel angles tied to horizontal and vertical plenum supporting angles. Install hinged access doors where indicated or required for access to equipment for cleaning and inspection. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install, support, and seal ducts in accordance with SMACNA (DCS). B. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. During construction provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ductwork to prevent construction dust from entering ductwork system. D. Duct sizes indicated are inside clear dimensions. For lined ducts, maintain sizes inside lining. E. Provide openings in ductwork where required to accommodate thermometers and controllers. Provide pilot tube openings where required for testing of systems, complete with metal can with spring device or screw to ensure against air leakage. Where openings are provided in insulated ductwork, install insulation material inside a metal ring. F. Locate ducts with sufficient space around equipment to allow normal operating and maintenance activities. G. Use crimp joints with or without bead for joining round duct sizes 8 inch and smaller with crimp in direction of air flow. H. Use double nuts and lock washers on threaded rod supports. I. Connect terminal units to supply ducts directly or with one foot maximum length of flexible duct. Do not use flexible duct to change direction. J. At exterior wall louvers, seal duct to louver frame and install blank-out panels. 3.02 CLEANING A. Clean duct system and force air at high velocity through duct to remove accumulated dust. To obtain sufficient air, clean half the system at a time. Protect equipment that could be harmed by excessive dirt with temporary filters, or bypass during cleaning.

HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 3100 - 4 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

3.03 PRESSURE TESTING A. Prior to the balancing of the duct system by the AABC certified balancing contractor all ductwork shall be tested by the mechanical contractor for duct leakage in accordance with SMACNA Standards and AABC Standards Chapter 23. Duct leakage shall not exceed 1% for a duration of (10) ten minutes. Test pressures shall be as per SMACNA, however, not less than the following: 1. Low Pressure Duct: a. 25% above system operating pressure, but not less than 2" w.c. (500 Pa). 2. High Pressure Supply Duct: a. 25% above system operating pressure, but not less than 6" w.c. (1500 Pa). 3. High Pressure Exhaust Duct: a. 25% above system operating pressure, but not less than 8" w.c. (2000 Pa). B. Insulation materials shall not be applied until systems have been witnessed to meet the above testing requirements. C. The testing and balancing contractor shall witness and certify all duct pressure tests. D. Additional leak testing requirements: 1. Disassemble, reassemble, and seal segments of duct systems to accommodate leakage testing and for compliance with test requirements. 2. If static pressure classes are not indicated, test system at maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above maximum design operating pressure. 3. Provide seven (7) days advance notice for testing. 3.04 SCHEDULES A. Ductwork Pressure Class: 1. Supply (Heating Systems): 2 inch (500 Pa 2. Supply (System with Cooling Coils): 2 inch. 3. Return Ductwork: 1 inch. 4. General Exhaust: 1 inch. 5. Outside Air Intake: 1 inch. 6. Combustion Air: 1 inch (250 Pa)

END OF SECTION

HVAC DUCTS AND CASINGS 23 3100 - 5

8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 23 3300

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Air turning devices/extractors. B. Backdraft dampers. C. Combination fire and smoke dampers. D. Duct access doors. E. Duct test holes. F. Fire dampers. G. Flexible duct connections. H. Smoke dampers. I. Volume control dampers. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 23 31 00 - HVAC Ducts and Casings. B. Section 23 36 00 - Air Terminal Units: Pressure regulating damper assemblies. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NFPA 90A - Standard for the Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems; National Fire Protection Association; 2012. B. NFPA 92 - Standard for Smoke-Control Systems; 2012. C. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; 2005. D. UL 33 - Heat Responsive Links for Fire-Protection Service; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. E. UL 555 - Standard for Fire Dampers; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. F. UL 555S - Standard for Leakage Rated Dampers for Use in Smoke Control Systems; Underwriters Laboratories Inc.; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide for shop fabricated assemblies including volume control dampers. Include electrical characteristics and connection requirements. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Provide instructions for fire dampers. D. Project Record Drawings: Record actual locations of access doors and test holes. 1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Protect dampers from damage to operating linkages and blades.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 3300 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 AIR TURNING DEVICES/EXTRACTORS A. Manufacturers: 1. Krueger: www.krueger-hvac.com. 2. PCI Industries, Inc; Pottorff Brand: www.portorff.com. 3. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. 4. Titus: www.titus-hvac.com. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Multi-blade device with blades aligned in short dimension; steel construction; with individually adjustable blades, mounting straps. 2.02 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Louvers & Dampers, Inc: www.louvers-dampers.com. 2. Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com. 3. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Multi-Blade, Parallel Action Gravity Balanced Backdraft Dampers: Galvanized steel, with center pivoted blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed edges, linked together in rattle-free manner with 90 degree stop, steel ball bearings, and plated steel pivot pin; adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure. 2.03 COMBINATION FIRE AND SMOKE DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Louvers & Dampers, Inc: www.louvers-dampers.com. 2. Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com. 3. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A, UL 555, UL 555S, and as indicated. C. Provide factory sleeve and collar for each damper. D. Multiple Blade Dampers: Fabricate with 16 gage galvanized steel frame and blades, oil- impregnated bronze or stainless steel sleeve bearings and plated steel axles, stainless steel jamb seals, 1/8 x 1/2 inch plated steel concealed linkage, stainless steel closure spring, blade stops, and lock, and 1/2 inch actuator shaft. E. Operators: UL listed and labelled spring return electric type suitable for 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz. Provide end switches to indicate damper position. Locate damper operator on interior of duct and link to damper operating shaft. F. Electro Thermal Link: Fusible link melting at 165 degrees F; 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz; UL listed and labeled. 2.04 DUCT ACCESS DOORS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated. B. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable. 2.05 DUCT TEST HOLES A. Temporary Test Holes: Cut or drill in ducts as required. Cap with neat patches, neoprene plugs, threaded plugs, or threaded or twist-on metal caps.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 3300 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Permanent Test Holes: Factory fabricated, air tight flanged fittings with screw cap. Provide extended neck fittings to clear insulation. 1. Products: 2. Carlisle HVAC Products; Dynair Test Port with Red Cap with O-Ring Seal: www.carlislehvac.com. a. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.06 FIRE DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555, and as indicated. B. Horizontal Dampers: Galvanized steel, 22 gage frame, stainless steel closure spring, and lightweight, heat retardant non-asbestos fabric blanket. C. Curtain Type Dampers: Galvanized steel with interlocking blades. Provide stainless steel closure springs and latches for horizontal installations. Configure with blades out of air stream except for 1.0 inch pressure class ducts up to 12 inches in height. D. Fusible Links: UL 33, separate at 160 degrees F with adjustable link straps for combination fire/balancing dampers. 2.07 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS A. Manufacturers: 1. Carlisle HVAC Products; Dynair Connector Plus G90 Steel Offset Seam Neoprene Fabric: www.carlislehvac.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated. C. Flexible Duct Connections: Fabric crimped into metal edging strip. 1. Fabric: UL listed fire-retardant neoprene coated woven glass fiber fabric to NFPA 90A, minimum density 30 oz per sq yd. a. Net Fabric Width: Approximately 2 inches wide. 2. Metal: 3 inches wide, 24 gage, 0.0239 inch thick galvanized steel. 2.08 SMOKE DAMPERS A. Fabricate in accordance with NFPA 90A and UL 555S, and as indicated. B. Electro Thermal Link: Fusible link melting at 165 degrees F; 120 volts, single phase, 60 Hz; UL listed and labeled. 2.09 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Louvers & Dampers, Inc: www.louvers-dampers.com. 2. Nailor Industries Inc: www.nailor.com. 3. Ruskin Company: www.ruskin.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) and as indicated. C. Single Blade Dampers: Fabricate for duct sizes up to 6 x 30 inch. D. Multi-Blade Damper: Fabricate of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 8 x 72 inch. Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized channel frame with suitable hardware. E. End Bearings: Except in round ducts 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple blade dampers, provide oil-impregnated nylon, thermoplastic elastomer, or sintered bronze bearings.

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 3300 - 3 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

F. Quadrants: 1. Provide locking, indicating quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers. 2. On insulated ducts mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases, or adapters. 3. Where rod lengths exceed 30 inches provide regulator at both ends. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Verify that electric power is available and of the correct characteristics. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, NFPA 90A, and follow SMACNA (DCS). Refer to Section 23 31 00 for duct construction and pressure class. B. Provide backdraft dampers on exhaust fans or exhaust ducts nearest to outside and where indicated. C. Provide duct access doors for inspection and cleaning before and after filters, coils, fans, automatic dampers, at fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and elsewhere as indicated. Provide for cleaning kitchen exhaust ducts in accordance with NFPA 96. Provide minimum 8 x 8 inch size for hand access, 18 x 18 inch size for shoulder access, and as indicated. Provide 4 x 4 inch for balancing dampers only. Review locations prior to fabrication. D. Provide duct test holes where indicated and required for testing and balancing purposes. E. Provide fire dampers, combination fire and smoke dampers, and smoke dampers at locations indicated, where ducts and outlets pass through fire rated components, and where required by authorities having jurisdiction. Install with required perimeter mounting angles, sleeves, breakaway duct connections, corrosion resistant springs, bearings, bushings and hinges. F. Install smoke dampers and combination smoke and fire dampers in accordance with NFPA 92. G. Demonstrate re-setting of fire dampers to Gladwyne Library's representative. H. At fans and motorized equipment associated with ducts, provide flexible duct connections immediately adjacent to the equipment. I. Provide balancing dampers at points on supply, return, and exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts as required for air balancing. Install minimum 2 duct widths from duct take-off. J. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, grilles, and registers, regardless of whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, grille, or register assembly. K. Provide air turning devices within duct whenever long radius elbows are not utilized.

END OF SECTION

AIR DUCT ACCESSORIES 23 3300 - 4 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 23 3700

AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Registers/grilles. B. Goosenecks. 1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASHRAE Std 70 - Method of Testing the Performance of Air Outlets and Inlets; American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Inc.; 2006. B. SMACNA (DCS) - HVAC Duct Construction Standards; 2005. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide data for equipment required for this project. Review outlets and inlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior to submission. Submit schedule of outlets and inlets showing type, size, location, application, and noise level. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of air outlets and inlets. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Test and rate air outlet and inlet performance in accordance with ASHRAE Std 70. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the type of products specified in this section, with minimum three years of documented experience. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Price Industries: www.price-hvac.com. B. Titus: www.titus-hvac.com. C. Tuttle & Bailey. D. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 WALL SUPPLY REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Type: Streamlined and individually adjustable curved blades to discharge air along face of grille with two-way deflection. B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting and gasket. C. Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions with factory clear lacquer finish. 2.03 WALL EXHAUST AND RETURN REGISTERS/GRILLES A. Type: Streamlined blades, 3/4 inch minimum depth, 3/4 inch maximum spacing, with spring or other device to set blades, vertical face. B. Frame: 1-1/4 inch margin with countersunk screw mounting. C. Fabrication: Aluminum extrusions, with factory baked enamel finish.

AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 3700 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.04 GOOSENECKS A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA (DCS) of minimum 18 gage, 0.0598 inch galvanized steel. B. Mount on minimum 12 inch high curb base where size exceeds 9 x 9 inch. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Check location of outlets and inlets and make necessary adjustments in position to conform with architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement. C. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connection. D. Provide balancing dampers on duct take-off to diffusers, and grilles and registers, despite whether dampers are specified as part of the diffuser, or grille and register assembly. E. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. F. Paint ductwork visible behind air outlets and inlets matte black. Refer to Section 09 90 00.

END OF SECTION

AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS 23 3700 - 2 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 23 8127

SINGLE ZONE HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS

Samsung Electronics “Whisper” Series Model Numbers: Model Indoor Unit Outdoor Unit AR09HSFSHWK AR09HSFSHWKN AR09HSFSHWKX AR12HSFSHWK AR12HSFSHWKN AR12HSFSHWKX AR18HSFSHWK AR18HSFSHWKN AR18HSFSHWKX AR24HSFSHWK AR24HSFSHWKN AR24HSFSHWKX

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.01 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

The variable capacity, heat pump air conditioning system shall be a Samsung Electronics System or equivalent. The systems shall be (cool/heat) split system heat pump.

The heat pump system shall consist of a single outdoor condensing unit, single indoor unit, and wireless controller.

The condensing shall be a horizontal discharge, 208/230V, 1Ph, 60Hz unit.

The evaporator shall be wall-mounted (high-wall) type.

1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The units shall be listed by Electrical Laboratories (ETL) and bear the ETL label. B. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.). C. The units shall be manufactured in a facility registered to ISO 9001 and ISO14001 which is a set of standards applying to environmental protection set by the International Standard Organization (ISO). D. A full charge of R-410A for the condensing unit only shall be provided in the condensing unit. Additional refrigerant is required based on lengths of system liquid refrigerant lines.

PART 2 – WARRANTY

(a) FIVE YEARS ON PARTS. The parts are warranted for a period of five (5) years to the original end- user of this Product. If it should prove defective due to improper workmanship and/or material for a period of five (5) years from the date of installation, QUIETSIDE will replace any defective part without charge for the part. Parts used for replacement may be of like kind and quality and may be new or remanufactured. Defective parts must be made available to QUIETSIDE in exchange for the replacement part and become the property of QUIETSIDE.

(b) SEVEN YEAR COMPRESSOR WARRANTY. The compressor is warranted for a total period of seven (7) years to the original end-user of this Product. If it should prove defective due to improper workmanship and/or material for a period of seven (7) years from the date of installation, QUIETSIDE will replace any defective compressor without charge for the compressor. Compressors used for replacement may be of like kind and quality and may be new or remanufactured. Defective

SINGLE ZONE HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS 23 8127 - 1

8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

compressors must be made available to QUIETSIDE in exchange for the replacement compressor and become the property of QUIETSIDE.

(c) NO LABOR. THESE LIMITED WARRANTIES DO NOT INCLUDE LABOR or any other costs incurred for service, maintenance, repair, removing, replacing, installing, complying with local building and electric codes, shipping or handling, or replacement of the Product, compressors or any other parts. For items that are designed to be maintained or replaced by the owner, the owner is solely responsible for all labor and other costs of maintaining, installing, replacing, disconnecting or dismantling the Product and parts (such as filters or belts) in connection with owner-required maintenance. Air filter cleaning and/or replacement for each applicable indoor unit are owner- required maintenance, and labor for this procedure is not covered under warranty.

(d) The warranty on the replacement compressor and replacement parts will be limited to the unexpired term of the original warranty for the Product.

2. CONDITIONS – The Limited Warranty applies only if the Product: (a) was initially installed within the continental United States, Hawaii or Canada and remains at the site of its original installation (except for mobile home installations); and (b) was installed and operated and maintained in accordance with all written instructions, all applicable local laws, regulations, permits and building codes, and good industry practices.

3. LIMITED LABOR WARRANTY: The Limited Warranty described in paragraph 1 and 2 above applies with respect to parts only and NOT labor. Accordingly, subject to the conditions and limitations set forth herein, QUIETSIDE shall provide additional Limited Labor Warranty for a period of one (1) year from proven date of installation of the Product. Pursuant to this Limited Labor Warranty, QUIETSIDE will provide labor services to repair a product or install replacement parts at its designated repair facilities, or at its option, compensate its authorized dealers and contractors at QUIETSIDE standard fixed rates in effect (irrespective of charges actually imposed and time actually expended) to provide such services. This Limited Labor Warranty covers only the installation of parts or repair of the Product, not diagnosis of fault, time taken to obtain such parts or travel time to and from the jobsite. This Limited Labor Warranty also does not cover costs for parts (such as filters or belts) incurred in connection with normal maintenance or owner-required maintenance of the Product. Consult the instructions enclosed with the Product for information regarding recommended maintenance.

4. THIS LIMITED WARRANTY DOES NOT COVER damages caused by: (a) accident, abuse, negligence or misuse; (b) operating the Product in a corrosive atmosphere containing chlorine, fluorine, or any other damaging chemicals; (c) modification, alteration, repair service by any person other than an authorized Product distributor, dealer or HVAC contractor; (d) improper matching or application of the Product or components or loss of refrigerant; (e) failure to provide proper maintenance or service to the Product according to manufacturer’s instructions; (f) failure to apply, install, and operate the Product in compliance with SAMSUNG’s (or QUIETSIDE’s) written instructions, training seminars and recommendations; or (g) fluctuations in electrical power;(h) lightning, flood, fire or other acts of God.

PART 4 – PRODUCTS

4.03 AR**HSFSHWKX Condensing Unit

A. General: The outdoor unit shall be equipped with multiple circuit boards that shall perform all functions necessary for operation. The outdoor unit shall have a powder coated finish. The outdoor unit

SINGLE ZONE HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS 23 8127 - 2

8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

shall be completely factory assembled, piped and wired. Each unit shall be run tested at the factory.

1. Outdoor unit shall have a sound rating no higher than 54DB 2. Both refrigerant lines from the outdoor unit to indoor units shall be insulated. 3. The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator. 4. The outdoor unit shall have a high pressure safety switch, fuse, over-current protection and crank case heater. 5. The outdoor unit shall have the ability to operate with a maximum height difference of 50 ft. and total length of 98 ft. 6. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating in outside ambient temperatures between 14⁰F to 115⁰F in cooling mode without additional low ambient controls. 7. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating in outside ambient temperatures between 0⁰F to 115⁰F in cooling mode with optional wind baffle accessory (see “accessories” section). 8. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating in outside ambient temperatures between 5⁰F and 75⁰F in heating mode without additional low ambient controls. 9. The control circuit between the indoor units, and the outdoor unit shall be 0.5VDC - 7VDC completed using stranded, annealed copper conductor, two-core, 16 AWG, shielded cable to provide total integration of the system.

B. Unit Cabinet: 1. The chassis shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized and finished with a powder coated baked enamel.

C. Fan: 1. The outdoor unit shall be furnished with one direct drive, variable speed propeller type fan. 2. All fan motors shall be BLDC type. 3. The fan motor shall have inherent protection, have permanently lubricated bearings, and be completely variable speed. 4. The fan motor shall be mounted for quiet operation. 5. The fan shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent contact with moving parts. 6. The outdoor unit shall have horizontal discharge airflow.

D. Refrigerant 1. The condensing unit shall require R410A refrigerant. 2. The condensing unit come charged for system line set lengths up to 25 feet. Additional refrigerant is required if the system line set length is over 25 feet. 3. The condensing unit shall contain a single EEV (electronic expansion valves) with 480 positions each to control refrigerant flow to the indoor unit.

E. Coil: 1. The outdoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with lanced or corrugated plate fins on copper tubing. 2. Aluminum coil fins shall be coated with a hydrophilic/protective coating to reduce corrosion and promote moisture shedding. 3. The coil shall be protected with an integral guard. 4. Refrigerant flow from the outdoor unit shall be controlled by means of a capacity modulation capable, inverter driven, twin BLDC rotary compressor.

F. Compressor:

SINGLE ZONE HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS 23 8127 - 3

8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

1. The compressor shall be an inverter driven, DC voltage, twin BLDC rotary compressor made by Samsung. 2. A crankcase heater shall be factory mounted in/on the compressor. 3. The outdoor unit compressor shall have a variable modulation technology to modulate capacity. The capacity shall be completely variable: Cooling 8,871 – 31,732. Heating 7,506 – 40,944. 4. The compressor shall be equipped with an internal thermal overload. 5. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration.

G. Electrical: 1. The outdoor unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. 2. The unit shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limitations of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/60Hz) with a maximum 25A overcurrent protection. 3. The outdoor unit shall be controlled by integral microprocessors. 4. The control circuit between the indoor units and the outdoor unit shall be 0.5VDC - 7VDC completed using stranded, annealed copper conductor, 16 AWG, shielded, two-core cable to provide total integration of the system. 5. The outdoor unit shall provide power to the indoor unit with 14 AWG X 3 power wire (2 X high voltage wires, 1 X ground). The power wire shall be run from the condensing unit to indoor unit.

4.04 (WALL-MOUNTED) INDOOR UNIT

A. General: The indoor unit shall be wall-mounted type with a slim silhouette. The indoor unit shall ship with a wireless controller as standard.

B. Indoor Unit: The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and run tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring, piping, control circuit board and fan motor. An electronic modulating linear expansion valves is located inside the condensing unit for refrigerant control. The unit shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, and an auto restart function. The system shall have a “Smart Install” operation mode to ensure system readiness after installation. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be charged with dehydrated nitrogen gas before shipment from the factory. The indoor unit shall have a 2-step cooling function that will run in turbo-mode initially then reduce capacity and operate in Dry mode once set point has been reached. The indoor unit shall have a fast comfort option to operate the system at a fixed, high capacity for thirty (30) minutes enabled with the wireless controller. The indoor unit shall have a night time sleep mode to reduce system noise and provide optimal sleep conditions enabled with the wireless controller. The indoor unit shall have a single-user function enabled with the wireless controller to reduce the maximum system capacity during mild conditions. The indoor unit shall have a single event, ON/OFF timer setting enabled at the wireless controller. The indoor unit high voltage terminals shall have a thermal fuse to prevent overheating due to loose connections of damaged components.

C. Unit Cabinet: 1. The casing shall be UL94 V0 with a white finish. 2. Multi directional drain and refrigerant piping offering four (4) directions for refrigerant piping and four (4) directions for draining shall be standard.

SINGLE ZONE HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS 23 8127 - 4

8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

3. Drain hose shall be on the right-hand side of the drain pan (when facing the front) as standard with optional left-hand side connection. 4. There shall be a separate galvanized steel mounting plate which secures the unit firmly to the wall. 5. The indoor unit shall have easy-access pipe and drain connections via access panel on front of unit for easier installation and service allowing maintenance without pulling the unit out from the wall thus preventing property damage. 6. LED’s on front of unit, behind louver, shall provide unit operation and error status.

D. Fan: 1. The indoor fan assembly shall be a cross-flow fan direct driven by a single motor. 2. The indoor fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced to run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. 3. A manual adjustable guide vane shall provide the ability to change the airflow from side to side (left to right). 4. A motorized air sweep louver shall provide an automatic change in airflow by directing the air up and down to provide uniform air distribution. 5. The motorized supply air louver shall be hinged from the top reducing restriction and air noise. 6. The indoor unit cabinet shall have a triangular shape allowing for a larger fan and supply air outlet providing superior air throw at lower sound levels. 7. The indoor fan shall consist of various speeds, Low- Medium - High.

E. Filter: 1. Return air shall be filtered by means of an easily removable, electro-static, washable filter. 2. The indoor unit air filter shall be on top of the unit and accessible without opening a panel or door providing simple access for the end-user.

F. Coil: 1. The indoor coil shall be of nonferrous construction with Slit fins on copper tubing. 2. The tubing shall have inner grooves for high efficiency heat exchange. 3. Aluminum coil fins shall be coated with a hydrophilic/protective coating to reduce corrosion and promote moisture shedding. 4. All tube joints shall be brazed with phos-copper or silver alloy. 5. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. 6. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil. 7. Both refrigerant lines to the indoor unit shall be insulated.

G. Electrical: 1. The unit electrical power shall be 208/230 volts, 1-phase, 60 hertz supplied from the condensing unit. 2. The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 187-228 volts (208V/60Hz) or 207-253 volts (230V/60Hz) 3. The indoor unit PCB contains a time-lag fuse. 4. The control circuit between the indoor units, and the outdoor unit shall be 0.5VDC - 7VDC completed using stranded, annealed copper conductor, two-core, 16 AWG, shielded cable to provide total integration of the system.

H. Standard Controls: 1. The indoor unit shall include a wireless controller as standard.

SINGLE ZONE HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS 23 8127 - 5

8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2. Function: The wireless controller shall control the following operations: On/Off, Operation Mode (auto, cool, heat, dry, and fan), temperature set point, “Fast Comfort” mode, “Single User” mode, fan speed setting, and other settings noted in the table below.

Simple Wireless Remote Controller Item Description ON/OFF Run and stop operation ON/OFF Timer  Single event ON/OFF timer  Setting range: 0 ~ 12 hours Operation Mode  Switches between Auto/Cool/Dry/Fan/Heat  “Single User” mode  “Fast Comfort” mode Temperature Setting  Sets the temperature for a single unit.  Range of temperature setting in 1⁰F increments: o Auto/Cool/Dry: 65°F-86°F o Heat: 61°F-86°F Fan Speed Setting  Models with 3 air flow speed settings: o High/Mid/Low/Auto Error When an error is currently occurring on an air conditioner unit, the afflicted unit and the error code are displayed Option Code Editing Allows user/installer to modify operation option codes and system settings

4.05 OPTIONAL ACCESSORIES

A. WIFI-AR09-24, Wi-Fi Adapter a. General Information 1. The Wi-Fi adapter shall install in a single indoor unit. 2. The Wi-Fi adapter shall allow control of system on a local network via Wi-Fi or through the internet when outside of home/office with Samsung's "Smart Air Conditioner" app (available in Android and Apple app stores). b. Control Features 1. The Wi-Fi adapter shall provide basic control and monitoring of: power, mode, set temperature, room temperature, fan speed, and louver swing. 2. The Wi-Fi adapter shall provide timer ON and OFF feature allowing scheduling of power ON and power OFF events on specific days at specific times. 3. The Wi-Fi adapter shall provide the ability to configure and store common control settings allowing the user to save common air conditioner control configurations for quick and easy system operation (mode, set temperature, fan speed, and louver swing). 4. The Wi-Fi adapter shall provide an air filter reminder option that will display hours of fan operation since last filter reminder reset. 5. The Wi-Fi adapter shall provide an optional filter reminder with four reminder intervals (180, 300, 500, and 700 hours of fan operation). 6. The Wi-Fi adapter shall provide error notifications. c. Specifications 1. App can monitor and control an unlimited quantity indoor units. 2. The Wi-Fi adapter shall install inside front cover of an indoor unit. 3. A network with Wi-Fi connectivity is required to use the Wi-Fi adapter. Wi-Fi- direct control is not possible. 4. Use is based on acceptance of manufacturer’s terms and conditions when creating

SINGLE ZONE HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS 23 8127 - 6

8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

user profile and registering devices. 5. Wired and wireless controllers can be used in conjunction with the Wi-Fi adapter.

END OF SECTION

SINGLE ZONE HEAT PUMP SYSTEMS 23 8127 - 7

8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 26 0501

MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical demolition. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 01 70 00 - Execution and Closeout Requirements: Additional requirements for alterations work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work: As specified in individual sections. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify field measurements and circuiting arrangements are as shown on Drawings. B. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned facilities. C. Demolition drawings are based on casual field observation and existing record documents. D. Report discrepancies to Gladwyne Library before disturbing existing installation. E. Beginning of demolition means installer accepts existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, and ceilings to be removed. B. Coordinate utility service outages with utility company. C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. D. Existing Electrical Service: Maintain existing system in service until new system is complete and ready for service. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize outage duration. 1. Obtain permission from Gladwyne Library at least 24 hours before partially or completely disabling system. 2. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. E. Existing Fire Alarm System: Maintain existing system in service until new system is accepted. Disable system only to make switchovers and connections. Minimize outage duration. 1. Notify Gladwyne Library before partially or completely disabling system. 2. Notify local fire service. 3. Make notifications at least 24 hours in advance. 4. Make temporary connections to maintain service in areas adjacent to work area. 3.03 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK A. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.

MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 26 0501 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Remove abandoned wiring to source of supply. C. Remove exposed abandoned conduit, including abandoned conduit above accessible ceiling finishes. Cut conduit flush with walls and floors, and patch surfaces. D. Disconnect abandoned outlets and remove devices. Remove abandoned outlets if conduit servicing them is abandoned and removed. Provide blank cover for abandoned outlets that are not removed. E. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment that has been removed. F. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension work. G. Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation or provide access panel as appropriate. 3.04 CLEANING AND REPAIR A. See Section 01 74 19 - Construction Waste Management and Disposal for additional requirements. B. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that remain or that are to be reused. C. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections. Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions. Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement. D. Light Fixtures: Remove existing Light Fixtures for cleaning. Use mild detergent to clean all exterior and interior surfaces; rinse with clean water and wipe dry. Replace lamps, ballasts and broken electrical parts. 3.05 UNIVERSAL WASTE DIVERSION A. Remove all universal waste from fixtures, panels, and related devices for proper diversion and reclamation. B. Universal waste components are as follows: electric motors, PCB ballasts, non PCB ballasts, capacitors, contactors, circuit breakers, elemental and liquid mercury containing articles, transformers, lead acid batteries, fluorescent light bulbs, and all HID light bulbs. C. Exemption: electric motors, circuit breakers, transformers and lighting contactors are exempt from this provision provided the contractor chooses to salvage or reuse the components. D. No identified universal waste will be discarded into the waste stream.

END OF SECTION

MINOR ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION 26 0501 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 26 0519

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Single conductor building wire. B. Metal-clad cable. C. Wire and cable for 600 volts and less. D. Wiring connectors. E. Electrical tape. F. Heat shrink tubing. G. Oxide inhibiting compound. H. Wire pulling lubricant. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping. B. Section 26 05 01 - Minor Electrical Demolition: Disconnection, removal, and/or extension of existing electrical conductors and cables. C. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems: Additional requirements for grounding conductors and grounding connectors. D. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM B3 - Standard Specification for Soft or Annealed Copper Wire; 2013. B. ASTM B8 - Standard Specification for Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors, Hard, Medium-Hard, or Soft; 2011. C. ASTM B33 - Standard Specification for Tin-Coated Soft or Annealed Copper Wire for Electrical Purposes; 2010. D. ASTM B787/B787M - Standard Specification for 19 Wire Combination Unilay-Stranded Copper Conductors for Subsequent Insulation; 2004 (Reapproved 2009). E. ASTM D3005 - Standard Specification for Low-Temperature Resistant Vinyl Chloride Plastic Pressure-Sensitive Electrical Insulating Tape; 2010. F. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. G. NECA 120 - Standard for Installing Armored Cable (AC) and Metal-Clad Cable (MC); National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006. H. NEMA WC 70 - Power Cables Rated 2000 Volts or Less for the Distribution of Electrical Energy; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2009 (ANSI/NEMA WC 70/ICEA S- 95-658).

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

I. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2013 (ANSI/NETA ATS). J. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. K. UL 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. M. UL 486A-486B - Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. N. UL 486C - Splicing Wire Connectors; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. O. UL 486D - Sealed Wire Connector Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. P. UL 510 - Polyvinyl Chloride, Polyethylene, and Rubber Insulating Tape; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. Q. UL 1569 - Metal-Clad Cables; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate sizes of raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures installed under other sections with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop. 2. Coordinate with electrical equipment installed under other sections to provide terminations suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 3. Notify DEDC, LLC of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conductors and cables, including detailed information on materials, construction, ratings, listings, and available sizes, configurations, and stranding. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed circuiting arrangements. Record actual routing for underground circuits. D. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Gladwyne Library's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conductors and cables in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install or otherwise handle thermoplastic-insulated conductors at temperatures lower than 14 degrees F, unless otherwise permitted by manufacturer's instructions. When installation below this temperature is unavoidable, notify DEDC, LLC and obtain direction before proceeding with work. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE APPLICATIONS A. Do not use conductors and cables for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. B. Provide single conductor building wire installed in suitable raceway unless otherwise indicated, permitted, or required. C. Nonmetallic-sheathed cable is not permitted. D. Concealed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway or metal clad cable. E. Exposed Dry Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway. F. Above Accessible Ceilings: Use only building wire in raceway or metal clad cable. G. Wet or Damp Interior Locations: Use only building wire in raceway. H. Exterior Locations: Use only building wire with Type THWN-2 insulation in raceway. I. Use solid conductor for feeders and branch circuits 10 AWG and smaller. J. Use stranded conductors for control circuits. K. Use conductor not smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits. L. Use conductor not smaller than 14 AWG for control circuits. M. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 120 volt branch circuits longer than 75 feet. N. Use 10 AWG conductors for 20 ampere, 277 volt branch circuits longer than 200 feet. 2.02 CONDUCTOR AND CABLE GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products that comply with requirements of NFPA 70. B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. C. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required conduit, boxes, wiring, connectors, etc. as required for a complete operating system. D. Comply with NEMA WC 70. E. Thermoplastic-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 83. F. Thermoset-Insulated Conductors and Cables: Listed and labeled as complying with UL 44. G. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding: Also comply with Section 26 05 26. H. Conductor Material: 1. Provide copper conductors only. Aluminum conductors are not acceptable for this project. Conductor sizes indicated are based on copper. 2. Copper Conductors: Soft drawn annealed, 98 percent conductivity, uncoated copper conductors complying with ASTM B3, ASTM B8, or ASTM B787/B 787M unless otherwise indicated. 3. Tinned Copper Conductors: Comply with ASTM B33. I. Minimum Conductor Size: 1. Branch Circuits: 12 AWG. J. Conductor Color Coding:

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519 - 3 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1. Color code conductors as indicated unless otherwise required by the authority having jurisdiction. Maintain consistent color coding throughout project. 2. Color Coding Method: Integrally colored insulation. 3. Color Code: a. 240/120 V, 1 Phase, 3 Wire System: 1) Phase A: Black. 2) Phase B: Red. 3) Neutral/Grounded: White. b. Equipment Ground, All Systems: Green. c. Travelers for 3-Way and 4-Way Switching: Purple. d. For modifications or additions to existing wiring systems, comply with existing color code when existing code complies with NFPA 70 and is approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2.03 SINGLE CONDUCTOR BUILDING WIRE A. Manufacturers: 1. Copper Building Wire: a. Cerro Wire LLC: www.cerrowire.com. b. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com. c. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com. B. Description: Single conductor insulated wire. C. Conductor Stranding: 1. Feeders and Branch Circuits: a. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid. b. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded. 2. Control Circuits: Stranded. D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V. E. Insulation: 1. Copper Building Wire: Type THHN/THWN or THHN/THWN-2, except as indicated below. a. Installed Underground: Type XHHW-2. F. Conductor: Copper. G. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. H. Insulation: NFPA 70, Type THHN/THWN. I. Insulation: Thermoplastic material rated 75 degrees C. 2.04 METAL-CLAD CABLE A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems Inc: www.afcweb.com. 2. Encore Wire Corporation: www.encorewire.com. 3. Southwire Company: www.southwire.com. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type MC cable listed and labeled as complying with UL 1569, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used. C. Conductor Stranding: 1. Size 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid. 2. Size 8 AWG and Larger: Stranded. D. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 V.

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519 - 4 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

E. Insulation: Type THHN, THHN/THWN, or THHN/THWN-2. F. Grounding: Full-size integral equipment grounding conductor. G. Armor: Steel, interlocked tape. H. Description: NFPA 70, Type MC. I. Conductor: Copper. J. Insulation Voltage Rating: 600 volts. K. Insulation Temperature Rating: 75 degrees C. L. Insulation Material: Thermoplastic. M. Armor Material: Steel. N. Armor Design: Interlocked metal tape. 2.05 WIRING CONNECTORS A. Description: Wiring connectors appropriate for the application, suitable for use with the conductors to be connected, and listed as complying with UL 486A-486B or UL 486C as applicable. B. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: Comply with Section 26 05 26. C. Wiring Connectors for Splices and Taps: 1. Copper Conductors Size 8 AWG and Smaller: Use twist-on insulated spring connectors. 2. Copper Conductors Size 6 AWG and Larger: Use mechanical connectors or compression connectors. D. Do not use insulation-piercing or insulation-displacement connectors designed for use with conductors without stripping insulation. E. Do not use push-in wire connectors as a substitute for twist-on insulated spring connectors. F. Twist-on Insulated Spring Connectors: Rated 600 V, 221 degrees F for standard applications and 302 degrees F for high temperature applications; pre-filled with sealant and listed as complying with UL 486D for damp and wet locations. 1. Manufacturers: a. 3M: www.3m.com. b. Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com. c. NSI Industries LLC: www.nsiindustries.com. G. Mechanical Connectors: Provide bolted type or set-screw type. 1. Manufacturers: a. Burndy: www.burndy.com. b. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. H. Compression Connectors: Provide circumferential type or hex type crimp configuration. 1. Manufacturers: a. Burndy: www.burndy.com. b. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. I. Crimped Terminals: Nylon-insulated, with insulation grip and terminal configuration suitable for connection to be made. 1. Manufacturers: a. Burndy: www.burndy.com. b. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com.

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519 - 5 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. 2.06 WIRING ACCESSORIES A. Electrical Tape: 1. Manufacturers: a. 3M: www.3m.com. 2. Vinyl Color Coding Electrical Tape: Integrally colored to match color code indicated; listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F. 3. Vinyl Insulating Electrical Tape: Complying with ASTM D3005 and listed as complying with UL 510; minimum thickness of 7 mil; resistant to abrasion, corrosion, and sunlight; conformable for application down to 0 degrees F and suitable for continuous temperature environment up to 221 degrees F. B. Heat Shrink Tubing: Heavy-wall, split-resistant, with factory-applied adhesive; rated 600 V; suitable for direct burial applications; listed as complying with UL 486D. 1. Manufacturers: a. 3M: www.3m.com. b. Burndy: www.burndy.com. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. C. Oxide Inhibiting Compound: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed. 1. Manufacturers: a. Burndy: www.burndy.com. b. Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com. c. Ilsco: www.ilsco.com. D. Wire Pulling Lubricant: Listed; suitable for use with the conductors or cables to be installed and suitable for use at the installation temperature. 1. Manufacturers: a. 3M: www.3m.com. b. American Polywater Corporation: www.polywater.com. c. Ideal Industries, Inc: www.idealindustries.com. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that interior of building has been protected from weather. B. Verify that work likely to damage wire and cable has been completed. C. Verify that raceways, boxes, and equipment enclosures are installed and are properly sized to accommodate conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70. D. Verify that raceway installation is complete and supported. E. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. F. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Clean raceways thoroughly to remove foreign materials before installing conductors and cables. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Circuiting Requirements: 1. Unless dimensioned, circuit routing indicated is diagrammatic.

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519 - 6 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

2. When circuit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required. 3. Arrange circuiting to minimize splices. 4. Maintain separation of Class 1, Class 2, and Class 3 remote-control, signaling, and power- limited circuits in accordance with NFPA 70. 5. Maintain separation of wiring for emergency systems in accordance with NFPA 70. 6. Common Neutrals: Unless otherwise indicated, sharing of neutral/grounded conductors among up to three single phase branch circuits of different phases installed in the same raceway is not permitted. Provide dedicated neutral/grounded conductor for each individual branch circuit. B. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. C. Install conductors and cable in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. D. Install metal-clad cable (Type MC) in accordance with NECA 120. E. Installation in Raceway: 1. Tape ends of conductors and cables to prevent infiltration of moisture and other contaminants. 2. Pull all conductors and cables together into raceway at same time. 3. Do not damage conductors and cables or exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tension and sidewall pressure. 4. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant where necessary, except when lubricant is not recommended by the manufacturer. F. Paralleled Conductors: Install conductors of the same length and terminate in the same manner. G. Secure and support conductors and cables in accordance with NFPA 70 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from raceways, piping, ductwork, or other systems. 1. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conductors and cables to lay on ceiling tiles. H. Terminate cables using suitable fittings. 1. Metal-Clad Cable (Type MC): a. Use listed fittings. b. Cut cable armor only using specialized tools to prevent damaging conductors or insulation. Do not use hacksaw or wire cutters to cut armor. I. Install conductors with a minimum of 12 inches of slack at each outlet. J. Neatly train and bundle conductors inside boxes, wireways, panelboards and other equipment enclosures. K. Group or otherwise identify neutral/grounded conductors with associated ungrounded conductors inside enclosures in accordance with NFPA 70. L. Make wiring connections using specified wiring connectors. 1. Make splices and taps only in accessible boxes. Do not pull splices into raceways or make splices in conduit bodies or wiring gutters. 2. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. 3. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector. 4. Clean contact surfaces on conductors and connectors to suitable remove corrosion, oxides, and other contaminates. Do not use wire brush on plated connector surfaces.

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519 - 7 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

5. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. 6. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies. M. Insulate splices and taps that are made with uninsulated connectors using methods suitable for the application, with insulation and mechanical strength at least equivalent to unspliced conductors. 1. Dry Locations: Use insulating covers specifically designed for the connectors or heat shrink tubing. N. Insulate ends of spare conductors using Twist-On Insulated Spring Connector or vinyl insulating electrical tape. O. Color Code Legend: Provide identification label identifying color code for ungrounded conductors at each piece of feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system. P. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00. Q. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide final connections to all equipment and devices, including those furnished by others, as required for a complete operating system. R. Install wire and cable securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. S. Route wire and cable as required to meet project conditions. 1. Wire and cable routing indicated is approximate unless dimensioned. 2. Where wire and cable destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing and lengths required. T. Use wiring methods indicated. U. Pull all conductors into raceway at same time. V. Use suitable wire pulling lubricant for building wire 4 AWG and larger. W. Protect exposed cable from damage. X. Support cables above accessible ceiling, using spring metal clips or metal cable ties to support cables from structure or ceiling suspension system. Do not rest cable on ceiling panels. Y. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors. Z. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards. AA. Clean conductor surfaces before installing lugs and connectors. AB. Make splices, taps, and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors with no perceptible temperature rise. AC. Use split bolt connectors for copper conductor splices and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connector with electrical tape to 150 percent of insulation rating of conductor. AD. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper conductor splices and taps, 8 AWG and smaller. AE. Use insulated spring wire connectors with plastic caps for copper conductor splices and taps, 10 AWG and smaller. AF. Identify and color code wire and cable under provisions of Section 26 05 53. Identify each conductor with its circuit number or other designation indicated.

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519 - 8 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 40 00. B. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 40 00. C. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. D. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.3.2. The insulation resistance test is required for all conductors. The resistance test for parallel conductors listed as optional is not required. E. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conductors and cables. F. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.3.2.

END OF SECTION

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 26 0519 - 9

8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 26 0526

GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Grounding and bonding requirements. B. Conductors for grounding and bonding. C. Connectors for grounding and bonding. D. Ground rod electrodes. E. Ground access wells. F. Grounding and bonding components. G. Provide all components necessary to complete the grounding system(s) consisting of: 1. Existing metal underground water pipe. 2. Metal underground water pipe. 3. Metal frame of the building. 4. Rod electrodes. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Additional requirements for conductors for grounding and bonding, including conductor color coding. B. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. C. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. IEEE 81 - Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth Surface Potentials of a Ground System; 2012. B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. C. NEMA GR 1 - Grounding Rod Electrodes and Grounding Rod Electrode Couplings; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2007. D. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. E. UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Verify exact locations of underground metal water service pipe entrances to building. 2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide steel reinforcement complying with specified requirements for concrete-encased electrode. 3. Notify DEDC, LLC of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work.

GROUNDNG AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Sequencing: 1. Do not install ground rod electrodes until final backfill and compaction is complete. 1.05 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Grounding System Resistance: 25 ohms. 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for grounding and bonding system components. C. Test Reports: Indicate overall resistance to ground and resistance of each electrode. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of grounding electrode system components and connections. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUNDING AND BONDING REQUIREMENTS A. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide all required components, conductors, connectors, conduit, boxes, fittings, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for a complete grounding and bonding system. C. Where conductor size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. D. Grounding System Resistance: 1. Achieve specified grounding system resistance under normally dry conditions unless otherwise approved by DEDC, LLC. Precipitation within the previous 48 hours does not constitute normally dry conditions. 2. Grounding Electrode System: Not greater than 25 ohms to ground, when tested according to IEEE 81 using "fall-of-potential" method. 3. Between Grounding Electrode System and Major Electrical Equipment Frames, System Neutral, and Derived Neutral Points: Not greater than 0.5 ohms, when tested using "point- to-point" methods. E. Grounding Electrode System:

GROUNDNG AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1. Provide connection to required and supplemental grounding electrodes indicated to form grounding electrode system. a. Provide continuous grounding electrode conductors without splice or joint. b. Install grounding electrode conductors in raceway where exposed to physical damage. Bond grounding electrode conductor to metallic raceways at each end with bonding jumper. 2. Metal Underground Water Pipe(s): a. Provide connection to underground metal domestic and fire protection (where present) water service pipe(s) that are in direct contact with earth for at least 10 feet at an accessible location not more than 5 feet from the point of entrance to the building. b. Provide bonding jumper(s) around insulating joints/pipes as required to make pipe electrically continuous. c. Provide bonding jumper around water meter of sufficient length to permit removal of meter without disconnecting jumper. 3. Metal Building or Structure Frame: a. Provide connection to metal building or structure frame effectively grounded in accordance with NFPA 70 at nearest accessible location. 4. Ground Rod Electrode(s): a. Provide two electrodes unless otherwise indicated or required. b. Space electrodes not less than 20 feet from each other and any other ground electrode. c. Provide ground access well for each electrode. 5. Provide additional ground electrode(s) as required to achieve specified grounding electrode system resistance. F. Service-Supplied System Grounding: 1. For each service disconnect, provide grounding electrode conductor to connect neutral (grounded) service conductor to grounding electrode system. Unless otherwise indicated, make connection at neutral (grounded) bus in service disconnect enclosure. 2. For each service disconnect, provide main bonding jumper to connect neutral (grounded) bus to equipment ground bus where not factory-installed. Do not make any other connections between neutral (grounded) conductors and ground on load side of service disconnect. G. Bonding and Equipment Grounding: 1. Provide bonding for equipment grounding conductors, equipment ground busses, metallic equipment enclosures, metallic raceways and boxes, device grounding terminals, and other normally non-current-carrying conductive materials enclosing electrical conductors/equipment or likely to become energized as indicated and in accordance with NFPA 70. 2. Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor in each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Do not use raceways as sole equipment grounding conductor. 3. Where circuit conductor sizes are increased for voltage drop, increase size of equipment grounding conductor proportionally in accordance with NFPA 70. 4. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. 5. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipment ground bus only. Do not terminate on neutral (grounded) or isolated/insulated ground bus. 6. Provide bonding jumper across expansion or expansion/deflection fittings provided to accommodate conduit movement.

GROUNDNG AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 3 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

7. Provide bonding for interior metal piping systems in accordance with NFPA 70. This includes, but is not limited to: a. Metal water piping where not already effectively bonded to metal underground water pipe used as grounding electrode. 2.02 GROUNDING AND BONDING COMPONENTS A. General Requirements: 1. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. 2. Provide products listed and labeled as complying with UL 467 where applicable. B. Conductors for Grounding and Bonding, in addition to requirements of Section 26 05 19: 1. Use insulated copper conductors unless otherwise indicated. a. Exceptions: 1) Use bare copper conductors where installed underground in direct contact with earth. 2) Use bare copper conductors where directly encased in concrete (not in raceway). C. Connectors for Grounding and Bonding: 1. Description: Connectors appropriate for the application and suitable for the conductors and items to be connected; listed and labeled as complying with UL 467. 2. Unless otherwise indicated, use exothermic welded connections for underground, concealed and other inaccessible connections. a. Exceptions: 1) Use mechanical connectors for connections to electrodes at ground access wells. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, use mechanical connectors, compression connectors, or exothermic welded connections for accessible connections. D. Ground Rod Electrodes: 1. Comply with NEMA GR 1. 2. Material: Copper-bonded (copper-clad) steel. 3. Size: 3/4 inch diameter by 10 feet length, unless otherwise indicated. 4. Manufacturers: a. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com. b. Galvan Industries, Inc: www.galvanelectrical.com. c. Harger Lightning & Grounding: www.harger.com. E. Ground Access Wells: 1. Description: Open bottom square or rectangular well with access cover for testing and inspection; suitable for the expected load at the installed location. 2. Size: As required to provide adequate access for testing and inspection, but not less than minimum size requirements specified. a. Rectangular Wells: Not less than 12 by 12 inches. 3. Depth: As required to extend below frost line to prevent frost upheaval, but not less than 10 inches. 4. Cover: Factory-identified by permanent means with word "GROUND". 5. Manufacturers: a. Advanced Lightning Technology (ALT): www.altfab.com. b. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com. c. Harger Lightning & Grounding: www.harger.com. 2.03 MANUFACTURERS A. Cooper Power Systems, a division of Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com. B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

GROUNDNG AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 4 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.04 ELECTRODES A. Manufacturers: 1. Cooper Power Systems, a division of Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Rod Electrodes: Copper-clad steel. 1. Diameter: 3/4 inch. 2. Length: 10 feet. 3. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.05 CONNECTORS AND ACCESSORIES A. Mechanical Connectors: Bronze. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that work likely to damage grounding and bonding system components has been completed. B. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. D. Verify existing conditions prior to beginning work. E. Verify that final backfill and compaction has been completed before driving rod electrodes. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install grounding and bonding system components in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. C. Ground Rod Electrodes: Unless otherwise indicated, install ground rod electrodes vertically. Where encountered rock prohibits vertical installation, install at 45 degree angle or bury horizontally in trench at least 30 inches (750 mm) deep in accordance with NFPA 70 or provide ground plates. D. Make grounding and bonding connections using specified connectors. 1. Remove appropriate amount of conductor insulation for making connections without cutting, nicking or damaging conductors. Do not remove conductor strands to facilitate insertion into connector. 2. Remove nonconductive paint, enamel, or similar coating at threads, contact points, and contact surfaces. 3. Exothermic Welds: Make connections using molds and weld material suitable for the items to be connected in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 4. Mechanical Connectors: Secure connections according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. 5. Compression Connectors: Secure connections using manufacturer's recommended tools and dies. E. Identify grounding and bonding system components in accordance with Section 26 05 53. F. Install ground electrodes at locations indicated. Install additional rod electrodes as required to achieve specified resistance to ground. G. Provide grounding electrode conductor and connect to reinforcing steel in foundation footing where indicated. Bond steel together. H. Provide bonding to meet requirements described in Quality Assurance.

GROUNDNG AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 5 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

I. Equipment Grounding Conductor: Provide separate, insulated conductor within each feeder and branch circuit raceway. Terminate each end on suitable lug, bus, or bushing.

END OF SECTION

GROUNDNG AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0526 - 6 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 26 0529

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Support and attachment components for equipment, conduit, cable, boxes, and other electrical work. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 34 - Conduit: Additional support and attachment requirements for conduits. B. Section 26 05 37 - Boxes: Additional support and attachment requirements for boxes. C. Conduit and equipment supports. D. Anchors and fasteners. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ASTM A123/A123M - Standard Specification for Zinc (Hot-Dip Galvanized) Coatings on Iron and Steel Products; 2013. B. ASTM A153/A153M - Standard Specification for Zinc Coating (Hot-Dip) on Iron and Steel Hardware; 2009. C. ASTM B633 - Standard Specification for Electrodeposited Coatings of Zinc on Iron and Steel; 2013. D. MFMA-4 - Metal Framing Standards Publication; Metal Framing Manufacturers Association; 2004. E. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate sizes and arrangement of supports and bases with the actual equipment and components to be installed. 2. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide additional framing and materials required for installation. 3. Coordinate compatibility of support and attachment components with mounting surfaces at the installed locations. 4. Coordinate the arrangement of supports with ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. 5. Notify DEDC, LLC of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not install products on or provide attachment to concrete surfaces until concrete has fully cured.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for metal channel (strut) framing systems, non-penetrating rooftop supports, and post-installed concrete and masonry anchors. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with NFPA 70. B. Comply with applicable building code. C. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SUPPORT AND ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS A. General Requirements: 1. Provide all required hangers, supports, anchors, fasteners, fittings, accessories, and hardware as necessary for the complete installation of electrical work. 2. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended, where applicable. 3. Where support and attachment component types and sizes are not indicated, select in accordance with manufacturer's application criteria as required for the load to be supported with a minimum safety factor of 50%. Include consideration for vibration, equipment operation, and shock loads where applicable. 4. Do not use products for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. 5. Do not use wire, chain, perforated pipe strap, or wood for permanent supports unless specifically indicated or permitted. 6. Steel Components: Use corrosion resistant materials suitable for the environment where installed. a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use zinc-plated steel or approved equivalent unless otherwise indicated. b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use stainless steel unless otherwise indicated. c. Zinc-Plated Steel: Electroplated in accordance with ASTM B633. d. Galvanized Steel: Hot-dip galvanized after fabrication in accordance with ASTM A123/A123M or ASTM A153/A153M. B. Conduit and Cable Supports: Straps, clamps, etc. suitable for the conduit or cable to be supported. 1. Conduit Straps: One-hole or two-hole type; steel or malleable iron. 2. Conduit Clamps: Bolted type unless otherwise indicated. 3. Manufacturers:

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com. b. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. C. Outlet Box Supports: Hangers, brackets, etc. suitable for the boxes to be supported. 1. Manufacturers: a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com. b. Erico International Corporation: www.erico.com. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. D. Metal Channel (Strut) Framing Systems: Factory-fabricated continuous-slot metal channel (strut) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware required for field-assembly of supports. 1. Comply with MFMA-4. 2. Channel Material: a. Indoor Dry Locations: Use painted steel, zinc-plated steel, or galvanized steel. b. Outdoor and Damp or Wet Indoor Locations: Use Stainless Steel. 3. Minimum Channel Thickness: Steel sheet, 12 gage, 0.1046 inch. 4. Minimum Channel Dimensions: 1-5/8 inch width by 1-5/8 inch height. 5. Manufacturers: a. Cooper B-Line, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com. b. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. c. Unistrut, a brand of Atkore International Inc: www.unistrut.com. d. Source Limitations: Furnish channels (struts) and associated fittings, accessories, and hardware produced by a single manufacturer. E. Hanger Rods: Threaded zinc-plated steel unless otherwise indicated. 1. Minimum Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required: a. Equipment Supports: 1/2 inch diameter. b. Single Conduit up to 1 inch (27mm) trade size: 1/4 inch diameter. c. Single Conduit larger than 1 inch (27mm) trade size: 3/8 inch diameter. d. Trapeze Support for Multiple Conduits: 3/8 inch diameter. e. Outlet Boxes: 1/4 inch diameter. f. Light Fixtures: 1/4 inch diameter. F. Anchors and Fasteners: 1. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the anchor and fastener types indicated for the specified applications. 2. Concrete: Use preset concrete inserts, expansion anchors, or screw anchors. 3. Solid or Grout-Filled Masonry: Use expansion anchors or screw anchors. 4. Hollow Masonry: Use toggle bolts. 5. Hollow Stud Walls: Use toggle bolts. 6. Steel: Use beam clamps, machine bolts, or welded threaded studs. 7. Sheet Metal: Use sheet metal screws. 8. Wood: Use wood screws. 9. Plastic and lead anchors are not permitted. 10. Preset Concrete Inserts: Continuous metal channel (strut) and spot inserts specifically designed to be cast in concrete ceilings, walls, and floors. a. Comply with MFMA-4. b. Channel Material: Use galvanized steel. c. Minimum Channel Thickness: Steel sheet, 12 gage, 0.1046 inch minimum base metal thickness.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 - 3 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

d. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of metal channel (strut) framing system. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. B. Threaded Rod Company: www.threadedrod.com. C. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.03 MATERIALS A. Hangers, Supports, Anchors, and Fasteners - General: Corrosion-resistant materials of size and type adequate to carry the loads of equipment and conduit, including weight of wire in conduit. B. Supports: Fabricated of structural steel or formed steel members; galvanized. C. Anchors and Fasteners:

ANCHOR HARDWARE TABLE D. Formed Steel Channel: 1. Product: Steel "U" shaped with in-turned clamping ridges manufactured by Unitstrut, Power Wtrut, B-Line Strut or Kindorf. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive support and attachment components. B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install support and attachment components in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 - 4 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

C. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. D. Unless specifically indicated or approved by DEDC, LLC, do not provide support from suspended ceiling support system or ceiling grid. E. Unless specifically indicated or approved by DEDC, LLC, do not provide support from roof deck. F. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members without approval of Structural Engineer. G. Equipment Support and Attachment: 1. Use metal fabricated supports or supports assembled from metal channel (strut) to support equipment as required. 2. Use metal channel (strut) secured to studs to support equipment surface-mounted on hollow stud walls. 3. Use metal channel (strut) to support surface-mounted equipment in wet or damp locations to provide space between equipment and mounting surface. 4. Securely fasten floor-mounted equipment. Do not install equipment such that it relies on its own weight for support. H. Conduit Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 05 34. I. Box Support and Attachment: Also comply with Section 26 05 37. J. Preset Concrete Inserts: Use manufacturer provided closure strips to inhibit concrete seepage during concrete pour. K. Secure fasteners according to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. L. Remove temporary supports. M. Identify independent electrical component support wires above accessible ceilings (only where specifically indicated or permitted) with color distinguishable from ceiling support wires in accordance with NFPA 70. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Inspect support and attachment components for damage and defects. C. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion. D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective support and attachment components. E. Install hangers and supports as required to adequately and securely support electrical system components, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. 1. Do not fasten supports to pipes, ducts, mechanical equipment, or conduit. 2. Do not drill or cut structural members. F. Rigidly weld support members or use hexagon-head bolts to present neat appearance with adequate strength and rigidity. Use spring lock washers under all nuts. G. Install surface-mounted cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. H. In wet and damp locations use steel channel supports to stand cabinets and panelboards 1-5/8" off wall. I. Use sheet metal channel to bridge studs above and below cabinets and panelboards recessed in hollow partitions. END OF SECTION

HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0529 - 5

8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 26 0534

CONDUIT

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC). B. Aluminum rigid metal conduit (RMC). C. PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC). D. Flexible metal conduit (FMC). E. Liquidtight flexible metal conduit (LFMC). F. Electrical metallic tubing (EMT). G. Rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit. H. Conduit fittings. I. Accessories. J. Conduit, fittings and conduit bodies. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 03 30 00 - Cast-in-Place Concrete: Concrete encasement of conduits. B. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping. C. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Metal clad cable (Type MC), armored cable (Type AC), and manufactured wiring systems, including uses permitted. D. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. E. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. F. Section 26 05 37 - Boxes. G. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI C80.1 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Steel Conduit (ERSC); 2005. B. ANSI C80.3 - American National Standard for Steel Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT); 2005. C. ANSI C80.5 - American National Standard for Electrical Rigid Aluminum Conduit (ERAC); 2005. D. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. E. NECA 101 - Standard for Installing Steel Conduits (Rigid, IMC, EMT); National Electrical Contractors Association; 2006. F. NECA 102 - Standard for Installing Aluminum Rigid Metal Conduit; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2004.

CONDUIT 26 0534 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

G. NECA 111 - Standard for Installing Nonmetallic Raceways (RNC, ENT, LFNC); National Electrical Contractors Association; 2003. H. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/NEMA FB 1). I. NEMA RN 1 - Polyvinyl-Chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel Conduit and Intermediate Metal Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2005. J. NEMA TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2013. K. NEMA TC 3 - Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Fittings for Use with Rigid PVC Conduit and Tubing; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2013. L. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. M. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. N. UL 6 - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. O. UL 6A - Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit-Aluminum, Red Brass, and Stainless Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. P. UL 360 - Liquid-Tight Flexible Steel Conduit; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. Q. UL 514B - Conduit, Tubing, and Cable Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. R. UL 651 - Schedule 40 and 80 Rigid PVC Conduit and Fittings; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. S. UL 797 - Electrical Metallic Tubing-Steel; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate minimum sizes of conduits with the actual conductors to be installed, including adjustments for conductor sizes increased for voltage drop. 2. Coordinate the arrangement of conduits with structural members, ductwork, piping, equipment and other potential conflicts installed under other sections or by others. 3. Verify exact conduit termination locations required for boxes, enclosures, and equipment installed under other sections or by others. 4. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide roof penetrations that preserve the integrity of the roofing system and do not void the roof warranty. 5. Notify DEDC, LLC of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not begin installation of conductors and cables until installation of conduit is complete between outlet, junction and splicing points. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for conduits and fittings. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual routing for conduits installed underground, conduits embedded within concrete slabs, and conduits 2 inch (53 mm) trade size and larger.

CONDUIT 26 0534 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for purpose specified and shown. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store conduit and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Accept conduit on site. Inspect for damage. C. Protect conduit from corrosion and entrance of debris by storing above grade. Provide appropriate covering. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 CONDUIT APPLICATIONS A. Do not use conduit and associated fittings for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. B. Unless otherwise indicated and where not otherwise restricted, use the conduit types indicated for the specified applications. Where more than one listed application applies, comply with the most restrictive requirements. Where conduit type for a particular application is not specified, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. C. Underground: 1. Under Slab on Grade: Use rigid PVC conduit. 2. Exterior, Direct-Buried: Use rigid PVC conduit. 3. Exterior, Embedded Within Concrete: Use rigid PVC conduit. 4. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit is provided, transition to galvanized steel rigid metal conduit where emerging from underground. 5. Where rigid polyvinyl (PVC) conduit larger than 2 inch (53 mm) trade size is provided, use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit elbows for bends. 6. Where steel conduit is installed in direct contact with earth where soil has a resistivity of less than 2000 ohm-centimeters or is characterized as severely corrosive based on soils report or local experience, use corrosion protection tape to provide supplementary corrosion protection or use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. 7. Where steel conduit emerges from concrete into soil, use corrosion protection tape to provide supplementary corrosion protection for a minimum of 4 inches on either side of where conduit emerges or use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. D. Concealed Within Masonry Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT). E. Concealed Within Hollow Stud Walls: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT). F. Concealed Above Accessible Ceilings: Use electrical metallic tubing (EMT). G. Interior, Damp or Wet Locations: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or aluminum rigid metal conduit. H. Exposed, Interior, Not Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or electrical metallic tubing (EMT).

CONDUIT 26 0534 - 3 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

I. Exposed, Interior, Subject to Physical Damage: Use galvanized steel rigid metal conduit. 1. Locations subject to physical damage include, but are not limited to: a. Where exposed below 8 feet, except within electrical and communication rooms or closets. J. Exposed, Exterior: Use PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit or aluminum rigid metal conduit. K. Connections to Luminaires Above Accessible Ceilings: Use flexible metal conduit. 1. Maximum Length: 6 feet. L. Connections to Vibrating Equipment: 1. Dry Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 2. Damp, Wet, or Corrosive Locations: Use liquidtight flexible metal conduit. 3. Maximum Length: 3 feet unless otherwise indicated. 4. Vibrating equipment includes, but is not limited to: a. Transformers. b. Motors. c. Heat Pumps. 2.02 CONDUIT REQUIREMENTS A. Provide all conduit, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system. B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. C. Minimum Conduit Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated: 1. Branch Circuits: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size. 2. Branch Circuit Homeruns: 3/4 inch (21 mm) trade size. 3. Control Circuits: 3/4 inch (_____ mm) trade size. 4. Flexible Connections to Light Fixtures: 3/8 inch (12 mm) trade size. 5. Underground, Exterior: 2 inch (_____ mm) trade size. D. Where conduit size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. 2.03 GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com. 2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com. 3. Wheatland Tube Company: www.wheatland.com. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. 2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 4. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted.

CONDUIT 26 0534 - 4 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.04 ALUMINUM RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com. 2. Republic Conduit: www.republic-conduit.com. 3. Wheatland Tube Company: www.wheatland.com. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC aluminum rigid metal conduit complying with ANSI C80.5 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6A. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. 2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use aluminum. 4. Connectors and Couplings: Use threaded type fittings only. Threadless set screw and compression (gland) type fittings are not permitted. 2.05 METAL CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedtube.com. 2. Wheatland Tube Company: www.wheatland.com. 3. Triangle 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; material to match conduit. 2.06 PVC-COATED GALVANIZED STEEL RIGID METAL CONDUIT (RMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. Thomas & Betts Corporation; Model ______: www.tnb.com. 2. Robroy Industries; Model ______: www.robroy.com. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type RMC galvanized steel rigid metal conduit with external polyvinyl chloride (PVC) coating complying with NEMA RN 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 6. C. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), nominal thickness of 40 mil. D. PVC-Coated Fittings: 1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of PVC-coated conduit to be installed. 2. Non-Hazardous Locations: Use fittings listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 4. Exterior Coating: Polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 40 mil. E. PVC-Coated Supports: Furnish with exterior coating of polyvinyl chloride (PVC), minimum thickness of 15 mil. 2.07 FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (FMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com. 2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com.

CONDUIT 26 0534 - 5 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type FMC standard wall steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 1, and listed for use in classified firestop systems to be used. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. D. Description: Interlocked steel construction. E. Fittings: NEMA FB 1. 2.08 LIQUIDTIGHT FLEXIBLE METAL CONDUIT (LFMC) A. Manufacturers: 1. AFC Cable Systems, Inc: www.afcweb.com. 2. Electri-Flex Company: www.electriflex.com. 3. International Metal Hose: www.metalhose.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type LFMC polyvinyl chloride (PVC) jacketed steel flexible metal conduit listed and labeled as complying with UL 360. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com. b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. D. Description: Interlocked steel construction with PVC jacket. E. Fittings: NEMA FB 1. 2.09 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) A. Manufacturers: 1. Allied Tube & Conduit: www.alliedeg.com. 2. Wheatland Tube Company: www.wheatland.com. 3. Triangle B. Description: NFPA 70, Type EMT steel electrical metallic tubing complying with ANSI C80.3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 797. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturers: a. Bridgeport Fittings Inc: www.bptfittings.com.

CONDUIT 26 0534 - 6 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

b. O-Z/Gedney, a brand of Emerson Industrial Automation: www.emersonindustrial.com. c. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA FB 1 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 514B. 3. Material: Use steel or malleable iron. 4. Connectors and Couplings: Use compression (gland) type. a. Do not use indenter type connectors and couplings. b. Do not use set-screw type connectors and couplings. D. Description: ANSI C80.3; galvanized tubing. E. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA FB 1; steel or malleable iron compression type. 2.10 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) CONDUIT A. Manufacturers: 1. Cantex Inc: www.cantexinc.com. 2. Carlon, a brand of Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.carlon.com. 3. JM Eagle: www.jmeagle.com. 4. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Description: NFPA 70, Type PVC rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit complying with NEMA TC 2 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; Schedule 40 unless otherwise indicated, Schedule 80 where subject to physical damage; rated for use with conductors rated 90 degrees C. C. Fittings: 1. Manufacturer: Same as manufacturer of conduit to be connected. 2. Description: Fittings complying with NEMA TC 3 and listed and labeled as complying with UL 651; material to match conduit. 2.11 ACCESSORIES A. Corrosion Protection Tape: PVC-based, minimum thickness of 20 mil. B. Conduit Joint Compound: Corrosion-resistant, electrically conductive; suitable for use with the conduit to be installed. C. Solvent Cement for PVC Conduit and Fittings: As recommended by manufacturer of conduit and fittings to be installed. D. Pull Strings: Use nylon cord with average breaking strength of not less than 200 pound-force. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings. B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive conduits. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. D. Conduit routing is shown on drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. Route as required to complete wiring system. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install conduit in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. C. Install galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 101.

CONDUIT 26 0534 - 7 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

D. Install aluminum rigid metal conduit (RMC) in accordance with NECA 102. E. Install PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) using only tools approved by the manufacturer. F. Install rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC) conduit in accordance with NECA 111. G. Conduit Routing: 1. Unless dimensioned, conduit routing indicated is diagrammatic. 2. When conduit destination is indicated and routing is not shown, determine exact routing required. 3. Conceal all conduits unless specifically indicated to be exposed. 4. Conduits in the following areas may be exposed, unless otherwise indicated: a. Electrical rooms. b. Mechanical equipment rooms. 5. Unless otherwise approved, do not route conduits exposed: a. Across floors. b. Across roofs. c. Across building exterior surfaces. 6. Conduits installed underground or embedded in concrete may be routed in the shortest possible manner unless otherwise indicated. Route all other conduits parallel or perpendicular to building structure and surfaces, following surface contours where practical. 7. Arrange conduit to maintain adequate headroom, clearances, and access. 8. Arrange conduit to provide no more than the equivalent of four 90 degree bends between pull points. 9. Arrange conduit to provide no more than 150 feet between pull points. 10. Route conduits above water and drain piping where possible. 11. Arrange conduit to prevent moisture traps. Provide drain fittings at low points and at sealing fittings where moisture may collect. 12. Maintain minimum clearance of 6 inches between conduits and piping for other systems. 13. Maintain minimum clearance of 12 inches between conduits and hot surfaces. This includes, but is not limited to: a. Heaters. b. Hot water piping. c. Flues. 14. Group parallel conduits in the same area together on a common rack. H. Conduit Support: 1. Secure and support conduits in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Provide independent support from building structure. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. 3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling support system. Do not provide support from ceiling grid or allow conduits to lay on ceiling tiles. 4. Use conduit strap to support single surface-mounted conduit. a. Use clamp back spacer with conduit strap for damp and wet locations to provide space between conduit and mounting surface. 5. Use metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel surface-mounted conduits. 6. Use conduit clamp to support single conduit from beam clamp or threaded rod.

CONDUIT 26 0534 - 8 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

7. Use trapeze hangers assembled from threaded rods and metal channel (strut) with accessory conduit clamps to support multiple parallel suspended conduits. 8. Use of wire for support of conduits is not permitted. I. Connections and Terminations: 1. Use approved zinc-rich paint or conduit joint compound on field-cut threads of galvanized steel conduits prior to making connections. 2. Where two threaded conduits must be joined and neither can be rotated, use three-piece couplings or split couplings. Do not use running threads. 3. Use suitable adapters where required to transition from one type of conduit to another. 4. Provide drip loops for liquidtight flexible conduit connections to prevent drainage of liquid into connectors. 5. Terminate threaded conduits in boxes and enclosures using threaded hubs or double lock nuts for dry locations and raintight hubs for wet locations. 6. Provide insulating bushings or insulated throats at all conduit terminations to protect conductors. 7. Secure joints and connections to provide maximum mechanical strength and electrical continuity. J. Penetrations: 1. Do not penetrate or otherwise notch or cut structural members, including footings and grade beams, without approval of Structural Engineer. 2. Make penetrations perpendicular to surfaces unless otherwise indicated. 3. Provide sleeves for penetrations as indicated or as required to facilitate installation. Set sleeves flush with exposed surfaces unless otherwise indicated or required. 4. Conceal bends for conduit risers emerging above ground. 5. Seal interior of conduits entering the building from underground at first accessible point to prevent entry of moisture and gases. 6. Where conduits penetrate waterproof membrane, seal as required to maintain integrity of membrane. 7. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00. K. Underground Installation: 1. Minimum Cover, Unless Otherwise Indicated or Required: a. Underground, Exterior: 24 inches. b. Under Slab on Grade: 12 inches to bottom of slab. 2. Provide underground warning tape in accordance with Section 26 05 53 along entire conduit length. L. Concrete Encasement: Where conduits not otherwise embedded within concrete are indicated to be concrete-encased, provide concrete in accordance with Section 03 30 00 with minimum concrete cover of 3 inches on all sides unless otherwise indicated. M. Conduit Movement Provisions: Where conduits are subject to movement, provide expansion and expansion/deflection fittings to prevent damage to enclosed conductors or connected equipment. This includes, but is not limited to: 1. Where conduits cross structural joints intended for expansion, contraction, or deflection. 2. Where conduits are subject to earth movement by settlement or frost. N. Condensation Prevention: Where conduits cross barriers between areas of potential substantial temperature differential, provide sealing fitting or approved sealing compound at an accessible point near the penetration to prevent condensation. This includes, but is not limited to: 1. Where conduits pass from outdoors into conditioned interior spaces.

CONDUIT 26 0534 - 9 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

2. Where conduits pass from unconditioned interior spaces into conditioned interior spaces. O. Provide pull string in all empty conduits and in conduits where conductors and cables are to be installed by others. Leave minimum slack of 12 inches at each end. P. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26. Q. Identify conduits in accordance with Section 26 05 53. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Repair cuts and abrasions in galvanized finishes using zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. Replace components that exhibit signs of corrosion. C. Where coating of PVC-coated galvanized steel rigid metal conduit (RMC) contains cuts or abrasions, repair in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective conduits. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean interior of conduits to remove moisture and foreign matter. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation of conduit, use suitable manufactured plugs to provide protection from entry of moisture and foreign material and do not remove until ready for installation of conductors. B. Install conduit securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. C. Install steel conduit as specified in NECA 101. D. Arrange supports to prevent misalignment during wiring installation. E. Support conduit using coated steel or malleable iron straps, lay-in adjustable hangers, clevis hangers, and split hangers. F. Group related conduits; support using conduit rack. Construct rack using steel channel. G. Fasten conduit supports to building structure and surfaces under provisions of Section 26 05 29. H. Do not support conduit with wire or perforated pipe straps. Remove wire used for temporary supports. I. Do not attach conduit to ceiling support wires. J. Arrange conduit to maintain headroom and present neat appearance. K. Route conduit parallel and perpendicular to walls. L. Route conduit installed above accessible ceilings parallel and perpendicular to walls. M. Route conduit in and under slab from point-to-point. N. Maintain adequate clearance between conduit and piping. O. Maintain 12 inch clearance between conduit and surfaces with temperatures exceeding 104 degrees F. P. Cut conduit square using saw or pipecutter; de-burr cut ends. Q. Bring conduit to shoulder of fittings; fasten securely. R. Use conduit hubs to fasten conduit to sheet metal boxes in damp and wet locations. S. Install no more than equivalent of three 90 degree bends between boxes. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction, as around beams. Use hydraulic one shot bender to fabricate bends in metal conduit larger than 2 inch size.

CONDUIT 26 0534 - 10 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

T. Avoid moisture traps; provide junction box with drain fitting at low points in conduit system. U. Provide suitable fittings to accommodate expansion and deflection where conduit crosses seismic. V. Provide suitable pull string in each empty conduit except sleeves and nipples. W. Use suitable caps to protect installed conduit against entrance of dirt and moisture. X. Ground and bond conduit under provisions of Section 26 05 26. Y. Identify conduit under provisions of Section 26 05 53. 3.06 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Install conduit to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00. B. Route conduit through roof openings for piping and ductwork wherever possible. Where separate roofing penetration is required, coordinate location and installation method with roofing installation specified in Section 01700.

END OF SECTION

CONDUIT 26 0534 - 11

8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 26 0537

BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Outlet and device boxes up to 100 cubic inches, including those used as junction and pull boxes. B. Cabinets and enclosures, including junction and pull boxes larger than 100 cubic inches. C. Underground boxes/enclosures. D. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes. E. Pull and junction boxes. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 07 84 00 - Firestopping. B. Section 08 31 00 - Access Doors and Panels: Panels for maintaining access to concealed boxes. C. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. D. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. E. Section 26 05 34 - Conduit: 1. Conduit bodies and other fittings. 2. Additional requirements for locating boxes to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points. F. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. G. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices: 1. Wall plates. 2. Additional requirements for locating boxes for wiring devices. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. B. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. C. NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit, Electrical Metallic Tubing, and Cable; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012 (ANSI/NEMA FB 1). D. NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers, and Box Supports; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2013 (ANSI/NEMA OS 1). E. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2008. F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements.

BOXES 26 0537 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

G. SCTE 77 - Specification for Underground Enclosure Integrity; Society of Cable Telecommunications Engineers; 2013 (ANSI/SCTE 77). H. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J. UL 514A - Metallic Outlet Boxes; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70. 2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. 3. Coordinate minimum sizes of boxes with the actual installed arrangement of conductors, clamps, support fittings, and devices, calculated according to NFPA 70. 4. Coordinate minimum sizes of pull boxes with the actual installed arrangement of connected conduits, calculated according to NFPA 70. 5. Coordinate the placement of boxes with millwork, furniture, devices, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others. 6. Coordinate the work with other trades to preserve insulation integrity. 7. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush- mounted boxes where indicated. 8. Notify DEDC, LLC of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for cabinets and enclosures, boxes for hazardous (classified) locations, floor boxes, and underground handhole enclosures. C. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations for outlet and device boxes, pull boxes, cabinets and enclosures, floor boxes, and underground handhole enclosures. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc., as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BOXES A. General Requirements: 1. Do not use boxes and associated accessories for applications other than as permitted by NFPA 70 and product listing. 2. Provide all boxes, fittings, supports, and accessories required for a complete raceway system and to accommodate devices and equipment to be installed.

BOXES 26 0537 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

3. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. 4. Where box size is not indicated, size to comply with NFPA 70 but not less than applicable minimum size requirements specified. 5. Provide grounding terminals within boxes where equipment grounding conductors terminate. B. Outlet and Device Boxes Up to 100 cubic inches, Including Those Used as Junction and Pull Boxes: 1. Use sheet-steel boxes for dry locations unless otherwise indicated or required. 2. Use cast iron boxes or cast aluminum boxes for damp or wet locations unless otherwise indicated or required; furnish with compatible weatherproof gasketed covers. 3. Use suitable concrete type boxes where flush-mounted in concrete. 4. Use suitable masonry type boxes where flush-mounted in masonry walls. 5. Use raised covers suitable for the type of wall construction and device configuration where required. 6. Use shallow boxes where required by the type of wall construction. 7. Do not use "through-wall" boxes designed for access from both sides of wall. 8. Sheet-Steel Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A. 9. Cast Metal Boxes: Comply with NEMA FB 1, and list and label as complying with UL 514A; furnish with threaded hubs. 10. Boxes for Supporting Light Fixtures and Ceiling Fans: Listed as suitable for the type and weight of load to be supported; furnished with fixture stud to accommodate mounting of light fixture where required. 11. Boxes for Ganged Devices: Use multigang boxes of single-piece construction. Do not use field-connected gangable boxes. 12. Minimum Box Size, Unless Otherwise Indicated: a. Wiring Devices (Other Than Communications Systems Outlets): 4 inch square by 2- 1/8 inch deep (100 by 54 mm) trade size. b. Ceiling Outlets: 4 inch octagonal or square by 2-1/8 inch deep (100 by 54 mm) trade size. 13. Wall Plates: Comply with Section 26 27 26. 14. Manufacturers: a. Cooper Crouse-Hinds, a division of Eaton Corporation: www.cooperindustries.com. b. Hubbell Incorporated; Bell Products: www.hubbell-bell.com. c. Hubbell Incorporated; RACO Products: www.hubbell-raco.com. d. Thomas & Betts Corporation: www.tnb.com. C. Cabinets and Enclosures, Including Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches: 1. Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E, or UL 508A. 2. NEMA 250 Environment Type, Unless Otherwise Indicated: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1, painted steel. b. Outdoor Locations: Type 4X, stainless steel. 3. Junction and Pull Boxes Larger Than 100 cubic inches: a. Provide screw-cover or hinged-cover enclosures unless otherwise indicated. D. Underground Boxes/Enclosures: 1. Description: In-ground, open bottom boxes furnished with flush, non-skid covers with legend indicating type of service and stainless steel tamper resistant cover bolts. 2. Size: As indicated on drawings.

BOXES 26 0537 - 3 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

3. Depth: As required to extend below frost line to prevent frost upheaval, but not less than 12 inches. 4. Applications: a. Sidewalks and Landscaped Areas Subject Only to Occasional Nondeliberate Vehicular Traffic: Use polymer concrete enclosures, with minimum SCTE 77, Tier 8 load rating. b. Do not use polymer concrete enclosures in areas subject to deliberate vehicular traffic. 5. Polymer Concrete Underground Boxes/Enclosures: Comply with SCTE 77. a. Manufacturers: 1) Hubbell Incorporated; Quazite Products: www.hubbellpowersystems.com. 2) Oldcastle Precast, Inc: www.oldcastleprecast.com. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Appleton Electric: www.appletonelec.com. B. Hoffman C. Steel City D. Crouse-Hinds E. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.03 OUTLET BOXES A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. 1. Luminaire and Equipment Supporting Boxes: Rated for weight of equipment supported; include 1/2 inch male fixture studs where required. B. Cast Boxes: NEMA FB 1, Type FD, aluminum. Provide gasketed cover by box manufacturer. Provide threaded hubs. C. Wall Plates for Finished Areas: As specified in Section 26 27 26. 2.04 PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES A. Sheet Metal Boxes: NEMA OS 1, galvanized steel. B. Surface Mounted Cast Metal Box: NEMA 250, Type 4; flat-flanged, surface mounted junction box: 1. Material: Galvanized cast iron. 2. Cover: Furnish with ground flange, neoprene gasket, and stainless steel cover screws. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings. B. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive boxes. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards where mounting heights are not indicated. C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70.

BOXES 26 0537 - 4 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

D. Provide separate boxes for emergency power and normal power systems. E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide separate boxes for line voltage and low voltage systems. F. Flush-mount boxes in finished areas unless specifically indicated to be surface-mounted. G. Unless otherwise indicated, boxes may be surface-mounted where exposed conduits are indicated or permitted. H. Box Locations: 1. Locate boxes to be accessible. Provide access panels in accordance with Section 08 31 00 as required where approved by the Architect. 2. Unless dimensioned, box locations indicated are approximate. 3. Locate boxes as required for devices installed under other sections or by others. a. Switches, Receptacles, and Other Wiring Devices: Comply with Section 26 27 26. 4. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not span different building finishes. 5. Locate boxes so that wall plates do not cross masonry joints. 6. Unless otherwise indicated, where multiple outlet boxes are installed at the same location at different mounting heights, install along a common vertical center line. 7. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back. Provide minimum 6 inches horizontal separation unless otherwise indicated. 8. Acoustic-Rated Walls: Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide minimum 24 inches horizontal separation. 9. Fire-Resistance-Rated Walls: Install flush-mounted boxes such that the required fire- resistance will not be reduced. a. Do not install flush-mounted boxes on opposite sides of walls back-to-back; provide minimum 24 inches separation where wall is constructed with individual noncommunicating stud cavities or protect both boxes with listed putty pads. 10. Locate junction and pull boxes as indicated, as required to facilitate installation of conductors, and to limit conduit length and/or number of bends between pulling points in accordance with Section 26 05 34. 11. Locate junction and pull boxes in the following areas, unless otherwise indicated or approved by the Architect: a. Concealed above accessible suspended ceilings. b. Electrical rooms. c. Mechanical equipment rooms. I. Box Supports: 1. Secure and support boxes in accordance with NFPA 70 and Section 26 05 29 using suitable supports and methods approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Provide independent support from building structure except for cast metal boxes (other than boxes used for fixture support) supported by threaded conduit connections in accordance with NFPA 70. Do not provide support from piping, ductwork, or other systems. 3. Installation Above Suspended Ceilings: Do not provide support from ceiling grid or ceiling support system. 4. Use far-side support to secure flush-mounted boxes supported from single stud in hollow stud walls. Repair or replace supports for boxes that permit excessive movement. J. Install boxes plumb and level. K. Flush-Mounted Boxes: 1. Install boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is not set back from finished surface more than 1/4 inch or does not project beyond finished surface.

BOXES 26 0537 - 5 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

2. Install boxes in combustible materials such as wood so that front edge of box or associated raised cover is flush with finished surface. 3. Repair rough openings around boxes in noncombustible materials such as concrete, tile, gypsum, plaster, etc. so that there are no gaps or open spaces greater than 1/8 inch at the edge of the box. L. Install boxes as required to preserve insulation integrity. M. Underground Boxes/Enclosures: 1. Install enclosure on gravel base, minimum 6 inches deep. 2. Mount enclosures located in landscaped areas with top at 1 inch above finished grade. 3. Install additional bracing inside enclosures in accordance with manufacturer's instructions to minimize box sidewall deflections during backfilling. Backfill with cover bolted in place. N. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V. O. Install firestopping to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00. P. Close unused box openings. Q. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no devices or equipment installed or designated for future use. R. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26. S. Identify boxes in accordance with Section 26 05 53. T. Install boxes securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. U. Install in locations as shown on Drawings, and as required for splices, taps, wire pulling, equipment connections, and as required by NFPA 70. V. Set wall mounted boxes at elevations to accommodate mounting heights indicated. W. Electrical boxes are shown on Drawings in approximate locations unless dimensioned. 1. Adjust box locations up to 10 feet if required to accommodate intended purpose. X. Orient boxes to accommodate wiring devices oriented as specified in Section 26 27 26. Y. Maintain headroom and present neat mechanical appearance. Z. Install pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings and in unfinished areas only. AA. Install boxes to preserve fire resistance rating of partitions and other elements, using materials and methods specified in Section 07 84 00. AB. Align adjacent wall mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices. AC. Use flush mounting outlet box in finished areas. AD. Locate flush mounting box in masonry wall to require cutting of masonry unit corner only. Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat opening. AE. Do not install flush mounting box back-to-back in walls; provide minimum 6 inches separation. Provide minimum 24 inches separation in acoustic rated walls. AF. Secure flush mounting box to interior wall and partition studs. Accurately position to allow for surface finish thickness. AG. Do not fasten boxes to ceiling support wires. AH. Support boxes independently of conduit, except cast box that is connected to two rigid metal conduits both supported within 12 inches of box.

BOXES 26 0537 - 6 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

AI. Use gang box where more than one device is mounted together. Do not use sectional box. AJ. Use cast outlet box in exterior locations exposed to the weather and wet locations. AK. Use cast floor boxes for installations in slab on grade; formed steel boxes are acceptable for other installations. 3.03 ADJUSTING A. Adjust flush-mounting outlets to make front flush with finished wall material. B. Install knockout closures in unused box openings. 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean interior of boxes to remove dirt, debris, plaster and other foreign material. 3.05 PROTECTION A. Immediately after installation, protect boxes from entry of moisture and foreign material until ready for installation of conductors. B. Clean exposed surfaces and restore finish.

END OF SECTION

BOXES 26 0537 - 7

8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 26 0553

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical identification requirements. B. Large Device Identification. C. Nameplates and Labels. D. Wire and cable markers. E. Voltage markers. F. Underground warning tape. G. Floor marking tape. H. Warning signs and labels. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Color coding for power conductors and cables 600 V and less; vinyl color coding electrical tape. B. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices: Device and wallplate finishes; factory pre-marked wallplates. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. ANSI Z535.2 - American National Standard for Environmental and Facility Safety Signs; 2011. B. ANSI Z535.4 - American National Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels; 2011. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. D. NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace; 2012. E. UL 969 - Marking and Labeling Systems; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Verify final designations for equipment, systems, and components to be identified prior to fabrication of identification products. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not conceal items to be identified, in locations such as above suspended ceilings, until identification products have been installed. 2. Do not install identification products until final surface finishes and painting are complete. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements for submittals procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each product.

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

C. Manufacturer's Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation and installation of product. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. 1.07 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Do not install adhesive products when ambient temperature is lower than recommended by manufacturer. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION REQUIREMENTS A. Identification for Equipment: 1. Use identification nameplate to identify each piece of electrical distribution and control equipment and associated sections, compartments, and components. a. Panelboards: 1) Identify ampere rating. 2) Identify voltage and phase. 3) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment. 4) Identify main overcurrent protective device. Use identification label for panelboards with a door. For power distribution panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate. 5) Use typewritten circuit directory to identify load(s) served for panelboards with a door. Identify spares and spaces using pencil. 6) For power panelboards without a door, use identification nameplate to identify load(s) served for each branch device. Do not identify spares and spaces. b. Enclosed switches, circuit breakers, and motor controllers: 1) Identify voltage and phase. 2) Identify power source and circuit number. Include location when not within sight of equipment. 3) Identify load(s) served. Include location when not within sight of equipment. 2. Service Equipment: a. Use identification nameplate to identify each service disconnecting means. b. Use identification nameplate at each piece of service equipment to identify the available fault current and the date calculations were performed. 3. Use identification nameplate to identify disconnect location for equipment with remote disconnecting means. 4. Use identification label on inside of door at each fused switch to identify required NEMA fuse class and size. 5. Use floor marking tape or warning labels to identify required equipment working clearances where indicated or where required by the authority having jurisdiction. 6. Arc Flash Hazard Warning Labels: Use warning labels to identify arc flash hazards for electrical equipment, such as switchboards, panelboards, industrial control panels, meter socket enclosures, and motor control centers that are likely to require examination, adjustment, servicing, or maintenance while energized. a. Minimum Size: 3.5 by 5 inches. b. Legend: Provide custom legend in accordance with NFPA 70E based on equipment- specific data:

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1) Include orange header that reads "WARNING" where calculated incident energy is less than 40 calories per square cm. 2) Include red header that reads "DANGER" where calculated incident energy is 40 calories per square cm or greater. 3) Include the text "Arc Flash and Shock Hazard; Appropriate PPE Required" or approved equivalent. 4) Include the following information: (a) Arc flash protection boundary. (b) Incident energy. (c) Hazard/risk category. (d) PPE (personnel protective equipment) requirements. (e) Nominal voltage. (f) Shock hazard condition. (g) Limited approach boundary. (h) Restricted approach boundary. (i) Prohibited approach boundary. (j) Equipment identification. (k) Date calculations were performed. B. Identification for Conductors and Cables: 1. Color Coding for Power Conductors 600 V and Less: Comply with Section 26 05 19. 2. Use identification nameplate or identification label to identify color code for ungrounded and grounded power conductors inside door or enclosure at each piece of feeder or branch-circuit distribution equipment when premises has feeders or branch circuits served by more than one nominal voltage system. 3. Use wire and cable markers to identify circuit number or other designation indicated for power, control, and instrumentation conductors and cables at the following locations: a. At each source and load connection. b. Within equipment enclosures when conductors and cables enter or leave the enclosure. 4. Use wire and cable markers to identify connected grounding electrode system components for grounding electrode conductors. C. Identification for Boxes: 1. Use voltage markers to identify highest voltage present. 2. Use identification labels or handwritten text using indelible marker to identify circuits enclosed. D. Identification for Devices: 1. Wiring Device and Wallplate Finishes: Comply with Section 26 27 26. 2. Use identification label or engraved wallplate to identify serving branch circuit for all receptacles. 2.02 MANUFACTURERS A. Brady Corporation: www.bradycorp.com. B. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.03 LARGE DEVICE IDENTIFICATION A. Identify all disconnect switches, pull boxes, junction boxes (larger than 4" X 4") in unfinished areas with Brady voltage markers, catalog #B-498, series #44xxx (xxx indicates last 3 numbers of model number which vary based on voltage, size, etc. Contractor shall coordinate this

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 - 3 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

information prior to ordering). Sizes for each label shall be as large as possible, style "A", "B" or "C" as the device permits. B. Identify all disconnect switches, pull boxes, junction boxes (larger than 4" X 4") finished with black engraved lamicoid self-adhesive labels, 1" X 4". The label shall state the power feed, circuit or section number, and the equipment identification number that the large device serves. 2.04 IDENTIFICATION NAMEPLATES AND LABELS A. Identification Nameplates: 1. Manufacturers: a. Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com. b. Kolbi Pipe Marker Co: www.kolbipipemarkers.com. c. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com. 2. Materials: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Use plastic nameplates. b. Outdoor Locations: Use stainless steel or aluminum nameplates suitable for exterior use. 3. Plastic Nameplates: Two-layer or three-layer laminated acrylic or electrically nonconductive phenolic with beveled edges; minimum thickness of 1/16 inch; engraved text. 4. Stainless Steel Nameplates: Minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser-etched text. 5. Aluminum Nameplates: Anodized; minimum thickness of 1/32 inch; engraved or laser- etched text. 6. Mounting Holes for Mechanical Fasteners: Two, centered on sides for sizes up to 1 inch high; Four, located at corners for larger sizes. B. Identification Labels: 1. Manufacturers: a. Brady Corporation: www.bradyid.com. b. Panduit Corp: www.panduit.com. 2. Materials: Use self-adhesive laminated plastic labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant. a. Use only for indoor locations. 3. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text. Do not use handwritten text unless otherwise indicated. C. Nameplates: Engraved three-layer laminated plastic, black letters on white background, 2" by 6" in size D. Locations: 1. Each electrical distribution and control equipment enclosure. 2. Disconnect Switches 3. Panelboards. E. Letter Size: 1. Use 1/8 inch letters for identifying individual equipment and loads. F. Labels: Embossed adhesive tape, with 3/16 inch (5 mm) white letters on black background. Use only for identification of individual wall switches and receptacles, and control device stations. 2.05 WIRE AND CABLE MARKERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation: www.bradyid.com. 2. HellermannTyton: www.hellermanntyton.com. 3. Panduit Corp: www.panduit.com.

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 - 4 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

4. Brady, Bradysleeve, Catalog #B-320 PVC. 5. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. B. Markers for Conductors and Cables: Use wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl cloth, wrap-around self-adhesive vinyl self-laminating, heat-shrink sleeve, plastic sleeve, plastic clip-on, or vinyl split sleeve type markers suitable for the conductor or cable to be identified. C. Markers for Conductor and Cable Bundles: Use plastic marker tags secured by nylon cable ties. D. Legend: Power source and circuit number or other designation indicated. E. Text: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed text, all capitalized unless otherwise indicated. F. Minimum Text Height: 1/8 inch. G. Color: Black text on white background unless otherwise indicated. H. Locations: Each conductor at pull boxes, junction boxes, and Termination or connection points including each load connection. I. Legend: 1. Power and Lighting Circuits: Branch circuit or feeder number indicated on drawings. 2.06 VOLTAGE MARKERS A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation: www.bradyid.com. 2. Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com. 3. Seton Identification Products; Model ______: www.seton.com. B. Markers for Boxes and Equipment Enclosures: Use factory pre-printed self-adhesive vinyl or self-adhesive vinyl cloth type markers. C. Minimum Size: 1. Markers for Pull Boxes: 1 1/8 by 4 1/2 inches. 2. Markers for Junction Boxes: 1/2 by 2 1/4 inches. D. Legend: 1. Markers for Voltage Identification: Highest voltage present. E. Color: Black text on orange background unless otherwise indicated. F. Location: Furnish markers for each conduit longer than 6 feet. G. Spacing: 20 feet on center. 2.07 UNDERGROUND WARNING TAPE A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation: www.bradyid.com. 2. Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com. 3. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com. B. Materials: Use foil-backed detectable type polyethylene tape suitable for direct burial, unless otherwise indicated. C. Foil-backed Detectable Type Tape: 6 inches wide, with minimum thickness of 5 mil, unless otherwise required for proper detection. D. Legend: Type of service, continuously repeated over full length of tape. E. Color: 1. Tape for Buried Power Lines: Black text on red background.

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 - 5 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.08 FLOOR MARKING TAPE A. Manufacturers: 1. Brady Corporation: www.bradyid.com. 2. Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com. 3. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com. B. Floor Marking Tape for Equipment Working Clearance Identification: Self-adhesive vinyl or polyester tape with overlaminate, 3 inches wide, with alternating black and white stripes. 2.09 WARNING SIGNS AND LABELS A. Manufacturers: 1. Brimar Industries, Inc: www.brimar.com. 2. Clarion Safety Systems, LLC: www.clarionsafety.com. 3. Seton Identification Products: www.seton.com. B. Comply with ANSI Z535.2 or ANSI Z535.4 as applicable. C. Warning Signs: 1. Materials: 2. Minimum Size: 7 by 10 inches unless otherwise indicated. D. Warning Labels: 1. Materials: Use factory pre-printed or machine-printed self-adhesive polyester or self- adhesive vinyl labels; UV, chemical, water, heat, and abrasion resistant; produced using materials recognized to UL 969. 2. Machine-Printed Labels: Use thermal transfer process printing machines and accessories recommended by label manufacturer. 3. Minimum Size: 2 by 4 inches unless otherwise indicated. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Clean surfaces to receive adhesive products according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive nameplates and labels. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install identification products to be plainly visible for examination, adjustment, servicing, and maintenance. Unless otherwise indicated, locate products as follows: 1. Surface-Mounted Equipment: Enclosure front. 2. Flush-Mounted Equipment: Inside of equipment door. 3. Free-Standing Equipment: Enclosure front; also enclosure rear for equipment with rear access. 4. Elevated Equipment: Legible from the floor or working platform. 5. Branch Devices: Adjacent to device. 6. Interior Components: Legible from the point of access. 7. Boxes: Outside face of cover. 8. Conductors and Cables: Legible from the point of access. 9. Devices: Outside face of cover. C. Install identification products centered, level, and parallel with lines of item being identified. D. Secure nameplates to exterior surfaces of enclosures using stainless steel screws and to interior surfaces using self-adhesive backing or epoxy cement. 1. Do not use adhesives on exterior surfaces except where substrate can not be penetrated.

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 - 6 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

E. Install self-adhesive labels and markers to achieve maximum adhesion, with no bubbles or wrinkles and edges properly sealed. F. Install underground warning tape above buried lines with one tape per trench at 3 inches below finished grade. G. Mark all handwritten text, where permitted, to be neat and legible. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. See Section 01 40 00 - Quality Requirements, for additional requirements. B. Replace self-adhesive labels and markers that exhibit bubbles, wrinkles, curling or other signs of improper adhesion.

END OF SECTION

IDENTIFICATION FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 26 0553 - 7

8318.02 | 10-8-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 26 2100

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical service requirements. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables. B. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. D. Section 26 05 34 - Conduit. E. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. F. Section 26 24 16 - Panelboards: Service entrance equipment. G. Section 26 28 18 - Enclosed Switches: Service entrance equipment. 1.03 PRICE AND PAYMENT PROCEDURES A. Allowances: 1. See Section 01 21 00 - Allowances, for allowances affecting this section. 2. Include cash allowance for Utility Company charges associated with providing service. 1.04 DEFINITIONS A. Service Point: The point of connection between the facilities of the serving utility and the premises wiring as defined in NFPA 70, and as designated by the Utility Company. 1.05 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. IEEE C2 - National Electrical Safety Code; Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers; 2012. B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.06 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. No later than two weeks following date of the Agreement, notify Utility Company of anticipated date of service. B. Coordination: 1. Verify the following with Utility Company representative: a. Utility Company requirements, including division of responsibility. b. Exact location and details of utility point of connection. c. Utility easement requirements. d. Utility Company charges associated with providing service.

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE 26 2100 - 1 8318.02 | 10-8-2015 Gladwyne Library

2. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of other utilities or obstructions within the spaces dedicated for electrical service and associated equipment. 3. Coordinate arrangement of service entrance equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. 4. Notify DEDC, LLC of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. C. Arrange for Utility Company to provide permanent electrical service. Prepare and submit documentation required by Utility Company. D. Utility Company charges associated with providing permanent service to be paid by Owner. E. Preinstallation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work of this section to review service requirements and details with Utility Company representative. F. Scheduling: 1. Arrange for inspections necessary to obtain Utility Company approval of installation. G. An application for new service has already been filled with PECO. PECO is aware of this project and they have been submitted drawings of the installation. For coordination, contact Joe Gallo, PECO/Delchester Region. Phone number (610) 490-6878 and email [email protected]. The contractor shall absorb all installation costs that PECO may change, if any. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Utility Company letter of availability for providing electrical service to project. C. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for each product. Include ratings, configurations, standard wiring diagrams, outline and support point dimensions, finishes, weights, service condition requirements, and installed features. D. Shop Drawings: Include dimensioned plan views and sections indicating locations and arrangement of Utility Company and service entrance equipment, metering provisions, required clearances, and proposed service routing. 1. Obtain Utility company approval of shop drawings prior to submittal. E. Drawings prepared by Utility Company. F. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of equipment and installed service routing. 1.08 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Comply with the following: 1. IEEE C2 (National Electrical Safety Code). 2. NFPA 70 (National Electrical Code). 3. The requirements of the Utility Company. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. D. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE 26 2100 - 2 8318.02 | 10-8-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Store products indoors in a clean, dry space having a uniform temperature to prevent condensation (including outdoor rated products which are not weatherproof until completely and properly installed). Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. C. Handle products carefully to avoid damage to internal components, enclosure, and finish. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ELECTRICAL SERVICE REQUIREMENTS A. Provide new electrical service consisting of all required conduits, conductors, equipment, metering provisions, supports, accessories, etc. as necessary for connection between Utility Company point of supply and service entrance equipment. B. Electrical Service Characteristics: 1. Service Type: Underground. 2. Service Voltage: 240/120 V, 1 phase, 60 Hz. 3. Service Size: 600 Amps. C. Division of Responsibility: 1. Pole-Mounted Utility Transformers: a. Utility Poles: Furnished and installed by Utility Company. b. Transformers: Furnished and installed by Utility Company. c. Transformer Grounding Provisions: Furnished and installed by Utility Company. d. Primary: Furnished and installed by Utility Company. e. Secondary - Underground Service: 1) Conduits: Furnished and installed by Contractor. 2) Conductors: Furnished and installed by Contractor (Service Point at utility pole). 2. Terminations at Service Point: Provided by Utility Company. 3. Metering Provisions: a. Meter Bases: Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility Company requirements. b. Metering Transformer Cabinets: Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility Company requirements. c. Metering Transformers: Furnished and installed by Utility Company. d. Conduits Between Metering Transformers and Meters: Furnished and installed by Contractor per Utility Company requirements. e. Wiring Between Metering Transformers and Meters: Furnished and installed by Utility Company. D. Products Furnished by Contractor: Comply with Utility Company requirements. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on drawings. B. Verify that ratings and configurations of service entrance equipment are consistent with the indicated requirements. C. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and Utility Company requirements. B. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1.

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE 26 2100 - 3 8318.02 | 10-8-2015 Gladwyne Library

C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances and required maintenance access. D. Provide required support and attachment components in accordance with Section 26 05 29. E. Provide grounding and bonding for service entrance equipment in accordance with Section 26 05 26. F. Identify service entrance equipment, including main service disconnect(s) in accordance with Section 26 05 53. 3.03 PROTECTION A. Protect installed equipment from subsequent construction operations.

END OF SECTION

LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL SERVICE ENTRANCE 26 2100 - 4 8318.02 | 10-8-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 26 2416

PANELBOARDS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Lighting and appliance panelboards. B. Overcurrent protective devices for panelboards. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. D. Section 26 05 73 - Overcurrent Protective Device Coordination Study. E. Section 26 28 13 - Fuses: Fuses for fusible switches and spare fuse cabinets. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. FS W-C-375 - Circuit Breakers, Molded Case; Branch Circuit and Service; Federal Specification; Revision E, 2013. B. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. C. NECA 407 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Panelboards; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2009. D. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2008. E. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2011. F. NEMA PB 1.1 - General Instructions for Proper Installation, Operation and Maintenance of Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2013 (ANSI/NEMA PB 1.1). G. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2013 (ANSI/NETA ATS). H. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. I. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. K. UL 67 - Panelboards; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. L. UL 489 - Molded-Case Circuit Breakers, Molded-Case Switches and Circuit Breaker Enclosures; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. M. UL 869A - Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions.

PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - 1 8318.02 | 10-8-2015 Gladwyne Library

N. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the work with other trades to avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70. 2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. 3. Coordinate the work with other trades to provide walls suitable for installation of flush- mounted panelboards where indicated. 4. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 5. Notify DEDC, LLC of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for panelboards, enclosures, overcurrent protective devices, and other installed components and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, overcurrent protective device arrangement and sizes, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories. 1. Clearly indicate whether proposed short circuit current ratings are fully rated or, where acceptable, series rated systems. D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of panelboards and actual installed circuiting arrangements. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Receive, inspect, handle, and store panelboards in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NECA 407. B. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. C. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to panelboard internal components, enclosure, and finish. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperature within the following limits during and after installation of panelboards: 1. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F.

PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - 2 8318.02 | 10-8-2015 Gladwyne Library

PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products: www.eaton.com. B. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us. C. Source Limitations: Furnish panelboards and associated components produced by the same manufacturer as the other electrical distribution equipment used for this project and obtained from a single supplier. 2.02 PANELBOARDS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. B. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following service conditions: 1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet. 2. Ambient Temperature: a. Panelboards Containing Circuit Breakers: Between 23 degrees F and 104 degrees F. C. Short Circuit Current Rating: 1. Provide panelboards with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as determined by short circuit study performed in accordance with Section 26 05 73. 2. Listed series ratings are acceptable, except where not permitted by motor contribution according to NFPA 70. 3. Label equipment utilizing series ratings as required by NFPA 70. D. Panelboards Used for Service Entrance: Listed and labeled as suitable for use as service equipment according to UL 869A. E. Mains: Configure for top or bottom incoming feed as indicated or as required for the installation. F. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices: Replaceable without disturbing adjacent devices. G. Bussing: Sized in accordance with UL 67 temperature rise requirements. 1. Provide fully rated neutral bus unless otherwise indicated, with a suitable lug for each feeder or branch circuit requiring a neutral connection. 2. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each panelboard, with a suitable lug for each feeder and branch circuit equipment grounding conductor. 3. Provide separate isolated/insulated ground bus where indicated or where isolated grounding conductors are provided. H. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. I. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E. 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1. 2. Boxes: Galvanized steel unless otherwise indicated. a. Provide wiring gutters sized to accommodate the conductors to be installed. 3. Fronts: a. Fronts for Surface-Mounted Enclosures: Same dimensions as boxes. b. Fronts for Flush-Mounted Enclosures: Overlap boxes on all sides to conceal rough opening. 4. Lockable Doors: All locks keyed alike unless otherwise indicated.

PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - 3 8318.02 | 10-8-2015 Gladwyne Library

J. Future Provisions: Prepare all unused spaces for future installation of devices including bussing, connectors, mounting hardware and all other required provisions. 2.03 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE PANELBOARDS A. Description: Panelboards complying with NEMA PB 1, lighting and appliance branch circuit type, circuit breaker type, and listed and labeled as complying with UL 67; ratings, configurations and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Conductor Terminations: 1. Main and Neutral Lug Material: Copper, suitable for terminating copper conductors only. 2. Main and Neutral Lug Type: Mechanical. C. Bussing: 1. Phase Bus Connections: Arranged for sequential phasing of overcurrent protective devices. 2. Phase and Neutral Bus Material: Copper. 3. Ground Bus Material: Copper. D. Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic bolt-on type unless otherwise indicated. E. Enclosures: 1. Provide surface-mounted or flush-mounted enclosures as indicated. 2. Fronts: Provide lockable hinged door with concealed hinges for access to overcurrent protective device handles without exposing live parts. 3. Provide clear plastic circuit directory holder mounted on inside of door. F. Description: NEMA PB1, circuit breaker type, lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboard. G. Panelboard Bus: Copper, ratings as indicated. Provide copper ground bus in each panelboard; provide insulated ground bus where scheduled. H. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 1. 240 Volt Panelboards: 22,000 amperes rms symmetrical. 2. 480 Volt Panelboards: 14,000 amperes rms symmetrical. I. Series Rated panelboards are not acceptable. J. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, bolt-on type, with common trip handle for all poles; UL listed. 1. Type SWD for lighting circuits. 2. Type HACR for air conditioning equipment circuits. 3. Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where scheduled. 4. Do not use tandem circuit breakers. K. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1, Type 1. L. Cabinet Box: 6 inches deep, 20 inches wide for 240 volt and less panelboards, 20 inches wide for 480 volt panelboards. M. Cabinet Front: Flush cabinet front with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge, metal directory frame, and flush lock all keyed alike. Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel. 2.04 OVERCURRENT PROTECTIVE DEVICES A. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: 1. Description: Quick-make, quick-break, over center toggle, trip-free, trip-indicating circuit breakers listed and labeled as complying with UL 489, and complying with FS W-C-375 where applicable; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings. 2. Interrupting Capacity:

PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - 4 8318.02 | 10-8-2015 Gladwyne Library

a. Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity as required to provide the short circuit current rating indicated, but not less than: 1) 22,000 rms symmetrical amperes at 240 VAC or 208 VAC. b. Fully Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers with interrupting capacity not less than the short circuit current rating indicated. c. Series Rated Systems: Provide circuit breakers listed in combination with upstream devices to provide interrupting rating not less than the short circuit current rating indicated. 3. Conductor Terminations: a. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. 4. Thermal Magnetic Circuit Breakers: For each pole, furnish thermal inverse time tripping element for overload protection and magnetic instantaneous tripping element for short circuit protection. 5. Multi-Pole Circuit Breakers: Furnish with common trip for all poles. 6. Provide the following circuit breaker types where indicated: a. Ground Fault Circuit Interrupter (GFCI) Circuit Breakers: Listed as complying with UL 943, class A for protection of personnel. 7. Do not use tandem circuit breakers. 8. Do not use handle ties in lieu of multi-pole circuit breakers. 9. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to complete installation: a. Handle Pad-Lock Provision: For locking circuit breaker handle in OFF position. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. Factory test panelboards according to NEMA PB 1. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify that the ratings and configurations of the panelboards and associated components are consistent with the indicated requirements. C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive panelboards. D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install panelboards securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 (general workmanship), NECA 407 (panelboards), and NEMA PB 1.1. C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. D. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 05 29. E. Install panelboards plumb. F. Install flush-mounted panelboards so that trims fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered. G. Mount panelboards such that the highest position of any operating handle for circuit breakers or switches does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform. H. Provide minimum of six spare 1 inch trade size conduits out of each flush-mounted panelboard stubbed into accessible space above ceiling and below floor.

PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - 5 8318.02 | 10-8-2015 Gladwyne Library

I. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26. 1. Terminate branch circuit equipment grounding conductors on solidly bonded equipment ground bus only. Do not terminate on isolated/insulated ground bus. 2. Terminate branch circuit isolated grounding conductors on isolated/insulated ground bus only. Do not terminate on solidly bonded equipment ground bus. J. Install all field-installed branch devices, components, and accessories. K. Install panelboards in accordance with NEMA PB 1.1 and NECA 1. L. Install panelboards plumb. Install recessed panelboards flush with wall finishes. M. Height: 6 feet to top of panelboard; install panelboards taller than 6 feet with bottom no more than 4 inches above floor. N. Provide filler plates to cover unused spaces in panelboards. O. Identify panelboards in accordance with Section 26 05 53. P. Provide computer-generated circuit directory for each lighting and appliance panelboard and each power distribution panelboard provided with a door, clearly and specifically indicating the loads served. Identify spares and spaces. Q. Provide identification nameplate for each panelboard in accordance with Section 26 05 53. R. Provide arc flash warning labels in accordance with NFPA 70. S. Provide spare conduits out of each recessed panelboard to an accessible location above ceiling. Identify each as SPARE. T. Ground and bond panelboard enclosure according to Section 26 05 26. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 40 00. B. Perform field inspection and testing in accordance with Section 01 40 00. C. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. D. Test GFCI circuit breakers to verify proper operation. E. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective panelboards or associated components. F. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA STD ATS, Section 7.5 for switches, Section 7.6 for circuit breakers. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings. B. Adjust alignment of panelboard fronts. C. Load Balancing: For each panelboard, rearrange circuits such that the difference between each measured steady state phase load does not exceed 20 percent and adjust circuit directories accordingly. Maintain proper phasing for multi-wire branch circuits. 3.05 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from panelboard enclosures and components according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION

PANELBOARDS 26 2416 - 6 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 26 2717

EQUIPMENT WIRING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Electrical connections to equipment. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 34 - Conduit. B. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables (600 V and Less). C. Section 26 05 37 - Boxes. D. Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices. E. Section 26 28 18 - Enclosed Switches. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1999 (R 2010). B. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002 (R2008). C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Obtain and review shop drawings, product data, manufacturer's wiring diagrams, and manufacturer's instructions for equipment furnished under other sections. 2. Determine connection locations and requirements. B. Sequencing: 1. Install rough-in of electrical connections before installation of equipment is required. 2. Make electrical connections before required start-up of equipment. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide wiring device manufacturer’s catalog information showing dimensions, configurations, and construction. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS A. Cords and Caps: NEMA WD 6; match receptacle configuration at outlet provided for equipment.

EQUIPMENT WIRING 26 2717 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1. Colors: Conform to NEMA WD 1. 2. Cord Construction: NFPA 70, Type SO, multiconductor flexible cord with identified equipment grounding conductor, suitable for use in damp locations. 3. Size: Suitable for connected load of equipment, length of cord, and rating of branch circuit overcurrent protection. B. Disconnect Switches: As specified in Section 26 28 18. C. Wiring Devices: As specified in Section 26 27 26. D. Flexible Conduit: As specified in Section 26 05 34. E. Wire and Cable: As specified in Section 26 05 19. F. Boxes: As specified in Section 26 05 37. 2.02 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS A. Heat Pumps PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that equipment is ready for electrical connection, wiring, and energization. 3.02 ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS A. Make electrical connections in accordance with equipment manufacturer's instructions. B. Make conduit connections to equipment using flexible conduit. Use liquidtight flexible conduit with watertight connectors in damp or wet locations. C. Connect heat producing equipment using wire and cable with insulation suitable for temperatures encountered. D. Provide receptacle outlet to accommodate connection with attachment plug. E. Provide cord and cap where field-supplied attachment plug is required. F. Install suitable strain-relief clamps and fittings for cord connections at outlet boxes and equipment connection boxes. G. Install disconnect switches, controllers, control stations, and control devices to complete equipment wiring requirements. H. Install terminal block jumpers to complete equipment wiring requirements. I. Install interconnecting conduit and wiring between devices and equipment to complete equipment wiring requirements.

END OF SECTION

EQUIPMENT WIRING 26 2717 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 26 2726

WIRING DEVICES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Wall switches. B. Receptacles. C. Wall plates. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 19 - Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables: Manufactured wiring systems for use with access floor boxes with compatible pre-wired connectors. B. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 05 37 - Boxes. D. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. E. Section 26 27 17 - Equipment Wiring: Cords and plugs for equipment. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. FS W-C-596 - Connector, Electrical, Power, General Specification for; Federal Specification; Revision G, 2001. B. FS W-S-896 - Switches, Toggle (Toggle and Lock), Flush-mounted (General Specification); Federal Specification; Revision F, 1999. C. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. D. NECA 130 - Standard for Installing and Maintaining Wiring Devices; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. E. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 1999 (R 2010). F. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Device -- Dimensional Specifications; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002 (R2008). G. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. H. UL 20 - General-Use Snap Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I. UL 498 - Attachment Plugs and Receptacles; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J. UL 514D - Cover Plates for Flush-Mounted Wiring Devices; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. K. UL 943 - Ground-Fault Circuit-Interrupters; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination:

WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes with millwork, furniture, equipment, etc. installed under other sections or by others. 2. Coordinate wiring device ratings and configurations with the electrical requirements of actual equipment to be installed. 3. Coordinate the placement of outlet boxes for wall switches with actual installed door swings. 4. Coordinate the installation and preparation of uneven surfaces, such as split face block, to provide suitable surface for installation of wiring devices. 5. Notify DEDC, LLC of any conflicts or deviations from the contract documents to obtain direction prior to proceeding with work. B. Sequencing: 1. Do not install wiring devices until final surface finishes and painting are complete. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's catalog information showing dimensions, colors, and configurations. C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Indicate application conditions and limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, and installation of product. D. Operation and Maintenance Data: 1. GFI Receptacles: Include information on status indicators and testing procedures and intervals. E. Project Record Documents: Record actual installed locations of wiring devices. F. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Gladwyne Library's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Products: Listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Store in a clean, dry space in original manufacturer's packaging until ready for installation. B. Products: Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Hubbell Incorporated; ______: www.hubbell-wiring.com. B. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc; ______: www.legrand.us C. Leviton Manufacturing, Inc: www.leviton.com. D. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. E. Source Limitations: Where possible, for each type of wiring device furnish products produced by a single manufacturer and obtained from a single supplier.

WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.02 WIRING DEVICE APPLICATIONS A. Provide wiring devices suitable for intended use and with ratings adequate for load served. B. For single receptacles installed on an individual branch circuit, provide receptacle with ampere rating not less than that of the branch circuit. C. Provide weather resistant GFI receptacles with specified weatherproof covers for all receptacles installed outdoors or in damp or wet locations. 2.03 WIRING DEVICE FINISHES: A. Provide wiring device finishes as described below unless otherwise indicated. B. Wiring Devices, Unless Otherwise Indicated: Ivory with stainless steel wall plate. C. Wiring Devices Installed in Finished Spaces: White with stainless steel wall plate. D. Wiring Devices Installed in Unfinished Spaces: Ivory with galvanized steel wall plate. E. Wiring Devices Installed in Wet or Damp Locations: Ivory with specified weatherproof cover. 2.04 ALL WIRING DEVICES A. Provide products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. B. Finishes: 2.05 WALL SWITCHES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated; ______: www.hubbell-wiring.com. 2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc; ______: www.leviton.com. 3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc; ______: www.legrand.us B. All Wall Switches: AC only, quiet operating, general-use snap switches with silver alloy contacts, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 20 and where applicable, FS W-S-896; types as indicated on the drawings. 1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring and screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw. C. Standard Wall Switches: Industrial specification grade, 20 A, 120/277 V with standard toggle type switch actuator and maintained contacts; single pole single throw or three way as indicated on the drawings. D. Wall Switches: Extra Heavy Duty Industrial Series, AC only general-use snap switch, complying with NEMA WD 6 and WD 1. 1. Body and Handle: Ivory plastic with toggle handle. 2. Ratings: a. Voltage: 120 volts, AC. b. Current: 20 amperes. E. Switch Types: Single pole, 3-way, and 4-way. 2.06 RECEPTACLES A. Manufacturers: 1. Hubbell Incorporated; ______: www.hubbell-wiring.com. 2. Leviton Manufacturing Company, Inc; ______: www.leviton.com. 3. Pass & Seymour, a brand of Legrand North America, Inc; ______: www.legrand.us 4. Source Limitations: Where wall controls are furnished as part of, provide accessory matching receptacles and wallplates by the same manufacturer in locations indicated.

WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 3 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. All Receptacles: Self-grounding, complying with NEMA WD 1 and NEMA WD 6, and listed as complying with UL 498, and where applicable, FS W-C-596; types as indicated on the drawings. 1. Wiring Provisions: Terminal screws for side wiring or screw actuated binding clamp for back wiring with separate ground terminal screw. 2. NEMA configurations specified are according to NEMA WD 6. C. Convenience Receptacles: 1. Standard Convenience Receptacles: Commercial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings. 2. Tamper Resistant and Weather Resistant Convenience Receptacles: Commercial specification grade, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R,, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type and as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations; single or duplex as indicated on the drawings. D. GFI Receptacles: 1. All GFI Receptacles: Provide with feed-through protection, light to indicate ground fault tripped condition and loss of protection, and list as complying with UL 943, class A. 2. Standard GFI Receptacles: Commercial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style. 3. Tamper Resistant and Weather Resistant GFI Receptacles: Commercial specification grade, duplex, 20A, 125V, NEMA 5-20R, rectangular decorator style, listed and labeled as tamper resistant type and as weather resistant type complying with UL 498 Supplement SE suitable for installation in damp or wet locations. E. Receptacles: Extra Heavy Duty Industrial Series, complying with NEMA WD 6 and WD 1. 1. Device Body: Ivory plastic. 2. Configuration: NEMA WD 6, type as specified and indicated. F. Convenience Receptacles: Type 5-20R. G. Single Convenience Receptacles. H. Duplex Convenience Receptacles. I. GFCI Receptacles: 5-20R Duplex Convenience receptacle with integral ground fault circuit interrupter to meet regulatory requirements. 2.07 WALL PLATES A. All Wall Plates: Comply with UL 514D. 1. Configuration: One piece cover as required for quantity and types of corresponding wiring devices. 2. Size: Standard. 3. Screws: Metal with slotted heads finished to match wall plate finish. B. Stainless Steel Wall Plates: Brushed satin finish, Type 302 stainless steel. C. Galvanized Steel Wall Plates: Rounded corners and edges, with corrosion resistant screws. D. Weatherproof Covers for Wet Locations: Gasketed, cast aluminum, with hinged lockable cover and corrosion-resistant screws; listed as suitable for use in wet locations while in use with attachment plugs connected and identified as extra-duty type. E. Decorative Cover Plates:, Smooth stainless steel. F. Weatherproof Cover Plates: Gasketed cast metal with gasketed device cover. G. Surface Mounted Device Wall Plates: Stamped steel.

WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 4 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify that outlet boxes are installed in proper locations and at proper mounting heights and are properly sized to accommodate devices and conductors in accordance with NFPA 70. C. Verify that wall openings are neatly cut and will be completely covered by wall plates. D. Verify that final surface finishes are complete, including painting. E. Verify that branch circuit wiring installation is completed, tested, and ready for connection to wiring devices. F. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Provide extension rings to bring outlet boxes flush with finished surface. B. Clean dirt, debris, plaster, and other foreign materials from outlet boxes. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1 and, where applicable, NECA 130, including mounting heights specified in those standards unless otherwise indicated. B. Perform work in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1, including mounting heights specified in that standard unless otherwise indicated. C. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 37 as required for installation of wiring devices provided under this section. 1. Orient outlet boxes for vertical installation of wiring devices unless otherwise indicated. 2. Where multiple receptacles or wall switches are installed at the same location and at the same mounting height, gang devices together under a common wall plate. D. Install wiring devices in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. E. Install permanent barrier between ganged wiring devices when voltage between adjacent devices exceeds 300 V. F. Where required, connect wiring devices using pigtails not less than 6 inches long. Do not connect more than one conductor to wiring device terminals. G. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor clockwise 3/4 turn around screw terminal and tightening to proper torque specified by the manufacturer. Where present, do not use push-in pressure terminals that do not rely on screw-actuated binding. H. Unless otherwise indicated, connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch circuit equipment grounding conductor and to outlet box with bonding jumper. I. Provide GFI receptacles with integral GFI protection at each location indicated. Do not use feed-through wiring to protect downstream devices. J. Install securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner, as specified in NECA 1. K. Install wiring devices plumb and level with mounting yoke held rigidly in place. L. Install wall switches with OFF position down. M. Install vertically mounted receptacles with grounding pole on top and horizontally mounted receptacles with grounding pole on left. N. Install wall plates to fit completely flush to wall with no gaps and rough opening completely covered without strain on wall plate. Repair or reinstall improperly installed outlet boxes or

WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 5 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

improperly sized rough openings. Do not use oversized wall plates in lieu of meeting this requirement. O. Install blank wall plates on junction boxes and on outlet boxes with no wiring devices installed or designated for future use. P. Install receptacles with grounding pole on bottom. Q. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to outlet box with bonding jumper. R. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas. S. Connect wiring devices by wrapping conductor around screw terminal. T. Install galvanized steel cover plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas, above accessible ceilings, and on surface mounted switches & outlets. 3.04 INTERFACE WITH OTHER PRODUCTS A. Coordinate locations of outlet boxes provided under Section 26 05 37 to obtain mounting heights specified. B. Install wall switch 48 inches above finished floor. C. Install convenience receptacle 18 inches above finished floor. D. Install convenience receptacle 6 inches above counter. E. Install telephone jack 18 inches above finished floor. F. Install telephone jack for side-reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at 54 inches above finished floor. G. Install telephone jack for forward-reach wall telephone to position top of telephone at 48 inches above finished floor. 3.05 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection, testing, and adjusting in accordance with Section 01 40 00. B. Inspect each wiring device for damage and defects. C. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized to verify proper operation. D. Operate each wall switch with circuit energized and verify proper operation. E. Test each receptacle to verify operation and proper polarity. F. Test each GFCI receptacle for proper tripping operation according to manufacturer's instructions. G. Correct wiring deficiencies and replace damaged or defective wiring devices. 3.06 ADJUSTING A. Adjust devices and wall plates to be flush and level. 3.07 CLEANING A. Clean exposed surfaces to remove dirt, paint, or other foreign material and restore to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION

WIRING DEVICES 26 2726 - 6 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 26 2813

FUSES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Fuses. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. B. Section 26 24 16 - Panelboards: Fusible switches. C. Section 26 28 18 - Enclosed Switches: Fusible switches. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2012. B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. C. UL 248-1 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 1: General Requirements; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. D. UL 248-12 - Low-Voltage Fuses - Part 12: Class R Fuses; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate fuse clips furnished in equipment provided under other sections for compatibility with indicated fuses. 2. Coordinate fuse requirements according to manufacturer's recommendations and nameplate data for actual equipment to be installed. 3. Notify DEDC, LLC of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard data sheets including voltage and current ratings, interrupting ratings, time-current curves, and current limitation curves. C. Maintenance Materials: Furnish the following for Gladwyne Library's use in maintenance of project. 1. See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements, for additional provisions. 2. Extra Fuses: One set(s) of three for each type and size installed. 3. Fuse Pullers: One set(s) compatible with each type and size installed. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70.

FUSES 26 2813 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this section with minimum three years documented experience. C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. D. Products: Listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories Inc. as suitable for the purpose specified and indicated. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Cooper Bussmann, a division of Cooper Industries: www.cooperindustries.com. B. Mersen (formerly Ferraz Shawmut): ferrazshawmut.mersen.com. C. Littelfuse, Inc; Model ______: www.littelfuse.com. D. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements. 2.02 APPLICATIONS A. Service Entrance: 1. Fusible Switches up to 600 Amperes: Class RK1, fast-acting, non-time-delay. B. Feeders: 1. Fusible Switches up to 600 Amperes: Class RK1, fast-acting, non-time-delay. C. General Purpose Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time-delay. D. Individual Motor Branch Circuits: Class RK1, time-delay. 2.03 FUSES A. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. B. Unless specifically indicated to be excluded, provide fuses for all fusible equipment as required for a complete operating system. C. Provide fuses of the same type, rating, and manufacturer within the same switch. D. Comply with UL 248-1. E. Unless otherwise indicated, provide cartridge type fuses complying with NEMA FU 1, Class and ratings as indicated. F. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage. G. Class R Fuses: Comply with UL 248-12. H. Selectivity: Where the requirement for selectivity is indicated, furnish products as required to achieve selective coordination. I. Provide the following accessories where indicated or where required to complete installation: 1. Fuseholders: Compatible with indicated fuses. J. Power Load Feeder Switches: Class RK1 (non-time-delay). K. Motor Load Feeder Switches: Class RK1 (time delay). 2.04 CLASS RK1 (TIME DELAY) FUSES A. Manufacturers: 1. Bussman, Ferraz-Shawmut. 2. Substitutions: See Section 01 60 00 - Product Requirements.

FUSES 26 2813 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that fuse ratings are consistent with circuit voltage and manufacturer's recommendations and nameplate data for equipment. B. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Do not install fuses until circuits are ready to be energized. B. Install fuses with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read.

END OF SECTION

FUSES 26 2813 - 3

8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 26 2818

ENCLOSED SWITCHES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 SECTION INCLUDES A. Enclosed safety switches. B. Fusible switches. C. Nonfusible switches. 1.02 RELATED REQUIREMENTS A. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems. B. Section 26 05 29 - Hangers and Supports for Electrical Systems. C. Section 26 05 53 - Identification for Electrical Systems: Identification products and requirements. D. Section 26 28 13 - Fuses. 1.03 REFERENCE STANDARDS A. NECA 1 - Standard for Good Workmanship in Electrical Construction; National Electrical Contractors Association; 2010. B. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum); 2008. C. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses; National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2002 (R2007). D. NEMA KS 1 - Heavy Duty Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches (600 Volts Maximum); National Electrical Manufacturers Association; 2013. E. NETA ATS - Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Equipment and Systems; International Electrical Testing Association; 2013 (ANSI/NETA ATS). F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code; National Fire Protection Association; Most Recent Edition Adopted by Authority Having Jurisdiction, Including All Applicable Amendments and Supplements. G. UL 50 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Non-Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. H. UL 50E - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment, Environmental Considerations; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. I. UL 98 - Enclosed and Dead-Front Switches; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. J. UL 869A - Reference Standard for Service Equipment; Current Edition, Including All Revisions. 1.04 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS A. Coordination: 1. Coordinate the work with other trades. Avoid placement of ductwork, piping, equipment, or other potential obstructions within the dedicated equipment spaces and within working clearances for electrical equipment required by NFPA 70.

ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 2818 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

2. Coordinate arrangement of electrical equipment with the dimensions and clearance requirements of the actual equipment to be installed. 3. Verify with manufacturer that conductor terminations are suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. 4. Notify DEDC, LLC of any conflicts with or deviations from the contract documents. Obtain direction before proceeding with work. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01 30 00 - Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. B. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets for enclosed switches and other installed components and accessories. C. Shop Drawings: Indicate outline and support point dimensions, voltage and current ratings, short circuit current ratings, conduit entry locations, conductor terminal information, and installed features and accessories. 1. Include dimensioned plan and elevation views of enclosed switches and adjacent equipment with all required clearances indicated. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to requirements of NFPA 70. B. Maintain at the project site a copy of each referenced document that prescribes execution requirements. C. Product Listing Organization Qualifications: An organization recognized by OSHA as a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Store in a clean, dry space. Maintain factory wrapping or provide an additional heavy canvas or heavy plastic cover to protect units from dirt, water, construction debris, and traffic. B. Handle carefully in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to avoid damage to enclosed switch internal components, enclosure, and finish. 1.08 FIELD CONDITIONS A. Maintain ambient temperature between -22 degrees F and 104 degrees F during and after installation of enclosed switches. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Eaton Corporation; Cutler-Hammer Products: www.eaton.com. B. Schneider Electric; Square D Products: www.schneider-electric.us. 2.02 ENCLOSED SAFETY SWITCHES A. Description: Quick-make, quick-break enclosed safety switches listed and labeled as complying with UL 98; heavy duty; ratings, configurations, and features as indicated on the drawings. B. Provide products listed, classified, and labeled as suitable for the purpose intended. C. Unless otherwise indicated, provide products suitable for continuous operation under the following service conditions: 1. Altitude: Less than 6,600 feet. 2. Ambient Temperature: Between -22 degrees F and 104 degrees F. D. Horsepower Rating: Suitable for connected load.

ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 2818 - 2 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

E. Voltage Rating: Suitable for circuit voltage. F. Short Circuit Current Rating: 1. Provide enclosed safety switches, when protected by the fuses or supply side overcurrent protective devices to be installed, with listed short circuit current rating not less than the available fault current at the installed location as indicated on the drawings. 2. Minimum Ratings: a. Switches Protected by Class H Fuses: 10,000 rms symmetrical amperes. b. Heavy Duty Single Throw Switches Protected by Class R, Class J, Class L, or Class T Fuses: 200,000 rms symmetrical amperes. G. Enclosed Safety Switches Used for Service Entrance: Listed and labeled as suitable for use as service equipment according to UL 869A. H. Provide with switch blade contact position that is visible when the cover is open. I. Fuse Clips for Fusible Switches: As required to accept fuses indicated. 1. Where NEMA Class R fuses are installed, provide rejection feature to prevent installation of fuses other than Class R. J. Conductor Terminations: Suitable for use with the conductors to be installed. K. Provide insulated, groundable fully rated solid neutral assembly where a neutral connection is required, with a suitable lug for terminating each neutral conductor. L. Provide solidly bonded equipment ground bus in each enclosed safety switch, with a suitable lug for terminating each equipment grounding conductor. M. Enclosures: Comply with NEMA 250, and list and label as complying with UL 50 and UL 50E. 1. Environment Type per NEMA 250: Unless otherwise indicated, as specified for the following installation locations: a. Indoor Clean, Dry Locations: Type 1. b. Outdoor Locations: Type 4X, stainless steel. N. Provide safety interlock to prevent opening the cover with the switch in the ON position with capability of overriding interlock for testing purposes. O. Heavy Duty Switches: 1. Comply with NEMA KS 1. 2. Conductor Terminations: a. Provide mechanical lugs unless otherwise indicated. b. Lug Material: Aluminum, suitable for terminating aluminum or copper conductors. 3. Provide externally operable handle with means for locking in the OFF position, capable of accepting three padlocks. P. Provide the following features and accessories where indicated or where required to complete installation: 1. Hubs: As required for environment type; sized to accept conduits to be installed. 2.03 COMPONENTS A. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch. 1. Externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. 2. Handle lockable in OFF position. 3. Fuse clips: Designed to accommodate NEMA FU1, Class R fuses. Provide rejection clips to reject all other than Class R fuses. 4. Fuse extenders where indicated on contract drawings. B. Nonfusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1, Type HD enclosed load interrupter knife switch.

ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 2818 - 3 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

1. Externally operable handle interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. 2. Handle lockable in OFF position. 3. Electrical interlocks, break before switch opens and close after switch closes, where indicated on contract drawings. C. Enclosures: NEMA KS 1. 1. Interior Dry Locations: Type 1. 2. Exterior Locations: Type 4X. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that field measurements are as shown on the drawings. B. Verify that the ratings of the enclosed switches are consistent with the indicated requirements. C. Verify that mounting surfaces are ready to receive enclosed safety switches. D. Verify that conditions are satisfactory for installation prior to starting work. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install enclosed switches in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Install enclosed switches securely, in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with NECA 1. C. Arrange equipment to provide minimum clearances in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and NFPA 70. D. Provide required supports in accordance with Section 26 05 29. E. Install enclosed switches plumb. F. Except where indicated to be mounted adjacent to the equipment they supply, mount enclosed switches such that the highest position of the operating handle does not exceed 79 inches above the floor or working platform. G. Provide grounding and bonding in accordance with Section 26 05 26. H. Provide fuses complying with Section 26 28 13 for fusible switches as indicated or as required by equipment manufacturer's recommendations. I. Provide identification nameplate for each enclosed switch in accordance with Section 26 05 53. J. Provide arc flash warning labels in accordance with NFPA 70. K. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches. L. Apply adhesive tag on inside door of each fused switch indicating NEMA fuse class and size installed. 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Perform field inspection in accordance with Section 01 40 00. B. Inspect and test in accordance with NETA ATS, except Section 4. C. Perform inspections and tests listed in NETA ATS, Section 7.5.1.1. D. Correct deficiencies and replace damaged or defective enclosed safety switches or associated components. 3.04 ADJUSTING A. Adjust tightness of mechanical and electrical connections to manufacturer's recommended torque settings.

ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 2818 - 4 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

3.05 CLEANING A. Clean dirt and debris from switch enclosures and components according to manufacturer's instructions. B. Repair scratched or marred exterior surfaces to match original factory finish.

END OF SECTION

ENCLOSED SWITCHES 26 2818 - 5

8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 27 1100

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Telecommunications mounting elements. 2. Backboards. 3. Telecommunications equipment racks and cabinets. 4. Grounding. 5. Cable Tray.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 27 13 00 "Communications Backbone Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices. 2. Section 27 15 00 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.

B. LAN: Local area network.

C. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for equipment racks and cabinets. 2. Include rated capacities, operating characteristics, electrical characteristics, and furnished specialties and accessories.

B. Shop Drawings: For communications equipment room fittings. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 27 1100 - 1 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Equipment Racks and Cabinets: Include workspace requirements and access for cable connections. 3. Grounding: Indicate location of grounding bus bar and its mounting detail showing standoff insulators and wall mounting brackets.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.

1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings shall be under the direct supervision of RCDD. 2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Registered Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site. 3. Field Inspector: Currently registered by BICSI as Commercial Installer, Level 2 to perform the on-site inspection.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PATHWAYS

A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.

B. Cable Support: NRTL labeled. Cable support brackets shall be designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. Cable tie slots fasten cable ties to brackets.

1. Comply with NFPA 70 and UL 2043 for fire-resistant and low-smoke-producing characteristics. 2. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets. 3. Lacing bars, spools, J-hooks, and D-rings. 4. Straps and other devices.

C. Cable Trays:

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

a. Cable Management Solutions, Inc.

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 27 1100 - 2 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

b. Cablofil Inc. c. Cooper B-Line, Inc. d. Cope - Tyco/Allied Tube & Conduit. e. GS Metals Corp.

2. Cable Tray Materials: Metal, suitable for indoors and protected against corrosion by electroplated zinc galvanizing, complying with ASTM B 633, Type 1, not less than 0.000472 inch thick. a. Ladder Cable Trays: Nominally 18 inches wide, and a rung spacing of 12 inches.

D. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

1. Outlet boxes shall be no smaller than 2 inches wide, 3 inches high, and 2-1/2 inches deep.

2.2 BACKBOARDS

A. Backboards: Plywood, fire-retardant treated, ¾ by 48 by 96 inches. Comply with requirements for plywood backing panels specified in Section 061000 "Rough Carpentry."

2.3 EQUIPMENT FRAMES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Chatsworth Products, Inc. 2. Belden Inc. 3. Cooper B-Line. 4. Emerson Network Power Connectivity Solutions. 5. Hubbell Premise Wiring. 6. Leviton Commercial Networks Division. 7. Middle Atlantic Products, Inc. 8. Panduit Corp.

B. General Frame Requirements:

1. Distribution Frames: Freestanding and wall-mounting, modular-steel units designed for telecommunications terminal support and coordinated with dimensions of units to be supported. 2. Module Dimension: Width compatible with EIA 310-D standard, 19 inch panel mounting. 3. Finish: Manufacturer's standard, baked-polyester powder coat.

C. Modular Wall Cabinets: Basis of Design: Chatsworth 11807-718

1. Standard Swing Gate Wall Rack. 2. Black. 3. 27 RMU.

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 27 1100 - 3 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

D. Cable Management for Equipment Frames:

1. Metal, with integral wire retaining fingers. 2. Baked-polyester powder coat finish. 3. Vertical cable management panels shall have front and rear channels, with covers. 4. Provide horizontal crossover cable manager at the top of each relay rack, with a minimum height of two rack units each.

2.4 POWER STRIPS

A. Power Strips: Comply with UL 1363.

1. Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application. 2. Rack mounting. 3. Ten 20-A, 120-V ac, NEMA WD 6, Configuration 5-15R receptacles. (Leviton Model 5500-190/-192 with 12’ cord & plug connected line cord, Basis of Design) 4. LED indicator lights for power and protection status. 5. LED indicator lights for reverse polarity and open outlet ground. 6. Circuit Breaker and Thermal Fusing: When protection is lost, circuit opens and cannot be reset. 7. Circuit Breaker and Thermal Fusing: Unit continues to supply power if protection is lost. 8. Cord connected with 15-foot line cord. 9. Rocker-type on-off switch, illuminated when in on position. 10. Peak Single-Impulse Surge Current Rating: 6.5 kA per phase. 11. Protection modes shall be line to neutral, line to ground, and neutral to ground. UL 1449 clamping voltage for all three modes shall be not more than 330 V.

2.5 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors.

B. Telecommunications Main Bus Bar:

1. Connectors: Mechanical type, cast silicon bronze, solderless exothermic-type wire terminals, and long-barrel, two-bolt connection to ground bus bar. 2. Ground Bus Bar: Copper, minimum ¼ inch thick by 4 inches wide with 9/32 inch holes spaced 1-1/8 inches apart. 3. Stand-Off Insulators: Comply with UL 891 for use in switchboards, 600 V. Lexan or PVC, impulse tested at 5000 V.

C. Comply with J-STD-607-A.

2.6 LABELING

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 27 1100 - 4 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ENTRANCE FACILITIES

A. Contact telecommunications service provider and arrange for installation of demarcation point, protected entrance terminals, and a housing when so directed by service provider.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. Comply with BICSI TDMM for layout and installation of communications equipment rooms.

C. Bundle, lace, and train conductors and cables to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Install lacing bars and distribution spools.

D. Coordinate layout and installation of communications equipment with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers. Coordinate service entrance arrangement with local exchange carrier.

1. Meet jointly with telecommunications and LAN equipment suppliers, local exchange carrier representatives, and Owner to exchange information and agree on details of equipment arrangements and installation interfaces. 2. Record agreements reached in meetings and distribute them to other participants. 3. Adjust arrangements and locations of distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch panels in equipment rooms to accommodate and optimize arrangement and space requirements of telephone switch and LAN equipment. 4. Adjust arrangements and locations of equipment with distribution frames, cross-connects, and patch panels of cabling systems of other communications, electronic safety and security, and related systems that share space in the equipment room.

E. Coordinate location of power raceways and receptacles with locations of communications equipment requiring electrical power to operate.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS

A. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA-569-A.

B. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, pathways, cabinets, and racks specified in Section 27 11 00 "Communications Equipment Room Fittings." Drawings indicate general arrangement of pathways and fittings.

C. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 260533 "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems" for installation of conduits and wireways.

E. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 27 1100 - 5 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

F. Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms:

1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood is installed, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room. 2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions. 3. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead. 4. Extend conduits 3 inches above finished floor. 5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system.

G. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly, and form smooth gap-free corners and joints.

3.4 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Comply with TIA-569-B, Annex A, "Firestopping."

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.5 GROUNDING

A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.

B. Comply with J-STD-607-A.

C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2 inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground.

D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor.

1. Bond the shield of shielded cable to the grounding bus bar in communications rooms and spaces.

3.6 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

B. Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 27 1100 - 6 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

C. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 2 level of administration including optional identification requirements of this standard.

D. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type.

END OF SECTION

COMMUNICATIONS EQUIPMENT ROOM FITTINGS 27 1100 - 7

8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 27 1300

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. Pathways. 2. UTP cable. 3. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects. 4. Cabling identification products.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section 27 11 00 "Communications Equipment Room Fittings".

2. Section 27 15 00 “Communications Horizontal Cabling”

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.

B. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection.

C. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

D. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

E. LAN: Local area network.

F. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

G. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 1300 - 1 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.4 BACKBONE CABLING DESCRIPTION

A. Backbone cabling system shall provide interconnections between communications equipment rooms, main terminal space, and entrance facilities in the telecommunications cabling system structure. Cabling system consists of backbone cables, intermediate and main cross-connects, mechanical terminations, and patch cords or jumpers used for backbone-to-backbone cross- connection.

B. Backbone cabling cross-connects may be located in communications equipment rooms or at entrance facilities. Bridged taps and splitters shall not be used as part of backbone cabling.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General Performance: Backbone cabling system shall comply with the following standards: 1. ANSI/NECA/BICSI-568-2006 – Standard for installing commercial building telecommunications cabling. 2. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.1 – Commercial building telecommunications wiring standard, general requirements. 3. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-1 – Commercial building telecommunications wiring standard, balanced twisted pair cabling components. 4. ANSI/TIA/EIA-569-B – Commercial building standard for telecommunications pathways and spaces. 5. ANSI/TIA/EIA-606A – Administration standard for telecommunication infrastructure of commercial buildings. 6. ANSI-J-STD-607(A) – Commercial building grounding and bonding requirements for telecommunications.

1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.

1. For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type used:

a. Nominal OD. b. Minimum bending radius. c. Maximum pulling tension.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and format selected by Owner. 2. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the cabling and asset identification system of the software. 3. Cabling administration drawings and printouts. 4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics including the following:

a. Cross-connects. b. Patch panels. c. Patch cords.

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 1300 - 2 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

5. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and physical relationship between the installed components. 6. Cable tray layout, showing cable tray route to scale, with relationship between the tray and adjacent structural, electrical, and mechanical elements. Include the following:

a. Vertical and horizontal offsets and transitions. b. Clearances for access above and to side of cable trays. c. Vertical elevation of cable trays above the floor or bottom of ceiling structure. d. Load calculations to show dead and live loads as not exceeding manufacturer's rating for tray and its support elements.

1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.

B. Source quality-control reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.

D. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals.

1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1. Software operating and upgrade manuals. 2. Program Software Backup: On magnetic media or compact disk, complete with data files. 3. Device address list. 4. Printout of software application and graphic screens.

1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Patch-Panel Units: One of each type. 2. Connecting Blocks: One of each type.

1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.

1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, Cabling Administration Drawings, and field testing program development by an RCDD.

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 1300 - 3 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Registered Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site. 3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.

C. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

D. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

E. Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.

F. Grounding: Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. 1. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.

1.12 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cables and connecting materials until wet work in spaces is complete and dry, and temporary HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at occupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.

1.13 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.

1.14 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years.

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 1300 - 4 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Upgrade Service: Update software to latest version at Project completion. Install and program software upgrades that become available within two years from date of Substantial Completion. Upgrading software shall include operating system. Upgrade shall include new or revised licenses for use of software.

1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UTP CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand-gigaSPEED XL 2071E ETL (Basis of Design) 2. Belden Inc. 3. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company. 4. CommScope, Inc. 5. Draka Cableteq USA. 6. Genesis Cable Products; Honeywell International, Inc. 7. Mohawk; a division of Belden Networking, Inc. 8. Superior Essex Inc. 9. 3M Communication Markets Division. 10. Tyco Electronics Corporation; AMP Products.

B. Description: 100-ohm, 25-pair UTP, formed into 25-pair binder groups covered with a gray thermoplastic jacket, 100-ohm, 4-pair UTP, covered with a gray thermoplastic jacket cable.

1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types:

a. Communications, General Purpose: Type CM or CMG. b. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262. c. Communications, Riser Rated: Type CMR, complying with UL 1666. d. Communications, Limited Purpose: Type CMX. e. Multipurpose: Type MP or MPG. f. Multipurpose, Plenum Rated: Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262. g. Multipurpose, Riser Rated: Type MPR, complying with UL 1666.

C. The cable shall support Voice, Analog Baseband Video/Audio, fax modem, switched-56, T-1, ISDN, RS-232, RS-422, RS-485, 10/100BASE-T Ethernet, AES/EBU Digital audio, 270 Mbps digital video, and emerging high-bandwidth applications including 1 Gbps Ethernet as well as all 77 channels (550Mhz) of analog broadband video.

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 1300 - 5 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.2 UTP CABLE HARDWARE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand (Basis of Design) 2. Dynacom Corporation. 3. Hubbell Premise Wiring. 4. KRONE Incorporated. 5. Leviton Voice & Data Division. 6. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc. 7. Nordex/CDT; a subsidiary of Cable Design Technologies. 8. Panduit Corp. 9. Siemon Co. (The). 10. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.

B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, IDC type, with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.

C. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 6 and 66-style IDC for extension of existing DEMARC for existing wide area network and POTS service lines as required. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.

D. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection between cables.

1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.

E. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.

1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair UTP cable indicated.

2. Provide 24 and 48 port-angled category 6 patch panels as required.

F. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand-GigaSPEED XL MGS400 (Basis of Design)

G. Patch Cords: Factory-made, 4-pair cables; terminated with 8-position modular plug at each end, in the following lengths: 1 foot lengths (80% for Data); 3 foot lengths (10% for Data); 7 foot lengths (10% for Voice).

1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure Category 6 performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging. 2. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification.

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 1300 - 6 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.3 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors.

B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

2.4 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for a system of labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.

B. Factory test cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.

D. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A and TIA/EIA-568- B.3.

E. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. Install cabling in accordance with the most recent edition of Building Industry Consulting Services International (BICSI) publications. 1. BICSI – Telecommunications distribution methods manual. 2. BICSI – Installation transport systems information manual. 3. BICSI – Wireless design reference manual. 4. BICSI – Electronic safety and security design reference manual 5. Infocomm/BICSI – AV design reference manual.

3.2 ENTRANCE FACILITIES

A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by communications service provider.

B. For extension and relocation of demarcation point, provide 100-ohm, 25-pair UTP, formed into 25-pair binder groups covered with a gray thermoplastic jacket, plus 100-ohm, 4-pair UTP covered with a gray thermoplastic jacket for future use.

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 1300 - 7 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

3.3 WIRING METHODS

A. Wiring Method: Install cables using wiring methods in accordance with the following applications: 1. Generally, conceal raceway and cables in accessible ceilings and walls where feasible except in unfinished spaces.

2. Install cables in raceways where exposed in unfinished spaces.

3. Install cables in cable trays within Server Rooms.

4. Install cables using open-cable installation method using J-hook supports when routed concealed above accessible ceilings.

5. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. 6. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Section 26 05 33 "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems." 7. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces.

B. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train cables within enclosures. Connect to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. General Requirements for Cabling:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 4. Terminate all conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. 5. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 6. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. 7. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Use lacing bars and distribution spools. 8. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. 9. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. 10. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot long service loop on each end of cable.

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 1300 - 8 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

11. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.

C. UTP Cable Installation:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. 2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than ½ inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.

D. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. 2. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway, a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart. 3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items.

E. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.

F. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A recommendations for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. 2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 5 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 24 inches.

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 12 inches.

4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:

a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2 kVA: No requirement. b. Electrical Equipment Rating between 2 and 5 kVA: A minimum of 3 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5 kVA: A minimum of 6 inches.

5. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5 kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches. 6. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of 5 inches.

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 1300 - 9 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping."

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.

B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

C. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Administration Class: 2. 2. Color-code cross-connect fields and apply colors to voice and data service backboards, connections, covers, and labels.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

C. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 2 level of administration including optional identification requirements of this standard.

D. Comply with requirements in Section 27 15 00 "Communications Horizontal Cabling" for cable and asset management software.

E. Cable Schedule: Install in a prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project.

F. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets, backbone pathways and cables, terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions, grounding buses and pathways, and equipment grounding conductors.

G. Cable and Wire Identification:

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 1300 - 10 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

1. Label each cable within 4 inches of each termination and tap, where it is accessible in a cabinet or junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. 2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet. 3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet. 4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack, or panel.

a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips and identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building- mounted device with name and number of particular device as shown. b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.

H. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA 606-A, for the following:

1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flexes as cables are bent.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Perform tests and inspections.

C. Tests and Inspections:

1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. 3. Test UTP copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection.

a. Test instruments shall meet or exceed applicable requirements in TIA/EIA-568- B.2. Perform tests with a tester that complies with performance requirements in "Test Instruments (Normative)" Annex, complying with measurement accuracy specified in "Measurement Accuracy (Informative)" Annex. Use only test cords and adapters that are qualified by test equipment manufacturer for channel or link test configuration.

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 1300 - 11 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

D. Data for each measurement shall be documented. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.

E. Remove and replace cabling where test results indicate that they do not comply with specified requirements.

F. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

END OF SECTION

COMMUNICATIONS BACKBONE CABLING 27 1300 - 12 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 27 1500

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes:

1. UTP cabling. 2. Coaxial cable. 3. Multiuser telecommunications outlet assemblies. 4. Cable connecting hardware, patch panels, and cross-connects. 5. Telecommunications outlet/connectors. 6. Cabling system identification products. 7. Cable management system.

B. Related Requirements:

1. Section 27 11 00 "Communications Equipment Room Fittings".

2. Section 27 13 00 "Communications Backbone Cabling" for voice and data cabling associated with system panels and devices.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International.

B. Consolidation Point: A location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending from building pathways and horizontal cables extending into furniture pathways.

C. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection.

D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference.

E. IDC: Insulation displacement connector.

F. LAN: Local area network.

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 1500 - 1 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

G. MUTOA: Multiuser telecommunications outlet assembly, a grouping in one location of several telecommunications outlet/connectors.

H. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet cable terminates.

I. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer.

J. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair.

1.4 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS

A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.

B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at each work area.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

1.6 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product.

1. For coaxial cable, include the following installation data for each type used:

a. Nominal OD. b. Minimum bending radius. c. Maximum pulling tension.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules, in software and format selected by Owner.

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 1500 - 2 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2. System Labeling Schedules: Electronic copy of labeling schedules that are part of the cabling and asset identification system of the software. 3. Cabling administration drawings and printouts. 4. Wiring diagrams to show typical wiring schematics, including the following:

a. Cross-connects. b. Patch panels. c. Patch cords.

5. Cross-connects and patch panels. Detail mounting assemblies, and show elevations and physical relationship between the installed components.

C. Samples: For workstation outlets, jacks, jack assemblies, in specified finish, one for each size and outlet configuration and faceplates for color selection and evaluation of technical features.

1.7 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Qualification Data: For Installer, qualified layout technician, installation supervisor, and field inspector.

B. Source quality-control reports.

C. Field quality-control reports.

1.8 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Maintenance Data: For splices and connectors to include in maintenance manuals.

B. Software and Firmware Operational Documentation:

1.9 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

1. Patch-Panel Units: One of each type. 2. Connecting Blocks: One of each type. 3. Device Plates: Five of each type. 4. Multiuser Telecommunications Outlet Assemblies: Five of each type.

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 1500 - 3 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.10 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Installer Qualifications: Cabling Installer must have personnel certified by BICSI on staff.

1. Layout Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings Cabling Administration Drawings, and field testing program development by an RCDD. 2. Installation Supervision: Installation shall be under the direct supervision of Registered Technician, who shall be present at all times when Work of this Section is performed at Project site. 3. Testing Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.

B. Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL.

1. Testing Agency's Field Supervisor: Currently certified by BICSI as an RCDD to supervise on-site testing.

1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Test cables upon receipt at Project site. 1. Test each pair of UTP cable for open and short circuits.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION

A. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between the telecommunications outlet/connector and the horizontal cross-connect located in the communications equipment room. This cabling and its connecting hardware are called a "permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols.

1. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 requires that a minimum of two telecommunications outlet/connectors be installed for each work area. 2. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more than one transition point or consolidation point between the horizontal cross-connect and the telecommunications outlet/connector. 3. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling. 4. Splitters shall not be installed as part of the optical fiber cabling.

B. A work area is approximately 100 sq. feet, and includes the components that extend from the telecommunications outlet/connectors to the station equipment.

C. The maximum allowable horizontal cable length is 295 feet. This maximum allowable length does not include an allowance for the length of 16 feet to the workstation equipment or in the horizontal cross-connect.

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 1500 - 4 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.2 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568-B.1 when tested according to test procedures of this standard.

B. Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

1. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. 2. Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.

C. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

D. Grounding: Comply with J-STD-607-A.

2.3 UTP CABLE

B. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP, covered with a blue thermoplastic jacket.

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 1500 - 5 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.4 UTP CABLE HARDWARE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand (Basis of Design) 2. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc. 3. Belden Inc. 4. Dynacom Inc. 5. Hubbell Premise Wiring. 6. Leviton Commercial Networks Division. 7. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc. 8. Panduit Corp. 9. Siemon Co. (The). 10. Tyco Electronics Corporation; AMP Products.

C. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 6. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.

D. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection between cables.

1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables.

2. All modular jack panels shall be wired to EIA/TIA 568-B specifications.

3. All category 6 cross connects shall support 100Mbps TP-PMD, 100Mbps Ethernet, 1 Gbps Ethernet and 155 Mbps ATM and shall meet or exceed EIA/TIA 568 performance specifications.

E. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables.

1. Number of Jacks per Field: One for each four-pair conductor group of indicated cables, plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.

2. Provide 24 and 48 port-angled category 6 patch panels as required.

3. Basis of Design Product: CommScope GigaSPEED XL 1100GS3 Category 6 patch panel system or equivalent.

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 1500 - 6 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

F. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: RJ45 type, Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand-GigaSPEED XL MGS400 (Basis of Design)

G. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables; terminated with eight-position modular plug at each end, in the following lengths: 7 foot lengths (80% for floor and wall jack connections); 14 foot lengths (10% for floor and wall jack connections); 3 foot lengths (5% for wall phones); and 1 foot lengths (5% for access points).

3. Basis of Design Product: CommScope GigaSPEED XL GS8E patch cords or equivalent.

2.5 COAXIAL CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Alpha Wire Company. 2. Belden Inc. 3. Coleman Cable, Inc. 4. CommScope, Inc. 5. Draka Cableteq USA.

B. Cable Characteristics: Broadband type, recommended by cable manufacturer specifically for broadband data transmission applications. Coaxial cable and accessories shall have 75-ohm nominal impedance with a return loss of 20 dB maximum from 7 to 806 MHz.

C. RG-6/U: NFPA 70, Type CATV or CM.

1. No. 16 AWG, solid, copper-covered steel conductor; gas-injected, foam-PE insulation. 2. Double shielded with 100 percent aluminum-foil shield and 60 percent aluminum braid. 3. Jacketed with black PVC or PE. 4. Suitable for indoor installations.

D. NFPA and UL compliance, listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction as complying with UL 1655 and with NFPA 70 "Radio and Television Equipment" and "Community Antenna Television and Radio Distribution" Articles. Types are as follows:

1. CATV Cable: Type CATV. 2. CATV Plenum Rated: Type CATVP, complying with NFPA 262. 3. CATV Riser Rated: Type CATVR, complying with UL 1666. 4. CATV Limited Rating: Type CATVX.

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 1500 - 7 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.6 COAXIAL CABLE HARDWARE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Emerson Network Power Connectivity Solutions. 2. Leviton Commercial Networks Division. 3. Siemon Co. (The).

B. Coaxial-Cable Connectors: Type BNC, 75 ohms.

2.7 CONSOLIDATION POINTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. American Technology Systems Industries, Inc. 2. Belden Inc. 3. Chatsworth Products, Inc. 4. Dynacom Inc. 5. Hubbell Premise Wiring. 6. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc. 7. Ortronics, Inc.; a subsidiary of Legrand Group. 8. Panduit Corp. 9. Siemon Co. (The).

B. Description: Consolidation points shall comply with requirements for cable connecting hardware.

1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables. 2. Number of Connectors per Field:

a. One for each four-pair UTP cable indicated. b. One for each four-pair conductor group of indicated cables, plus 25 percent spare positions.

3. Mounting: Wall. 4. NRTL listed as complying with UL 50 and UL 1863. 5. When installed in plenums used for environmental air, NRTL listed as complying with UL 2043.

2.8 MULTIUSER TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET ASSEMBLY (MUTOA)

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Belden Inc. 2. Chatsworth Products, Inc. 3. Hubbell Premise Wiring.

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 1500 - 8 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

4. Molex Premise Networks; a division of Molex, Inc. 5. Ortronics, Inc.; a subsidiary of Legrand Group. 6. Panduit Corp. 7. Siemon Co. (The).

B. Description: MUTOAs shall meet the requirements for cable connecting hardware.

1. Number of Terminals per Field: One for each conductor in assigned cables. 2. Number of Connectors per Field:

a. One for each four-pair UTP cable indicated. b. One for each four-pair conductor group of indicated cables, plus 25 percent spare positions.

3. Mounting: Wall. 4. NRTL listed as complying with UL 50 and UL 1863. 5. Label shall include maximum length of work area cords, based on TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 6. When installed in plenums used for environmental air, NRTL listed as complying with UL 2043.

2.9 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTORS

A. Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

B. Workstation Outlets: Four-port-connector assemblies mounted in single or multigang faceplate. 1. Metal Faceplate: Stainless steel, complying with requirements in Section 262726 "Wiring Devices." 2. For use with snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP, and coaxial work area cords.

a. Flush mounting jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle.

3. Legend: Factory labeled by silk-screening for stainless steel faceplates. 4. Legend: Machine printed, in the field, using adhesive-tape label.

2.10 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 260526 "Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems" for grounding conductors and connectors.

B. Comply with J-STD-607-A.

2.11 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

B. Comply with requirements in Section 26 05 53 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 1500 - 9 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.12 CABLE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. CommScope Systemax wire manager system (Basis of Design) 2. iTRACS Corporation, Inc. 3. TelSoft Solutions.

B. Description: Computer-based cable management system, with integrated database and graphic capabilities.

C. Document physical characteristics by recording the network, TIA/EIA details, and connections between equipment and cable.

D. Information shall be presented in database view, schematic plans, or technical drawings.

1. Microsoft Visio Professional drawing software shall be used as drawing and schematic plans software.

E. System shall interface with the following testing and recording devices:

1. Direct upload tests from circuit testing instrument into the personal computer. 2. Direct download circuit labeling into labeling printer.

2.13 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.

B. Factory test UTP cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.

D. Factory-sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall test the frequency response, or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by generating a voltage whose frequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphing the results.

E. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 1500 - 10 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

3. BICSI – Wireless design reference manual. 4. BICSI – Electronic safety and security design reference manual 5. Infocomm/BICSI – AV design reference manual.

3.2 ENTRANCE FACILITIES

A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by communications service provider.

3.3 WIRING METHODS

2. Install cables in raceways where exposed in unfinished spaces.

3. Install cables in cable trays within Server Rooms.

4. Install cables using open-cable installation method using J-hook supports when routed concealed above accessible ceilings.

C. Wiring within Enclosures:

1. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. 2. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 3. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. General Requirements for Cabling:

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 1500 - 11 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

5. Consolidation points may be used only for making a direct connection to telecommunications outlet/connectors:

a. Do not use consolidation point as a cross-connect point, as a patch connection, or for direct connection to workstation equipment. b. Locate consolidation points for UTP at least 49 feet from communications equipment room.

6. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. 7. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than 6 inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames, and terminals. 8. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. 9. Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 10. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed, or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. 11. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. 12. In the communications equipment room, install a 10-foot long service loop on each end of cable. 13. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions. 14. Maximum length of run from patch panel to information outlet shall not exceed 295 feet.

C. UTP Cable Installation:

1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. 2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than ½ inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.

D. Open-Cable Installation:

1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment. 2. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of 8 inches above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart. 3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items.

E. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.

F. Separation from EMI Sources:

1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA-569-B for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment.

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 1500 - 12 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows:

3. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows:

4. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows:

3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Section 078413 "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Comply with TIA-569-B, Annex A, "Firestopping."

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.

B. Comply with J-STD-607-A.

C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least 2-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground.

D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor.

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 1500 - 13 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Section 260553 "Identification for Electrical Systems."

1. Administration Class: 2. 2. Color-code cross-connect fields. Apply colors to voice and data service backboards, connections, covers, and labels.

B. Using cable management system software specified in Part 2, develop Cabling Administration Drawings for system identification, testing, and management. Use unique, alphanumeric designation for each cable and label cable, jacks, connectors, and terminals to which it connects with same designation. At completion, cable and asset management software shall reflect as- built conditions.

C. Comply with requirements in Section 099123 "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. For fire-resistant plywood, do not paint over manufacturer's label.

D. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 2 level of administration, including optional identification requirements of this standard.

E. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins, and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for Project.

G. Cable and Wire Identification:

a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building- mounted device shall be identified with name and number of particular device as shown. b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames.

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 1500 - 14 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

5. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling, use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service. 6. Uniquely identify and label work area cables extending from the MUTOA to the work area. These cables may not exceed the length stated on the MUTOA label.

H. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA-606-A.

1. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent.

3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform the following tests and inspections with the assistance of a factory-authorized service representative:

1. Visually inspect UTP and optical fiber cable jacket materials for NRTL certification markings. Inspect cabling terminations in communications equipment rooms for compliance with color-coding for pin assignments, and inspect cabling connections for compliance with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Visually confirm Category 6, marking of outlets, cover plates, outlet/connectors, and patch panels. 3. Visually inspect cable placement, cable termination, grounding and bonding, equipment and patch cords, and labeling of all components. 4. Test UTP backbone copper cabling for DC loop resistance, shorts, opens, intermittent faults, and polarity between conductors. Test operation of shorting bars in connection blocks. Test cables after termination but not cross-connection.

5. UTP Performance Tests:

a. Test for each outlet and MUTOA. Perform the following tests according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1 and TIA/EIA-568-B.2:

1) Wire map. 2) Length (physical vs. electrical, and length requirements). 3) Insertion loss. 4) Near-end crosstalk (NEXT) loss.

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 1500 - 15 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

5) Power sum near-end crosstalk (PSNEXT) loss. 6) Equal-level far-end crosstalk (ELFEXT). 7) Power sum equal-level far-end crosstalk (PSELFEXT). 8) Return loss. 9) Propagation delay. 10) Delay skew.

6. Coaxial Cable Tests: Conduct tests according to Section 274133 "Master Antenna Television System." 7. Final Verification Tests: Perform verification tests for UTP systems after the complete communications cabling and workstation outlet/connectors are installed.

a. Voice Tests: These tests assume that dial tone service has been installed. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Go off-hook and listen and receive a dial tone. If a test number is available, make and receive a local, long distance, and digital subscription line telephone call. b. Data Tests: These tests assume the Information Technology Staff has a network installed and is available to assist with testing. Connect to the network interface device at the demarcation point. Log onto the network to ensure proper connection to the network.

D. Document data for each measurement. Data for submittals shall be printed in a summary report that is formatted similar to Table 10.1 in BICSI TDMM, or transferred from the instrument to the computer, saved as text files, and printed and submitted.

E. End-to-end cabling will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.9 SOFTWARE SERVICE AGREEMENT

A. Technical Support: Beginning with Substantial Completion, provide software support for two years.

1. Provide 30 days' notice to Owner to allow scheduling and access to system and to allow Owner to upgrade computer equipment if necessary.

3.10 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel in cable-plant management operations, including changing signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and keeping records of cabling assignments and revisions when extending wiring to establish new workstation outlets.

END OF SECTION

COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING 27 1500 - 16 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 28 2300

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes a video surveillance system consisting of cameras, digital video recorder, data transmission wiring, and a control station with its associated equipment. System shall be Analog based system.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. AGC: Automatic gain control.

B. BNC: Bayonet Neill-Concelman - type of connector.

C. B/W: Black and white.

D. CCD: Charge-coupled device.

E. FTP: File transfer protocol.

F. IP: Internet protocol.

G. LAN: Local area network.

H. MPEG: Moving picture experts group.

I. NTSC: National Television System Committee.

J. PC: Personal computer.

K. PTZ: Pan-tilt-zoom.

L. RAID: Redundant array of independent disks.

M. TCP: Transmission control protocol - connects hosts on the Internet.

N. UPS: Uninterruptible power supply.

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 1 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

O. WAN: Wide area network.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include dimensions and data on features, performance, electrical characteristics, ratings, and finishes.

B. Shop Drawings: For video surveillance. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.

1. Detail equipment assemblies and indicate dimensions, weights, loads, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection. 2. Functional Block Diagram: Show single-line interconnections between components for signal transmission and control. Show cable types and sizes. 3. Dimensioned plan and elevations of equipment racks, control panels, and consoles. Show access and workspace requirements. 4. UPS: Sizing calculations. 5. Wiring Diagrams: For power, signal, and control wiring.

C. Equipment List: Include every piece of equipment by model number, manufacturer, serial number, location, and date of original installation. Add pretesting record of each piece of equipment, listing name of person testing, date of test, set points of adjustments, name and description of the view of preset positions, description of alarms, and description of unit output responses to an alarm.

D. Field quality-control reports.

E. Operation and Maintenance Data: For cameras, power supplies, infrared illuminators, monitors, videotape recorders, digital video recorders, video switches, and control-station components to include in emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. In addition to items specified in Division 01 Section "Operation and Maintenance Data," include the following:

1. Lists of spare parts and replacement components recommended to be stored at the site for ready access.

F. Warranty: Sample of special warranty.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by a qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

B. Comply with NECA 1.

C. Comply with NFPA 70.

D. Electronic data exchange between video surveillance system with an access-control system shall comply with SIA TVAC.

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 2 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Environmental Conditions: Capable of withstanding the following environmental conditions without mechanical or electrical damage or degradation of operating capability:

1. Control Station: Rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of 60 to 85 deg F (16 to 29 deg C) and a relative humidity of 20 to 80 percent, noncondensing. 2. Interior, Controlled Environment: System components, except central-station control unit, installed in temperature-controlled interior environments shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of 36 to 122 deg F (2 to 50 deg C) dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, noncondensing. Use NEMA 250, Type 1 enclosures. 3. Exterior Environment: System components installed in locations exposed to weather shall be rated for continuous operation in ambient temperatures of minus 30 to plus 122 deg F (minus 34 to plus 50 deg C) dry bulb and 20 to 90 percent relative humidity, condensing. Rate for continuous operation when exposed to rain as specified in NEMA 250, winds up to 85 mph (137 km/h) and snow cover up to 24 inches (610 mm) thick. Use NEMA 250, Type 3R enclosures. 4. Security Environment: Camera housing for use in high-risk areas where surveillance equipment may be subject to physical violence.

1.7 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of cameras, equipment related to camera operation, and control-station equipment that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

1. Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.01 GENERAL

A. All equipment and materials used shall be standard components that are regularly manufactured and used in the manufacturer’s system. B. All systems and components shall have been thoroughly tested and proven in actual use. C. All systems and components shall be provided with the availability of a toll-free (U.S. and Canada), 24-hour technical assistance program (TAP) from the manufacturer. The TAP shall allow for immediate technical assistance for either the dealer/installer or the end user at no charge for as long as the product is installed. D. All systems and components shall be provided with a one-day turnaround repair express and 24-hour parts replacement. The repair and parts express shall be guaranteed by the manufacturer on warranty and nonwarranty items.

2.02 INDOOR/OUTDOOR CAMERA SYSTEM

A. The indoor/outdoor compact camera system shall consist of a tamper-resistant/impact- resistant, surface-mount wedge enclosure with integrated fixed camera, lens, and low temperature resistor array.

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 3 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. The series shall be designed with a microporous membrane vent that shall equalize the pressure differential, and shall repel water and dust but allow for free passage of vapors to prevent condensation within. C. The indoor/outdoor camera system shall offer a large selection of camera and lens options. D. The series shall meet or exceed the following design and performance specifications.

2.03 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A. Connectors 1 composite BNC 1 UTP B. Input Voltage 12 VDC or 24 VAC (10%), autosensing

C. ELECTRICAL -Port RJ-45 connector for 100Base-TX -Auto MDI/MDI-X -Cable Type Cat5 or better for 100Base-TX -Power Input PoE (IEEE 802.3af class 3) -Power Consumption < 6 W -Current Consumption -PoE < 200 mA maximum -Service Connector External 3-connector, 2.5 mm provides -NTSC/PAL video output -Accessory Port Connects Pelco accessories

-IE30DN-1 Pelco Sarix™ IE Fxd Outdoor Dome 3.1MP D/N No Lens Clear -IE10DN-1 Pelco Sarix™ IE Fxd Outdoor Dome 1.3 MP D/N, No Lens Clear

2.04 VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS

A. Imaging Device 1. DW/CW Models 1/3-inch pixel based imager 2. DN/CH Models 1/3-inch imager B. Signal System NTSC or PAL C. Video Output 1. Composite 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms 2. UTP 1 Vp-p, 100 ohms

2.05 PELCO SARIX LINE

INTERIOR MP, PROVIDE: (31) IMS0C10-1 Pelco Sarix™ Mini Indoor Fixed Dome 0.5 Megapixel Std Def (4) ID30DN-0 Pelco Sarix™ ID Fixed Indoor Dome 3.1MP D/N, Smoked Bubble (4) 13M2.8-12 Pelco Lens 1/3” Megapixel 2.8-12mm Vari-Focal

OUTDOOR MP, PROVIDE (8) IE30DN-1 Pelco Sarix™ IE Fxd Outdoor Dome 3.1MP D/N No Lens Clr (1) IE10DN-1 Pelco Sarix™ IE Fxd Outdoor Dome 1.3 MP D/N, No Lens Clr (9) 13M2.8-12 Pelco Lens 1/3” Megapixel 2.8-12mm Vari-Focal (9) IE-P Pelco Pendant Mount Light Grey Sarix™ IE (9) IWM-SR Pelco Wall Mount Lt Gray for Sarix™ IE P Pnd Lg

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 4 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

A. Picture Elements i. NTSC PAL 1. DW/CW Models 720 (H) x 540 (V) 720 (H) x 540 (V) 2. DN/CH Models 768 (H) x 494 (V) 752 (H) x 582 (V) B. Dynamic Range 102 dB typical/120 dB maximum (CW/DW models) C. Scanning System 2:1 interlace (progressive option for CW/DW) D. Synchronization Internal Electronic Shutter Range 1. DW/CW Models Auto (1/15 to 1/22,000) 2. DN/CH Models Auto (1/60 to 1/100,000) E. Lens Type 1. DW/CW Models Varifocal with auto iris 2. DN/CH Models Varifocal with auto iris 3. CH Models Fixed focal without iris F. Focal Length 3.0 mm  9.5 mm (varifocal) i. 9.0 mm  22.0 mm (varifocal) ii. 3 mm (fixed) iii. 3.6 mm (fixed) iv. 6.0 mm (fixed) v. 8.0 mm (fixed) vi. 12.0 mm (fixed) G. Operation Varifocal Fixed 1. Iris Auto (DC drive) N/A 2. Focus Manual Manual 3. Zoom Manual N/A

2.06 CAMERA SPECIFICATIONS

A. Model Options 1. DW Series Day/night, wide dynamic range 2. DN Series Day/night, high resolution, 3. CW Series Color, wide dynamic range 4. CH Series Color, high resolution B. Horizontal Resolution 1. DW/CW Models 504 TV lines 2. DN/CH Models 540 TV lines C. Minimum Illumination 1. DW Models Color: 0.8 lux, SEN 8X: 0.2 lux B-W: 0.08 lux, SEN 8X: 0.02 lux (f/1.0, 40 IRE, AGC on, 75% scene reflectance) 2. DN Models Color: 0.15 lux at full frame rate B-W: 0.015 lux at full frame rate (f/1.0, 40 IRE, AGC on, 75% scene reflectance) 3. CW Models Color: 0.8 lux, SEN 8X: 0.2 lux (f/1.0, 40 IRE, AGC on, 75% scene reflectance) 4. CH Models Color: 0.2 lux (f/1.0, 40 IRE, AGC on, 75% scene reflectance)

2.07 ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 5 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

A. Environment Low temperature, indoor/outdoor B. Operating Temperature -50°F to 122°F (-45°C to 50°C); de-ices to 25°F (-4°C) C. Thermostat Operation Heater is thermostatically controlled to activate ON at 50°F (10°C) and OFF at 80°F (27°C)

2.08 PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A. Construction Aluminum base and cover, steel camera mounting bracket B. Finish Gray polyester powder coat C. Unit Weight 1.25 lb (0.57 kg)

2.09 CERTIFICATIONS

A. CE, Class B B. FCC, Class B C. UL/cUL Listed E. Meets NEMA Type 4X and IP66 standards F. U.S. Patents D476,025; 6,715,939 B2; 6,805,498 B2

2.10 WARRANTY

A. 3 years, parts and labor.

2.11 INDOOR/OUTDOOR CCTV CAMERA DOME SYSTEM

A. The indoor/outdoor CCTV camera dome system shall be a discreet, miniature camera dome system consisting of a dome drive with a variable speed/high speed pan and tilt drive unit with continuous 360 rotation; 1/4-inch high resolution color, monochrome, or color/black- white CCD camera; motorized zoom lens with optical and digital zoom; auto focus; and an enclosure consisting of a back box, lower dome, and a quick-install mounting.

B. The indoor/outdoor CCTV camera dome system shall meet or exceed the following design and performance specifications.

2.12 DOME DRIVE

A. The variable speed/high speed pan and tilt dome drive unit shall meet or exceed the following design and performance specifications.

1. Pan Speed: Variable between 400 per second continuous pan to 0.1° per second 2. Vertical Tilt: Unobstructed tilt of +2 to -92 3. Manual Control Speed: Pan speed of 0.1 to 80 per second, and pan at 150 per second in turbo mode. Tilt operation shall range from 0.1 to 40 per second 4. Automatic Preset Speed: Pan speed of 400 and a tilt speed of 200 per second

Spectra IV SE Series Dome System

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 6 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

5. Presets: 256 positions with a 20-character label available for each position; programmable camera settings, including selectable auto focus modes, iris level, LowLight limit, and backlight compensation for each preset; command to copy camera settings from one preset to another; and preset programming through control keyboard or through dome system on-screen menu 6. Preset Accuracy: ± 0.1 7. Proportional Pan/Tilt Speed: Speed decreases in proportion to the increasing depth of zoom 8. Automatic Power-Up: User-selectable to the mode of operation. The dome will assume when power is cycled, including an automatic return to position or function before power outage 9. Zones: Eight zones with up to 20-character labeling for each, with the ability to blank the video in the zone 10. Motor Drive: Cogged belt with 0.9° stepper motor 11. Motor Operating Mode: Microstep to 0.015° steps 12. Motor: Continuous duty and variable speed, operating at 18 to 32 VAC, 24 VAC nominal 13. Limit Stops: Programmable for manual panning, auto/random scanning, and frame scanning 14. Inner Liner: Rotating black ABS liner inside a sealed lower dome 15. Alarm Inputs: Ability to control seven alarm inputs located in the back box 16. Alarm Outputs: Ability to control one auxiliary Form C relay output and one open collector auxiliary output located in the back box 17. Alarm Output Programming: Auxiliary outputs can be alternately programmed to operate on alarm 18. Alarm Action: Individually programmed for three priority levels, initiating a stored pattern or going to a preassigned preset position 19. Resume after Alarm: After completion of alarm, dome returns to previously programmed state or its previous position 20. Window Blanking: Eight 4-sided, user-defined shapes, each side with different lengths; window blanking setting to turn off at user-defined zoom ratio; window blanking set to opaque gray or translucent smear; blank all video above user-defined tilt angle; blank all video below user-defined tilt angle 21. Patterns: Eight user-defined programmable patterns including pan, tilt, zoom, and preset functions; and pattern programming through control keyboard or through dome system on-screen menu

2.13 SARIX SERIES DOME SYSTEM-GENERAL

A. Pattern Length: Eight patterns of user-defined length based on dome memory B. Internal Clock: Internal system clock, user programmable for 12 or 24 hour day format and mm/dd/yy or dd/mm/yy calendar format C. Scheduler: Internal scheduling system for programming presets, patterns, window blanks, alarms, and auxiliary functions based on internal clock settings D. Autosensing: Automatically sense and respond to protocol utilized for controlling the unit whether Coaxitron or RS-422 P or D protocols,

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 7 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

and accept competitors’ control protocols with the use of optional translator cards E. Menu System: Built-in setup of programmable functions and multiple languages including English, French, Italian, Spanish, Portuguese, German, Russian, Turkish, Polish, and Czechoslo- vakian F. Auto Flip: Rotates dome 180° at bottom of tilt travel G. Password Protection: Programmable settings with optional password protection H. Clear: Clear individual, grouped, or all programmed settings I. Freeze Frame: Freeze current scene of video during preset movement J. Display Setup: User-definable locations of all labels and displays and user- selectable time duration of each display K. Azimuth/Elevation/Zoom: On-screen display of pan and tilt locations and zoom ratio L. Compass Display: On-screen display of compass heading and user-definable compass setup M. Camera Title Overlay: 20 user-definable characters on the screen camera title display N. Video Output Level: User-selectable for normal or high output levels to compensate for long video wire runs O. Dome Drive Compatibility: All dome drives are compatible with all back box configurations P. RJ-45 Jack: Contains a plug-in jack on the dome drive for control and setup of the unit, the uploading of new operating code and language file updates, and is compatible with personal computers and PDAs such as Palm™ and iPAQ™ Q. Remote Data Port Compatibility: Ability to set up and control unit, and upload new operating code and language file updates through the easily accessible optional remote data port. Remote data port is also compatible with personal computers and PDAs such as Palm and iPAQ R. Power Consumption: Maximum 70 VA

2.14 SARIX SERIES DOME SYSTEM-CCD CAMERA

A. The high resolution CCD camera shall meet or exceed the following design and performance specifications.

a. Color/Black-White Optic System (35X) b. 1. Image Sensor: 1/4-inch EXview HAD™ CCD c. 2. Scanning System: 2:1 interlaced output B. Effective Pixels i. a. NTSC: 768 x 494 ii. b. PAL: 752 x 582 C. Horizontal Resolution i. a. NTSC: >540 TVL ii. b. PAL: >540 TVL b. 5. Lens: F1.4 (f=3.4 - 119 mm optical, 35X optical zoom, 12X digital zoom) c. 6. Programmable Zoom Speeds: 3.2, 4.6, or 6.6 seconds d. 7. Horizontal Angle of View: 55.8° at 3.4 mm wide zoom, 1.7° at 119 mm telephoto zoom e. 8. Focus: Automatic with manual override

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 8 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

D. Sensitivity at 35 IRE a. NTSC/EIA: 0.55 lux at 1/60 sec shutter speed (color) i. 0.063 lux at 1/4 sec shutter speed (color) ii. 0.00018 lux at 1/2 sec shutter speed (B-W) ii. b. PAL/CCIR: 0.50 lux at 1/50 sec shutter speed (color) i. 0.062 lux at 1/3 sec shutter speed (color) ii. 0.00014 lux at 1/1.5 sec shutter speed (B-W) b. 10. Synchronization System: Internal/AC line lock phase adjustable via remote control, V-sync c. 11. White Balance: Automatic with manual override E. Shutter Speed i. a. NTSC: 1/2-1/30,000 ii. b. PAL: 1/1.5-1/30,000 b. 13. Iris Control: Automatic with manual override c. 14. Gain Control: Automatic/ off d. 15. Video Output: 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms e. 16. Video Signal-to-Noise: >50 dB f. 17. Type of Lighting: Menu selection of indoor or outdoor lighting for optimum camera performance g. 18. Wide Dynamic Range: 128X h. 19. Motion Detection: User-definable motion detection settings for each preset scene, can activate auxiliary outputs, and contains three sensitivity levels per zone i. 20. Electronic Image Stabilization: Electronic compensation for external vibration sources that cause image blurring; User selectable for two frequency ranges, 5Hz (3-7Hz) and 10Hz (8-12Hz)

2.15 SARIX SERIES DOME SYSTEM-OPTIC SYSTEM

Color/Black-White Optic System (23X) 1. Image Sensor: 1/4-inch CCD 2. Scanning System: 2:1 interlaced output 3. Effective Pixels a. NTSC: 724 x 494 b. PAL: 724 x 582 4. Horizontal Resolution a. NTSC: >470 TVL b. PAL: >470 TVL 5. Lens: F1.6 (f=3.6 – 82.8 mm optical, 23X optical zoom, 12X digital zoom) 6. Programmable Zoom Speeds: 2.9, 4.2, or 5.8 seconds 7. Horizontal Angle of View: 54° at 3.6 mm wide zoom, 2.5° at 82.8 mm telephoto zoom 8. Focus: Automatic with manual override 9. Sensitivity at 35 IRE a. NTSC/EIA: 0.08 lux at 1/2 sec shutter speed (color) 0.3 lux at 1/60 sec shutter speed (B-W) 0.013 lux at 1/2 sec shutter speed (B-W) b. PAL/CCIR: 0.08 lux at 1/1.5 sec shutter speed (color) 0.3 lux at 1/50 sec shutter speed (B-W) 0.013 lux at 1/1.5 sec shutter speed (B-W)

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 9 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

10. Synchronization System: Internal/AC line lock phase adjustable via remote control, V- sync 11. White Balance: Automatic with manual override 12. Shutter Speed a. NTSC: 1/2-1/30,000 b. PAL: 1/1.5-1/30,000 13. Iris Control: Automatic with manual override 14. Gain Control: Automatic/ off 15. Video Output: 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms 16. Video Signal-to-Noise: >50 dB 17. Type of Lighting: Menu selection of indoor or outdoor lighting for optimum camera performance 18. Wide Dynamic Range: 80X 19. Motion Detection: User-definable motion detection settings for each preset scene, can activate auxiliary outputs, and contains three sensitivity levels per zone

Color Optic System (22X) 1. Image Sensor: 1/4-inch EXview HAD CCD 2. Scanning System: 2:1 interlaced output 3. Effective Pixels a. NTSC: 768 x 494 b. PAL: 752 x 582 4. Horizontal Resolution a. NTSC: >470 TVL b. PAL: >460 TVL 5. Lens: F1.6 (f=4 – 88 mm optical, 22X optical zoom, 12X digital zoom) 6. Programmable Zoom Speeds: 2.4, 3.9, or 6.3 seconds Spectra IV SE Series Dome System

7. Horizontal Angle of View: 47° at 4 mm wide zoom, 2.2° at 88 mm telephoto zoom 8. Focus: Automatic with manual override 9. Sensitivity at 35 IRE a. NTSC/EIA: 0.02 lux at 1/2 sec shutter speed b. PAL/CCIR: 0.02 lux at 1/1.5 sec shutter speed 10. Synchronization System: Internal/AC line lock phase adjustable via remote control, V- sync 11. White Balance: Automatic with manual override 12. Shutter Speed a. NTSC: 1/2-1/30,000 b. PAL: 1/1.5-1/30,000 13. Iris Control: Automatic with manual override 14. Gain Control: Automatic/ off 15. Video Output: 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms 16. Video Signal-to-Noise: >50 dB 17. Type of Lighting: Menu selection of indoor or outdoor lighting for optimum camera performance

Monochrome Optic System (22X) 1. Image Sensor: 1/4-inch EXview HAD CCD

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 10 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2. Scanning System: 2:1 interlaced output 3. Effective Pixels a. NTSC: 768 x 494 b. PAL: 752 x 582 4. Horizontal Resolution a. NTSC: >500 TVL b. PAL: >500 TVL 5. Lens: F1.6 (f=4 – 88 mm optical, 22X optical zoom, 12X digital zoom) 6. Programmable Zoom Speeds: 2.4, 3.9, or 6.3 seconds 7. Horizontal Angle of View: 47° at 4 mm wide zoom, 2.2° at 88 mm telephoto zoom 8. Focus: Automatic with manual override 9. Sensitivity at 35 IRE a. NTSC/EIA: 0.005 lux at 1/2 sec shutter speed b. PAL/CCIR: 0.005 lux at 1/1.5 sec shutter speed 10. Synchronization System: Internal/AC line lock phase adjustable via remote control, V- sync 11. Shutter Speed a. NTSC: 1/2-1/30,000 b. PAL: 1/1.5-1/30,000 12. Iris Control: Automatic with manual override 13. Gain Control: Automatic/ off 14. Video Output: 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms 15. Video Signal-to-Noise: >50 dB 16. Type of Lighting: Menu selection of indoor or outdoor lighting for optimum camera performance

2.16 SARIX SERIES DOME SYSTEM-BACKBOX & LOWER DOME

A. The back box and lower dome shall meet or exceed the following design and performance specifications

B. Pendant, Environmental 1. Connection to Dome Drive: Quick, positive mechanical and electrical disconnect without the use of any tools 2. Trap Door: Easy access trap door that allows complete access to the installation wiring, and provides compete separation of the wiring from the dome drive mechanics when closed 3. Terminal Strips: Removable terminal strips with screw-type terminals for use with a wide range of wire gauge sizes 4. Auxiliary Connections: One Form-C relay output at <40 V, 2 A maximum and a second open collector output at 32 VDC maximum at 30 mA 5. Alarm Inputs: Seven alarm inputs 6. Integrated UTP Circuit: Integrated circuit that converts video output to passive, UTP transmission 7. Fiber Optic Compatibility: Ability to plug into back box an optional Pelco fiber optic module, or a third-party board that converts video output and control input for fiber optic transmission 8. Third-Party Control Systems: Ability to plug in an optional TXB board that converts control signals from selected third-party controllers 9. Installation: Quick-mount wall, corner, pole, parapet, or ceiling adapter 10. Cable Entry: Through a 1.5-inch NPT fitting

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 11 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

11. Environmental Features: Factory-installed heaters, blowers, and sun shroud 12. Operating Temperatures: Maximum temperature range of -60 to 140F (-51.1° to 60°C) for two hours, and a continuous operating range of -50° to 122F (-51.1° to 50°C) 13. Memory: Built-in memory storage of camera and location- specific dome settings such as presets and patterns. If new dome drive is installed in back box, all settings will automatically download into new dome drive 14. Color: Gray, baked-on enamel powder coat 15. Construction: Aluminum 16. Lower Dome Material: Acrylic, optically clear, with no distortion in any portion of the dome up to +2 above the horizontal 17. Dome Color: Clear and smoked versions 18. Trim Ring Connection: Two captivated screws

2.17 SARIX SERIES DOME SYSTEM-CEILING ENVIRONMENT

A. In-Ceiling, Environmental 1. Connection to Dome Drive: Quick, positive mechanical and electrical disconnect without the use of any tools 2. Trap Door: Easy access trap door that allows complete access to the installation wiring, and provides compete separation of the wiring from the dome drive mechanics when closed 3. Terminal Strips: Removable terminal strips with screw-type terminals for use with a wide range of wire gauge sizes 4. Auxiliary Connections: One Form-C relay output at <40 V, 2 A maximum, and a second open collector output at 32 VDC maximum at 30 mA 5. Alarm Inputs: Seven alarm inputs

6. Integrated UTP Circuit: Integrated circuit board that converts video output to passive, UTP transmission 7. Fiber Optic Compatibility: Ability to plug into back box an optional Pelco fiber optic module, or a third-party board that converts video output and control input for fiber optic transmission 8. Third-Party Control Systems: Ability to plug in an optional TXB board that converts control signals from selected third-party controllers 9. Installation: Quick-mount spring clips 10. Cable Entry: Through a 0.75-inch conduit hole 11. Environmental Features: Factory-installed heaters and blowers 12. Operating Temperatures: Maximum temperature range of -60 to 140F (-51.1° to 60°C) for two hours, and a continuous operating range of -50° to 122F (-51.1° to 50°C) 13. Memory: Built-in memory storage of camera and location- specific dome settings such as presets and patterns. If new dome drive is installed in back box, all settings will automatically download into new dome drive 14. Color: Black, baked-on enamel powder coat 15. Construction: Aluminum

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 12 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

16. Lower Dome Material: Acrylic, optically clear, with no distortion in any portion of the dome up to +2 above the horizontal 17. Dome Color: Clear and smoked versions 18. Trim Ring Connection: Two captivated screws

B. In-Ceiling, Interior 1. Connection to Dome Drive: Quick, positive mechanical and electrical disconnect without the use of any tools 2. Trap Door: Easy access trap door that allows complete access to the installation wiring, and provides compete separation of the wiring from the dome drive mechanics when closed

3. Terminal Strips: Removable terminal strips with screw-type terminals for use with a wide range of wire gauge sizes 4. Auxiliary Connections: One Form-C relay output at <40 V, 2 A maximum, and a second open collector output at 32 VDC maximum at 30 mA 5. Alarm Inputs: Seven alarm inputs 6. Integrated UTP Circuit: Integrated circuit board that converts video output to passive, UTP transmission 7. Fiber Optic Compatibility: Ability to plug into back box an optional Pelco fiber optic module, or a third-party board that converts video output and control input for fiber optic transmission 8. Third-Party Control Systems: Ability to plug in optional TXB board that converts control signals from selected third-party controllers 9. Installation: Quick-mount spring clips 10. Cable Entry: Through a 0.75-inch conduit hole 11. Operating Temperatures: Maximum temperature range of 32 to 122F (0° to 50°C) 12. Memory: Built-in memory storage of camera and location- specific dome settings such as presets and patterns. If new dome drive is installed in back box, all settings will automatically download into new dome drive 13. Color: Black back box with baked-on enamel powder coat; white trim ring 14. Construction: Aluminum 15. Lower Dome Material: Acrylic, optically clear with no distortion in any portion of the dome up to +2 above the horizontal 16. Dome Color: Clear, smoked, chrome, and gold versions 17. Trim Ring Connection: Snaps in place 18. Safety Cable: Plastic tether

C. Pendant, Standard 1. Connection to Dome Drive: Quick, positive mechanical and electrical disconnect without the use of any tools 2. Trap Door: Easy access trap door that allows complete access to the installation wiring, and provides compete separation of the wiring from the dome drive mechanics when closed 3. Terminal Strips: Removable terminal strips with screw-type terminals for use with a wide range of wire gauge sizes 4. Auxiliary Connections: One Form-C relay output at <40 V, 2 A maximum, and a second open collector output at 32 VDC maximum at 30 mA 5. Alarm Inputs: Seven alarm inputs

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 13 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

6. Integrated UTP Circuit: Integrated circuit board that converts video output to passive, UTP transmission

7. Fiber Optic Compatibility: Ability to plug into back box an optional Pelco fiber optic module, or a third-party board that converts video output and control input for fiber optic transmission 8. Third-Party Control Systems: Ability to plug in an optional TXB board that converts control signals from selected third-party controllers 9. Installation: Quick-mount wall, corner, pole, parapet, or ceiling adapter 10. Cable Entry: Through a 1.5-inch NPT fitting 11. Operating Temperatures: Maximum temperature range of 25 to 113F (-4° to 45°C) for two hours, and a continuous operating range of 25° to 95F (-4° to 35°C) 12. Memory: Built-in memory storage of camera and location- specific dome settings such as presets and patterns. If new dome drive is installed in back box, all settings will automatically download into new dome drive 13. Colors: Gray or black, baked-on enamel powder coat 14. Construction: Aluminum 15. Lower Dome Material: Acrylic, optically clear with no distortion in any portion of the dome up to +2 above the horizontal 16. Dome Color: Clear, smoked, chrome, and gold versions 17. Trim Ring Connection: Two captivated screws

D. Surface Mount, Interior 1. Connection to Dome Drive: Quick, positive mechanical and electrical disconnect without the use of any tools 2. Trap Door: Easy access trap door that allows complete access to the installation wiring, and provides compete separation of the wiring from the dome drive mechanics when closed 3. Terminal Strips: Removable terminal strips with screw-type terminals for use with a wide range of wire gauge sizes 4. Auxiliary Connections: One Form-C relay output at <40 V, 2 A maximum, and a second open collector output at 32 VDC maximum at 30 mA 5. Alarm Inputs: Seven alarm inputs 6. Integrated UTP Circuit: Integrated circuit board that converts video output to passive, UTP transmission 7. Fiber Optic Compatibility: Ability to plug into back box an optional Pelco fiber optic module, or a third-party board that converts video output and control input for fiber optic transmission 8. Third-Party Control Systems: Ability to plug in an optional TXB board that converts control signals from selected third-party controllers 9. Installation: Surface mount 10. Cable Entry: Through a 0.75-inch conduit hole

11. Operating Temperatures: Maximum temperature range of 32 to 122F (0° to 50°C) 12. Memory: Built-in memory storage of camera and location- specific dome settings such as presets and patterns. If new dome drive is installed in back box, all settings will automatically download into new dome drive

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 14 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

13. Colors: Black or white finish 14. Construction: Plastic 15. Lower Dome Material: Acrylic, optically clear with no distortion in any portion of the dome up to +2 above the horizontal 16. Dome Color: Clear, smoked, chrome, and gold versions 17. Trim Ring Connection: Snaps in place 18. Safety Cable: Plastic tether

2.18 DOME SYSTEM DIMENSIONS

A. Diameter of Bubble, All Models: Maximum of 5.9 inches B. Pendant, Environmental: 10.6-inch (26.9 cm) overall length (including dome) by 8.6-inch (21.8 cm) diameter C. In-Ceiling, Environmental: 4.4 inches (11.0 cm) above ceiling, lower dome 4.3 inches (10.9 cm) below ceiling, 8.9-inch (22.6 cm) diameter; D. In-Ceiling, Interior: 5.2 inches (13.2 cm) above ceiling, 3.5 inches (8.8 cm) below ceiling, 8.2-inch (20.8 cm) diameter E. Pendant, Standard: Pendant 10.6-inch (26.9 cm) overall length (including dome) by 8.6-inch (21.8 cm) diameter F. Surface Mount, Interior: 8.7 inches (22.0 cm) by 7.6-inch (19.3 cm) diameter

2.19 DOME SYSTEM WEIGHTS

A. Pendant, Environmental: 7.4 lb (3.34 kg) B. In-Ceiling, Environmental: 6.0 lb (2.7 kg) C. In-Ceiling, Interior: 5.0 lb (2.3 kg) D. Pendant, Standard: 6.3 lb (2.86 kg) E. Surface Mount, Interior: 4.4 lb (2.0 kg)

2.20 CERTIFICATIONS AND RATINGS

A. CE, Class B: All models B. UL Listed: All models C. UL Listed to Canadian Safety Standards: All models D. FCC, Class B All models D. Meets NEMA Type 4X, IP66 standards: Pendant, Environmental In-Ceiling, Environmental Pendant, Standard

2.21 MODELS

A. The discreet CCTV camera dome system shall be the Pelco Sarix Series.

B. Color/Black-White Dome System (35X)

Type: Back Box: Model: Dome:

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 15 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

Surface Mount: White SD435-SMW-0 Smoked SD435-SMW-1 Clear SD435-SMW-2 Chrome SD435-SMW-3 Gold

Surface Mount: Black SD435-SMB-0 Smoked SD435-SMB-1 Clear SD435-SMB-2 Chrome SD435-SMB-3 Gold In-Ceiling, Indoor: Black SD435-F0 Smoked SD435-F1 Clear SD435-F2 Chrome SD435-F3 Gold In-Ceiling, Environmental: Black SD435-F-E0 Smoked SD435-F-E1 Clear Pendant, Standard: Black SD435-PB-0 Smoked SD435-PB-1 Clear SD435-PB-2 Chrome SD435-PB-3 Gold Pendant, Standard: Lt. Gray SD435-PG-0 Smoked SD435-PG-1 Clear SD435-PG-2 Chrome SD435-PG-3 Gold Pendant, Environmental: Lt. Gray SD435-PG-E0 Smoked SD435-PG-E1 Clear

C. Color/Black-White Dome System (23X)

Type: Back Box: Model: Dome: Surface Mount: White SD4CBW-SMW-0 Smoked SD4CBW-SMW-1 Clear SD4CBW-SMW-2 Chrome SD4CBW-SMW-3 Gold Spectra IV SE Series Dome System

Surface Mount: Black SD4CBW-SMB-0 Smoked SD4CBW-SMB-1 Clear SD4CBW-SMB-2 Chrome SD4CBW-SMB-3 Gold In-Ceiling, Indoor: Black SD4CBW-F0 Smoked SD4CBW-F1 Clear SD4CBW-F2 Chrome SD4CBW-F3 Gold In-Ceiling, Environmental: Black SD4CBW-F-E0 Smoked SD4CBW-F-E1 Clear Pendant, Standard: Black SD4CBW-PB-0 Smoked SD4CBW-PB-1 Clear

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 16 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

SD4CBW-PB-2 Chrome SD4CBW-PB-3 Gold Pendant, Standard: Lt. Gray SD4CBW-PG-0 Smoked SD4CBW-PG-1 Clear SD4CBW-PG-2 Chrome SD4CBW-PG-3 Gold Pendant, Environmental: Lt. Gray SD4CBW-PG-E0 Smoked SD4CBW-PG-E1 Clear

D. Color Dome System (22X)

Type: Back Box: Model: Dome: Surface Mount: White SD4C22-SMW-0 Smoked SD4C22-SMW-1 Clear SD4C22-SMW-2 Chrome SD4C22-SMW-3 Gold

Surface Mount: Black SD4C22-SMB-0 Smoked SD4C22-SMB-1 Clear SD4C22-SMB-2 Chrome SD4C22-SMB-3 Gold In-Ceiling, Indoor: Black SD4C22-F0 Smoked SD4C22-F1 Clear SD4C22-F2 Chrome SD4C22-F3 Gold In-Ceiling, Environmental: Black SD4C22-F-E0 Smoked SD4C22-F-E1 Clear Pendant, Standard: Black SD4C22-PB-0 Smoked SD4C22-PB-1 Clear SD4C22-PB-2 Chrome SD4C22-PB-3 Gold Pendant, Standard: Lt. Gray SD4C22-PG-0 Smoked SD4C22-PG-1 Clear SD4C22-PG-2 Chrome SD4C22-PG-3 Gold Pendant, Environmental: Lt. Gray SD4C22-PG-E0 Smoked SD4C22-PG-E1 Clear Spectra IV SE Series Dome System

E. Monochrome Dome System (22X)

Type: Back Box: Model: Dome: Surface Mount: White SD4M22-SMW-0 Smoked SD4M22-SMW-1 Clear SD4M22-SMW-2 Chrome SD4M22-SMW-3 Gold

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 17 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

Surface Mount: Black SD4M22-SMB-0 Smoked SD4M22-SMB-1 Clear SD4M22-SMB-2 Chrome SD4M22-SMB-3 Gold In-Ceiling, Indoor: Black SD4M22-F0 Smoked SD4M22-F1 Clear SD4M22-F2 Chrome SD4M22-F3 Gold In-Ceiling, Environmental: Black SD4M22-F-E0 Smoked SD4M22-F-E1 Clear Pendant, Standard: Black SD4M22-PB-0 Smoked SD4M22-PB-1 Clear SD4M22-PB-2 Chrome SD4M22-PB-3 Gold Pendant, Standard: Lt. Gray SD4M22-PG-0 Smoked SD4M22-PG-1 Clear SD4M22-PG-2 Chrome SD4M22-PG-3 Gold Pendant, Environmental: Lt. Gray SD4M22-PG-E0 Smoked SD4M22-PG-E1 Clear

2.22 INDOOR/OUTDOOR FIXED MINI DOME CAMERA SYSTEM

A. The indoor/outdoor fixed mini dome camera system shall be quick and easy to install and is ideal for both indoor and outdoor applications. It shall have a versatile design allowing for multiple mounting options.

B. The indoor/outdoor fixed mini dome camera system’s back box shall have three conduit openings.

C. The indoor/outdoor fixed mini dome camera system shall offer a large selection of camera and lens options, including a choice of a clear or smoked bubble lower dome.

D. The indoor/outdoor fixed mini dome camera system shall meet or exceed the following design and performance specifications.

2.23 ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A. Connectors 1 composite BNC 1 UTP B. Input Voltage 12 VDC or 24 VAC (10%), autosensing C. Power Consumption 1. DW/CW Models <3 W maximum 2. DN/CH Models <4 W maximum 3. Heaters 10 W when active; thermostatically controlled

2.24 PELCO SARIX LINE

INTERIOR MP, PROVIDE

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 18 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

(31) IMS0C10-1 Pelco Sarix™ Mini Indoor Fixed Dome 0.5 Megapixel Std Def (4) ID30DN-0 Pelco Sarix™ ID Fixed Indoor Dome 3.1MP D/N, Smoked Bubble (4) 13M2.8-12 Pelco Lens 1/3” Megapixel 2.8-12mm Vari-Focal

OUTDOOR MP, PROVIDE: (8) IE30DN-1 Pelco Sarix™ IE Fxd Outdoor Dome 3.1MP D/N No Lens Clr (1) IE10DN-1 Pelco Sarix™ IE Fxd Outdoor Dome 1.3 MP D/N, No Lens Clr (9) 13M2.8-12 Pelco Lens 1/3” Megapixel 2.8-12mm Vari-Focal (9) IE-P Pelco Pendant Mount Light Grey Sarix™ IE (9) IWM-SR Pelco Wall Mount Lt Gray for Sarix™ IE P Pnd Lg

A. Imaging Device 1.DW/CW Models 1/3-inch pixel based imager 2.DN/CH Models 1/3-inch imager B. Signal System NTSC or PAL C. Video Output 1. Composite 1 Vp-p, 75 ohms 2. UTP 1 Vp-p, 100 ohms D. Picture Elements NTSC PAL 1. DW/CW Models 720 (H) x 540 (V) 720 (H) x 540 (V) 2. DN/CH Models 768 (H) x 494 (V) 752 (H) x 582 (V) E. Dynamic Range 102 dB typical/120 dB maximum (CW/DW models) F. Scanning System 2:1 interlace (progressive option for CW/DW) G. Synchronization Internal H. Electronic Shutter Range 1. DW/CW Models Auto (1/15 to 1/22,000) 2. DN/CH Models Auto (1/60 to 1/100,000) I. Lens Type 1. DW/CW Models Varifocal with auto iris 2. DN/CH Models Varifocal with auto iris 3. CH Models Fixed focal without iris J. Focal Length 3.0 mm  9.5 mm (varifocal) 9.0 mm  22.0 mm (varifocal) 3 mm (fixed) 3.6 mm (fixed) 6.0 mm (fixed) 8.0 mm (fixed) 12.0 mm (fixed) G. Operation Varifocal Fixed 1. Iris Auto (DC-drive) N/A 2. Focus Manual Manual 3. Zoom Manual N/A

2.25 SARIX-CAMERA SPECIFICATIONS

A. Model Options 1. DW Series Day/night, wide dynamic range 2. DN Series Day/night, high resolution, 3. CW Series Color, wide dynamic range 4. CH Series Color, high resolution

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 19 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. Horizontal Resolution 1. DW/CW Models 504 TV lines 2. DN/CH Models 540 TV lines C. Minimum Illumination 1. DW Models Color: 0.8 lux, SEN 8X: 0.2 lux B-W: 0.08 lux, SEN 8X: 0.02 lux (f/1.0, 40 IRE, AGC on, 75% scene reflectance) 2. DN Models Color: 0.15 lux at full frame rate B-W: 0.015 lux at full frame rate (f/1.0, 40 IRE, AGC on, 75% scene reflectance) 3. CW Models Color: 0.8 lux, SEN 8X: 0.2 lux (f/1.0, 40 IRE, AGC on, 75% scene reflectance) 4. CH Models Color: 0.2 lux (f/1.0, 40 IRE, AGC on, 75% scene reflectance)

2.26 SARIX-ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS

A. Environment: Low temperature, indoor/outdoor B. Operating Temperature: -50°F to 122°F (-45°C to 50°C); de-ices to 25°F (-4°C) C. Thermostat Operation: Heater is thermostatically controlled to activate ON at 50°F (10°C) and OFF at 80°F (27°C)

2.27 SARIX-MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A. Pan/Tilt Adjustment Manual 1. Pan 360° 2. Tilt 140° (20° to 160° range) 3. Rotation 360° B. Light Attenuation f/1.5 light loss, smoked bubble Zero light loss, clear bubble

2.28 SARIX-PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A. Construction Aluminum with steel camera mounting bracket and polycarbonate dome B. Finish Light gray polyester powder coated C. Unit Weight 2.20 lb (1.00 kg)

2.29 SARIX-CERTIFICATIONS

A. CE, Class B B. UL Listed C. UL Listed to Canadian safety standards D. FCC, Class B E. Meets NEMA Type 4X and IP66 standards F. U.S. Patents D476,025; 6,715,939 B2; 6,805,498 B2

2.30 HYBRID VIDEO RECORDER

A. The hybrid video recorder (HVR) shall provide a high-quality recorder capable of storage and playback of images from as many as 24 or 32 analog and IP camera inputs.

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 20 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

B. The HVR user interface shall include a System Resource Meter independent of the Windows Resource Meter. The System Resource Meter shall provide a real-time indication of the utilization of HVR resources.

C. The HVR shall provide support for Pelco standard definition IP cameras, including fixed and pan/tilt/zoom models, and AXIS® cameras written to Vapix™ Version 2.0, Firmware 4.xx.

D. The HVR shall not require an IP camera license fee for support of any IP cameras.

E. The HVR shall also provide a simultaneous refreshing recording rate up to 480 images per second (NTSC) at CIF resolution with a DVD-RW as standard equipment. The 8- or 16-channel base unit shall be expandable to add an additional 16 camera inputs to provide an optional 24- or 32-channel HVR.

F. The HVR shall be capable of storage and playback of audio from 2 built-in audio inputs. The unit shall be expandable to provide one audio input for each video channel for the base 8- or 16-channel units and the optional 24- and 32-channel units. The HVR shall have the ability to provide bidirectional audio to one remote client at a time, allowing the user to listen to audio as it is being recorded at a remote station.

G. The HVR shall provide internal storage of up to 8 TB and support for optional external storage appliances using USB 2.0 JBOD (just a bunch of disks) of up to 8 TB. External RAID5 optional storage shall be available up to 9 TB.

H. The server unit shall provide connection to a primary and secondary monitor and include dual display for as many as 72 local or remote cameras simultaneously. The secondary dual display output shall be switch-selectable to connect to a VGA (DB15) or analog (BNC) monitor, and it shall be capable of displaying up to 36 cameras simultaneously. The primary and secondary display shall provide live view of local or remote cameras.

I. One standard composite monitor output shall be available for the 8- or 16- channel base units and a second standard composite output for 24- or 32- channel expansion units. Camera views shall be configurable in multiple sequences with independently set dwell times and shall have the ability to interleave alarm or motion events into the video sequences. In the case of two composite monitors, the display shall be mirrored between the two monitors.

J. Optional MUX cards shall be available to provide live view of local cameras and send video to the VGA and composite monitor port at up to 480/400 (NTSC/PAL) ips for real-time viewing. Each display shall mirror live, local, and public cameras from the primary monitor.

K. The unit shall support as many as 16 ATM/POS devices, synchronously record transaction data received from each ATM/POS device into a text database, and record the associated video of that transaction into the HVR’s database. The user shall be able to search transaction video associated with transaction data by ATM/POS device name, data, transaction type, specific text within a transaction, or transaction exception. Connection to ATM/POS devices shall be accomplished through optional serial pass-through devices.

L. The HVR server shall include a health check system that monitors certain server CPU components, including but not limited to the operating temperature of each internal hard drive.

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 21 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

Health check administration shall allow the modification of some components’ operational limits. If a component functions outside of the operating limit, the server shall display an alert on the server main monitor and connected remote client monitors. The error log shall contain details on the error condition.

M. The HVR shall operate as part of a network of as many as five units with the ability of each to use the server for administrative functions as well as a control and video viewing station. An HVR operator shall have the ability to view and control up to 180 cameras from a server. With proper administrative rights the remote client shall have the ability to administer as many as 200 servers. A remote client with proper rights shall have the ability to simultaneously control and operate up to 36 cameras connected to any of 200 HVR/DVRs.

N. The HVR shall utilize a Microsoft® Windows® XP Embedded operating system.

O. Remote software shall be provided at no additional cost for operation using PC, Web, and Pocket PC handheld devices.

P. An Emergency Agent application shall be included to provide alarm notification at any connected PC and shall not require the installation of the HVR’s PC client software. There shall be no additional cost for the Emergency Agent application.

Q. The HVR shall meet or exceed the following design and performance specifications.

2.31 HYBRID VIDEO RECORDER-ELECTRICAL/VIDEO SPECIFICATIONS

A. Input Voltage 100 to 240 VAC 10%, 50/60Hz, autoranging B. Power Consumption Maximum 350 W C. Signal System NTSC/PAL D. Operating System Windows 2000 (SP4) or Windows XP, Professional DirectX® 8.1 or later, 500 MB free disk space

E. Recording Resolutions NTSC PAL 320 x 240 320 x 288 640 x 240 640 x 288 640 x 480 640 x 576 352 x 240 352 x 288 704 x 240 704 x 288 704 x 480 704 x 576 F. Frame Rate NTSC PAL 1. CIF 480 ips 400 ips 2. 2CIF 240 ips 200 ips 3. 4CIF 120 ips 100 ips G. Recording Modes Multi-event Recording capability for continuous, motion detection, alarm activation, or scheduled recording, and ATM/POS with overlapping and differing frame rates and quality settings for each recording mode. H. Motion Detection Built-in motion detection for each camera to start recording or to increase the recording rate of the system I. Maximum Analog and IP cameras 1. DX8108 models 8 analog cameras; 24 analog and IP cameras

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 22 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2. DX8116 models 16 analog cameras; 32 analog and IP cameras 3. DX8124 models 24 analog cameras; 32 analog and IP cameras 4. DX8132 models 32 analog cameras; 32 analog and IP cameras J. Available IP Camera Bandwidth 1. DX8108 models 1 ips, 13 Mbps IP stream 15 ips, 11 Mbps IP stream 30 ips, 11 Mbps IP stream 2. DX8116 models 1 ips, 11 Mbps IP stream 15 ips, 7 Mbps IP stream 30 ips, 4 Mbps IP stream 3. DX8124 models 1 ips, 11 Mbps IP stream 7 ips, 10 Mbps IP stream 15 ips, 6 Mbps IP stream 4. DX8132 models 1 ips, 15 Mbps IP stream 7 ips, 14 Mbps IP stream 15 ips, 13 Mbps IP stream K. Pelco IP Camera Resource Usage* 1. Primary Stream 4CIF/30 ips resolution; 2 Mbps bit rate 2. Secondary Stream CIF/15 ips, 1 Mbps bit rate L. Internal Storage Hard drive with 250, 500, 750, 1000, 1500, 2000, 3000, 4000, 6000 or 8000 GB of storage M External Storage RAID 5 storage of up to 9 TB N. Compression Pelco engineered O. Video Inputs 8/16/24/32 (looping with automatic termination) P. VGA Outputs 1 primary Q. Password Protection 4 user levels of protection for setup functions, operation, and system exiting; each level with user-assignable features per user level and offer multiple users per level R. Languages English, Spanish, German, French, Italian, Portuguese, Russian, and Polish S. Alarm Input Terminals 8/16/24/32 (user-selectable, N.O. or N.C.) T. Analog Video Outputs 1 with DX8108/DX8116 2 with DX8124/DX8132 U. Relay Output Terminals 8/16/24 (user-selectable, N.O./N.C.) * Rates are for Pelco standard definition IP cameras, including fixed and pan/tilt/zoom models. Refer to the appropriate product specification sheet for bit rates based on desired settings.

V. Relay Contact Ratings Rated (Resistive) Load 0.5 A at 120 VAC or 1 A at 24 VDC W. Remote Administration Full remote control through TCP/IP network X. LAN/WAN Connection Software and hardware is provided for viewing and controlling the HVR over the network, including an exclusive server-to- server connection feature Y. Video Quality High-quality video recording of at least VHS grade compared to the original video; supports NTSC or PAL video Z. Backup A scheduled backup management system is provided to back up data to external devices that are mapped to the server (CD, NAS, or other storage devices) without interrupting hard disk recording AA. Hard Disk Drives 250 to 8000 GB on board storage capability

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 23 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

AB. Programming On-screen programming and operation through a keyboard or mouse (keyboard and mouse are supplied) AC. On-line Help system Provides a built-in Help system containing the information needed for faster reference by the user at both the server and remote client AD. Search Modes Thumbnail, Pixel (Smart Search), and ATM/POS AE. View Favorites Provides a mechanism to bookmark and name certain screen configurations and retrieve these by name AF. KBD300A Keyboard Support Enables control of as many as 72 cameras connected to 5 servers from a single server-attached optional keyboard AG. Instant Playback Feature Provides the option of a forced write to internal disk storage and allows users immediate playback of events AH. ATM/POS Support 1. Single-Mode Data interface for up to 4 ATM/POS devices per server 2. Multimode Data interface for up to 16 ATM/POS devices per server AI. System Health Check Monitors and provides an error message if CPU components or hard disk drive operating parameters exceed their thresholds AJ. API Integration Published APIs are available for application integration to the HVR

AK. Recording Modes: (NTSC): 2CIF for indoor cameras, 4CIF for outdoor cameras.

AL. Minimum recording storage of 1080 hours (45 days) in normal (time-lapse) record mode shall be provided. All individual cameras shall record at a rate of 10 frames per second per camera, image size shall be at a minimum 5.16 KB. Camera activity levels shall be calculated at a rate of 65% activity twenty-four (24) hours a day, seven (7) days a week for all Video Surveillance cameras at the facility.

2.32 HYBRID VIDEO RECORDER-MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A. Connectors 1. BNC Video inputs and outputs 2. 6-pin mini-DIN PS/2 mouse and keyboard 3. DB9 COM 1 4. DB15 VGA Port 5. RJ-45 10/100/1000 Megabit Ethernet port and RS-485/RS-422 ports on PTZ control (4) 6. USB 6 high-speed USB 2.0 ports (2 front, 4 back), connects the mouse, keyboard, and JBOD external storage B. Audio Connectors Miniature male phone plug for line in, microphone in, and audio output

C. Optional Audio Connectors 1. Audio Decoding GSM610 Wave Format 2. Audio Bit Rate 8 Kbps 3. Audio Levels a. Input Line-level input

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 24 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

b. Output Line-level output 4. Audio Connectors Female RCA jacks a. Standard Inputs 2 b. Audio Inputs 8 for the 8-channel unit; 16 for the 16-channel unit c. Audio Outputs 1

2.33 HYBRID VIDEO RECORDER-PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A. Dimensions, Standard 1. Desk Mount 19.9" D x 17.0" W x 7.0" H (50.55 x 43.18 x 17.78 cm) 2. Rack Mount 22.0" D x 19.0" W x 7.0" H (4 RUs) (55.88 x 48.26 x 17.78 cm) B. Dimensions, Expansion Unit 1. Desk Mount 8.19" D x 17.0" W x 1.73" H (20.80 x 43.18 x 4.39 cm) 2. Rack Mount 8.19" D x 19.0" W x 1.73" H (20.80 x 48.26 x 4.39 cm) C. Weight Some models, not all, are listed to show range of weights 1. DX8108-250 39.8 lb (18.1 kg) 2. DX8108-8000 44.9 lb (20.4 kg) 3. DX8116-250 40.3 lb (18.3 kg) 4. DX8116-8000 45.4 lb (20.6 kg) 5. DX8124-250 40.8 lb (18.5 kg) 6. DX8124-8000 45.9 lb (20.8 kg) 7. DX8132-250 41.3 lb (18.7 kg) 8. DX8132-8000 46.4 lb (21.1 kg) D. Operating Temperature 50° to 95°F (10° to 35°C) E. Relative Humidity Maximum 80%, noncondensing F. Optical Drive DVD-RW

2.34 HYBRID VIDEO RECORDER-REMOTE CLIENT REQUIREMENTS

A. Processor Dual core 1.6 GHz or greater B. Memory 2 GB RAM minimum C. Video AGP or PCI-e VGA card with minimum 64 MB video RAM (nonshared memory), 1024 x 768 or 1280 x 1024 display resolution, and DirectX 8.1 application programming interface D. Monitor SVGA or XGA with 1024 x 768 or 1280 x 1024 resolution E. Operating System Windows 2000 with SP4 or Windows XP; Professional DirectX 8.1 or later F. RAM 500 MB free disk space G. Web Browser 1. Multicast Internet Explorer® 6.0 2. Remote Client Internet Explorer 6.0 and 7.0 3. Web Client Internet Explorer 6.0 and 7.0 H. Mobile PDA Client Application A Pocket PC with Microsoft PPC 2002 or later, Intel® XScale® CPU with minimum 64 MB of memory I. Antivirus Software Symantec™ Endpoint Protection Version 11.0.4

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 25 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.35 HYBRID VIDEO RECORDER-CERTIFICATIONS

A. CE and FCC, Class A All DX8124-M, DX8124-MA, DX8132-M, and DX8132-MA models B. CE and FCC, Class B All except DX8124-M, DX8124-MA, DX8132-M, and DX8132- MA models C. UL/cUL All models

2.36 HYBRID VIDEO RECORDER-PELCO MODEL NUMBERS

A. Models 1. DX8108-250 8-channel, 250 GB 2. DX8108-500 8-channel, 500 GB 3. DX8108-750 8-channel, 750 GB 4. DX8108-1000 8-channel, 1000 GB 5. DX8108-1500 8-channel, 1500 GB 6. DX8108-2000 8-channel, 2000 GB 7. DX8108-3000 8-channel, 3000 GB 8. DX8108-4000 8-channel, 4000 GB 9. DX8108-6000 8-channel, 6000 GB 10. DX8108-8000 8-channel, 8000 GB 11. DX8116-250 16-channel, 250 GB 12. DX8116-500 16-channel, 500 GB 13. DX8116-750 16-channel, 750 GB 14. DX8116-1000 16-channel, 1000 GB 15. DX8116-1500 16-channel, 1500 GB 16. DX8116-2000 16-channel, 2000 GB 17. DX8116-3000 16-channel, 3000 GB 18. DX8116-4000 16-channel, 4000 GB 19. DX8116-6000 16-channel, 6000 GB 20. DX8116-8000 16-channel, 8000 GB 21. DX8124-250 24-channel, 250 GB 22. DX8124-500 24channel, 500 GB 23. DX8124-750 24-channel, 750 GB 24. DX8124-1000 24-channel, 1000 GB 25. DX8124-1500 24-channel, 1500 GB 26. DX8124-2000 24-channel, 2000 GB 27. DX8124-3000 24-channel, 3000 GB 28. DX8124-4000 24-channel, 4000 GB 29. DX8124-6000 24-channel, 6000 GB 30. DX8124-8000 24-channel, 8000 GB 31. DX8132-250 32-channel, 250 GB 32. DX8132-500 32-channel, 500 GB 33. DX8132-750 32-channel, 750 GB 34. DX8132-1000 32-channel, 1000 GB 35. DX8132-1500 32-channel, 1500 GB 36. DX8132-2000 32-channel, 2000 GB 37. DX8132-3000 32-channel, 3000 GB 38. DX8132-4000 32-channel, 4000 GB 39. DX8132-6000 32-channel, 6000 GB

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 26 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

40. DX8132-8000 32-channel, 8000 GB

B. Model Numbering Key 1. The prefix DX81 is followed by two digits designating the channels: 08, 16, 24, or 32. 2. The second set of numbers designate the storage in GB; 250, 500, 750, 1000, 1500, 2000, 3000, 4000, 6000 or 8000. 3. Add a letter suffix to designate options: A = Audio, M = MUX, or MA = MUX and Au- dio.

2.37 HYBRID VIDEO RECORDER-SUPPLIED ACCESSORIES

A. Power Cords 1 USA and 1 European B. USB Keyboard and Mouse 1 each for configuration and operation C. Recovery Disc 1, for re-imaging the unit D. Resource Disc 1, with server and client software and documentation E. Audio Input Breakout Cables Optional F. Terminal Blocks 1. Alarm (green) 1 (8 inputs) or 2 (16 inputs) 2. Relay (blue) 1 (8 inputs) or 2 (16 inputs) G. Rack Mount Kit 1 standard kit (brackets, rails, and hardware

2.38 HYBRID VIDEO RECORDER-UPGRADE EQUIPMENT

A. DX8100-EXP 16-channel expansion unit kit B. DX8108-AUD 8-channel audio input card C. DX8116-AUD 16-channel audio input card D. DX8100-512RAM* Memory upgrade from 512 MB to 1 GB E. DX8108-MUX 8-channel multiplexed analog output display card F. DX8116-MUX 16-channel multiplexed analog output display card G. DX8100-ISCI† DX8100 internal Ultra 160SCSI card H. DX8100HDDI-2250† 2.25 TB external RAID 5 storage expansion unit I. DX8100HDDI-4500† 4.5 TB external RAID 5 storage expansion unit J. DX8100HDDI-6750† 6.75 TB external RAID 5 storage expansion unit K. DX8100HDDI-9000† 9 TB external RAID 5 storage expansion unit L. DX81HDD250KIT SATA 250 GB upgrade M. DX81HDD500KIT SATA 500 GB upgrade N. DX81HDD750KIT SATA 750 GB upgrade O. DX81HDD1000KIT SATA 1000 GB upgrade P. DX81HDD1500KIT SATA 1500 GB upgrade Q. DX81HDD2000KIT SATS 2000 GB upgrade R. KBD300A Universal keyboard (requires KBDKIT/KBDKIT-X) S. KBDKIT/KBDKIT-X Remote keyboard wiring kit T. VSI-Pro § AVE® video serial interface for ATM/POS single-mode U. Regcom‡ AVE RS-485 network system unit for ATM/POS multimode V. Hydra AVE RS-485 network system control unit for ATM/POS multimode W. DX81SWV20XPE Software only upgrade for DX8100 Windows XP Embedded

* Provides pre- and post- alarm recording up to 15 minutes. † Not for use with DX8124 or DX8132 models.

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 27 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

‡ One Regcom unit is required for each ATM/POS device; one Hydra unit is required for each DX8100 serial connection used. One to four serial ports may be used. Support is limited to 16 total ATM/POS devices. Hydra, Regcom, and the required cabling are available from AVE. § The VSI-PRO and required cabling is available from AVE.

2.39 FULL HIGH DEFINITION LCD MONITOR

A. The PMCL500 Series FHD LCD monitor shall the following features: VGA and digital visual interface (DVI) inputs, picture-in-picture (PIP), looping BNC output, and full high definition resolution.

B. The PMCL500 Series FHD LCD monitor shall provide a front panel that allows the user to adjust image quality, brightness, size, position, and geometry for optimal viewing.

C. The PMCL500 Series FHD LCD monitor shall have improved airflow and thermal reduction allowing for longer component life, ensuring reliability in a 24/7 security installation environment.

D. The PMCL500 Series FHD LCD monitor shall be constructed of a lightweight aluminum frame composition for desktop or wall-mount installations. Stationary and tilt wall mounts shall be available. The monitors shall provide built-in hand holds in the rear cover for easy installation and handling.

E. The PMCL500 Series FHD LCD monitor shall be compatible with industry-leading megapixel technology, providing a minimum of 1920 x 1080p native resolution that is used with the latest megapixel video security cameras.

F. The PMCL500 Series FHD LCD monitor shall meet or exceed the following design and performance specifications.

2.40 FULL HIGH DEFINITION LCD MONITOR-ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A. Input Voltage 100 to 240 VAC, 50/60 Hz B. Power Consumption 1. PMCL542F 250 W 2. PMCL547F 350 W 3. PMCL5552F 380 W C. Video Input Interfaces 2 BNC, looping; 1 S-Video, looping; 1 RGB; 1 DVI; 1 component D. Audio Input Interfaces 2 audio L/R, RCA jack E. Horizontal Frequency: 31 to 69 kHz F. Vertical Frequency 56 to 85 Hz G. Sync Format NTSC/PAL

2.41 FULL HIGH DEFINITION LCD MONITOR-ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS

A. Operating Temperature 32° to 104°F (0° to 40°C) B. Operating Humidity 20% to 80%, noncondensing

2.42 FULL HIGH DEFINITION LCD MONITOR-PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 28 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

A. Dimensions (without stand) 1. PMCL542F 4.4” D x 39.0” W x 24.1” H (11.2 x 99.1 x 61.2 cm) 2. PMCL547F 4.4” D x 43.5” W x 26.7” H (11.2 x 110.5 x 67.8 cm) 3. PMCL552F 4.5” D x 48.5” W x 29.8” H (11.4 x 123.2 x 75.7 cm) B. Unit Weight 1. PMCL542F 66.1 lb (30.0 kg) 2. PMCL547F 77.2 lb (35.0 kg) 3. PMCL552F 90.4 lb (41.0kg)

2.43 FULL HIGH DEFINITION LCD MONITOR-MECHANICAL SPECIFICATIONS

A. Native Resolution 1920 x 1080p B. Panel Aspect Ratio 16:9 C. Viewing Area 1. PMCL542F 930 x 523 mm 2. PMCL547F 1040 x 585 mm 3. PMCL552F 1152 x 648 mm D. Pixel Pitch 1. PMCL542F 0.485 x 0.485 mm 2. PMCL547F 0.542 x 0.542 mm 3. PMCL552F 0.600 x 0.600 mm E. Video Formats 480p, 576p, 720p, 1080i, 1080p F. Brightness 1. PMCL542F 500 cd/m2 2. PMCL547F 500 cd/m2 3. PMCL552F 500 cd/m2 G. Contrast Ratio 1. PMCL542F 5000:1 2. PMCL547F 1300:1 3. PMCL552F 4000:1

H. Backlight Type 1. PMCL542F CCFL 2. PMCL547F CCFL 3. PMCL552F CCFL I. Panel Life 50,000 hours J. Viewing Angle (H/V) 178°/178° K. Displayable Colors 16.7 million L. Response Time 1. PMCL542F 5 ms 2. PMCL547F 5ms 3. PMCL552F 8 ms M. PIP Selectable, sizeable, swappable, moveable N. Speakers 2 internal (5 W, 4 ohms x 2) O. Front Panel Controls Menu, source, up/ down, power, and volume +/- P. Indicators LED (power on/off)

2.44 FULL HIGH DEFINITION LCD MONITOR-CERTIFICATIONS

A. CE, Class A B. FCC, Class A

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 29 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

C. UL/cUL listed D. C-Tick E. S Mark for Argentina* F. CCC

* As of date of this document, these certifications and patents are pending.

2.45 FULL HIGH DEFINITION LCD MONITOR-PELCO MODEL NUMBERS

A. PMCL542F 42-inch (1,067 mm) LCD monitor, 1920 X 1080p resolution, 5 m/s response time, made of lightweight aluminum with integrated handholds for easy installation B. PMCL547F 47-inch (1,193 mm) LCD monitor, 1920 X 1080p resolution, 5 m/s response time, made of lightweight aluminum with integrated handholds for easy installation C. PMCL552F 52-inch (1,321 mm) LCD monitor, 1920 X 1080p resolution, 5 m/s response time, made of lightweight aluminum with integrated handholds for easy installation

2.46 SOFTWARE A. 1 DS-NVS-NC Pelco DS NVS S/W only (64 CAMS) B. 1 DS-SW-CAM Pelco Software License Fee for IP Camera C. The PC Client Workstation has been optimized to run DS ControlPoint Client Software.

2.47 SYSTEM SERVER

A. Server manufacturer shall pre load DS NVs VMS software and associated installation software on server so as to provide a “turnkey” server that, when connected to the network switch, with cameras connected, shall automatically detect all cameras for identification and labeling.

B. Maufacturer shall also have DS Control Point Client Software pre-loaded and tested on the work station provided Client software shall be capable of running existing DX8100 DVR’s on the same platform across the entire campus network.

C. Server/storage/work station shall be comprised of Intel hardware. There shall be a 4 year warranty on Server/storage device that will include direct Intel support and advance replacements when required. Required camera licenses shall be a ONE TIME cost and NOT be reoccurring.

2.48 CONTROL AREA: SERVER/STORAGE

A. 1 AGS-HD101-0808-5N AGS Reliance 8 Svr, 100 Mbps, 8-1TB HDD, RAID5

B. 1 AGS-WSMB AGS Mirador WSMB, 2-DVI port card, 1-NIC

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 30 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine pathway elements intended for cables. Check raceways and other elements for compliance with space allocations, installation tolerance, hazards to camera installation, and other conditions affecting installation.

B. Examine roughing-in for LAN, WAN, and IP network before device installation.

C. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 WIRING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26 Section "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

B. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways unless otherwise indicated.

1. Except raceways are not required in accessible indoor ceiling spaces and attics. 2. Except raceways are not required in hollow gypsum board partitions. 3. Conceal raceways and wiring except in unfinished spaces.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace, and train conductors to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.

D. Splices, Taps, and Terminations: For power and control wiring, use numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets; and equipment enclosures. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A-486B.

E. For LAN connection and fiber-optic and copper communication wiring, comply with Division 27 Sections "Communications Backbone Cabling" and "Communications Horizontal Cabling."

F. Grounding: Provide independent-signal circuit grounding recommended in writing by manufacturer.

3.3 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE SYSTEM INSTALLATION

A. Install cameras and infrared illuminators level and plumb.

B. Install cameras with 84-inch- (2134-mm-) minimum clear space below cameras and their mountings. Change type of mounting to achieve required clearance.

C. Set pan unit and pan-and-tilt unit stops to suit final camera position and to obtain the field of view required for camera. Connect all controls and alarms, and adjust.

D. Install power supplies and other auxiliary components at control stations unless otherwise indicated.

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 31 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

E. Install tamper switches on components indicated to receive tamper switches, arranged to detect unauthorized entry into system-component enclosures and mounted in self-protected, inconspicuous positions.

F. Avoid ground loops by making ground connections only at the control station.

1. For 12- and 24-V dc cameras, connect the coaxial cable shields only at the monitor end.

G. Identify system components, wiring, cabling, and terminals according to Division 26 Section "Identification for Electrical Systems."

3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.

B. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect, test, and adjust components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections.

C. Perform tests and inspections.

1. Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to inspect components, assemblies, and equipment installations, including connections, and to assist in testing.

D. Tests and Inspections:

1. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly installed, connected, and labeled, and that interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. 2. Pretesting: Align and adjust system and pretest components, wiring, and functions to verify that they comply with specified requirements. Conduct tests at varying lighting levels, including day and night scenes as applicable. Prepare video-surveillance equipment for acceptance and operational testing as follows:

a. Prepare equipment list described in "Submittals" Article. b. Verify operation of auto-iris lenses. c. Set back-focus of fixed focal length lenses. At focus set to infinity, simulate nighttime lighting conditions by using a dark glass filter of a density that produces a clear image. Adjust until image is in focus with and without the filter. d. Set back-focus of zoom lenses. At focus set to infinity, simulate nighttime lighting conditions by using a dark glass filter of a density that produces a clear image. Additionally, set zoom to full wide angle and aim camera at an object 50 to 75 feet (17 to 23 m) away. Adjust until image is in focus from full wide angle to full telephoto, with the filter in place. e. Set and name all preset positions; consult Owner's personnel. f. Set sensitivity of motion detection. g. Connect and verify responses to alarms. h. Verify operation of control-station equipment.

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 32 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

3. Test Schedule: Schedule tests after pretesting has been successfully completed and system has been in normal functional operation for at least 14 days. Provide a minimum of 10 days' notice of test schedule. 4. Operational Tests: Perform operational system tests to verify that system complies with Specifications. Include all modes of system operation. Test equipment for proper operation in all functional modes.

E. Video surveillance system will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

F. Prepare test and inspection reports.

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to two visits to Project during other-than-normal occupancy hours for this purpose. Tasks shall include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Check cable connections. 2. Check proper operation of cameras and lenses. Verify operation of auto-iris lenses and adjust back-focus as needed. 3. Adjust all preset positions; consult Owner's personnel. 4. Recommend changes to cameras, lenses, and associated equipment to improve Owner's use of video surveillance system. 5. Provide a written report of adjustments and recommendations.

3.6 CLEANING

A. Clean installed items using methods and materials recommended in writing by manufacturer.

B. Clean video-surveillance-system components, including camera-housing windows, lenses, and monitor screens.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain video-surveillance equipment.

END OF SECTION

VIDEO SURVEILLANCE 28 2300 - 33

8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 28 3111

EXTEND EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SUMMARY

A. The work covered by this section of the specifications includes the furnishing of all labor, equipment, materials, and performance of all operations in connection with the extension and modification of the existing Addressable Fire Alarm System as shown on the drawings and as herein specified.

B. The requirements of the conditions of the Contract, Supplementary Conditions, and General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this section.

C. The fire alarm system shall comply with requirements of 2008 NFPA Standard 72 for Protected Premises Signaling Systems except as modified and supplemented by this specification. The complete installation shall conform to the applicable sections of NFPA-70 National Electrical Code (Article 760). The system shall be electrically supervised and monitor the integrity of all conductors.

D. Related Requirements: 1. General Conditions, Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1, General Requirements, apply to the work of this section.

1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. All panels and peripheral devices shall be the standard product of a single manufacturer and shall display the manufacturer's name on each component.

B. Acceptable manufacturer’s for this project is as follows:

1. Silent Knight Systems 2. No Substitutions

C. Equivalent UL- listed equipment may not be substituted for the specified manufacturer.

D. Each and all items of the Fire Alarm System shall be listed as a product of a SINGLE fire alarm system manufacturer under the appropriate category by Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. (UL), and shall bear the "U.L." label. All control equipment shall be listed under UL category UOJZ as a single control unit. Partial listing shall NOT be acceptable.

F. The fire alarm equipment manufacturer shall be an ISO 9001 certified company and meet the requirements of BS EN9001: ANSI/ASQC Q9001.

G. All control equipment must have transient protection to comply with UL864 requirements. Where Fire Alarm circuits leave the building, additional transient protection must be provided for each circuit. Devices must be UL listed under standard #497B (Isolated Loop Protectors).

EXTEND EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 3111 - 1

8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

H. The fire alarm equipment supplier shall employ technicians on site to provide system certification and programming in accordance with NFPA 72 testing requirements NICET (minimum Level III Fire Alarm Technology).

1.3 APPLICABLE STANDARDS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. The codes and standards listed below form a part of this specification. The system shall comply with the latest adopted standards.

1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) - USA:

a. No. 13 Sprinkler Systems b. No. 70 National Electrical Code 2008 c. No. 72 National Fire Alarm Code 2008 d. No. 90A Standard for Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems e. No. 101 Life Safety Code

2. All requirements of the Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).

1.4 APPROVALS:

A. The system shall have proper listing and/or approval from the following nationally recognized agencies:

1. UL Underwriters Laboratories Inc 2. FM Factory Mutual

B. The fire alarm control panel shall meet UL Standard 864 (Control Units) and UL Standard 1076 (Proprietary Burglar Alarm Systems).

C. The system shall be listed by the national agencies as suitable for extinguishing release applications.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General:

1. Ten copies of equipment cuts and drawings shall be submitted to the Architect/Engineer for review.

2. Submittals shall be provided as a complete submission, no partial submissions will be accepted.

3. No substituted equipment shall be reviewed.

B. Shop Drawings:

1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications.

EXTEND EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 3111 - 2

8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2. Include manufacturer's name(s), model numbers, ratings, power requirements, battery calculations, voltage drop calculations, control panel layout, device mounting elevations and wiring typicals, and complete point-to-point-wiring diagrams.

3. Provide a complete set of construction drawings. Drawings at the minimum shall consist of floor plans indicating all fire alarm device locations, device addresses, and control panels, auxiliary panels and remote annunciator panels.

C. Equipment Submittals:

1. Sufficient information, clearly presented, shall be included to determine compliance with drawings and specifications.

2. Include all equipment data sheets pertinent to equipment provided. All data sheets shall be highlighted indicating specific equipment supplied. Failure to provide proper annotation of all devices shall result in submittals being rejected.

D. Manuals:

1. Submit simultaneously with the shop drawings, complete operating and maintenance manuals listing the manufacturer name(s), including technical data sheets.

2. Wiring diagrams shall indicate internal wiring for each device and the interconnections between the items of equipment.

3. Provide a clear and concise description of operation that gives, in detail, the information required to properly operate the equipment and system.

1.6 GENERAL

A. Furnish and install all extensions and modifications to the existing Fire Alarm System as specified herein and as shown on the plans; to be wired, connected, and left in first class operating condition. Include all control modules, power supplies, annunciator modifications, manual stations, automatic fire detectors, smoke detectors, alarm indicating appliances, wiring terminations, electrical boxes, appurtenances and all other necessary material and programming modifications required for a complete operating system.

1.7 OPERATION

A. The existing fire alarm system operation shall remain as originally programmed. At a minimum a alarm activation of any manual station, automatic detection device, or sprinkler flow switch shall be as follows:

1. Display all alarm location information at the Fire Alarm Control Panel. 2. Display all alarm location information on the Remote LCD Annunciator where indicated. 3. All alarm indicating appliances shall sound in a continuous ringing manner, throughout the protected premises, until silenced by the appropriate switch at the fire alarm control panel. 4. All visual alarm lamps, (Xenon Strobes) shall operate throughout the protected premises, in a march time cadence until the system is reset.

EXTEND EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 3111 - 3

8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

5. A supervised signal to notify an approved central station (as required by local codes) shall be activated. 6. The alarm activation of any duct-mounted sensor shall initiate the smoke control function in accordance with NFPA 72. 7. System activity on the FACP shall retain the information, along with time and date of occurrence on with in history storage log.

B. All system output programs assigned via control-by-event interlock programming to be activated by the alarm condition shall be executed, and the associated system outputs shall be activated.

C. The alarm activation of any elevator lobby and/or machine room smoke detector shall, in addition to the operations listed above, cause the elevator cabs to be recalled according to the following sequence:

1. If the alarmed sensor is on any floor other than the main level of egress, the elevator cabs shall be recalled to the main level of egress. 2. If the alarmed sensor is on the main egress level, the elevator cabs shall be recalled to the predetermined alternate recall level as determined by the local authority having jurisdiction. 2. The alarm activation of respective elevator shaft and machine room heat detectors shall activate a "shunt trip breaker " discontinuing operation of elevator power.

D. The activation of any system smoke sensor shall initiate an Alarm Verification operation whereby the panel will reset the activated detector and wait for a second alarm activation. If, within one (1) minute after resetting, a second alarm is reported from the same or any other smoke detector, the system shall process the alarm as described previously. If no second alarm occurs within one minute the system shall resume normal operation. The Alarm Verification shall operate only on smoke detector alarms. Other activated initiating devices shall be processed immediately. The alarm verification operation shall be selected by device, zone, group of zones.

E. The control panel shall have the capability to display the number of times (tally) a zone has gone into a verification mode. Should this smoke verification tally reach a pre-programmed number, a trouble condition shall occur.

F. Alarm verification zones shall be able to be divided into eight separate groups whereby only verification zones from the same group will confirm the first activation and cause the alarm sequence to occur.

G. The control panel shall have provide a dedicated supervisory indication for all sprinkler supervisory devices installed on the system.

H. The activation of any standpipe or sprinkler valve supervisory (tamper) switch shall activate the system supervisory service audible signal and illuminate the LED at the control panel (and the remote annunciator). Differentiation between valve tamper activation and opens and/or grounds on the initiation circuit wiring shall be provided.

1. Pressing the Supervisory Service Acknowledge Key will silence the supervisory audible signal while maintaining the Supervisory Service LED "on" indicating the off-normal condition.

EXTEND EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 3111 - 4

8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2. Restoring the valve to the normal position shall cause the Supervisory Service LED to extinguish, indicating restoration to normal.

1.8 SUPERVISION

A. The system shall contain supervised inputs/outputs. The alarm activation of any initiation circuit shall not prevent the subsequent alarm operation of any other initiation circuit.

B. There shall be supervisory service initiation device circuits for connection of all sprinkler valve supervisory (tamper). Device activation shall cause a supervisory alarm at the control panel.

C. There shall be the required number of independently supervised and independently fused indicating appliance circuits for alarm bells and flashing alarm lamps. Disarrangement conditions of any circuit shall not affect the operation of other circuits.

D. Each independently supervised circuit shall include a discrete display to indicate disarrangement conditions per circuit.

E. The incoming power to the system shall be supervised so that any power failure must be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel. A green "power on" LED shall be displayed continuously while incoming power is present.

F. The system batteries shall be supervised so that a low battery condition or disconnection of the battery shall be audibly and visually indicated at the control panel.

G. The system modules shall be electrically supervised for module placement. Should a module become disconnected the system trouble indicator shall illuminate and the audible trouble signal shall sound.

H. The system shall have provision for disabling and enabling all circuits individually for maintenance or testing purposes.

1.9 POWER REQUIREMENTS

A. All new and/or existing control panels and remote auxiliary power supplies shall receive 120 VAC power via a dedicated fused disconnect circuit.

B. All control panels and remote auxiliary power supplies shall be provided with sufficient battery capacity to operate the entire system upon loss of normal 120VAC power in a normal supervisory mode for a period of twenty-four (24) hours with five (5) minutes of alarm activation. The system shall automatically transfer to the standby batteries upon power failure. All battery charging and recharging operation shall be automatic. Batteries, once discharged, shall recharge at a rate to provide a minimum of 70% capacity in 12 hours.

C. All circuits requiring system-operating power shall be 24 VDC and shall be individually fused at the control panel.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

EXTEND EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 3111 - 5

8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

2.1 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL

A. Not applicable, extend and modify existing Silent Knight IFP-1000 Fire Alarm Control Panel.

2.5 PERIPHERAL DEVICES

A. Device Types

1. General

a. The modifications to the existing system control panel must be capable of communicating with the types of devices specified below as well as existing fire alarm devices. All new devices will be located as shown on the drawings. b. The sensors shall be listed to UL Standard 268 and shall be documented compatible with the control equipment to which they are connected. The sensors shall be listed for both ceiling and wall mount applications. c. Each sensor base shall contain an LED that will flash each time it is scanned by the control panel (once every 4 seconds). When the control panel determines that a sensor is in an alarm or a trouble condition, the control panel shall command the LED on that sensor's base to turn on steady indicating the abnormal condition. Sensors which do not provide a visible indication of an abnormal condition are not acceptable. d. Sensor bases, where shown on the plans, shall be provided with a relay driver output that is to be controlled either automatically or manually from the control panel. e. Each Smoke Sensor shall contain a magnetically actuated test switch to provide for easy alarm testing at the sensor location. f. The sensor's electronics shall be immune from false alarm caused by EMI and RFI.

B. Pull Box (manual station)

1. Pull boxes shall, use a key operated test-reset lock, and shall be designed so that after actual emergency operation, they cannot be restored to normal use except by the use of a key. 2. All operated stations shall have a positive, visual indication of operation and utilize a key type reset. 3. Manual stations shall be constructed of Lexan with clearly visible operating instructions provided on the cover. The word FIRE shall appear on the front of the stations in raised letters, 1.75 inches (44 mm) or larger. 4. Furnish and install clear Lexan protective covers w/self contained horn on all manual pull stations were indicated on drawings.

C. Photoelectric Smoke Detector

1. The detectors shall use the photoelectric (light-scattering) principal to measure smoke density.

D. Duct Smoke Detectors

1. Duct smoke detectors shall be photoelectric and listed by Underwriters’ Laboratories, Inc. Each smoke sensor and air duct housing shall be self-compensating for the effects of

EXTEND EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 3111 - 6

8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

air velocity (from 300 to 4,000 FM), temperature, humidity and atmospheric pressure. It shall not be necessary to field adjust the sensitivity to compensate for the above effects. Each smoke sensor shall utilize solid state components and be equipped with an integral alarm indicating LED which shall flash when the smoke sensor is activated and shall also provide a form “C” remote relay with contacts rated at 3 AMPS, 120 VAC resistive or 24 VDC resistive. 2. Duct-smoke detectors shall be provided by the electrical contractor and installed by the mechanical contractor. See Division 23. They shall be furnished, wired and connected to the fire alarm system by the electrical contractor.

E. Thermal Detectors

1. Thermal detectors shall be rated at 1 degrees Fahrenheit (58 degrees Celsius) and have a rate-of-rise element rated at 15 degrees F (9.4 degrees C) per minute. It shall connect via two wires to the fire alarm control panel signaling line circuit.

J. Batteries:

1. The batteries shall be sealed Gel Cell type, 12-volt nominal. 2. The battery shall have sufficient capacity to power the fire alarm system for not less than 24 hours plus 5 minutes of alarm upon a normal AC power failure.

K. Combination Horn/Strobe Assembly

1. Furnish and install where shown combination “synchronized” horn/strobe notification appliance. The strobe lens shall be clear and the housing engraved “FIRE”. The strobe candela rating shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 72 and UL 1971. Horn unit shall produce a minimum sound pressure level of 88db at 10 feet and shall be UL listed for fire alarm use. 2. Furnish and install wire guards on all Horn/Strobe units, where indicated on Drawings.

L. Visual Flashing Strobe, only.

1. Furnish and install where shown “synchronized” strobe notification application. The strobe lens shall be clear and the housing engraved “FIRE”. The strobe candela rating shall be provided in accordance with NFPA 72 and UL 1971. 2. Furnish and install wire guards on all Strobe units, where indicated on Drawings.

B. Field Charging Power Supply: (Auxiliary Power Supply)

1. The FCPS is a device designed for use as either a remote 24-volt power supply or used to power Notification Appliances.

a. The FCPS shall offer up to 6.0 amps (4.0 amps continuous) of regulated 24 volt power. It shall include an integral charger designed to charge 7.0 amp hour batteries and to support 24 hour standby. b. The Field Charging Power Supply shall have two input triggers. The input trigger shall be a Notification Appliance Circuit (from the fire alarm control panel) or a relay. Four outputs (two Style Y or Z and two style Y) shall be available for connection to the Notification devices.

EXTEND EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 3111 - 7

8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

c. The Field Charging Power Supply shall include the ability to delay the AC fail delay per 2008 NFPA requirements. d. The FCPS include power limited circuitry, per UL standards.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Provide and install the system in accordance with the plans and specifications, all applicable codes and the manufacturer's recommendations. All wiring shall be installed in strict compliance with all the provisions of NEC-Article 760 A and C, Power-Limited Fire Protective Signaling Circuits or if required may be reclassified as non-power limited and wired in accordance with NEC-Article 760. Upon completion, the contractor shall so certify in writing to the owner and general contractor.

B. Installation of equipment and devices that pertain to other work in the contract shall be closely coordinated with the appropriate subcontractors.

C. The contractor shall clean all dirt and debris from the inside and the outside of the fire alarm equipment after completion of the installation.

3.2 TESTING

A. The fire alarm system contractor shall provide a 100% full operational test on all new work as well as the existing system in accordance with NFPA 72 requirements. Upon completion of a successful test, the contractor shall so certify in writing to the owner and general contractor.

3.3 WARRANTY

A. The contractor shall warrant the completed fire alarm system wiring, equipment and modifications be free from inherent mechanical and electrical defects for a period of one (1) year from date of the completed and certified test or from the date of first beneficial use.

END OF SECTION

EXTEND EXISTING FIRE ALARM SYSTEM 28 3111 - 8

8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 31 2001

EARTHMOVING-BUILDING PAD

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes the following:

1. Preparing subgrades for foundations, slabs-on-grade, and other structures in an area bounded by a perimeter of five feet outside of and parallel to the exterior walls including canopies and other structures attached to the building. 2. Excavating and backfilling for buildings and structures. 3. Drainage course for slabs-on-grade. 4. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities within building lines.

B. Related Sections include the following:

1. Division 31 Section “Earthwork” for earthwork located 5 feet beyond the perimeter of the building. 2. Division 21, 22, 23, 26, 27, and 28 Sections for installing underground mechanical and electrical utilities and buried mechanical and electrical structures. 3. Division 31 Section “Site Clearing” for temporary erosion and sedimentation control measures, site stripping, grubbing, stripping topsoil, and removal of above-and below- grade improvements and utilities.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Backfill: Soil materials used to fill an excavation.

1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, including haunches to support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench.

B. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade in a trench before laying pipe.

C. Borrow: Satisfactory soil imported from off-site for use as fill or backfill.

D. Drainage Course: Layer supporting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore water.

EARTHMOVING-BUILDING PAD 31 2001 - 1 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

E. Excavation: Removal of material encountered above subgrade elevations.

1. Additional Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations as directed by Architect. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the Work. 2. Bulk Excavation: Excavations more than 10 feet (3 m) in width and pits more than 30 feet (9 m) in either length or width. 3. Unauthorized Excavation: Excavation below subgrade elevations or beyond indicated dimensions without direction by Architect. Unauthorized excavation, as well as remedial work directed by Architect, shall be without additional compensation.

F. Fill: Soil materials used to raise existing grades.

G. Structures: Buildings, footings, foundations, retaining walls, slabs, tanks, curbs, mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below the ground surface.

H. Subgrade: Surface or elevation remaining after completing excavation, or top surface of a fill or backfill immediately below subbase, drainage fill, or topsoil materials.

I. Utilities include underground services within buildings.

1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Material Test Reports: From a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test results for compliance of the following with requirements indicated:

1. Classification according to ASTM D 2487 of each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill. 2. Laboratory compaction curve according to ASTM D 1557 for each on-site or borrow soil material proposed for fill and backfill.

B. Certification that borrow fill is virgin material from a commercial or non-commercial source.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

1. Geotechnical Testing Agency Qualifications: Engage an independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct soil materials and rock-definition testing, as documented according to ASTM D 3740 and ASTM E 548 and to perform material testing.

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Owner and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated:

1. Notify Owner not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Owner's written permission.

EARTHMOVING-BUILDING PAD 31 2001 - 2 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating.

B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services if lines are active.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 SOIL MATERIALS

A. General: Provide borrow soil materials when sufficient satisfactory soil and controlled fill materials are not available from excavations.

B. Satisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GW, GP, GM, SW, SP, and SM, or a combination of these group symbols; free of rock or gravel larger than 4 inches in any dimension, debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation, and other deleterious matter.

C. Unsatisfactory Soils: ASTM D 2487 soil classification groups GC, SC, ML, MH, CL, CH, OL, OH, and PT, or a combination of these group symbols.

1. Unsatisfactory soils also include satisfactory soils not maintained within 2 percent of optimum moisture content at time of compaction.

D. Backfill and Fill: Satisfactory soil materials.

E. Load Bearing Fill: Uncontaminated, well-graded Satisfactory Soils with at least 90 percent passing a 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) sieve and not more than 15 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075- mm) sieve.

F. Bedding: Naturally or artificially graded mixture of natural or crushed gravel, crushed stone, and natural or crushed sand; ASTM D 2940; except with 100 percent passing a 1-inch (25-mm) sieve and not more than 8 percent passing a No. 200 (0.075-mm) sieve.

G. Drainage Fill: Washed, narrowly graded mixture of crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel; ASTM D 448; coarse-aggregate grading Size 57; with 100 percent passing a 1-1/2- inch (38-mm) sieve and 0 to 5 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36-mm) sieve.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by settlement, lateral movement, undermining, washout, and other hazards created by earthwork operations.

B. Protect subgrades and foundation soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary.

EARTHMOVING-BUILDING PAD 31 2001 - 3 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

C. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.

3.2 DEWATERING

A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations, from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area.

B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation.

1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to accumulate in excavations. Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches. 2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dewatering is no longer required.

3.3 EXPLOSIVES

A. Explosives: Do not use explosives.

3.4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL

A. Unclassified Excavation: Excavate to subgrade elevations regardless of the character of surface and subsurface conditions encountered, including rock, soil materials, and obstructions. No changes in Contract Sum or Contract Time will be authorized for rock excavation or removal of obstructions.

1. If excavated materials intended for fill and backfill include unsatisfactory soil materials and rock, replace with satisfactory soil materials. 2. Where rock is encountered, remove to a depth 12” inches below proposed subgrade, bottom of footing, or trench bottom replace with satisfactory soil material.

3.5 BUILDING PAD PREPARATION

A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from subgrade surface. Excavate and remove existing fill materials within five foot perimeter of building to subgrade of natural, virgin soils.

A. Notify Geotechnical Testing Agency when excavations have reached required subgrade.

B. After excavation, proofroll existing subgrade with a minimum of ten passes of a heavy, vibratory compactor to identify soft pockets and areas of excess yielding.

1. Make one-half of the passes perpendicular to the other passes and at a speed of 2 to 3 miles/hour. 2. Perform proofrolling in the presence of the Geotechnical Testing Agency. 3. Perform proofrolling only when weather conditions permit. Do not proofroll wet or saturated subgrades.

EARTHMOVING-BUILDING PAD 31 2001 - 4 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

C. If Geotechnical Testing Agency determines that unsatisfactory or unstable subgrade soil is present, continue excavation and replace with compacted fill material as directed by Geotechnical Testing Agency and Architect.

1. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract provisions for changes in the work.

D. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures, frost, rain, accumulated water, or construction activities, as directed by Architect and Geotechnical Testing Agency.

E. Place and compact fill material in layers to required elevations as follows:

1. Under building slabs, steps and ramps, use load bearing fill. 2. Under footings and foundations, use load bearing fill.

F. Place fill materials in layers not more than 12 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 6 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

G. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557:

1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and ramps, compact each layer of fill material at 95 percent.

3.6 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES

A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork, for installing services and other construction, and for inspections.

1. Excavations for Footings and Foundations: Do not disturb bottom of excavation. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid base to receive other work. 1. Excavation for Underground Tanks, Basins, and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavate to elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing surface.

3.7 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES

A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations.

B. Excavate trenches to uniform widths to provide a working clearance on each side of pipe or conduit. Excavate trench walls vertically from trench bottom to 12 inches (300 mm) higher than top of pipe or conduit, unless otherwise indicated.

1. Clearance: 12 inches (300 mm) on each side of pipe or conduit.

EARTHMOVING-BUILDING PAD 31 2001 - 5 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

C. Trench Bottoms: Excavate trenches 4 inches (100 mm) deeper than bottom of pipe elevation to allow for bedding course. Hand excavate for bell of pipe.

1. Excavate trenches 6 inches (150 mm) deeper than elevation required in rock or other unyielding bearing material to allow for bedding course.

3.8 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION

A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean concrete fill may be used when approved by Architect.

1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Architect.

3.9 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS

A. Stockpile borrow materials and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials without intermixing. Place, grade, and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.

1. Stockpile soil materials away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.

3.10 BACKFILL

A. Place and compact backfill using Satisfactory Soil Materials in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following:

1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, waterproofing, and perimeter insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents. 3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities. 4. Removing concrete formwork. 5. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting.

B. Place backfill materials in layers not more than 12 inches in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment, and not more than 6 inches in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers.

C. Place backfill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure.

D. Compact soil to not less than the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557:

1. Under structures, building slabs, steps, and ramps, compact each layer of backfill material at 95 percent.

EARTHMOVING-BUILDING PAD 31 2001 - 6 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

3.11 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL

A. Place and compact bedding course on trench bottoms and where indicated. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells, joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints, fittings, and bodies of conduits.

B. Backfill trenches excavated under footings and within 18 inches (450 mm) of bottom of footings; fill with concrete to elevation of bottom of footings.

C. Place and compact initial backfill of subbase material, free of particles larger than 1 inch (25 mm), to a height of 12 inches (300 mm) over the utility pipe or conduit.

1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of utility system.

D. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing.

E. Fill voids with approved backfill materials while shoring and bracing, and as sheeting is removed.

E. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade.

3.12 MOISTURE CONTROL

A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequent fill or backfill layer before compaction to within 2 percent of optimum moisture content.

1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy, frozen, or contain frost or ice. 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry, otherwise satisfactory soil material that exceeds optimum moisture content by 2 percent and is too wet to compact to specified dry unit weight.

3.13 GRADING

A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations indicated.

1. Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances.

B. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 1/2-inch (13 mm) when tested with a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge.

3.14 DRAINAGE COURSE

EARTHMOVING-BUILDING PAD 31 2001 - 7 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

A. Under slabs-on-grade, place drainage course on prepared subgrade and as follows:

1. Compact drainage course to required cross sections and thickness to not less than 95 percent of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 1557. 2. When compacted thickness of drainage course is 6 inches (150 mm) or less, place materials in a single layer. 3. When compacted thickness of drainage course exceeds 6 inches (150 mm), place materials in equal layers, with no layer more than 6 inches (150 mm) thick or less than 3 inches (75 mm) thick when compacted.

3.15 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified independent geotechnical engineering testing agency to perform field quality-control testing and special inspections.

B. Allow testing agency to inspect and test subgrades and each fill or backfill layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements.

C. Footing Subgrade: At footing subgrades, at least one test of each soil stratum will be performed to verify design bearing capacities. Subsequent verification and approval of other footing subgrades may be based on a visual comparison of subgrade with tested subgrade when approved by Architect.

D. Testing agency will test compaction of soils in place according to ASTM D 1556, ASTM D 2167, ASTM D 2922, and ASTM D 2937, as applicable. Tests will be performed at the following locations and frequencies:

1. Paved and Building Slab Areas: At subgrade and at each compacted fill and backfill layer, at least one test for every 2000 sq. ft. (186 sq. m) or less of paved area or building slab, but in no case fewer than three tests. 2. Foundation Wall Backfill: At each compacted backfill layer, at least one test for each 100 feet (30 m) or less of wall length, but no fewer than two tests. 3. Trench Backfill: At each compacted initial and final backfill layer, at least one test for each 150 feet (46 m) or less of trench length, but no fewer than two tests.

E. When testing agency reports that subgrades, fills, or backfills have not achieved degree of compaction specified, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil to depth required; recompact and retest until specified compaction is obtained.

3.16 PROTECTION

A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep free of trash and debris.

B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions.

EARTHMOVING-BUILDING PAD 31 2001 - 8 8318.02 | 8-31-2015 Gladwyne Library

1. Scarify or remove and replace soil material to depth as directed by Architect; reshape and recompact.

C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses, remove finished surfacing, backfill with additional soil material, compact, and reconstruct surfacing.

1. Restore appearance, quality, and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible.

3.17 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS

A. Disposal: Remove surplus satisfactory soil and waste material, including unsatisfactory soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of it off Owner's property.

END OF SECTION

EARTHMOVING-BUILDING PAD 31 2001 - 9

8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

SECTION 31 2319

DEWATERING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.01 DESCRIPTION

A. This section shall consist of furnishing all labor, equipment and materials necessary and incidental to dewatering, surface and underground water control and pumping and drainage during the construction.

1.02 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit dewatering calculations and shop drawings prior to installation of any dewatering system. Calculations and drawings are to be prepared and sealed by a Professional Engineer. It is the contractor’s responsibility to obtain a licensed Professional Engineer to provide the dewatering system capable of maintaining dry working conditions.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

NOT USED

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.01 PUMPING

A. Adequate pumping and drainage facilities shall be provided and all water from whatever sources entering the work during any stage of construction shall be promptly removed and disposed of. All pumping and drainage shall be done without damage to property or structures and without interference with the rights of the public, owners of private property, pedestrians, vehicular traffic, or the work of other Contractors. Dewatering shall be done in such a manner that the soil under or adjacent to existing structures shall not be disturbed, removed or displaced.

B. The overloading or obstructing of existing facilities will not be permitted and the Contractor shall be solely responsible for damage caused by his operations.

C. All alterations, relocation, or use of any existing facilities shall be approved by the proper governing agency, and shall be restored to the location, and to as good a condition as found; all as approved by the governing agency.

3.02 SURFACE AND UNDERGROUND WATER CONTROL

A. The Contractor shall determine to what extent, if any, variations in surface water levels and underground water levels may affect the work under this contract. It is the intention of these Contract Documents that all work shall be preformed in the dry and that means and methods shall be employed by the Contractor to protect the work as necessary at no additional cost to the owner.

DEWATERING 31 2319 - 1 8318.02 | 8-17-2015 Gladwyne Library

3.03 DEWATERING

A. Where the work is in ground containing an excessive amount of water, the Contractor shall provide, install and maintain an adequate dewatering system in order to permit under relatively dry conditions the performance of excavation, and related work, and placement of backfill.

B. The dewatering system shall be adequate to pre-drain the water bearing strata above and below the bottom of the drains, and all other excavations to prevent boils and quick conditions, and to maintain the stability of sides and bottoms of excavations.

C. Appropriate screens and filters shall be used to prevent loss of soil through the dewatering equipment.

D. Take all necessary precautions to accomplish the excavations and construction work in relatively dry conditions.

E. Provide complete standby equipment, available for operation as may be required to maintain the dewatering system in the event that all or part of the dewatering system becomes inadequate or fails.

G. Dewatering outlets shall be approved by OWNER. The Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining all necessary permissions from relevant authorities for discharging water into the public drainage system.

END OF SECTION

DEWATERING 31 2319 - 2